Architecture

DOCU
UMENT VOLUME
V
E 02.01
GENER
RAL SPECIFICATIONS
S ARCHITE
ECTURE
A049_RSP_AR_SPC_00
001_DD
NOVEMBER 18, 2014
P
PALM JUMEIRAH
H WE
EST BEACH
H CLU
UB
D
DMS
No. 139305 Palm Jum
meirah, Dubai,
D
UA
AE
Co
onstruction
n of Westt Beach Club
C
Project:
PALM JUMEIRAH WEST BEACH CLUB
Works:
G+1 STOREY PALM JUMEIRAH, DUBAI, UAE
Title:
DOCUMENT VOLUME 02.01

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ARCHITECTURE
DOCUMENTS INDEX
VOLUME 01
Tendering & Contract Conditions
VOLUME 02
Specifications
Volume 02.01
General Specifications Architecture & Interior

Design
Volume 02.02
Interior Design Schedules (Appendices)
Volume 02.03
Civil & Structural Specifications
Volume 02.04
Sustainability Specifications
Volume 02.05
Fire Specifications
Volume 02.06
Plumbing Specifications
Volume 02.07
HVAC Specifications
Volume 02.08
Electrical Specifications
Volume 02.09
Specialist Lighting Specifications (Included in Electrical)
Volume 02.10
Signage Specifications
Volume 02.11
Faade Specifications (Section 084413)
Volume 02.12
Landscape Specifications
Volume 02.13
Volume 02.14
Volume 02.15
Vertical Transport Specifications (Section

142100)
Waste Handling Equipment Specifications (Not
Applicable)
AV / IT Specifications (Included in Electrical)
VOLUME 03
Bill of Quantities
VOLUME 04
Drawings
VOLUME 05
Health & Safety & Environment Plan HSEP
VOLUME 06
Addendums
Project:
PALM JUMEIRAH WES

ST BEACH CLUB
B
Works:
G+1 STTOREY PALM JUMEIRAH,

J
DUBAI, UAE
Title:
DOCUM
MENT VOLUME
E 02.01
GENER
RAL SPECIFICATTIONS ARCHITECTURE
DOCU
UMENT VO
OLUME 02
2.01
Generral Speciffications Architect
A
ure
TABLE OF CONTENT
SION 01
DIVIS
GENERAL REQUIREM
MENTS
SECTIO
ON 011000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTIO
ON 011011 DOCUMEN
NT MANAGE
EMENT
SECTIO
ON 015000 TEMPORAR
RY FACILITIES
S AND CON
NTROL
DIVIS
SION 03
SECTIO
ON 035216 LIGHTWEIGHT INSULA
ATING CON
NCRETE
SECTIO
ON 035413 GYPSUM CEMENT
C
UN
NDERLAYMEN
NT
SECTIO
ON 035416 HYDRAULIIC CEMENT UNDERLAYM
MENT
SECTIO
ON 035300 CONCRETTE TOPPING
SECTIO
ON 054000 COLD FOR
RMED META
AL FRAMING
SECTIO
ON 055000 METAL FA
ABRICATION
SECTIO
ON 055213 PIPE AND TUBE
T
RAILING
GS
SECTIO
ON 055300 METAL GRA
ATINGS
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
W
WOOD,
P
PLASTIC
AN
ND COMPOSITES
SECTIO
ON 061000 SF ROUGH
H CARPENTRY
SECTIO
ON 061053 SF MISCELLANEOUS RO
OUGH CARP
PENTRY
SECTIO
ON 061063 SF EXTERIO
OR ROUGH CARPENTRY
C
DIVIS
SION 07
TD
TD
METALS
SECTIO
ON 051213 ARCHITEC
CTURAL EXPO
OSED STRUCTURAL FRAM
MING
DIVIS
SION 06
TD
TD
TD
MASONRY
Y
ON 040110 BLOCKWO
ORK CLEANIN
NG
SECTIO
SECTIO
ON 040120.63 BLOCK
KWORK REPA
AIR
SECTIO
ON 040120.64 BLOCK
KWORK REPO
OINTING
SECTIO
ON 042000 UNIT MASONRY
DIVIS
SION 05
TD
TD
TD
CONCRETE
SECTIO
ON 034900 GLASS FIB
BER REINFOR
RCED CONC
CRETE (GFRC)
DIVIS
SION 04
TD
TD
TD
T
THERMAL
AND MOISTURE PR
ROTECTION
N
VOLUME 02.01 REV00

0
Page i of 3
Tab
ble Of Contents
Project:
PALM JUMEIRAH WES

ST BEACH CLUB
B
Works:

J
DUBAI, UAE
Title:
DOCUM
MENT VOLUME
E 02.01
GENER
SECTIO
ON 071113 BITUMINO
OUS DAMPRO
OOFING
TD
SECTIO
ON 071326 SELF-ADHE
ERING SHEETT WATERPRO
OOFING
SECTIO
ON 071416 COLD FLUID APPLIED WATERPROO
W
OFING
SECTIO
ON 071800 TRAFFIC COATINGS
C
FOR
F
EXPOSED DECKS
SECTIO
ON 071900 WATER RE
EPELLENTS
SECTIO
ON 072100 THERMAL INSULATION
N
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
072726
076200
077200
078100
078123
FLUID-APPLIED AIR AND WATER RE

ESISTIVE BAR
RRIER
SHEET ME
ETAL FLASHIN
NG & TRIM
ROOF ACCESSORIES
APPLIED FIIREPROOFIN
NG
INTUMESC
CENT FIREPR
ROOFING
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
078413
079100
079200
079500
PENETRATTION FIREPRO
OOFING
PREFORME
ED JOINT SE
EALS
JOINT SELLANTS
EXPANSIO
ON CONTRO
OL
DIVIS
SION 08
OPENING
GS
SECTIO
ON 081113 SF HOLLO
OW METAL DOORS
D
AND
D FRAMES
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
081213
081216
081416
083113
083213
SF
SF
SF
SF
SF
HOLLO
OW METAL FR
RAMES
ALUMIN
NUM FRAME
ES
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
ACCES
SS DOORS AND
A
FRAMES
S
SLIDING
G-ALUMINIU
UM-FRAMED GLASS DOO
ORS
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
083473..13 SF METTAL SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSE

EMBLIES
084413 SF GLAZED ALUMINUM
M CURTAIN WALLS
087100 SF DOOR HARDWARE
E
088000 SF GLAZIN
NG
089119 SF FIXED LOUVERS
L
SECTIO
ON 089516 SF WALL VENTS
V
DIVIS
SION 09
TD
FINISHES
SECTIO
ON 092116..23 SF GYP
PSUM BOAR
RD SHAFT WALL
W
ASSEMB
BLIES
SECTIO
ON 092400 SF PORTLA
AND CEMEN
NT PLASTERIN
NG
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
092900__SF GYPSU
UM BOARD
093013 SF CERAM
MIC TILING
095113 SF ACOUS
STICAL PANE
EL CEILINGS
S
096516 SF RESILIENT SHEET FLLOORING
096519 SF RE=SILIENT TILE FLO
OORING
SECTIO
ON 096536 SF STATIC
C-CONTROL RESILIENT
R
FLOORING
SECTIO
ON 096900 SF ACCES
SS FLOORING
G
SECTIO
ON 099113 SF EXTERIO
OR PAINTING
G
VOLUME 02.01 REV00
0
Page ii of 3
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
Tab
ble Of Contents
Project:
PALM JUMEIRAH WES

ST BEACH CLUB
B
Works:

J
DUBAI, UAE
Title:
DOCUM
MENT VOLUME
E 02.01
GENER
SECTIO
ON 099114 SF EPOXY PAINT
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
099123
099300
099600
099601
DIVIS
SION 10
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SF
SF
SF
SF
INTERIO
OR PAINTING
G
STAINING AND TR
RANSPARENTT FINISHING
G
HIGH-P
PERFORMAN
NCE COATIN
NGS..
ANTICA
ARBONATIO
ON PAINT
SPECIALTIES
102600 SF WALL AND

A
DOOR PROTECTION
104413 SF FIRE PR
ROTECTION CABINETS
104416 SF FIRE EX
XTINGUISHER
RS
105123__SF PLASTIC
C-LAMINATE
E-CLAD LOCK
KERS
SECTIO
ON 105613 SF METAL STORAGE SHELVING
S
DIVIS
SION 11
TD
CONVEYIN
NG EQUIP
PMENT
SECTIO
ON 142100 SF ELECTR
RIC TRACTION ELEVATOR
RS
DIVIS
SION 32
EXTERIOR
R IMPROVE
EMENTS
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SECTIO
ON
SF
SF
SF
SF
321400
321713
321723
321729
TD
TD
FURNISHINGS
SECTIO
ON 124813 SF ENTRANCE FLOOR
R MATS AND
D FRAMES.
DIVIS
SION 14
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
EQUIPMEN
NT
SECTIO
ON 111200 SF PARKIN
NG CONTRO
OL EQUIPMENT
SECTIO
ON 118226__SF FACILITTY WASTE COMPACTOR
C
RS
DIVIS
SION 12
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
UNIT PA
AVING
PARKIN
NG BUMPERS
S
PAVEM
MENT MARKINGS
MANUFACTURED TRAFFIC-CAL
T
LMING DEVIC
CES
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
APPEN
NDICES
APPENDIX A LOB
BBY / ATRIUM
M SPECIFICA
ATION SHEETT
APPENDIX B TOILLETS SPECIFIC
CATION SHE
EET
APPENDIX C BOH
H SPECIFICA
ATION SHEETT
TD
TD
TD
END OF TABLE
T
OF CONTENT
C
VOLUME 02.01 REV00

0
Page iii of 3
Tab
ble Of Contents
DIVISION 01
________________________________________________________________________
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 011000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
10
18.0
19.0
20.0
21.0
PROJECT INFORMATION..
GENERAL.
ABBREVIATION.
TEST TO ESTABLISH ACCEPTABILITY OF WORKS
SAFETY REGULATIONS AND TEMPORARY WORKS..
SITE INVESTIGATION REPORT
LICENSES, PERMIT AND LIASON WITH GOVERNMENT DEPARTMENTS, ETC
SAFE GUARDING PROPERTIES ADJASCENT TO SITE.
REINSTATEMENT OF ROADS AND STREET FURNITURE.
CHECKING AND MONITORING.
TESTING AUTHORITY.
RESPONSIBILITY
SITE INFORMATION
PROGRAMME
RECORDS AND CERTIFICATES.
CERTIFICATES FOR MATERIALS..
COMPLIANCE WITH LOCAL AUTHORITIES REQUIREMENT, REGULATIONS
& BY-LAWS
BREAKING UP OF EXISTING WORKS.
OBSTRUCTION.
BLASTING..
DEFECTIVE WORKS.
22.0
22.1
22.2
22.3
22.4
22.5
22.6
PROJECT COORDINATION..
DESCRIPTION..
COORDINATION
ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURE.
DRAWINGS.
SPECIFICATIONS.
COORDINATION AND COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS.
11
11
11
12
12
13
13
23.0
23.1
23.2
23.3
23.4
23.5
23.6
23.7
23.8
23.9
ON-SITE ADMINISTRATION.
DESCRIPTION
DETAILS OF CONTRACTORS SUPERVISORY AND OFFICE STAFF.
USE OF SITE.
ADVERTISING..
INSPECTION OF WORKS AND MATERIALS...
LABOR RECORD..
PLANT AND EQUIPMENT RECORD..
DEFECTIVE WORK
REPRESENTATIVES FOR EMERGENCIES..
13
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
Division 01 Section 011000
Page 1 of 37
10
10
10
11
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

23.10
23.11
23.12
23.13
MAINTAINING EXISTING FACILITIES IN OPERATION..

NON-COMPLIANCE
HOUSEKEEPING..
FINAL CONDITIONS OF WORK...
15
15
15
16
24.0
24.1
24.2
24.3
24.4
24.5
24.6
24.7
24.8
PROJECT MEETINGS
DESCRIPTION
KICK-OFF MEETING.
PROGRESS MEETINGS
ADDITIONAL UNSCHEDULED MEETINGS..
PRE-START UP CONFERENCE
POST-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE..
MINUTES OF MEETING..
TECHNICAL MEETING
16
16
16
17
18
18
18
19
19
25.0
25.1
25.2
25.3
25.4
25.5
25.6
25.7
CONTRACTORS DOCUMENTS AND OTHER SUBMITTALS..

DESCRIPTION...
DEFINITIONS
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE
SHOP DRAWINGS.
MISCLELLANEOUS SUBMISSION.
DRAWINGS.
MISTAKE IN INFORMATION
19
19
19
20
23
24
29
29
26.0
26.1
26.2
26.3
PREPARATION OF ASSET REGISTER.

PROJECT LAYOUT DRAWING
LIST OF INSTALLED ASSETS (MEP & CIVIL)..
LIST OF SPARE PARTS (MEP & CIVIL)....
30
30
31
30
27.0
27.1
27.2
27.3
QUALITY CONTROL.
EQUIPMENT / MATERIAL HANDLING AND STORAGE
WORKMANSHIP.
PROTECTION OF PROPERTY.
30
30
31
31
28.0
28.1
28.2
28.3
28.4
28.5
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

PRODUCTS...
PRODUCT OPTIONS
PRODUCT ACCEPTANCE..
MATERIALS GENERALLY.
APPROVAL...
32
32
32
33
34
35
29.0
HOLES, CHASE, INSERTS AND FIXINGS
36
30.0
DESCRIPTION OF SUBSTRUCTURE AND SUPERSTRUCTURE..
36
31.0
NOMINATED SUBCONTRACTORS
37
Page 2 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 011000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1
This General Specification for Building is applicable to all building works in connection with
the construction, alteration and maintenance of buildings unless overridden by the General
Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions of Contract, Drawings, Bills of Quantities,
Schedules of Rates prepared by the Employer, Particular Specifications or the instructions of
the Engineer
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Retain or delete this article in all Sections of Project Manual.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.3
APPLICATION OF SPECIFICATIONS
Materials and workmanship specified in one section of this general specification shall apply
to the same items in other section.
1.4
SUMMARY
A.
Section
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
Includes:
Project Information
General
Abbreviations
Test to Establish Acceptability of Works
Safety regulations and Temporary Works
Site Investigation Report
Licenses, Permit and Liaison with Government Departments, etc.
Safe Guarding Properties Adjacent to Site
Reinstatement of Roads and Street Furniture
Checking and Monitoring
Testing Authority
Responsibility
Site Information
Programme
Records and Certificates
Certificates for Materials
Compliance with Local Authorities Requirements, Regulations & By-Laws
Breaking of Existing Works
Obstructions
Blasting
Defective Work
Project Coordination
On-site Administration
Project Meetings
Contractors Documents and Other Submittals
Page 3 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
1.0
Preparation of Asset Register

Quality Control
Materials and Equipment
Holes, Case and Inserts
Description of Substructures and Superstructure
Nominated Sub Contractor
PROJECT INFORMATION
1.1.
Project Identification:
The Palm Jumeirah West Beach Club is located on the western part of the trunk of Palm
Jumeirah Island in Dubai, United Arab Emirates.
Recognizing that the Palm Jumeirah Island is a tourist and leisure attraction, Nakheel will
develop a small piece of land located on the west side of the Palm Jumeirah trunk. The
development will be a destination beach club, young, hip and new, with F & B outlets. Following the example of successful beach developments, such as Clark Quay in Singapore, this development shall attract young tourist and local visitors to enjoy the Palm beach, restaurants,
health club and entertainment facilities.
Palm Jumeirah West Beach Club will feature a total of 5 retails, 18 restaurants, open
restaurants along the whole stretch facing the beach and a swimming pool, Upper deck will
house a gym, open dining areas and terraces overlooking the panoramic view of the beach.
2.0
GENERAL
2.1
The following descriptions of materials and workmanship apply to the whole of the
Works regardless of the trade headings under which they have been described and
shall be read in conjunction with the Drawings and Bills of Quantities/Schedule of
Rates.
2.1.
Where trade names or catalogue numbers are mentioned in this Specification, Drawings or the Bills/Schedule of Rates, the reference is intended only as a guide to the type
of article quoted or material required. Subject to the approval of the Engineer, the
Contractor may substitute any article or material similar and equal to those described
by reference to trade names or catalogue numbers. All proprietary materials or processes specified in this Specification, Drawings or the Bills of Quantities/Schedule of
Rates are to be used or carried out strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
2.2.
The Contractor must make allowance in his unit rates to cover for all requirements in
the Specifications.
2.3.
The Contractor shall ensure that these requirements in the Specification be strictly adhered to when carrying out the Works, unless otherwise instructed.
2.4.
The drawings, details and specification provided describe the general scope and essence of the work in terms of architectural design concept and principal dimension. It
shall be the Contractors responsibility to develop the works with detail shop drawings
in compliance with the performance requirements, latest relevant industry standard and
local by-laws and regulations including making any technical modifications within the
Page 4 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

design intent for that purpose without any additional cost to the contract. The shop
drawings shall be subject to Engineers review and approval.
3.0
ABBREVIATIONS
Throughout the Specification and other Documents, the following abbreviations have been
used:
m
Linear metre
m2
Square metre
m3
mm
Cubic metre
Millimetre
mm2
sq
No or Nr
gm
kg
Mg
0
C
N
kN
ft
cc
oz
lb
Cwt
Ton
Tonne
W
cps
BS
CP
Square millimetre
square
Number
gramme
kilogramme
Megagramme
Degree Celsius
Newton
kilo Newton
foot / feet
cubic centimetre
Ounce (avoirdupois)
Pound (avoirdupois)
Hundredweight
Imperial Ton
Metric Ton
Watt
centpoise
The 'British Standard' (including any amendment or reenactment) issued by the British Standards Institution
current as of the date of the Contract.
The 'British Standard Code of Practice' (including any
amendment or re-enactment) issued by the Council for
Codes of Practice of the British Standards Institution
current as of the date of the Contract.
4.0
TESTS TO ESTABLISH ACCEPTABILITY OF WORKS

4.1.
Any tests that are proposed by the Contractor as a result of failure to comply with the
requirements of the Specification shall be at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor
shall also be responsible for any delay caused.
5.0
SAFETY REGULATIONS AND TEMPORARY WORKS

5.1.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the strict observance of all necessary safety
requirements to comply with the local regulations and standards.
Page 5 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

5.2.
The Contractor shall employ a Professional Engineer who shall be fully responsible for
the design and supervision of all temporary Works carried out in relation to the Works.
The Professional Engineer shall endorse and submit all structural drawings and calculations pertaining to the temporary Works in compliance with the local relevant authorities. These temporary works shall include the kentledge or ground anchor systems proposed by the Contractor for carrying out the pile load testing as specified in the Works.
The Contractor's Professional Engineer will be responsible to ensure that the pile load
tests can be carried out in a safe manner with the Contractor's proposed system.
6.0
SITE INVESTIGATION REPORT

6.1. Site Investigation has been carried out and the reports.
6.2. The Contractor should note that the ground conditions revealed by the reports on site
investigations are to be taken as a guide only and that he has to satisfy himself as to
the actual type of strata, geotechnical nature of the underlying stratum and ground
conditions to be encountered during the Works. It is to be at the risk of the Contractor
if different ground conditions are actually encountered on the site.
6.3. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is deemed necessary by reason of the safety of the
Works, or for the restoration of interrupted services, or for continuity and integrity of
the piles, the Contractor shall, when so ordered, carry out the Works or any portion
thereof continuously by day and by night without extra charge.
7.0
LICENCES, PERMIT AND LIAISON WITH GOVERNMENT DEPARTMENTS, ETC.

7.1. The Contractor shall be responsible to initiate action and to apply for all necessary li
censes, permits, etc and to carry out all necessary liaisons with AAM, Government Departments, Government Statutory Boards, etc., whenever necessary, for the satisfactory
completion of the Works. The Contractor shall be responsible for any delay in obtaining these licenses, permits, liaisons, etc, for the satisfactory completion of the works.
8.0
SAFE GUARDING PROPERTIES ADJACENT TO SITE

8.1
The Contractor's site procedures and method of working shall at all times be such as to
limit to a practical minimum any settlement and lateral movement of the ground and
buildings around the Site.
8.2
The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage or movement in adjacent properties including roads, paved areas, drains, services, building, street furniture, underground structures, etc.
8.3
Allowance shall be made for all ancillary treatment and all work necessary to ensure
the stability of roadways, adjacent structures, services and underground constructions
and for all remedial Works needed to make good any damage to the satisfaction of
the relevant Authority or the Engineer.
8.4
The Contractor must take due care to safeguard all existing services as shown in the
services cable route plan and culverts that will be affected by his work.
8.5
The Contractor shall note that all services within the proposed Site had been terminated. Notwithstanding this, due care must be taken when excavating the boreholes and
the Contractor will be responsible for any damage done to these services and culverts
as a result of his Works.
Page 6 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

9.0
REINSTATEMENT OF ROADS AND STREET FURNITURE

9.1
The Contractor's work shall make allowance for the reinstatement of all the street
furniture, and the foundation and surfaces of any roads, kerbs, walkways, and
foot ways, etc., disturbed by the Works both within and outside the Site.
9.2
The Contractor shall allow for the complete reinstatement of all surfaces damaged
in side-tables, and all neighbouring lands to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the
respective Local Authorities resulting from the execution of the Works.
9.3
Permanent reinstatement must be carried on receipt of a direction from the Engineer
and the reinstatement shall be completed as soon as possible. The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to reinstate the roads in sections as the work proceeds.
9.4
The reinstatement must comply with all requirements. Any work not conforming in
standard or extent to the requirements of the Engineer or the DOT must be immediately
removed and replaced.
10.0
CHECKING AND MONITORING

10.1 The Contractor shall provide all necessary instrumentation for the close and continuous
checking of the movements of adjacent structures, services and underground
constructions. The Contractor is to read this item in conjunction with the section for
Instrumentation and Monitoring.
11.0
TESTING AUTHORITY
11.1. "Testing Authority" shall mean an organisation or laboratory that is proposed by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer fully equipped to carry out all tests and
checks required by this specification. If for any reason, the Engineer is not satisfied
with the performance of the Testing Authority, he may direct the Contractor to use a different testing laboratory at no extra cost.
12.0
RESPONSIBILITY
12.1 No approval by the Engineer shall in any ways relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for the quality of materials and the standard of workmanship in the
finished works and for the strength and durability of the finished Works.
13.0
SITE INFORMATION
13.1 The Contractor shall refer to the survey plan and underground services plans provided
for indicative site information.
13.2 The Contractor will be deemed to have visited and inspected the site and surroundings
prior to the Contract and to have made himself thoroughly acquainted with all visible
details of the site including those not specifically mentioned herein or shown on the
drawings and which may affect his program or methods of carrying out the Works.
14.0
PROGRAMME
14.1
The Contractor shall submit a detailed program, showing clearly how he proposes to
complete the Works within the contract period.
14.2
The program must comply strictly with all the requirements specified in this
Specification.
14.3
The Contractor shall submit three copies of the programme tothe Employer's
Page 7 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

Representative and keep one copy in the site office. The Contractor shall record
progress on a copy of the chart kept on site and update and re-draft if any circumstances arise which affect the progress of the works. The Contractor shall submit copies of all revisions to the Employer's Representative, and submit weekly update reports
(status report) to the Employer's Representative.
15.0
RECORDS AND CERTIFICATES

15.1
Copies of all records and certificates, including manufacturer's or supplier's certificates
of tests, shall be kept on site and be available for inspection at any time.
15.2
Works test certificates shall be sent to the Engineer immediately once they are available, all other records and certificates shall be sent to the Engineer upon completion of
the Works unless otherwise directed.
15.3
The Contractor shall keep records at his own cost of all details and dimensions of the
Works as constructed and shall when requested submit such of the records to the Engineer as may be required by him.
15.4
The Contractor is to submit to the Employer's Representative daily, his returns of labour,
plant and materials. The daily reports must also include planned works for the next
working day. The Contractor is to keep a day-to-day site diary to record the happenings and events on site which affect the Contract which must be open for examination
by the Employer's Representative on demand, and for the recording by the Employer's
Representative of any site instruction which may be found necessary for the Contract,
and must be signed by the Employer's Representative.
15.5
The Contractors shall submit to the Employer's Representative all Records, As Built
Drawings and Operation and Maintenance Manuals for the Works; all in accordance
with the relevant clauses in the Specification.
15.6
Should the Contractor fail to produce such information, the Employer will, after serving
notice to the Contractor, instruct other persons to produce this information and all costs
incurred will be charged to the Contractor.
15.7
Records, Drawings, Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be supplied in the
number of copies set out in the Specification, failing which an adjustment will be made
to the Contract price.
16.0
CERTIFICATES FOR MATERIALS

16.1
All materials shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the appropriate
codes as specified or British Standard / ASTM or. Where certificates of manufacture
or tests are available for materials proposed for use in the Works, the Engineer may
direct that independent testing be carried out to determine compliance with the these
Specifications or British standard / ASTM.
16.2
Where appropriate all materials delivered to the site shall bear the manufacturer's
name, brand name or any other data that may be required to verify the exact nature of
the material and relate it to the requirements of the specification.
16.3
Works test certificates shall include, whenever applicable, the location in the Works or
the delivery or batch which the sample represents.
16.4
Where the Contract Documents allow the Contractor a choice of materials to be used
in the Works, the materials chosen and their proposed sources of supply shall be
subject to approval.
Page 8 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

16.5
16.6
16.7
Alternative to the materials specified or shown on the drawings may be permitted subject to the Contractor providing full details of his proposals before the related work
begins.
All submissions should be accompanied by a test certificate or similar evidence that the
material complies with the requirements of the specifications.
Unless otherwise directed, bulk orders for materials shall not be placed before the
sources and samples of the materials have been approved and the results of any
preliminary tests required by the specification have been accepted.
17.0
COMPLIANCE WITH LOCAL AUTHORITIES' REQUIREMENT, REGULATIONS &

BY-LAWS
17.1 It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure full compliance with the relevant
regulations and by-laws of the local Authorities together with any future relevant regulations or by-laws applicable in the United Arab Emirates.
17.2 The Contractor will be held responsible for any delays due to the stoppage of work on
site by the Authorities for non-compliance with the above. He shall pay all charges levied by the Authorities which have jurisdiction on the areas of his non-compliance.
18.0
BREAKING UP OF EXISTING WORKS

18.1 Before the breaking up of existing works, the Contractor shall seek the permission
of the Authority concerned and the Engineer to carry out such works. All costs and
expenses incurred including the reinstatement if required shall be borne by the
Contractor.
19.0
OBSTRUCTIONS
19.1 An obstruction is defined as material the excavation of which requires additional effort.
Upon encountering an obstruction, the Contractor shall immediately inform the
Engineer and shall agree with the Engineer the method to be employed in removing the
obstruction.
19.2 No claim for additional cost shall be allowed for excavation through difficult ground
conditions no matter how adverse or for the removal of boulders.
20.0
BLASTING
20.1 Blasting shall not be permitted without the written approval of the Engineer, the relevant
Authorities and the Employer. The Contractor shall engage a specialist sub-contractor
to provide consultancy services on the blasting and to execute blasting on the site. The
specialist sub-contractor shall be solely responsible for obtaining any necessary permits
and approvals from the relevant Authorities, etc. for the use of and storage of
explosives. The Contractor shall only engage specialist sub-contractor approved by the
Engineer to provide this service.
20.2 Prior to blasting, the Contractor shall propose and submit details of equipment and
construction procedures to ensure that blasting during caisson excavation will not
adversely affect nor reduce the frictional shaft resistance between the concrete and the
weathered rock for approval by the Engineer.
Page 9 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

20.3
20.4
Details of all proposed blasting operations shall be submitted to the Engineer with as
much advance notice as possible and at least 24 hours prior to blasting. These shall
include charge calculations and expected ground vibration levels.
In any blasting works, the Contractor shall take into account the specified threshold
vibration levels of all property of the existing monorail viaduct and monorail station
structures and all computer installations of all buildings in the vicinity of the project site.
The Contractor shall comply with all regulations of the relevant Authorities and take all
precautions necessary to avoid damage to buildings and other property. Should any
damage be caused this shall immediately be made good at the Contractor's own
expense.
21.0
DEFECTIVE WORK
21.1 Where in the opinion of the Engineer, any of the finished works, materials or
workmanship in any part of the Works fails to comply with the Specification, that part
of the Works will not be accepted and may be classified as defective.
21.2 All works classified as defective shall be removed from the Works and replaced with
other in an approved manner.
21.3 The extent and nature of any measures required as a result of defective work shall be
determined by the Engineer.
22.0
PROJECT COORDINATION
22.1. DESCRIPTION
22.1.1. The Contractor shall provide the administrative and supervisory personnel necessary for the proper and satisfactory coordination, construction, completion,
commissioning and maintenance of the Works.
22.2.
COORDINATION
General
22.2.1. The Contractor shall coordinate construction activities included under various
Sections of these Specifications to assure the efficient and orderly installation of
each part of the Works.
22.2.2. The Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included under different Sections of the Specifications that are dependent upon each other for
proper installation, connection, and operation.
22.2.1.1
22.2.1.2
22.2.1.3
Where installation of one part of the Works is dependent on

installation of other components, the Contractor shall schedule detailed design and construction activities in the sequence required
to obtain the best results.
Where availability of space is limited, the Contractor shall
coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum
accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair.
The Contractor shall make adequate provision to accommodate
items scheduled for later installation.
Page 10 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

22.2.1.4
22.2.1.5
Where necessary, the Contractor shall prepare memoranda for

distribution to each party involved outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Memoranda shall include such items as
required notices, reports and at tendance at meetings.
The Contractor shall prepare similar memoranda for the Employer
and separate contractors, where coordination of their work is
required.
22.3
ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURE
22.3.1 There will be other contractors, engaged directly by the Employer or by others,
either working on the Site or constructing other utilities and buildings in the vicinity of the Works during the course of this Contract.
22.3.2 The Contractor must allow for the above Sub-Clause and for coordinating work
as necessary to cause minimum disruption.
22.3.3 The Contractor shall coordinate scheduling and timing of the required administrative procedure with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure
orderly progress of the work.
a. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.1 Preparation of schedules
a.2 Organizing the installation and removal of temporary facilities
a.3 Delivery and processing of submittals.
a.4 Progress meetings
a.5 Project Closeout activities
22.4
DRAWINGS
22.4.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for checking all schedules and drawings
etc, supplied by the Employer's Representative. In the event of any discrepancy
being found between such schedules and drawings, etc, or if the Contractor
considers that additional detail drawings are required, then in either case the
Contractor shall report such discrepancy to the Employer's Representative for
instruction, or apply in writing for such detail drawings, at least 14 days
before the works concerned are to be executed, or 14 days before the
materials and components necessary for the Works are to be placed on order
by the Contractor.
22.4.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay the extra cost, if any,
occasioned by any discrepancies, errors or omissions in the Contractors
Documents, whether they have been approved by the Engineer or not.
22.4.3 The Contractor shall prepare and submit coordination drawings where close
and careful coordination is required relative to:
a. Installation of products
b. Material fabricated off-site by separate entities
c. Efficient installation of different components where limited space
availability necessitates maximum utilization of space.
22.4.4 These coordination drawings shall indicate:
a. Interrelationship of components detailed on separate shop drawings.
b. Required installation sequences.
Page 11 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

23.0
22.5
SPECIFICATIONS
22.5.1 The arrangement of the Specifications into Divisions, Sections, Clauses,
Sub-Clauses and paragraphs, shall not control the division of work among
sub-Contractors nor establish the extent of work to be performed by any
particular trade or subcontractor.
22.5.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper coordination of all the
Works including that required between different trades and different
sub-contractors, suppliers, Utility Agencies, Governmental Authorities, etc.
22.6
COORDINATION AND COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS

22.6.1 During the progress of the Works, other contractors may be engaged in
performing work on, at or near the Site. The Contractor shall coordinate the
Works with the works of other contractors.
ON-SITE ADMINISTRATION
23.1 DESCRIPTION
This section involves the Contractors on-Site operations and administration of the Contract. All work shall be performed under the observation of and in the presence of the
Engineer or his authorized delegate.
23.2
DETAILS OF CONTRACTORS SUPERVISORY AND OFFICE STAFF

23.2.1 It shall be clearly understood that the management and supervisory staff
proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer shall be available
on a full-time basis during the execution of the Works.
23.2.2 Each person nominated by the Contractor is subject to final approval by the
Engineer.
23.2.3 Approval of the Contractors supervisory staff does not waive the right of the
Employer Representative to withdraw that approval at any time thereafter as
provided for in Sub-Clause 6.9 [Contractors Personnel] of the Conditions of
Contract.
23.2.4 It is pointed out that the provision of the management and supervisory staff
proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer does not relieve the
Contractor in any way of its liability under the Contract to provide all the staff
necessary for the satisfactory completion, commissioning and maintenance of
the Works within the Completion Dates stated in the Contract.
23.2.5 The Contractor shall provide the names and details of the experience,
qualifications and previous appointments of the key Contractors Personnel.
23.3 USE OF SITE

The Contractor shall not use the Site, or any part thereof, for any purpose other than
carrying out the Works.
23.4 ADVERTISING
23.4.1 The Contractor shall not display, or permit advertisements to be displayed, on the
Site without written approval of the Engineer
Page 12 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

23.5
INSPECTION OF WORK AND MATERIALS

23.5.1 The Contractors attention is directed to the requirements of Sub-Clause 7 [Plant,
Materials and Workmanship] of the Conditions of Contract with respect to
inspection and testing of the Works and Materials
23.5.2 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer seven working days in advance of any
work to be done in order that inspection services may be provided.
23.5.3 Inspection of any work or material by the Engineer or his authorized delegate shall
not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to ensure that such work and material
is in accordance with the requirements of the Contract.
23.5.4 Inspection by the Engineer during Defects Notification Period is to be performed as
follows:
23.5.4.1 The Engineer will give the Contractor due notice of his intention to carry
out any inspections during the Defects Notification Period
23.5.4.2 The Contractors Representative shall be present at the times and dates
proposed by the Engineer.
23.5.4.3 Contractors Representative shall render all necessary assistance and
take note of all matters and issues to which the Engineer calls attention.
23.6 LABOR RECORD

23.6.1 In addition to Sub Clause 6.10 (b) [Records of Contractors Personnel and
Equipment] of the Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall submit a daily
record to the Engineer in a format to be approved by the Engineer showing the
number, duration of their engagement, and description of craftsmen, laborers and
other persons employed on or in connection with the Works, including those
employed by subcontractors.
23.6.2 This record shall be incorporated in the Contractors daily report.
23.7 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT RECORD
23.7.1 In addition to Sub Clause 6.10 (b) [ Records of Contractors Personnel and Equipment] of the Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall submit a daily record to
the Engineer in a format to be approved by the Engineer, showing the type,
model, number of hours worked, and capacity of all Contractors Equipment employed on the Works.
23.8 DEFECTIVE WORK
23.8.1 When any part of the Works is known or suspected to be defective, the Contractor
shall submit proposals for further testing, opening up, inspection, making good or
removal and re-execution of the same as soon as possible to the Engineer for his
approval.
23.8.2 Whenever inspection or testing shows that any part of the Works is not in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall take all necessary measures to establish the acceptability of such work (e.g. further testing, opening up, experimental
making good).
25.8.2.1 Such measures shall be:
a. At the expense of the Contractor.
Page 13 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

b. Not considered as grounds for extension of time.

23.9 REPRESENTATIVES FOR EMERGENCIES
23.9.1 The Contractor shall file with the Engineer, the names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of representatives who can be contacted at any time, in case of
emergency.
23.9.2 These representatives must be fully authorized and empowered to immediately
instruct whatever measures are necessary in order to correct unsafe or excessively
inconvenient conditions.
23.10 MAINTAINING EXISTING FACILITIES IN OPERATION
23.10.1
The Contractor shall carry out the Works in such manner as to avoid
interference with existing facilities, pipelines, etc, wherever possible.
23.10.2
In no case shall the Contractor interfere with the operation of existing facilities
pipelines, cables etc., without first obtaining the permission of both the
Engineer and the relevant Authority to which such facility pertains.
23.11 NON-COMPLIANCE
23.11.1
The Contractor must not rectify work, which fails to meet the specified levels
of accuracy, without approval.
23.11.2
The Contractor shall submit proposed rectification measures for parts of the
Works, which do not meet the specified levels of accuracy, to the Engineer for
approval.
23.11.3
23.11.3 The Contractor shall note that rectification measures necessitating removal and replacement of sub-standard work may not be approved.
23.11.4
23.11.4 All costs and losses associated with rectification of sub-standard work
shall be borne by the Contractor.
23.12 HOUSEKEEPING
23.12.1
Throughout
all working
23.12.1.1
23.12.1.2
23.12.2
the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall keep the Site and
areas.
In tidy and work man-like condition.
Free from rubbish and waste materials.
Any Temporary Works, Contractors Equipment, or other things that for the
time being are not required for use by the Contractor may, with the consent of
the Engineer, in accordance with Sub-Clause 4.17 [Contractors Equipment] of
the Conditions of Contract:
23.12.2.1 Be removed from the Site, but otherwise
23.12.2.2 Shall be dispersed about the Site in an orderly fashion and be
properly and securely stored thereon.
23.12.2.3 Requirements of this Clause shall not limit the Contractors
obligations under the Conditions of Contract.
23.13 FINAL CONDITIONS OF WORK
Page 14 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

23.13.1
23.13.2
23.13.3
23.13.3
24.0
Before application is made for the Employer to accept the Works, or any
Section or part thereof, all items of work associated therewith, shall be
complete, ready to operate and in a clean condition.
All trash, debris, unused building materials and temporary structures shall have
been removed from the site of the work.
Contractors Equipment not needed for repair and adjustment consequent to
operational tests shall not be left on the Site or on that Section or part of the
Works to which the Contractors application relates.
All associated walkways, parking areas and roadways, streets and lanes
pertaining to the Works shall be completely cleaned.
PROJECT MEETINGS
24.1 DESCRIPTION
This section includes requirements for
24.1.1 Kick-Off Meeting
24.1.2 Progress Meetings
24.1.3 Pre-Startup Conference
24.1.4 Post-Construction Conference
24.1.5 Minutes of Meeting
24.2
KICK-OFF MEETING
24.2.1 A Kick-Off Meeting shall be held at the Site prior to physical execution of the
Works on site.
24.2.2 This meeting shall be attended by the Engineer, the Employer, the Project
Manager and the Contractor. Representative,
24.2.3 The agenda shall be provided a minimum of 3 working days prior to the
meeting by the Engineer, responsible for the supervision of the Works.
24.2.3.1
Topics of discussion will include but not necessarily be limited to

the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
Project Title and Correspondence

Contract Documents
Letter of Acceptance (if any)
Contract Dates
Completion Dates for Sections
Site Possession
Site Establishment and Services
Material Approvals
Contract Programme
Performance Bond
Insurances
Working Hours (Friday/ Holiday/ Overtime Working)
Variations
Materials on Site
Page 15 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
z.
aa.
bb.
cc.
dd.
ee.
24.3
Services Authorities
Progress Meetings
Site Personnel
Method Statements
Site Inspections
Subcontractors
Daily Reports
Weekly Reports
Monthly Reports
Site Safety
Valuations
Value Engineering (if applicable)
Adjustments for Changes in Cost/Fluctuations (if applicable)
Delay Liquidated Damages
Project Sign Boards
Contractors Queries
Any other business (AOB)
PROGRESS MEETINGS
24.3.1 Progress meetings shall be held weekly to review work progress.
Progress reviews shall verify:
a. Actual start and finish dates for activities completed during the update
period.
b. Remaining durations and percentage of completion for all activities
not completed.
c. Logic, activity duration and cost data for Variations that will be
incorporated into the construction schedule.
d. Contractors proposed measures to recover lost time and bring the
progress of the Works back on schedule by increasing manpower,
materials and equipment resources and working extended hours,
additional shifts, etc.
24.3.2 Progress meetings shall be attended by the Engineer, the Project Manager and
the Contractor, together with subcontractors who may attend when involved in
the matters to be discussed or resolved but only when requested by the
Engineer.
24.3.2.1
In addition to the attendees named above, the meetings shall be

attended by the representatives of regulatory agencies having
jurisdiction over the Project, if required and such other persons as
the Engineer may designate.
24.3.3 The time and location of the progress meetings shall be as directed by the
Engineer. The Engineer or his designee shall chair the meetings.
Page 16 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

24.3.4 The Contractor shall submit the Weekly progress report which includes the
information itemized below to the Engineer at least 2 working days prior to
each progress meeting.
a. A list of completed activities.
b. A list of current activities with an estimate of time required for completion.
c. A list of changes to planned starting dates and duration of all
outstanding activities
d. Percentage of completion of each current activity.
e. A list of activities planned to start in the next period.
f. Other information required by the Engineer.
24.4
ADDITIONAL UNSCHEDULED MEETINGS

24.4.1 Additional unscheduled meetings required by the Contractor shall be submitted
to the Engineer in writing.
a. The Contractor shall provide proposed agenda for the meeting.
b. The Contractor shall provide the names of all personnel who are required to
attend.
c. The Engineer or his designee shall chair these meetings.
24.5
PRE-STARTUP CONFERENCE
24.5.1 A pre-startup conference shall be required prior to starting up any major part
of the Works, system or sub-system.
24.5.2 This conference requires attendance by the Contractor, the Engineer or his
designee, and Plant manufacturers (if necessary).
24.5.3 The agenda shall be provided by the Engineer a minimum of 3 working days
prior to the conference. Topics of discussion will include but not necessarily be
limited to the following:
a. Start-up and validation prerequisites.
b. Start-up plan and schedule.
c. Temporary connections.
d. Other items deemed necessary by the Engineer.
24.6
POST-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
24.6.1 A post-construction conference shall be required prior to final inspection of the
Works.
24.6.2 This conference requires attendance by the Engineer, the Project Manager, the
Contractor and its appropriate representatives.
24.6.3 The agenda shall be provided by the Engineer a minimum of 3 working days
Page 17 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

prior to the conference. Topics of discussion will include but not necessarily
limited to the following:
a. Discussion and resolution of all unsettled matters.
b. Warranties and insurances.
c. Security Interests and Claims Certificate as required by Sub Clause 7.9
[Security Interest] of the Conditions of Contract
d. Schedules and procedures for the final inspection process.
e. Correction of defects and deficiencies.
f. Documents required to be submitted to the Contractor
g. Other items deemed necessary by the Engineer.
24.7
MINUTES OF MEETING
24.7.1 The Engineer will record minutes of each meeting.
24.7.2 The Contractor shall submit written objections, if any, to contents of minutes
within 2 days of receipt thereof.
In the absence of any objection, it shall be deemed that the Contractor
accepts the minutes as a true and complete record of the meeting.
24.8
TECHNICAL MEETING
24.8.1 The Technical meetings shall be held on a weekly basis.
24.8.2 The Contractor shall submit the agenda for the Technical meetings
a minimum of 2 working days prior to the meeting.
24.8.3 The Contractor shall record the minutes of each Technical meeting.
25.0
CONTRACTORS DOCUMENTS AND OTHER SUBMITTALS

25.1 DESCRIPTION
This section describes requirements for the submittal of the Contractors Documents and other information by the Contractor.
25.2
DEFINITIONS
25.2.1 Product Data and Shop Drawings
a. Includes drawings, diagrams, illustrations, detailed calculations, brochures,
schedules, bills of materials, and other data prepared specifically for the
Works.
b. Information may be prepared by the Contractor, his subcontractors,
suppliers or distributors, plant manufacturers, or fabricators.
c. Information must illustrate or describe manufacture, fabrication,
construction, and installation of the Works or a portion thereof.
25.2.2 Manufacturers Representatives
Page 18 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

a. Persons actively working at manufacturers factory with minimum 5 years

experience
b. Such persons shall be familiar with actual processes and procedures
of manufacturing, installing, and operating the product.
c. Sales representatives or agents will not be acceptable.
25.2.3 Working Drawings
a. Contractor prepared plans for Temporary Works and other facilities.
b. Elements of work which may affect the safety of persons or property shall
be checked and certified by a qualified health and safety engineer.
c. Calculations demonstrating adequacy of the Contractors design shall be
submitted with the working drawings.
d. Follow submittal procedures for shop drawings
25.2.4 Samples
a. Physical examples illustrating Materials, Plant or workmanship proposed
for incorporation in the works
b. Samples will establish standards by which the work will be judged.
25.2.5 Manuals / Technical Literature
The Contractor shall obtain copies of the following which shall be retained on
Site for the use of the Consultants.
a. Manuals shall comprise manufacturers written installation, start-up,
operating, maintenance and repair instructions.
b. These manuals shall include part lists, pictures, sketches and diagrams
specific to the Plant supplied in order to document the manufacturers
requirements.
c. All relevant Codes of Practice.
d. BSI Handbook No. 3 with all current revision sheets included and
superseded sheets removed.
e. Any standards referred to in the specifications.
25.3
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE
25.3.1 Only the Contractor shall be permitted to make submissions to the Engineer
and the Engineer
25.3.1.1
All data and correspondence prepared by subcontractors and

suppliers shall be submitted through the Contractor.
a. All submittals shall be in English
b. The Contractor shall make all corrections and changes to shop
drawings and working drawings as required by the Engineer
or the Engineer and resubmit until approved.
c. The Contractor shall review submittals returned by the
Engineer.
Page 19 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

d
e
The Contractor shall determine if changes requested by the

Engineer will result in extra cost or will affect progress.
In accordance with Sub-Clause 20.1 [Contractors Claims] of
the Conditions of Contract the Contractor shall notify Engineer
in writing within 7 days of receiving submittal if contractor
believes additional costs are incurred, or if progress will be
impeded.
If the Contractor fails to notify the Engineer of the extra costs
or of the progress implications within the specified time the
Contractor shall be deemed to have waived its entitlement to
make such claim.
25.3.2 Copies of all submittals having cost and time implications to the Contract shall
be furnished to the Project Manager.
25.3.3 The Engineer shall review and approve all shop drawings, working drawings,
product data, samples and manuals required by the Contract Documents.
25.3.3.1
Such review and approval shall be for compliance with the

Contract Requirements.
a. It is deemed that prior to submission for approval the Contractor has verified all materials, field measurements, field construction
criteria and similar items and accepts responsibility for the same.
b. It is also deemed that prior to submission for approval the
Contractor has coordinated information contained in the submittal
with work requirements of other trades and subcontracts and accepts responsibility for the same.
25.3.3.2 The Contractor shall prepare and furnish all submittals to the
Engineer and Engineer in a timely manner so as not to delay
the progress of the Works.
25.3.3.3 Contractor shall prepare submittals in such a manner that no more
Than one re-submission is necessary to obtain the Engineer and
Engineers approval.
a. If more than one re-submittal is required, the Employer reserves the right to deduct the cost of the Engineers time and the
Engineers time to review all additional re-submittals (after the first
re-submittal) from money due to the Contractor.
25.3.4 The Contractor shall not deliver Materials or Plant to the Site and shall not
incorporate these into the Works until they been approved or authorized in
writing by the Engineer.
Page 20 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

25.3.5 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings, working drawings, product data
and samples in accordance with approved submittal schedule.
25.3.5.1 The Contractor shall allow sufficient time for the Engineers review,
approval, and transmittal back to the Contractor.
25.3.6 The Contractor shall submit full details of items, not completely described on
the Drawings, separately in a form acceptable to the Engineer. In addition
the Contractor shall:
25.3.6.1 Adjust dimensions shown on the Drawings to reflect actual
dimensions of Plant provided.
25.3.6.2 Coordinate dimensions shown on the Drawings as well as actual
25.3.6.3 Plant dimensions with measurements of existing, adjacent,
incorporated, and completed work to ensure all components fit
into the space available.
25.3.6.4 Verify all dimensions before beginning any work depending on
such data.
25.3.7 The Contractor shall identify each and every deviation from the Contract
Documents to the Engineer either on the shop drawing or in the letter of
transmittal. Such submittal shall:
25.3.7.1 Explain reason for deviation
25.3.7.2 Compare requested deviation with Contract requirement.
a. Explain why deviation is equal to or better than contract requirement.
25.3.7.3 If the Contractor fails to identify deviations in a submittal then the
Contractor shall not be relieved of the responsibility for
executing work in complete conformance with Contract Documents
even though such submittal has been approved.
25.3.8 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings, working drawings, product data
and samples for related Plant items and integrated system components at the
same time.
25.3.8.1 Partial submissions may be returned to the Contractor without
review.
25.3.9 The Contractor shall direct Engineers attention either in writing or on the resubmitted documents to each and every revision other than those requested by
the Engineer on previous submittals.
Page 21 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

The Contractor shall not perform any work until shop drawings have been
submitted to and approved by the Engineer. Shop drawings are not to be
prepared after work has started or is complete.
25.3.10
All submittals from the Contractor shall include a label or stamp which
indicates that the submittal has been reviewed and approved by the
Contractor for conformance to the Contract requirements Engineers
Review:
25.3.10.1 Engineers review is for general conformance with the Contract
requirements only; all work is still subject to the detailed
requirement of the Contract Documents.
25.3.10.2 The Engineers review is to help the Contractor in discovering
errors and omissions.
25.3.10.3 The Engineers review does not relieve the Contractor of the
obligation and responsibility to co-ordinate and plan the details of
the Works and fulfill the intent and purpose of the Contract.
25.3.10.4 The Engineers review shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for accuracy, proper fit, or proper functioning and
performance of work.
25.3.10.5 The Engineer reserves the right to require written confirmation from
the Contractor that the comments placed on submittals stamped
Approved as Noted will actually be implemented.
25.3.10.6 Large or multiple submittals may require additional time. In such
instances the Contractor shall prioritize submittals and the
Engineer will review and return them in the order of the highest
priority.
25.3.10.7 The need for re-submission or the resultant delays in obtaining the
Engineers review or approval thereon, unless unduly delayed,
shall not entitle the Contractor to a time extension for completion
of the Contract or a Section thereof as the case may be.
25.4
SHOP DRAWINGS
25.4.1 The Contractor shall provide detailed drawings and written descriptions of
both the assembly and components.
25.4.2 Drawings shall indicate proposed installation of work as well as Materials and
Plant being furnished.
Page 22 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

25.4.3 Information shown on shop drawings shall be complete and sufficient for
Engineer to review for compliance with the requirements of the Contract.
25.4.3.1 Information shall include but not necessarily be limited to the
following:
25.4.3.1.1 Layout dimensions and component sizes including
bases,
25.4.3.1.2 Foundations, anchors, permanent supporting
structures, bracings, penetrations etc.
25.4.3.1.3 Design Criteria
25.4.3.1.4 Materials of construction
25.4.3.1.5 Detailed calculations for the capacities of product and
materials proposed for use in the shop drawings.
25.4.3.1.6 Components and assembly weights.
25.4.3.1.7 Utility requirements (power, water, etc.)
25.4.3.1.8 Manufacturers rating or performance curves.
25.4.3.1.9 Wiring diagram and control schematics.
25.4.3.1.10
Recommended spare parts.
25.5.3.1.11
Special tools
25.4.3.1.12
Deviation from requirements of the Contract
25.4.3.1.13
Additional requirements contained in individual
Specification sections.
25.4.4 Copies of the Contract Drawings are not acceptable for submission as
component arrangement (layout) drawings.
25.5
MISCELLANEOUS SUBMISSION
25.5.1 Manufacturers guarantees and warranties. The Contractor shall:
a. Submit original including organization registration stamp unless otherwise
specified.
b. Submit prior to final acceptance.
25.5.2 Work Plans
25.7.2.1
The Contractor shall submit 3 copies, unless otherwise specified,

at least 30 days prior to beginning work.
25.5.3 Submittal Schedule

25.5.3.1
25.5.3.2
Such schedule shall show the proposed date the Contractor will
deliver each required submittal to the Engineer for review in
format provided by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall furnish the submittal schedule within 21
Page 23 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

calendar days of the Commencement Date.

25.5.4 Health, Safety and Fire Protection Plan.
25.5.4.1
25.5.4.2
The Contractor shall submit 3 copies of its Project specific Health,

Safety and Fire Protection Plan
No work shall commence on the site until the Health, Safety and
Fire Protection Plan is approved.
25.5.5 Accident Reports

25.5.5.1
The Contractor shall submit 3 copies unless otherwise specified.
25.5.6 Reports
25.5.6.1
Progress Report
a. The Contractor shall prepare and submit the Progress Reports
in accordance with Sub-clause 4.21 [Progress Reports] of the
Conditions of Contract.
b. Work activities and procurement reports should be referenced
where relevant to the approved Contractors Construction
Program.
c. The contractor shall be permitted to take progress
photographs (with date shown) of the Works under
construction. An adequate number of photographs must be
taken for inclusion in the monthly Contractors Progress Report
in accordance with the specifications
d. Submission shall be in 6 copies unless otherwise specified
25.5.6.2
Time-Lapse record
a. The Contractor is to provide and maintain Time-Lapse
photography equipment of the site from a minimum of 2 near
angles for the Empoyer's Representative to monitor
progress and for the Employers marketing requirements.
b. Contractor has to include Time-lapse record in monthly
reports.
25.5.6.3
Contractors Daily Report
The daily record shall be signed by the Contractors Representative and shall:
a. Be submitted on a daily basis no later than 9:00am the
following day.
b. Describe labor force and its allocation.
Page 24 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

c.
d.
e.
f.
25.5.6.4
Describe Materials and Contractors Equipment utilized

Describe work progress during the day
Describe temperature and weather conditions.
Describe any occurrence which may affect the progress of the
Works.
Procurement Status Report
The procurement status report shall:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Be submitted on weekly basis

Include a list of materials and items procured.
Include list of items delivered to the Site.
Provide references to all correspondence and transmittals
between Contractor and the Engineer regarding approval of
such Materials and items.
25.5.7 Inspection and Test Reports

25.5.7.1
The Contractor shall submit 6 copies unless otherwise

specified.
25.5.8 Close-out Submittals and Procedures

With respect to the required close-out submittals and procedures the Contractor shall:
25.5.8.1 Prepare, in a tabular format acceptable to the Engineer a list of items
to be completed and corrected (Punch List). The Contractor shall
include the value for each item on the list, and reasons why the work
is not complete.
25.5.8.2 Submit a written undertaking in a form acceptable to the Engineer, to
complete and/or correct all items contained in the Punch List, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, within 28 days from date of issue of the
Taking-Over Certificate or other reasonable time as is instructed by
the Engineer in accordance with Sub-Clause 11.1 [Completion of
Outstanding Work and Remedying Defects] of the Conditions of
Contract.
25.5.8.3 Advise the Employer, with copy to the Engineer, of impending
insurance changeover requirements.
25.5.8.4 Submit warranties, bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
25.5.8.5 Obtain and submit releases permitting the Employer unrestricted use
Page 25 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

of the Works and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy

permits, operating certificates, and similar releases as applicable.
25.5.8.6 Prepare and submit Record (As-Built) Documents, and operation and
maintenance manuals.
25.5.8.7 Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to
locations designated by the Engineer. The Contractor shall label with
manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
25.5.8.8 Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to the
Engineer.The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of changeover
in security provisions.
25.5.8.9 Complete start-up testing of systems.
25.5.8.10 Submit test/adjust/balance records.
25.5.8.11 Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Site, together with
mockups, unused samples, construction tools, and similar
elements.
25.5.8.12 Advise the Engineer of impending changeover in utilities.
25.5.8.13 Submit changeover information related to the Employer's
occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
25.5.8.14 Complete final cleaning requirements, including touch-up painting.
25.5.8.15 Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed
finishes to eliminate visual defects.
25.5.8.16 Commence Instruction of the Employer's Personnel in operation,
adjustment, and maintenance of systems and equipment, and
maintenance of products.
25.5.9 Organizational Chart
25.5.9.1
The Contractor shall submit for Engineers approval within 14

days the Commencement Date.
25.5.9.2
This chart shall show the management, administrative, Quality

Control, Safety and construction supervision organization
a. All personnel from the Contractors Representative through
foreman level reporting to the Contractors Representative
Page 26 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

shall be shown on the chart

b. The chart shall be accompanied by a description of
personnel duties
c. The Contractor shall provide qualifications and experience of
all personnel shown on Organizational Chart.
25.5.9.3
The Contractor shall update the Organizational Chart whenever

key personnel are reassigned
25.5.9.4
The Engineer may interview any of the Contractors proposed staff

prior to approval,
25.5.9.5
The Engineer may direct the Contractor to remove from the Site
Contractors personnel who, in the Engineers sole opinion,
a. Exhibit inappropriate conduct
b. Are incompetent, negligent in the performance of their duties
c. Otherwise considered undesirable.
25.5.10
Site Layout for Contractors Facilities

25.7.10.1 Full details of the proposed Site layout of the Contractors
facilities shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer prior
to physical execution on site.
25.7.10.2 Site layout plan should include but not necessarily be limited
to the following:
a. Temporary facilities including accommodation.
b. Storage areas including permanent dumping of excavated
material and all debris.
c. Fences, gates and security lighting.
d. Access to subcontractors, vendors, Contractors Equipment, staff, visitors, etc.
25.5.11
Correspondence
All correspondence shall:

25.5.11.1 Be issued via transmittals and cover letters including
attachments and enclosures.
25.5.11.2 Be submit on A4 size whenever possible
25.5.11.3 Clearly indicate the following on each document
Page 27 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
25.6
Project Number
Title of Project
Contractors Name
Date
Correspondence Reference Number
DRAWINGS
25.6.1 Drawings forming part of the Contract are listed in the Schedule of Drawings
25.6.2 Compliance with Drawings
a. All works, during its progress, and upon completion shall conform to the
lines, elevations and grades as shown on the Drawings.
b. The Contractor shall complete the proposed work in every detail as
specified.
c. The Contractor shall bring to the notice of the Engineer any detail or details that have been omitted from the Drawings and Specifications which
are essential to the intended completeness of the Works.
25.6.3 Additional Drawings
27.6.3.1
Additional drawings may be issued to the Contractor by the

Engineer as work progresses.
25.6.4 Record Drawings and Specifications

25.6.4.1
Contractor shall maintain one record copy of all Drawings,

Specifications, Addenda, Variations, Approved submittals,
Correspondence, and Transmittals at the Site in good order
and readily available to the Engineer.
25.6.4.2
In addition to the requirements of the technical Specifications,

record drawings shall be clearly and correctly marked and the
Record Specifications annotated by the Contractor to show:
a. All changes made during the construction process, the date
the changes are made and those parts of the Works affected
by the changes
The Works as executed complete with:
1. Existing and finished level,
2. Profiles of all pipelines,
3. Dimensions,
4. Reinforcing details
5. Details of support left in place,
6. Location of all services encountered
Page 28 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

7. Any other information requested by the Engineer.

25.6.4.3
Drawings shall be supplemented as necessary by schedules

and data sheets indicating:
a. Quantity,
b. Quality
c. Type of materials installed.
25.6.4.4
Draft Record Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for his

approval, and shall be finalized in accordance with any amendments required by him.
25.6.4.5
The Engineer shall furnish the Contractor with electronic version of

the original Contract Drawings in Autocad software. The
Contractor shall update these Drawings progressively as the
Works proceed at its own expense.
The Contractor shall amend as and where required to portray the
Works as actually constructed
The Contractor shall prepare and supply the Engineer the revised
transparencies and diskettes marked As-Built Record Drawings
for his approval.
On completion of the Works the Record Drawings shall be
handed over to the Engineer together with the diskettes
Record Drawing submission shall include:
a. Five bound sets of As-Built Record Drawings.
b. One set of first copy negatives.
c. One set of diskettes.
Each drawing shall have the Contract details and Drawing
Number detailed to the approval of the Engineer.
25.7
25.6.4.6
No final payment shall be made except for the work that has
been completed in accordance with the Specification and has
been duly represented on the As-Built Record Drawings.
25.6.4.7
The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra payment or

extension of time for the preparation of the Record Drawings.
MISTAKE IN INFORMATION
Page 29 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

A.
26.0
PREPARATION OF ASSET REGISTER

The contractor has to prepare an Asset Register in the prescribed format as approved by the
Employers Representative at least 6 months prior to the completion and handover of the Project. The same needs to be submitted to the Consultant for verification, and which shall thereafter be submitted to the Employers Representative and needs to be updated accordingly. The
minimum submission requirements are as below:
26.1
26.2
26.3
27.0
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay the extra cost, if any, occasioned by any discrepancies, errors, or omission in drawings and other particular supplied by him whether they have been approved by the Engineer or
not.
PROJECT LAYOUT DRAWING

LIST OF INSTALLED ASSETS (MEP & civil) complete with
Location of asset
Description of asset
Make, model and serial number of asset
Capacity (in case of MEP) of asset
Quantity
Supplier name and contact details
LIST OF SPARE PARTS (MEP & civil) complete with

Item description
Part number
Make and model pf the part
Quantity suggested by OEM for a minimum period of 2 years.
QUALITY CONTROL
Detail of Quality Control requirements are provided in the Schedules. In addition the Contractor
shall comply with following.
27.1
EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL HANDLING AND STORAGE
The Contractor shall be responsible for handling, storing and preserving equipment and material from the time of receipt to the time of acceptance by the Engineer.
27.1.1 Contractors storage and handling procedures shall be designed to prevent
damage, deterioration, distortion of shape or dimension, loss, degradation,
loss of identification, or substitution.
Page 30 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

27.1.2 The handling procedure shall address the use, inspection and maintenance of
special devices such as crates, boxes, containers, dividers, slings, material
handling and transportation equipment and other facilities
27.1.3 The Contractor shall identify equipment and material requiring special
handling or testing.
27.2
WORKMANSHIP
27.2.1 The Contractor shall comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or
more precise workmanship.
27.2.2 The Contractor shall perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of the specified quality.
27.2.3 The Contractor shall secure products in place with positive anchorage devices
designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking.
27.2.4 The Contractor shall comply with manufacturers published installation instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. Should instructions conflict
with Contract Documents, the Contractor shall request clarification from Engineer before proceeding.
27.3
PROTECTION OF PROPERTY
27.3.1 The Contractor shall not load or permit a structure to be loaded in a manner
that will endanger the structure.
27.3.2 The Contractor shall not subject work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it.
27.3.3 Existing Surfaces and Facilities:
27.3.3.1 The Contractor shall take positive action to protect existing surfaces
and facilities from damage resulting from construction operations
unless modifications to the surfaces or facilities are required as part
of the Contract.
27.3.3.2. The Contractor shall protect paving, landscaping, and utility facilities from damage caused by mobile and stationary equipment, including vehicles delivering materials to the project site.
27.3.3.3. The Contractor shall protect finished surfaces, including jambs and
soffits of openings used as passageways through which materials
are handled, against possible damage resulting from the conduct of
the work by trades.
Page 31 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

27.3.3.4. The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate protection for
adjacentstructures.
a.
When required by law or for the safety of the Work; shore,

brace underpin, or otherwise the Contractor shall protect those
portions of adjacent structures that may be affected by the
Works.
27.3.4 New Work

27.3.4.1. All finished surfaces shall be clean and un-marred upon
acceptance of the area.
27.3.4.2. The Contractor shall not permit traffic or material storage on
finished surfaces.
a. Where some activity must take place on the finished surface in
order to perform the Works, provide and maintain adequate
protection.
27.3.4.3. The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate protection
against the weather at all times so as to preserve Work, Materials,
Plant, apparatus, and fixtures free from injury or damage.
27.3.4.4. The Contractor shall not use items of Plant that are intended to
from a part of the completed work as construction equipment
without specific approval from the Engineer in each instance.
28.0
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

28.1 PRODUCTS
28.1.1 The term product shall mean any material including proprietary goods,
equipment and manufactured items that are incorporated in the final Works.
It does not include machinery and equipment used for the preparation,
fabrication, conveying and erection of the Works.
28.2
28.1.2
Products of a similar nature shall be standardized, interchangeable and

supplied by the same manufacturer as far as possible.
28.1.3
The Contractor shall comply with specifications and referenced standards as

minimum requirements.
PRODUCT OPTIONS
28.2.1 Products specified by Reference Standards or by description only.
28.2.2
If products are specified by naming one or more manufacturers, only the

named manufacturers shall be used.
Page 32 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

28.2.3
Where the term or approved equal is included, the Contractor

may submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically
named.
28.2.4
A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the Contractor:

a.
b.
c.
d.
28.3
Has investigated the proposed product and has determined that it

meets or exceeds, in all respects, the specified product.
Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as the specified
product.
Will coordinate the installation requirements of the substitution and will
make all changes necessary for the Works to be complete in all
respects. Cost of such changes shall be at the Contractors sole
expense.
Waive claims for additional costs resulting from the substitution which
may subsequently become apparent.
PRODUCT ACCEPTANCE
28.3.1 All products shall be tested as required by the Specifications.
28.3.1.1
Product testing shall be by an approved independent laboratory

or a recognized testing organization, when required either by the
Specifications or the Engineer.
28.3.1.2
The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with

product testing including labor, transportation and the cost of the
test itself.
28.3.1.3
Testing samples shall be taken at the place of origin, place of

fabrication or from the site as required by the Engineer.
a. Samples that are of value after testing shall remain the property of the Contractor.
b. Samples used for testing may only be incorporated into the
Work with the written approval of the Engineer.
28.3.1.4
The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities required for on

site testing of products.
28.3.1.5
The Contractor shall ensure that products are made available for
testing sufficiently in advance of intended use so as to allow for
testing.
Page 33 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

a. Delays resulting from the time taken to test a product shall not
be acceptable as cause for a claim.
28.3.1..6
28.4
Prior to final inspection, all components, systems and subsystems,

shall be tested to demonstrate compliance with the specified performance requirements.
MATERIALS GENERALLY
28.4.1 Definition
28.4.1.1
28.4.1.2
The terms materials, products and goods shall mean all

materials, goods and articles of every kind whether raw,
processed or manufactured and equipment and plant of every
kind to be supplied by the Contractor for incorporation in the
Permanent Works.
The Employer's Representative shall check and approve such
samples with reasonable promptness only for conformance with
the design concept of the Works and with the information given in
the Contract documents. The Works shall be in accordance with
approved samples. Where a choice of manufacturer or source of
supply is approved, the whole quantity required to complete the
work must be of the same type, manufacturer and/or source.
Changes will not be permitted without approval of the Employer's
Representative. Written evidence of sources must be supplied as
and when requested by the Employer's Representative.
28.4.1.3
All material samples shall be delivered to the Employer's

Representative office in triplicate with all charges in connection
therewith paid by the Contractor. In the case of larger items
where samples are not normally called for, copies of relevant literature including alternatives shall be supplied in triplicate.
28.4.1.4
Samples shall be furnished so as not to delay fabrication,

allowing the Employer's Representative reasonable time for consideration of the sample submitted.
28.4.1.5
Each sample shall be properly labelled with the name and quality
of the material, manufacturers name, name of the project, the
Contractors name, the date of submission and the specification
clause number to which the sample refers.
28.4.2 New Materials

28.4.2.1
All materials shall be suitable for the climatic and environmental

conditions prevailing on Site, new, and of the kinds and qualities
Page 34 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

described in the Contract.

28.4.2.2
Environmental conditions may be different in different parts of the

Works. Materials shall be selected and manufactured items
designed accordingly to withstand the relevant corrosive elements.
28.4.2.3
All materials and products in contact with sewage or sewage

environment shall be non-biodegradable.
28.4.2.4
All materials shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer and shall

be equal or superior to the materials specified for the use to which
they are to be put.
28.4.2.5
The Contractor shall obtain the Engineers approval in writing for

all materials prior to their incorporation in the Works.
28.4.2.6
Where materials to be used for any component have not been

laid down in the Specifications, the Contractor shall use only
those materials in such positions as have been proved in actual
service to be the most suitable for the particular purpose.
28.4.3 Substitute Materials

28.4.3.1
During the course of the Contract certain materials may be unobtainable despite the best efforts of the Contractor. The
Contractor may then offer substitute materials for the approval of
the Employer/Employer's Representative.
28.4.3.2
A price reduction shall be made in respect of decrease in quality

or value, but no price addition shall be made in respect of any
increase in quality or value of the accepted substitute material, etc.
28.4.3.3
If the substitute materials are not accepted the Contractor shall not
be relieved of any of his obligations under the Contract and shall
be solely liable for any delay or loss occasioned by his failure to
provide materials as specified.
28.4.4 Imported Materials

28.4.4.1
28.5
The Contractor will be held entirely responsible for obtaining

imported materials on Site in sufficient time to maintain the
Contract programme.
APPROVAL
28.5.1
The Contractor shall supply to the Employer's Representative three copies of
Page 35 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

all orders placed by him and three copies of the suppliers confirmation of orders for the supply of materials for the construction of the permanent work or
any item of permanent work or materials for the fabrication thereof; similarly
Sub-Contractors shall supply, through the Contractor, three copies of all orders they may place for items of work or materials for fabricating any articles
or things for which they have sub-contracted.
29.0
The Contractor shall not place any order for materials without the approval of
the Engineer which may be withheld until samples have been submitted and
satisfactorily tested.
28.5.3
The Contractor shall thereafter keep the Engineer informed of orders for and
delivery dates of all materials.
28.5.4
Approval by the Engineer as to the placing of orders for materials or as to

samples or tests shall not prejudice any of the Engineers powers under the
Contract.
28.5.5
The provision of the Specifications shall also apply to materials supplied

under any subcontract.
28.5.6
Contractor should note that the Engineers approval to all goods and
materials to be imported into Dubai will be further subject to a written
statement from the supplier giving the maximum anticipated manufacture and
delivery periods for each item to be provided.
28.5.7
The project schedule for the works must include all critical material delivery
dates. Any additional costs involved to ensure that the delivery dates are met
will be borne by the Contractor.
HOLES, CHASE, INSERTS AND FIXINGS

29.1
30.0
28.5.2
The Contractor shall obtain approval for the size and positions of any hole, chase,
insert or fixing required by himself before the related work begins. Unless otherwise
specified or approved all holes and chases shall be formed, and any inserts or fixings
shall be built-in at the time of construction. No part of the Works shall be cut or drilled
without approval.
DESCRIPTION OF SUBSTRUCTURES AND SUPERSTRUCTURES

30.1
30.2
The work comprises the supply of all labour, materials, plant, equipment and temporary
hut with telephone / mobile phone facilities etc., necessary for the installation of the
provisional number of bored piles and caissons to the working loads as shown on the
Contract Drawings.
The Contractor shall maintain records and perform tests as the Engineer may deem
Page 36 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

necessary for ensuring compliance with various provisions of the Specification.
31.0
30.3
Unless otherwise stated, the whole of the Works and materials are to be in accordance
with the latest local authority requirements/regulations and the relevant British Standard Code of Practice.
30.4
The work is to be executed in accordance with this Contract Documents and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTOR
31.1
This applies to situations where the Employer requires employers nominated

contractors to have access to the Site to undertake fit-out works, whilst the Contractor
is in possession of the site, for the avoidance of doubt, any separate contractor and all
workmen engaged by any separate contractor shall be required to fully comply with
the site rules and regulations that apply to the Contractor's subcontractors and their
workmen in order to access the site and to work within the Site. In particular fully
compliance with all of the contractor's health and safety site rules and regulation shall
apply.
31.2
It is required by the Main contractor to allow for coordination, profit and attendance to
manage the Nominated Sub Contractors and ensure delivery of their respective scope
of works within the overall Project Program or Time for Completion as mentioned in this
contract.
END OF SECTION 011000
Page 37 of 37
General
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 011011 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY..
INFORMATION MANAGEMENT
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS..
Page 1 of 3
2
2
2
2
Document Management
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 011011 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT

1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1. Information management
2. Specific requirements
3. Additional clauses
1.3
INFORMATION MANAGEMENT
A.
To ensure efficient information management on the project, a web-based information
management system (the System) must be used for, and will be the only recognized
method of, transmitting formal project correspondence, documents and information.
Where it is necessary to transmit original signed documents, these shall be acceptable
forms of correspondence only when they have been issued via the System first.
B.
1.4
The Contractors Tender must include provision for the cost of project-wide use of a
web-based information management system during the construction phase and defects
liability period. The System will be used by all participants engaged on this project,
including contractors, sub-contractors, sub-sub-contractors, suppliers and their
subsequent legal successors in title. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure this is
the case. The bidder is responsible for obtaining from the selected system provider
pricing and other information in relation to the project and for incorporating these
details within the Bill of Quantities.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Contractors benefit from using a web-based information management system through reduced
cost, time savings and a reduction in project risk. However, all project participant organizations should also expect to enjoy these benefits, so that the winning Contractor can ensure
project-wide adoption. To ensure this, the System must:
Be fully web based. No installation or licenses should be needed by users

Handle formal correspondence/ mail, with or without attachments
Manage transmittals of drawings
Integrate print shops, to enable direct print orders
Permit faxing in and out, to allow involvement of participants that are not web-enabled
Handle bulk up/ downloads and zip up/ downloads
Handle workflows and shop drawing approvals
Include an on-line viewer with mark-up capabilities
Automatically generate reports, such as
o all outstanding RFIs
Page 2 of 3
Document Management
Project:
Works:
Title:

o late drawing progress

o status reports for drawings in workflows
Reports must be exportable to Excel
Provide
o unlimited system use, uploads and downloads
o any number of participants
o unlimited storage capacity
o unlimited training for participating organizations at no additional cost
o 24/7 hotline support for all participants at no additional cost
Be fully available for project duration and for 12 months of defect liability period upon project completion
Allow each participant to download all their information at any time they choose.
Allow each participant to request archive disks with their complete information (cost to be
paid by the requesting participant)
Be fully-redundant and have a guaranteed uptime of at least 99.8%
Data to be hosted in no less than a Tier 4 Data Centre.
Offer redundant internet connections to ensure stability and accessibility
Perform data backups several times daily or at least once every 24 hours
Have in place disaster recovery procedures guaranteeing full system accessibility within 12
hours of major disaster in main servers/ hosting centers. Data loss must be no more than
24 hours in worst case scenario
Be provided by a vendor
o with at least 10 years experience in web-based project collaboration
o with at least 10 local support staff
o with local reference projects
Be hosted by a neutral party/ hosting center. Systems hosted internally by the winning contractor are not acceptable due to intellectual property rights issues
Be provided at no direct cost to participants other than the winning contractor, to ensure
early and widespread adoption.
The system must have a mobile interface for smartphones and tablets.
The system must have a module for compiling information collected during the construction
period into electronic Operation & Maintenance manuals.
The system must have integration capability through APIs should the Client require an integration with their internal systems.
Page 3 of 3
Document Management
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL..
SUMMARY..
USE CHARGES..
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS..
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
PROJECT CONDITIONS..
2
2
2
2
3
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
PRODUCTS..
MATYERIALS...
TEMPORARY FACILITIES...
EQUIPMENT
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT...
THERMOMETERS
SURVEYING EQUIPMENT
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
EXECUTION.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL..
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION.
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION.
MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL
7
7
7
10
12
14
15
SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

Page 1 of 15
Temporary Facilities & Controls
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
SUMMARY
Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection
facilities.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 011000 "General Requirements"
1.2
A.
USE CHARGES
General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in
the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and
facilities without cost, including, but not limited to Employer, Employer representatives
Consultants, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Employer's existing water system is
available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and
extensions of services as required for construction operations.
C.
Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Employer's existing system is
available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and
extensions of services as required for construction operations.
1.3
A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
B.
Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction
General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
C.
Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having
jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention
program.
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
Page 2 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
C.
Accessible Temporary
ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1.5
A.
Egress:
Comply
with
applicable
provisions
in
Trakhees
and
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use
as a construction facility before Employer's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS
Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 50-mm, 3.8-mm thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing;
minimum 1.8 m high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 60-mm OD line posts and 73-mm
OD corner and pull posts[, with 42-mm OD top rails, with galvanized barbed-wire top strand.
B.
Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 50-mm, 3.8-mmthick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric
fencing; minimum 1.8 m high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 60-mm OD line posts
and 73-mm- OD corner and pull posts, with 42-mm- OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanizedsteel bases for supporting posts.
C.
Wood Enclosure Fence: Plywood, 1.8 m high, framed with four 50-by-100-mm rails, with
preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 2.4 m apart.
2.2
A.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
Site Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B.
Common-Use site Office to include Employer, Employers representatives consultant and

construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified as per list
below. Keep office clean and orderly.
Provide and maintain the following separate temporary offices accommodating the specified
numbers of personnel for their exclusive use including acceptable circulation and office Storage
space. Acoustically enclosed partition walls shall be provided between the offices if they are to
be housed within a single building.
Page 3 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

i)
Executive Offices: (2 offices Employers Representative and Employers

Representatives Consultant)
(a) Provide an executive office for of 4mx6m
(b) Executive Table, side unit
(c) Executive pneumatic height adjustable chair on castor with arm rests
(d) Visiting chairs 4 and circular table
(e) Executive storage / shelves
(f) White Board
ii)
Staff Offices (2 for Employers Representative and 8 for Employers

Representatives Consultant)
(a) Provide 10 rooms with a space requirement of 4m x 8.5m each.
(b) For each of the rooms, provide and maintain the following furniture & equipment for
the full duration of the Contract period:
(i) Six Writing Desks with a working top of 1.8m x 0. 75m
(ii) Pneumatic height adjustable Chair on castors with arm rests.
(iii) 4-Drawer Low Steel Stationery Cabinet (0.45m wide x0.5m deep x 0.6m high)
(iv) 5-Shelf High Steel File Cabinet (1.2m wide x 0.4m deepx1.8m high)
(v) Waste Paper Bin
(vi) White Board
(vii) Drawing Racks
iii)
Conference Room : 90 sq.m with a table and a set of chairs sufficient for seating
capacity of 20 persons
iv)
Meeting Room: Provide and maintain the following meeting rooms. They shall be
equipped with a white writing board of reasonable size 20 sq.m for 6 persons
v)
Pantry :Provide and maintain an air-conditioned temporary pantry of 25 sq.m

It shall be equipped with the following:
(a) 30 litres Bottled Type Hot & Cold Water Dispensers (4numbers)
(b) Sink with drainer mounted on storage cabinets
(c) Refrigerators of 500 litres capacity with freezer compartment. (2 numbers)
(d) Dining Table with chairs for 12 persons
(e) Microwave oven
vi)
Toilet facilities:
Provide, maintain and/or replenish all necessary modern sanitary accommodation,
facilities and toiletries for the exclusive use of the Employer's Representatives and Site
Representatives. Separate female and male sanitary accommodating the following
minimum toilet cubicles and sanitary wares shall be provided.
Page 4 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

(a) Male Toilet

(i) 6 Toilet Cubicles with 3 Water Closets
(ii) 6 Urinals
(iii) 6 Wash Basins
(b) Female Toilet
(i) 2Toilet Cubicles with 2 Water Closets
(ii) 2 Wash Basins
(c) Unisex Showering Facility
(i) 2 Toilet Cubicles with shower Mixer & Shower Head and seating bench
Provide, maintain and/or replenish all necessary modern sanitary accommodation,
facilities and toiletries for the exclusive use of the Employer. Separate female and male
sanitary accommodating the following minimum toilet cubicles and sanitary wares shall be
provided.
(d) Male Toilet
(i) 2 Toilet Cubicles with 3 Water Closets
(ii) 2 Urinals
(iii) 2 Wash Basins
(e) Female Toilet
(i) 2Toilet Cubicles with 2 Water Closets
(ii) 2 Wash Basins
(f) Resting Room
(i) Provide a Resting Room of 100 square meters for use by the Site Representatives
for night shift work.
(ii) Provide and maintain 6 sets of double-decked beds with 200mm thick spring
mattresses, pillows and bed linens.
(iii) Provide and maintain 12 metal wardrobes (1.2m wide x 0.6m deep x 1.8m high)
(g) Rest Room
(i) Provide a Resting Room of 100 square meters for use by theSite Representatives
for night shift work.
(ii) Provide and maintain 6 sets of double-decked beds with
a. 200mm thick spring mattresses, pillows and bed linens.
b. Provide and maintain 12 metal wardrobes (1.2m wide x 0.6m deep x
1.8m high)
(h) First Aid Room
(i) Provide a first aid post equipped and manned by a competent person suitably
trained in administering first aid.
Page 5 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

(ii) The facility shall be clearly marked with a red crescent and clear lettering reading
First Aid in English and local languages.
C.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
2.3
A.
EQUIPMENT
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations
and classes of fire exposures.
B.
HVAC Equipment: Unless Employer authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
A.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating

units is prohibited.
Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and
application.
Permanent HVAC System: If Employer authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in
system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".
PERSPONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

Provide Mandatory PPE requirement for all Site personal employed by Employers Representative
and Employers Representatives Consultant not limited to
1.
2.
3.
4.
Safety Shoes
Safety Helmet
Torch lights with replenishable battery (5 numbers)
Any other safety equipment required under safety regulations and authorities
B.
Provide additional PPE requirements for site visitors

1.
Provide and maintain 10 safety helmets and 10 pairs of safety boots of assorted sizes for
the exclusive use of visitors.
2.5
A.
THERMOMETERS
The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good working order maximum and minimum
thermometers for measuring atmospheric shade temperature, in a location approved by the
Employer's Representative. Daily records of data must be provided by the Contractor.
Page 6 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.6
A.
SURVEYING EQUIPMENT
The Contract shall provide and maintain for the use of the Employer's Representative all surveying
equipment as detailed below
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The Contractor shall provide at all times for the duration of the Contract, for the exclusive
use of the Employer's Representative, all chainmen necessary for the carrying out of his
duties in connection with the Contract.
The Contractor shall provide, for the duration of the Contract, access to and the use of all
survey instruments and equipment required by the Employer's Representative as the
Employer's Representative may deem necessary for the carrying out of his duties in
connection with the Contract.
Such instruments shall include total station, leveling instrument of reputed brand with latest
technology and tripod capable of reading to 20 seconds, one level and tripod with
horizontal circle, one level and tripod of the quick set type, and suitable levelling staffs
graduated in metres, tapes, ranging rods, setting out pegs, etc.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all instruments and equipment and shall
ensure that they are, at all times, in good repair and adjustment.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for providing suitable protective clothing and
safety equipment for his own workmen.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with
performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.
1.
B.
3.2
A.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are
no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1.
B.
Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."
Arrange with utility company, Employer, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1.
Connect temporary sewers to as per local authoritys requirement.
Page 7 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
D.
Water Service: Connect to Employer's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water
service facilities in a condition acceptable to Employer. At Substantial Completion, restore these
facilities to condition existing before initial use.
E.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,
number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
F.
Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse
effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect
on completed installations or elements being installed.
G.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse
effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed
installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient
condition required and minimize energy consumption.
H.
Electric Power Service: Connect to Employer's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment
in a condition acceptable to Employer.
I.
Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,
capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1.
2.
J.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1.
K.
Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.

Connect temporary service to Employer's existing power source, as directed by Employer.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each site officer. Provide and maintain
individual direct telephone line connections Under a PABX system to each personnel as specified
above and facsimile services to each office for the full duration of the contract period.
1.
Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
Page 8 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
2.
At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
L.
Provide a dedicated telephone line for each person

Facsimile machine - 2
Police and fire departments.

Ambulance service.
Contractor's home office.
Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.
Employers representatives consultant's office.
Employer's office.
Principal subcontractors' site and home offices.
Electronic Communication Service: Provide 25 desktop computers in the primary site offices for
use by Employers representatives consultant and Employer to access project electronic
documents and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Windows Server & Backup - Provide a windows latest server dedicated control for
consultant usage. Backup system to be provided for daily, weekly, monthly & yearly as per
industry standard GFS basis.
Processor: Intel Core i7 (4/8 Core) process with the latest configuration & Memory: 8
gigabyte with latest Windows operation system
Disk Storage: 1terrabyte hard-disk drive and combination DVD-RW/CD-RW drive.
Display: 22-inch LCD monitor with 2gb display card Video RAM
Key board and Mouse
Network Connectivity: 100/1000 Base Ethernet a separate network for Employer &
Employer Representatives Consultant
Productivity Software:
a.
Microsoft Office Professional, 2014 or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook
for all computers
b.
Anti-Virus program with live updates
c.
Adobe Reader 9.0 or higher. for all computers
d.
WinZip 7.0 or higher. for all computers
e.
Autodesk Building Design suite latest (Revit + AutoCAD) 6 nos
a. Latest AutoCAD licenses- for all remaining systems
f.
Primavera (P6) licenses 2 nos
g.
WinQS latest version license of the full package www.winqs.co.za 1 no
h.
Dimension X Plus latest version license www.winqs.co.za 1 no
i.
MS Project latest version 2 nos
Printer:
a.
Color laser photocopier of A3 size-2 nos with automated scanner feeder connected
by network & wifi
Page 9 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

b.
c.
d.
9.
10.
11.
3.3
A.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

General: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
B.
Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction
area or within 9 m of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136.
Comply with NFPA 241.
Maintain support facilities until Employers representatives consultant schedules Substantial
Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after
Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions
acceptable to Employer.
Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas on Drawings.
1.
C.
A0 color plotter -1 nos

Fax machine 1nos
Digital camera minimum 14mega pixel 4 nos
(i) Stationery supply
a. Necessary Stationery (Replenishable Supplies)
b. A0,A1,A2,A3,A4 Papers (Replenishable Supplies)
c. CD-R Compact Discs, DVDs (Replenishable Supplies)
Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall,
providing minimum 12 Mbps Upload & download speeds at each computer for unlimited
usage.
Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware, phishing,
and spam protection in a combined application.
LCD Projector and screen for presentations
Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as

required to minimize dust.
Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas
in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads
and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved
areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.
1.
2.
3.
Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and
paved areas.
Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas
according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material,
regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing.
Page 10 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

4.
D.
Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately
before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before
installation of final course according to Section 321216 "Asphalt Paving."
Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.
2.
Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
E.
Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for Employer and Employer representative
F.
Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1.
2.
G.
Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining
properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1.
2.
Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.

Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and
individuals seeking entrance to Project.
a.
3.
Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
H.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction
Waste Management and Disposal."
I.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste
from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply
with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."
J.
Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1.
K.
Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders
are not adequate.
Page 11 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

L.
Existing Stair Usage: Use of Employer's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are
cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Employer. At Substantial Completion,
restore stairs to condition existing before initial use.
1.
Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs
and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no
evidence remains of correction work.
M.
Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted,
provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial
Completion.
3.4
A.
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and
other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be
removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air,
waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
C.
Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with local requirement
D.
Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers
in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater
from heavy rains.
E.
Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Section 015639 "Temporary
Tree and Plant Protection."
F.
Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of
trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems
from damage, flooding, and erosion.
G.
Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
H.
Site Enclosure Fence: Prior to commencing earthwork, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a
manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
Page 12 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to
accommodate construction operations.
Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel.
I.
Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of
construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and
similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.
J.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
K.
Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and
as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
L.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress

and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.
Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1.
M.
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate
temporary enclosures.
Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration
and to separate areas occupied by Employer and his consultants from fumes and noise.
1.
2.
Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side,
and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side.
Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet on each side.
Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 460 mm up the
sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant-treated
plywood.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with
not less than 1219 mm between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in
vestibule.
Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by

authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.
Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas.
Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks
where openings are required.
Protect air-handling equipment.
Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.
Page 13 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

N.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed
to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241;
manage fire prevention program.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Prohibit smoking in construction areas.

Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at
Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.5
A.
MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible
signs of mold that may appear during construction.
B.
Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to
wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water damage and
keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
C.
Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full
enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of
moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high
organic content, into partially enclosed building.
Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material.
Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before
enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.
Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building
enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:
1.
2.
Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.
Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level
within 48 hours.
Page 14 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.6
A.
B.
OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL

Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse,
limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation,

and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to
avoid possibility of damage.
C.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,
when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been
delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed
surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
2.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Employer reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700
"Closeout Procedures."
Page 15 of 15
DIVISION 03
________________________________________________________________________
CONCRETE
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 034900 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED CONCRETE (GFRC)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
GENERAL..
RELATED DOCUMENTS...
SUMMARY..
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS..
SUBMITTALS...
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
PRODUCTS..
MOLD MATERIALS.
GFRC MATERIALS.
ANCHORS, CONNECTORS AND MISCELLAENOUS MATERIALS
PANEL FRAME MATERIALS..
GFRC MIXES..
PANEL FRAME FABRICATION.
MOLD FABRICATION
GFRC FABRICATION
FABRICATION TOLERANCE
FINISHES
SOURCE QULAITY CONTROL.
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
8
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
EXECUTION.
EXAMINATION..
ERECTION..
ERECTION TOLERANCE..
REPAIRS..
CLEANING AND PROTECTION.
8
8
8
9
9
10
Page 1 of 10
Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Concrete (GFRC)
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 034900 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED CONCRETE (GFRC)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes glass fiber reinforced concrete (GFRC) panels consisting of GFRC, panel
frames, anchors, and connection hardware.
B.
Related Sections include the following:

1.
2.
Section 055000 Metal Fabrications

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants"
1.3
A.
Structural Performance: Provide GFRC panels, including panel frames, anchors, and connections, capable of withstanding the following design loads as well as the effects of thermaland moisture-induced volume changes, according to load factors and combinations established in PCI MNL 128, "Recommended Practice for Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Panels."
1.4
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include GFRC design mixes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for GFRC panels, including the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
Panel elevations, sections, and dimensions.
Thickness of facing mix, GFRC backing, and bonding pads for typical panels.
Finishes.
Joint and connection details.
Erection details.
Panel frame details for typical panels, including sizes, spacings, thickness, and yield
strength of various members.
Location and details of connection hardware attached to structure.
Size, location, and details of flex, gravity, and seismic anchors for typical panels.
Other items sprayed into panels.
Erection sequence for special conditions.
Relationship to adjacent materials.
Page 2 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

13.
Description of loose, cast-in, and field hardware.
C.
Samples: Representative of finished exposed face of GFRC showing the full range of colors
and textures expected, 400 by 400 mm and of actual thickness.
D.
Source Quality-Control Program: For GFRC manufacturer.
E.
Source Quality-Control Test Reports: For GFRC, inserts, and anchors.
F.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For GFRC.
1.5
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer who participates in PCI's Plant Certification Program and is designated a PCI-Certified Plant for Group G - Glass Fiber Reinforced
Concrete.
1.
2.
Manufacturer's responsibility includes fabricating GFRC panels and providing

professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility for
GFRC panels.
Engineering responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive
engineering analysis, based on GFRC production test values, by a qualified
professional engineer experienced in GFRC design.
B.
Mill Certificates: Obtain certified mill test report from manufacturer of structural-steel shapes
and hollow structural sections used in panel framing indicating compliance of these products
with requirements.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain GFRC panels through one source from a single manufacturer.
D.
PCI Manuals: Comply with requirements and recommendations in the following PCI manuals
unless more stringent requirements are indicated:
1.
2.
PCI MNL 128, "Recommended Practice for Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Panels."
PCI MNL 130, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Glass Fiber
Reinforced Concrete Products."
E.
AISI Specifications: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members."
F.
AISC Specifications:
Structural Sections."
1.6
A.
Comply with AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow

Handle and transport GFRC panels to avoid damage.
1.
Place nonstaining resilient spacers between panels.
Page 3 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.
3.
B.
Support panels during shipment on nonstaining material.

Protect panels from dirt and damage during handling and transport.
Store GFRC panels to protect from contact with soil, staining, and physical damage.
1.
2.
3.
Store panels with nonstaining resilient supports in same positions as when transported.
Store panels on firm, level, and smooth surfaces.
Place stored panels so identification marks are clearly visible.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MOLD MATERIALS
Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, nonabsorptive material, warp and buckle free, that will
provide continuous and true GFRC surfaces; nonreactive with GFRC and capable of
producing required finish surfaces.
1.
2.2
A.
Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid-release agent that will not bond
with, stain, or adversely affect GFRC surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface or
joint treatments of GFRC.
GFRC MATERIALS
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, II, or III.
1.
2.
3.
For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, use white or buff type, brand, and
source throughout GFRC production.
Metakaolin: ASTM C 618, Class N.
Colour pigment RAL code as per Architects Details.
B.
Glass Fibers: Alkali resistant, with a minimum zirconia content of 16 percent, 25 to 50 mm

long, specifically produced for use in GFRC, and complying with PCI MNL 130.
C.
Sand: Washed and dried silica, complying with composition requirements of ASTM C 144;
passing 0.85-mm sieve with a maximum of 2 percent passing 0.15-mm sieve.
D.
Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored waterreducing admixtures, temperature stable, nonfading, and alkali resistant.
E.
Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or
strength of GFRC and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 130.
F.
Chemical Admixtures:
chloride ions.
ASTM C 494/C 494M, containing not more than 0.1 percent
Page 4 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.3
A.
ANCHORS, CONNECTORS, AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Finish steel shapes and plates less
than 4.76 mm thick as follows:
1.
B.
Finish: Shop primed with SSPC-Paint 25 on surfaces prepared to comply with SSPCSP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or better.
Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A 108, AISI Grade 1018. Finish steel bars less than 4.76 mm
thick as follows:
1.
Finish: Shop primed with SSPC-Paint 25 on surfaces prepared to comply with SSPCSP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or better.
C.
Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/ A 47M Grade 22010.
D.
Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 415-205.
E.
Bolts: ASTM F 568M or ASTM A 325M.

1.
2.4
A.
PANEL FRAME MATERIALS

Cold-Formed Steel Framing: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, complying with
AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members," minimum
uncoated steel thickness of 1.37 mm)[ of web depth indicated], with stiffened flanges, Ushaped steel track, and of the following steel sheet:
1.
B.
Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 on surfaces prepared to comply with SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool

Cleaning," or better.
Steel Channels and Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M, finished as follows:

1.
2.5
A.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural-steel sheet, Z180 zinc
coating, of grade required by structural performance of framing.
Hollow Structural Sections: Steel tubing, ASTM A 500, Grade B, or ASTM A 513. Finish
hollow structural sections with wall thickness less than 4.76 mm as follows:
1.
C.
Finish: Zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M, after
fabrication, and ASTM A 153/A 153M, as applicable.
Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 on surfaces prepared to comply with SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool

Cleaning," or better.
GFRC MIXES
Backing Mix: Proportion backing mix of portland cement, glass fibers, sand, and admixtures
to comply with design requirements. Provide nominal glass-fiber content of not less than 5
percent by weight of total mix.
Page 5 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Face Mix: Proportion face mix of portland cement, sand, facing aggregates, and admixtures
to comply with design requirements.
C.
Mist Coat: Portland cement, sand slurry, and admixtures; of same proportions as backing mix
without glass fibers.
D.
Polymer-Curing Admixture: 6 to 7 percent by weight of polymer-curing admixture solids to

dry portland cement.
E.
Coloring Admixture: Not to exceed 10 percent of cement weight.
2.6
A.
PANEL FRAME FABRICATION

Fabricate panel frames and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with components
securely fastened, according to Shop Drawings and requirements in this Section.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Fabricate panel frames using jigs or templates.

Cut cold-formed metal framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding. Comply with AWS D1.3
requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and
methods used in correcting welding work.
Fasten framing members of hollow structural sections, steel channels, or steel angles by
welding.
Comply with AWS D1.1 requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
Weld flex, gravity, and seismic anchors to panel frames.
B.
Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies, if necessary, to withstand handling, delivery,
and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies in a manner that prevents damage or
significant distortion.
C.
Painting Repair: Touch up accessible damaged painted surfaces using same primer.
2.7
A.
MOLD FABRICATION
Construct molds that will result in finished GFRC complying with profiles, dimensions, and
tolerances indicated, without damaging GFRC during stripping. Construct molds to prevent
water leakage and loss of cement paste.
1.
B.
2.8
A.
Coat contact surfaces of molds with form-release agent.
Locate, place, and secure flashing reglets accurately.

GFRC FABRICATION
Proportioning and Mixing: For backing mix, meter sand/cement slurry and glass fibers to
spray head at rates to achieve design mix proportions and glass-fiber content according to
PCI MNL 130 procedures.
Page 6 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Hand form and consolidate intricate details, incorporate formers or infill materials, and over
spray before material reaches initial set to ensure complete bonding.
C.
Attach panel frame to GFRC before initial set of GFRC backing, maintaining a minimum
clearance of 13 mm from GFRC backing, and without anchors protruding into GFRC backing.
D.
Build up homogeneous GFRC bonding pads over anchor feet, maintaining a minimum
thickness of 13 mm over tops of anchor feet, before initial set of GFRC backing.
E.
Inserts and Embedments: Build up homogeneous GFRC bosses or bonding pads over inserts
and embedments to provide sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design
requirements.
F.
Curing: Employ initial curing method that will ensure sufficient strength for removing units
from mold.
1.
After initial curing, remove panel from mold and place in a controlled curing
environment.
2.
Keep GFRC panels continuously moist for a minimum of seven days unless polymercuring admixture was used. Maintain temperature between 16 and 49 deg C during
this period.
2.9
A.
FABRICATION TOLERANCES
Manufacturing Tolerances: Manufacture GFRC panels so each finished unit complies with
PCI MNL 130 for dimension, position, and tolerances.
B.
Position Tolerances: Measured from datum line locations, as indicated on Shop Drawings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Panel Frame Tolerances: As follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
2.10
A.
Panel Frame and Track: Plus or minus 6 mm.

Flashing Reglets at Edge of Panel: Plus or minus 6 mm.
Inserts: Plus or minus 13 mm.
Special Handling Devices: Plus or minus 75 mm.
Location of Bearing Devices: Plus or minus 6 mm.
Blockouts: Plus or minus 10 mm.
Vertical and Horizontal Alignment: 6 mm per 3 m.

Spacing of Framing Member: Plus or minus 10 mm.
Squareness of Frame: Difference in length of diagonals of 10 mm.
Overall Size of Frame: Plus or minus 10 mm.
FINISHES
Finish exposed-face surfaces of GFRC as follows. Panel faces shall be free of joint marks,
grain, or other obvious defects.
Page 7 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.11
A.
Smooth-Surface Finish: Provide free of sand streaks, honeycombs, and excessive air
voids, with uniform color and texture.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

Quality-Control Testing: Establish and maintain a quality-control program for manufacturing
GFRC panels according to PCI MNL 130.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Test materials and inspect production techniques.

Quality-control program shall monitor glass-fiber content, spray rate, unit weight,
product physical properties, anchor pull-off and shear strength, and curing period and
conditions.
Prepare test specimens and test according to ASTM C 1228, PCI MNL 130, and
PCI MNL 128 procedures.
Test GFRC inserts and anchors according to ASTM C 1230 to validate design values.
Produce test boards at a rate not less than one per work shift per operator for each
spray machine and for each mix design.
a.
For each test board, determine glass-fiber content according to ASTM C 1229,
and flexural yield and ultimate strength according to ASTM C 947.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine structure and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,
true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
ERECTION
Install clips, hangers, and other accessories required for connecting GFRC panels to
supporting members and backup materials.
B.
Lift GFRC panels and install without damage.
C.
Install GFRC panels level, plumb, square, and in alignment. Provide temporary supports and
bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment of panels until permanent
connections are completed.
1.
2.
D.
Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width.
Remove projecting hoisting devices.
Connect GFRC panels in position by bolting or welding, or both, as indicated on Shop

Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as possible after
connecting is completed.
Page 8 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

E.
Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3 requirements for welding,
appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
F.
3.3
A.
Protect GFRC panels from damage by field welding or cutting operations, and provide
noncombustible shields as required.
At bolted connections, use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent loosening of
nuts.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
Erect GFRC panels to comply with the following noncumulative tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Plan Location from Building Grid Datum: Plus or minus 13 mm.

Top Elevation from Nominal Top Elevation: As follows:
a.
Exposed Individual Panel: Plus or minus 6 mm.
b.
Nonexposed Individual Panel: Plus or minus 13 mm.
c.
Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 6 mm.
d.
Nonexposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 13 mm.
Support Elevation from Nominal Elevation: As follows:
a.
Maximum Low: 13 mm.
b.
Maximum High: 6 mm.
Maximum Plumb Variation over the Lesser of Height of Structure or 30 m: 25 mm.
Plumb in Any 3 m of Element Height: 6 mm.
Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Edges: 6 mm.
Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Faces: 6 mm.
Face Width of Joint: As follows (governs over joint taper):
a.
Panel Dimension 6 m or Less: Plus or minus 6 mm.
b.
Panel Dimension More Than 6 m: Plus or minus 8 mm.
Maximum Joint Taper: 10 mm.
Joint Taper in 3 m: 6 mm.
Differential Bowing, as Erected, between Adjacent Members of Same Design: 6 mm.
3.4
A.
REPAIRS
Minimal repairs of 5%-10% of overall panel will be permitted provided structural adequacy of
GFRC panel and appearance are not impaired, as approved by Architect.
B.
Mix patching materials and repair GFRC so cured patches blend with color, texture, and
uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces.
C.
Prepare and repair accessible damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint
according to ASTM A 780.
D.
Wire brush, clean, and paint accessible weld areas on prime-painted components with same
type of shop primer.
Page 9 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

E.
Remove and replace damaged GFRC panels when repairs do not comply with requirements
as stated above.
3.5
A.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION

Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to GFRC manufacturer's written
instructions. Clean soiled GFRC surfaces with detergent and water, using soft fiber brushes
and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Prevent damage to GFRC surfaces and staining of
adjacent materials.
Page 10 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 035216 LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL..
SUMMARY..
ACTION SUBMITTALS..
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
PRODUCTS..
MATERIALS.
AGGREGATE LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE
CELLULAR LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE..
3
3
3
4
3.0
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION.
PREPARATION..
MIXING AND PLACING.
4
4
5
Page 1 of 5
Lightweight Insulating Concrete
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 035216 LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes cast-in-place perlite aggregate, or vermiculite aggregate or cellular
lightweight insulating concrete.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, and details showing roof slopes, lightweight
insulating concrete thicknesses, embedded insulation board, roof penetrations, roof perimeter
terminations and curbs, control and expansion joints, and roof drains.
C.
Design mixtures.
1.3
A.
Product certificates.
B.
Material test reports.
C.
Research/evaluation reports.
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: An Installer who employs and retains, throughout the project,
supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.
B.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide lightweight insulating concrete identical to

those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency.
C.
FM Approvals Listing: Provide lightweight insulating concrete evaluated by FM Approvals as

part of a roof assembly and listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible
construction, as applicable.
D.
Provide vermiculite aggregates containing no detectable asbestos as determined by method

specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."
E.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site
Page 2 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS
Cementitious Material: Portland
ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
cement,
ASTM C 150,
Supplement
with
fly
ash,
B.
Lightweight Mineral Aggregate: ASTM C 332, Group I, vermiculite, perlite.
C.
Foaming Agent: ASTM C 869.
D.
Water: Clean, potable.
E.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
F.
Joint Filler: ASTM C 612, Class 2, glass-fiber type; compresses to one-half thickness under a
load of 172 kPa.
G.
Steel Wire Mesh: Cold-drawn steel wire, galvanized, 1.04-mm diameter, woven into 50-mm
hexagonal mesh, and reinforced with a longitudinal 1.57-mmdiameter wire spaced 75 mm
apart.
H.
Galvanized Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 50 by 50 mm,
W0.5 by W0.5, fabricated from galvanized steel wire into flat sheets.
I.
Retain paragraph below if insulation board is required. Embedded insulation

increases thermal-insulation value of lightweight insulating concrete assembly and
may be used to produce a sloped roof.
J.
Molded-Polystyrene Insulation Board: ASTM C 578, Type I, 14.4-kg/cu. m minimum density.

1.
2.2
A.
AGGREGATE LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE

Produce lightweight insulating concrete using the minimum amount of water necessary to
produce a workable mix.
1.
B.
Provide units with manufacturer's standard keying slots of approximately 3 percent of

board's gross surface area.
Do not exceed maximum air content recommended by aggregate manufacturer.
Perlite Aggregate Mix: Lightweight insulating concrete produced from cementitious materials,
water, air-entraining admixture, and perlite mineral aggregates.
1.
As-Cast Unit Weight: 610 to 705 kg/cu. m at point of placement, when tested
according to ASTM C 138/C 138M.
Page 3 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.
3.
4.
C.
Vermiculite Aggregate Mix: Lightweight insulating concrete produced from cementitious

materials, water, air-entraining admixture, and vermiculite mineral aggregates.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
A.
Oven-Dry Unit Weight: 385 to 480 kg/cu. m, when tested according to ASTM C 495.
Compressive Strength: Minimum 860 kPa, when tested according to ASTM C 495.
Cement-to-Aggregate Ratio, by Volume: 1:6
Cement-to-Aggregate Ratio, by Volume: [1:6]
CELLULAR LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE

Produce cellular lightweight insulating concrete with the following minimum physical
properties using cementitious materials, air-producing liquid-foaming agents, and the
minimum amount of water necessary to produce a workable mix.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements Properties in three

subparagraphs below are based on a range of proportions published by various
manufacturers. Revise to another specific range of properties if required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PREPARATION
Control Joints: Install control joints at perimeter of roof deck and at junctures with vertical
surfaces, including curbs, walls, and vents, for full depth of lightweight insulating concrete. Fill
control joints with joint filler.
B.
Wire Mesh: Place steel wire mesh with longest dimension perpendicular to steel deck ribs.
Cut mesh to fit around roof openings and projections. Terminate mesh at control joints. Lap
sides and ends of mesh at least 150 mm.
C.
Welded Wire Reinforcement: Place steel welded wire reinforcement with longest dimension
perpendicular to steel deck ribs. Cut reinforcement to fit around roof openings and
projections. Terminate reinforcement at control joints. Lap sides and ends of reinforcement at
least 150 mm.
Page 4 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.2
A.
MIXING AND PLACING

Mix and place lightweight insulating concrete according to manufacturer's written instructions,
using equipment and procedures to avoid segregation of mixture and loss of air content.
B.
Install insulation board according to lightweight insulating concrete manufacturer's written

instructions.
C.
Deposit and screed lightweight insulating concrete in a continuous operation until an entire
panel or section of roof area is completed. Do not vibrate or work mix except for screeding or
floating. Place to depths and slopes indicated.
D.
Finish top surface smooth, free of ridges and depressions, and maintain surface in condition
to receive subsequent roofing system.
E.
Begin curing operations immediately after placement, and air cure for not less than three
days, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
If ambient temperature falls below 0 deg C, protect lightweight insulating concrete from
freezing and maintain temperature recommended by manufacturer for 72 hours after
placement.
Page 5 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 035413 GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL..
SUMMARY..
ACTION SUBMITTALS..
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
PRODUCTS..
GYPSUM-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS
2
2
3.0
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION.
PREPARATION
APPLICATION
3
3
4
Page 1 of 4
Gypsum Cement Underlayment
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 035413 GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling underlayment for application below
interior floor coverings.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
LEED/EHS Submittals:
1.
2.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.2: For primer, documentation including printed statement
of VOC content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For primer, documentation indicating that
products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department
of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions
from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of
underlayment products required for this Project.
B.
Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify in

writing that products are compatible.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
GYPSUM-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS
Underlayment: Gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum
uniform thickness of 3 mm and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
2.
Cement Binder: Gypsum or blended gypsum cement as defined by ASTM C 219.
3.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 27.6 MPa at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
Page 2 of 4
Project:
Works:
Title:

4.
B.
Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer,

formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions
indicated.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 3 to 6 mm; or coarse sand as recommended by

underlayment manufacturer.
1.
Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for

underlayment thickness required.
C.
Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 21 deg C.
D.
Reinforcement: For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide galvanized metal lath
or other corrosion-resistant reinforcement recommended in writing by underlayment
manufacturer.
E.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,

conditions, and application indicated.
1.
2.
Primer shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
Primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PREPARATION
General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds,

form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair
underlayment bond.
1.
C.
Treat nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting)

through underlayment.
Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.
Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with
installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate
of 1.36 kg of water/100 sq. m in 24 hours.
Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate
movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and
remove sanding dust.
Page 3 of 4
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
Install underlayment reinforcement.
D.
Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes,
sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond, and prepare surfaces.
E.
Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment.
3.2
A.
APPLICATION
General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after
application recommended in writing by manufacturer.
Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate
and intercoat adhesion.
At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to
continue through underlayment.
B.
Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
C.
Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.

1.
2.
Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface.

Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
D.
Cure underlayment. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.
E.
Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in
writing by underlayment manufacturer.
F.
Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including
areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.
Page 4 of 4
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 035416 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
(CN05)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL..
SUMMARY..
ACTION SUBMITTALS.
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
PRODUCTS..
HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS
2
2
3.0
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION.
PREPARATION
APPLICATION.
3
3
4
Page 1 of 4
Hydraulic Cement Underlayment
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 035416 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling underlayment for
application below interior floor coverings.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
1.
2.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.2: For primer, documentation including printed statement
of VOC content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For primer, documentation indicating that
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of
underlayment products required for this Project.
B.
Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify in

writing that products are compatible.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS
Underlayment: Hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in minimum uniform thickness of 6 mm and that can be feathered at edges to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements
2.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined by ASTM C 219.
Page 2 of 4
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.
4.
B.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 27.6 MPa at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer,
formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions
indicated.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 3 to 6 mm; or coarse sand as recommended by

1.
Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for

underlayment thickness required.
C.
Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 21 deg C.
D.
Reinforcement: For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide galvanized metal lath
or other corrosion-resistant reinforcement recommended in writing by underlayment
manufacturer.
E.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,

conditions, and application indicated.
1.
2.
Primer shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
Primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PREPARATION
General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
B.
Treat nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting)

through underlayment.
Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.
Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds,

form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair
underlayment bond.
1.
Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with
installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate
of 1.36 kg of water/100 sq. m in 24 hours.
Page 3 of 4
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate
movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and
remove sanding dust.
1.
Install underlayment reinforcement.
D.
Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes,
sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond, and prepare surfaces.
E.
Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment.
3.2
A.
APPLICATION
General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after
application recommended in writing by manufacturer.
Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate
and intercoat adhesion.
At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to
continue through underlayment.
B.
Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
C.
Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.

1.
2.
Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface.

Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
D.
Cure underlayment. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.
E.
Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in
writing by underlayment manufacturer.
F.
Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including
areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.
Page 4 of 4
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 035440 CONCRETE TOPPING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
GENERAL..
SUMMARY..
DEFINITIONS.
SUBMITTALS
DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING.
PROJECT CONDITIONS...
COORDINATION..
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
PRODUCTS
SCREED MATERIALS..
REINFORCEMENT.
CURING MATERIALS.
DESIGN MIXES..
RELATED MATERIALS
MIXING..
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
EXECUTION.
EXAMINATION..
PREPARATION
SCREED APPLICATION.
PROTECTION AND CURING..
REPAIRS...
FIELD QUALITY CONTROLS.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION.
4
4
5
5
6
7
7
7
Page 1 of 7
Concrete Toppings
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 035440 CONCRETE TOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes:
1.
2.
Polymer modified leveling screeds to floors to receive finishes.

Roof screeds necessary to provide roof slopes.
1.2
A.
DEFINITIONS
Screed: A layer of cement-sand or concrete mix, with or without reinforcement, applied over
structural floor or roof deck slab to achieve correct level and receive another finish material.
1.3
A.
SUBMITTALS
B.
Mix Design and Test Reports: For each mix used for screeds.
C.
Joint details and arrangements.
D.
Test reports for field control testing.
1.4
A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other
components, and application.
B.
Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from
moisture or other detrimental effects.
1.5
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: For proprietary products, comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and
humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting screed performance.
B.
Close areas to traffic during screed application and for appropriate time period after
application as recommended in writing by the manufacturer.
1.6
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate cement-based screed with requirements of finish flooring products, including
adhesives and other miscellaneous materials, specified in Division 9 Sections.
Page 2 of 7
Concrete Toppings
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
SCREED MATERIALS
Cement: BS EN 197-1, ordinary type of gray color.
Aggregate:
1.
2.
Sand: To BS EN 13139. Grading Limit: In accordance with BS 8204-1, Table B1.

Coarse aggregates for fine concrete levelling screeds: To BS EN 12620. Designation:
4/10
C.
Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 21 deg. C.
D.
Admixtures: In accordance to BS 8204-1 Table 1. Do not use admixtures containing calcium

chloride. Use only liquid type admixtures.
2.2
A.
REINFORCEMENT
Fibrous Reinforcement: 100% virgin polypropylene, fibrillated fibers containing no
reprocessed olefin materials and specifically manufactured to an optimum gradation for use
as concrete secondary reinforcement. Proportion shall be in accordance with the written
manufacturer instructions of the manufacturer.
1.
2.
Specific Gravity: 0.91.

Tensile strength: 345 - 758 N/mm.
B.
Galvanized Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: For screeds 70 mm deep and more is to be BS
4483, eye size not more than 50 by 50mm.
2.3
A.
CURING MATERIALS
Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 305 g/sq.
m when dry.
B.
2.4
Water: Potable.
DESIGN MIXES
A.
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of cement-based screed by either laboratory
trial batch or field-test data methods. For trial batch method, use an approved qualified
independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
B.
Design mix: 1:3-4.5, according to BS 8204-1, to meet specified performance and the
following characteristics:
1.
In-Situ Crushing Resistance (ISCR):
Page 3 of 7
Concrete Toppings
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
c.
Class (A) for leveling screed (3 mm maximum indentation)

Class (B) for roof screed (4 mm maximum indentation).
Mass of test weight is 4 kg.
C.
Screed Mix: Use cement-sand mix for screeds less than 70 mm in depth. Use fine concrete
mix for 70 mm deep and more.
2.5
A.
RELATED MATERIALS
Joint-Filler Strips: Bituminous Impregnated Cork or self-expanding bituminous impregnated
cork.
B.
Water: Potable.
C.
Acrylic-Bonding Agent: Non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
D.
Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, Type V, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements.
2.6
A.
MIXING
General: Apply screeds in strict accordance to with requirements of BS 8204-1 in construction
types as the following:
1.
2.
3.
Fully Bonded Construction: Stairs landings.

Partially Bonded Construction: Flat roof and levelling screeds under floor finishes.
Start screed application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.
B.
Water content: Minimum necessary to achieve full compaction, low enough to prevent
excessive water being brought to surface during compaction.
C.
Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistency. Mixes other than no-fines must be mixed in
a suitable forced action mechanical mixer. Do not use a free fall drum type mixer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates for conditions affecting performance of screed. Proceed with application
only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
Verify that base slabs meet finish and surface profile requirements in Division 3 Section "Castin-Place Concrete." Concrete strength to meet BS 8204-1, Table 1.
C.
Examine hardness of substrates. Substrates must restrain stresses that occur setting and
hardening of wearing screeds. Test for surface hardness to comply with BS EN 12504-2 with
values selected from the following:
Page 4 of 7
Concrete Toppings
Project:
Works:
Title:

D.
Screed Thickness
Rebound Hammer Value
E.
15 mm or less
Greater than 25
F.
Greater than 15 mm
Greater than 30
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Existing Concrete: Remove existing surface treatments and deteriorated and unsound
concrete. Mechanically abrade base slabs to produce a heavily scarified surface profile with
an amplitude of 6 mm.
1.
2.
B.
Prepare and clean existing base slabs according to topping manufacturer's written
instructions. Fill voids, cracks, and cavities in base slabs.
Mechanically remove contaminants from existing concrete that might impair bond of
topping.
Install joint-filler strips where screed abuts vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals,
foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with screed
surface, unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate full-width joint-filler strips 13 mm below screed surface where joint sealants,
specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.
Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
3.3
A.
SCREED APPLICATION
Materials, mix proportions, mixing methods, minimum thickness and workmanship must in
accordance of screed manufacture ant to meet BS 8204-3.
B.
Flatness/Surface Regularity of Floor Screeds: Comply with the BS 8204-1, Table 5 and the
following:
1.
2.
C.
Flatness/Surface Regularity of Roof Screeds:

1.
2.
D.
Leveling Screed: Maximum permissible deviation to be 2 mm under a 1 m

straightedge.
Sudden irregularities are not permitted.
Sudden irregularities are not permitted.

Deviation of surface: Measure form underside of a 2m straightedge (between points of
contact), placed anywhere on surface:
a.
Permissible deviation (maximum): 6 mm.
Fibrous Reinforcement: For screeds of depth less than 70 mm, apply fibrous reinforcing as per
manufacturer's written instructions.
Page 5 of 7
Concrete Toppings
Project:
Works:
Title:

E.
Reinforcing Mesh: Screeds 70 mm deep and more shall have a reinforcing layer at mid
height. Reinforcement shall be as specified this Section. Place steel wire mesh with
reinforcing wire parallel to longest dimension of screed bay. Cut mesh to fit around roof
openings and projections. Terminate mesh at control joints. Lap sides and ends of mesh at
least 150 mm.
F.
Place screed continuously in a single layer, tamping and consolidating to achieve tight
contact with bonding surface. Do not permit cold joints or seams to develop within pour strip.
1.
Screed surface with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
2.
Slope surfaces uniformly where indicated.
3.
Begin initial floating using bull floats to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane
free of humps or hollows.
G.
Finishing: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats as soon as screed can support
equipment and operator. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float
passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
1.
H.
Construction Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
screed, at locations indicated or as approved by the Engineer.
1.
I.
Form joints in screed over contraction joints in base slabs, unless otherwise indicated.
Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to one-half of screed thickness, but not
less than 13 mm deep.
Coved In-Situ Skirting:

1.
2.
3.
3.4
A.
Coat face of construction joint with epoxy adhesive at locations where screed is placed
against hardened or partially hardened screed.
Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints with power saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 3 mm wide joints into concrete when
cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before screed develops
random contraction cracks.
1.
2.
J.
Hard Trowel Finish: After floating surface, apply first trowel finish and consolidate
screed by power-driven trowel so no blisters develop. Continue troweling passes and
restraighten until surface is smooth and uniform in texture.
Mix: To BS 8204-3, Table. Aggregate size adjusted as necessary to suit skirting

thickness.
Form construction joint at the base.
Apply bonding agent. Render skirting while bonding is still wet to achieve good bond.
PROTECTION AND CURING

General: Protect freshly placed screed from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
Page 6 of 7
Concrete Toppings
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Begin curing immediately after finishing screed. Cure by one or a combination of the
following methods, according to screed manufacturer's written instructions:
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with
water or absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover screed
surfaces and edges with 300 mm lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
3.5
A.
REPAIRS
Defective Screed: Repair and patch defective screed areas, including areas that have not
bonded to concrete substrate.
3.6
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Mix sample sets at point of placement, testing and inspecting agency shall take a set of 3
molded-cylinder samples from the screed mix for the first 50 sq. m plus 1 set of samples for
each subsequent 150 sq. m of screed, or fraction thereof, but not less than 6 samples for
each day's placement. Samples shall be tested according to BS 4551-1 for compliance with
compressive strength requirements.
3.7
A.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING

Protect screeds from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use
protective methods and materials approved by the Engineer, including temporary covering.
B.
Clean screeds not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to install
final finishes.
Page 7 of 7
Concrete Toppings
DIVISION 04
________________________________________________________________________
MASONRY
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 040110 BLOCKWORK CLEANING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL..
SUMMARY..
DEFINITIONS.
PREINSTALATION MEETINGS.
ACTION SUBMITTALS..
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
PRODUCTS..
PAINT REMOVERS.
CLEANING MATERIALS
CHEMICAL CLEANING SOLUTIONS.
2
2
3
3
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
EXECUTION.
PROTECTION.
CLEANING MASONRY, GENERAL
PRELIMINARY CLEANING
PAINT REMOVAL..
CLEANING BLOCKWORK..
4
4
4
5
6
7
Page 1 of 8
Blockwork Cleaning
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 040110 BLOCKWORK CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes cleaning the following:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
Unit masonry surfaces.

Stone surfaces.
DEFINITIONS
Low-Pressure Spray: 690 to 2750 kPa; 0.25 to 0.4 L/s
B.
Medium-Pressure Spray: 2750 to 5510 kPa; 0.25 to 0.4 L/s
C.
High-Pressure Spray: 5510 to 8250 kPa; 0.25 to 0.4 L/s
1.3
A.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
1.4
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.5
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Mockups: Prepare mockups of cleaning on existing surfaces to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Cleaning: Clean an area approximately

surface condition.
a.
b.
2.3 sq. m for each type of masonry and
Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse
reactions. Do not test cleaners and methods known to have deleterious effect.
Allow a waiting period of not less than seven days after completion of sample
cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PAINT REMOVERS
Covered or Skin-Forming Alkaline Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard covered or skinforming, alkaline paste or gel formulation, for removing paint from masonry; containing no
methylene chloride. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements
Page 2 of 8
Blockwork Cleaning
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Solvent-Type Paste Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard water-rinsable, solvent-type paste

or gel formulation, for removing paint from masonry. Products: Subject to compliance with
requirements
C.
Low-Odor, Solvent-Type Paste Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard low-odor, waterrinsable, solvent-type paste, gel, or foamed emulsion formulation, for removing paint coatings
from masonry; containing no methanol or methylene chloride. Products: Subject to compliance
with requirements,
2.2
A.
CLEANING MATERIALS
Water: Potable.
B.
Hot Water: Water heated to a temperature of 60 to 71 deg C.
C.
Detergent Solution, Job Mixed: Solution prepared by mixing 0.5 L of tetrasodium

pyrophosphate (TSPP), 125 mL of laundry detergent, and 20 L of hot water for every 20 L of
solution required.
D.
Mold, Mildew, and Algae Remover, Job Mixed: Solution prepared by mixing 0.5 L of
tetrasodium pyrophosphate (TSPP), 5 L of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite (bleach), and 15 L of
hot water for every 20 L of solution required.
E.
Nonacidic Gel Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard gel formulation, with pH between 6 and 9
that contains detergents with chelating agents and is specifically formulated for cleaning
masonry surfaces. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements
F.
Nonacidic Liquid Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly alkaline liquid cleaner formulated
for removing mold, mildew, and other organic soiling from ordinary building materials,
including polished stone, brick, aluminum, plastics, and wood. Products: Subject to
compliance with requirements
G.
Mild-Acid Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mild-acid cleaner containing no muriatic

(hydrochloric), hydrofluoric, or sulfuric acid; or ammonium bifluoride or chlorine bleaches.
H.
Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard acidic masonry cleaner composed of hydrofluoric

acid or ammonium bifluoride blended with other acids, detergents, wetting agents, and
inhibitors. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements
I.
One-Part Limestone Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard one-part acidic formulation for
cleaning limestone. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements
2.3
A.
CHEMICAL CLEANING SOLUTIONS

Dilute chemical cleaners with water to produce solutions not exceeding concentration
recommended in writing by chemical-cleaner manufacturer.
Page 3 of 8
Blockwork Cleaning
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Acidic Cleaner Solution for Nonglazed Masonry and Unpolished Stone: Dilute acidic cleaner
with water to produce hydrofluoric acid content of 3 percent or less, but not greater than that
recommended in writing by chemical-cleaner manufacturer.
1.
C.
Stones: Use only on unpolished granite, unpolished dolomite marble, and siliceous
sandstone.
Acidic Cleaner for Glazed Masonry and Polished Stone: Dilute acidic cleaner with water to
concentration demonstrated by testing that does not etch or otherwise damage glazed or
polished surface, but not greater than that recommended in writing by chemical-cleaner
manufacturer.
1.
Stones: Use only on polished granite and polished dolomite marble.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PROTECTION
Comply with each manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building and other
surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. Prevent paint removers and chemical
cleaning solutions from coming into contact with people, motor vehicles, landscaping,
buildings, and other surfaces that could be harmed by such contact.
1.
Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist paint removers and
chemical cleaners used unless products being used will not damage adjacent surfaces.
Use protective materials that are waterproof and UV resistant. Apply masking agents
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid strippable masking
agent to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove
masking to prevent adhesive staining.
3.2
A.
CLEANING MASONRY, GENERAL

Cleaning Appearance Standard: Cleaned surfaces are to have a uniform appearance as
viewed from 6 m 15 m away by Architect.
B.
Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold width
and from one end of each elevation to the other. Ensure that dirty residues and rinse water do
not wash over dry, cleaned surfaces.
C.
Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location.
1.
2.
Brushes: Do not use wire brushes or brushes that are not resistant to chemical cleaner
being used.
Spray Equipment: Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume
and pressure indicated, measured at nozzle. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that
cleaning methods do not damage surfaces, including joints.
Page 4 of 8
Blockwork Cleaning
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
c.
d.
Equip units with pressure gages.

For chemical-cleaner spray application, use low-pressure tank or chemical pump
suitable for chemical cleaner indicated, equipped with nozzle having a coneshaped spray.
For water-spray application, use fan-shaped spray that disperses water at an
angle of 25 to 50 degrees.
For heated water-spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining
temperature between 60 and 71 deg C at flow rates indicated.
D.
Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all
surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect
without streaking or damaging masonry surfaces. Keep wall wet below area being cleaned to
prevent streaking from runoff.
E.
Perform additional general cleaning, paint and stain removal, and spot cleaning of small
areas that are noticeably different when viewed according to the "Cleaning Appearance
Standard" Paragraph, so that cleaned surfaces blend smoothly into surrounding areas.
F.
Water-Spray Application Method: Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least 150
mm from masonry surface and apply water in horizontal back-and-forth sweeping motion,
overlapping previous strokes to produce uniform coverage.
G.
Chemical-Cleaner Application Methods: Apply chemical cleaners to masonry surfaces

according to chemical-cleaner manufacturer's written instructions; use brush application. Do
not allow chemicals to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
H.
Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each treated
area at each stage or scaffold setting. Periodically during each rinse, test pH of rinse water
running off of cleaned area to determine that chemical cleaner is completely removed.
1.
Apply neutralizing agent and repeat rinse if necessary to produce tested pH of

between 6.7 and 7.5.
3.3
A.
PRELIMINARY CLEANING
Removing Plant Growth: Completely remove visible plant, moss, and shrub growth from
masonry surfaces. Carefully remove plants, creepers, and vegetation by cutting at roots and
allowing remaining growth to dry as long as possible before removal. Remove loose soil and
plant debris from open joints to whatever depth they occur.
B.
Preliminary Cleaning: Before beginning general cleaning, remove extraneous substances that
are resistant to planned cleaning methods. Extraneous substances include paint, calking,
asphalt, and tar.
1.
2.
Carefully remove heavy accumulations of rigid materials from masonry surface with
sharp chisel. Do not scratch or chip masonry surface.
Remove paint and calking with alkaline paint remover
Page 5 of 8
Blockwork Cleaning
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
3.
Remove asphalt and tar with solvent-type paste paint remover

a.
b.
c.
d.
3.4
A.
B.
Comply with requirements in "Paint Removal" Article.

Apply paint remover only to asphalt and tar by brush without prewetting.
Allow paint remover to remain on surface for 10 to 30 minutes.
Repeat application if needed.
PAINT REMOVAL
Paint-Remover Application, General: Apply paint removers according to paint-remover
manufacturer's written instructions. Do not allow paint removers to remain on surface for
periods longer than those indicated or recommended in writing by manufacturer.
Paint Removal with Covered or Skin-Forming Alkaline Paint Remover:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Comply with requirements in "Paint Removal" Article.

Repeat application up to two times if needed.
Remove loose and peeling paint using medium-pressure water spray, scrapers, stiff
brushes, or a combination of these. Let surface dry thoroughly.
Apply paint remover to dry, painted surface with trowel, spatula, or as recommended
in writing by manufacturer.
Apply cover according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended in writing by
manufacturer or as determined by preconstruction testing.
Scrape off paint and remover.
Rinse with optimum temperature water applied by medium pressure spray to remove
chemicals and paint residue.
Apply acidic cleaner or manufacturer's recommended after wash to surface, while
surface is still wet, using low-pressure spray equipment or soft-fiber brush. Let cleaner or
after wash remain on surface as a neutralizing agent for period recommended by
chemical-cleaner or after wash manufacturer.
Rinse with cold water applied by medium-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil.
Retreat spots of remaining paint.
Paint Removal with Solvent-Type Paste Paint Remover:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove loose and peeling paint using medium-pressure water spray, scrapers, stiff
brushes, or a combination of these. Let surface dry thoroughly.
Apply thick coating of paint remover to painted surface with natural-fiber cleaning
brush, deep-nap roller, or large paint brush. Apply in one or two coats according to
Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended in writing by
manufacturer or as determined by preconstruction testing.
Rinse with optimum temperature water applied by medium -pressure spray to remove
chemicals and paint residue.
Page 6 of 8
Blockwork Cleaning
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.5
A.
CLEANING BLOCKWORK
Detergent Cleaning:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Mold, Mildew, and Algae Removal:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Wet surface with optimum temperature water applied by low-pressure spray.

Apply mold, mildew, and algae remover by brush or low-pressure spray.
Scrub surface with medium-soft brushes until mold, mildew, and algae are thoroughly
dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes for mortar joints and
crevices. Dip brush in mold, mildew, and algae remover often to ensure that adequate
fresh cleaner is used and that surface remains wet.
Rinse with Optimum temperature water applied by medium -pressure spray to remove
mold, mildew, and algae remover and soil.
Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect
established by mockup.
Nonacidic Gel Chemical Cleaning:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.

Scrub surface with detergent solution using medium-soft brushes until soil is thoroughly
dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove soil from
mortar joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that adequate fresh
detergent is used and that surface remains wet.
Rinse with Optimum temperature water applied by medium pressure spray to remove
detergent solution and soil.
established by mockup.
Wet surface with Optimum temperature water applied by low-pressure spray.

Apply gel cleaner in 3-mm thickness by brush, working into joints and crevices. Apply
quickly and do not brush out excessively, so area is uniformly covered with fresh
cleaner and dwell time is uniform throughout area being cleaned.
Let cleaner remain on surface for period recommended in writing by chemical-cleaner
manufacturer, confirmed and established by mockup.
Remove bulk of gel cleaner.
Rinse with optimum temperature water applied by medium-pressure spray to remove
chemicals and soil.
established by mockup. Do not repeat more than once. If additional cleaning is
required, use steam cleaning.
Nonacidic Liquid Chemical Cleaning:

1.
2.
3.
Wet surface with Optimum temperature water applied by low-pressure spray.

Apply cleaner to surface in two applications by brush or low-pressure spray.
Page 7 of 8
Blockwork Cleaning
Project:
Works:
Title:

4.
5.
E.
Mild-Acid Chemical Cleaning:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Wet surface with cold water applied by low-pressure spray.

Apply cleaner to surface in two applications by brush or low-pressure spray.
Rinse with cold water applied by medium pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil.
Acidic Chemical Cleaning:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.

chemicals and soil.
Repeat cleaning procedure above where required produce cleaning effect established
by mockup. Do not repeat more than once. If additional cleaning is required, use
steam cleaning.
Wet surface with cold water applied by low-pressure spray.

Apply cleaner to surface in two applications by brushor low-pressure spray.
manufacturer, confirmed and reestablished by mockup.
Rinse with cold water applied by medium -pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil.
Rinse until all foaming, if any, stops and suds disappear.
One-Part Limestone Chemical Cleaning:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Apply cleaner to surface by brush or low-pressure spray.
manufacturer, confirmed and reestablished by mockup.
Immediately repeat application of one-part limestone cleaner as indicated above over
the same area.
chemicals and soil.
Page 8 of 8
Blockwork Cleaning
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 040120 BLOCKWORK REPAIR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
GENERAL..
SUMMARY..
UNIT PRICES..
DEFINITIONS.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS...
ACTION SUBMITTALS..
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
PRODUCTS..
BLOCKWORK MATERILAS..
MORTAR MATERIALS
MANUFACTURED REPAIR MATERILAS..
ACCESSORY MATERIALS.
MORTAR MIXES.
3
3
3
4
4
4
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXECUTION...............................................................................................
PROTECTION.
BRICK REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.
MASONRY UNIT PATCHING.
FINAL CLEANING.
5
5
5
6
7
Page 1 of 7
Blockwork Repair
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 040120 BLOCKWORK REPAIR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes repairing brick masonry, including replacing units.
1.2
A.
UNIT PRICES
Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Section 012200 "Unit Prices."
1.3
A.
DEFINITIONS
Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar: Mortar used to set and anchor masonry in a structure, distinct
from pointing mortar installed after masonry is set in place.
1.4
A.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
C.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and locations of replacement masonry units on the
structure.
Show provisions for expansion joints or other sealant joints.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.6
A.
Quality-control program.
1.7
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Brick Masonry Repair Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced brick masonry repair
firm to perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service
performance. Experience in only installing masonry is insufficient experience for masonry
repair work.
B.
Quality-Control Program: Prepare a written quality-control program for this Project to

systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow methods and use
Page 2 of 7
Blockwork Repair
Project:
Works:
Title:

materials and tools without damaging masonry. Include provisions for supervising
performance and preventing damage.
C.
Mockups: Prepare mockups of brick masonry repair to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set
quality standards for materials and execution and for fabrication and installation.
1.
Masonry Repair: Prepare sample areas for each type of masonry repair work
performed. If not otherwise indicated, size each mockup not smaller than two adjacent
whole units or approximately 1200 mm in least dimension. Construct sample areas in
locations in existing walls where directed by Architect unless otherwise indicated.
Demonstrate quality of materials, workmanship, and blending with existing work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
BLOCKWORK MATERIALS
Refer to Section 042000 Unit Masonry
2.2
A.
MORTAR MATERIALS
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for
cold-weather construction; white or gray, or both where required for color matching of mortar.
1.
Provide cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested
according to ASTM C 114.
B.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M.

1.
D.
Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329/C 1329M.

1.
E.
Mortar Sand: ASTM C 144.

1.
2.
F.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements.
Exposed Mortar: Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely
as possible. Blend several sands if necessary to achieve suitable match.
Colored Mortar: Natural sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone of color
necessary to produce required mortar color.
Mortar Pigments: ASTM C 979/C 979M, compounded for use in mortar mixes, and having a
record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars.
1.
Page 3 of 7
Blockwork Repair
Project:
Works:
Title:

G.
2.3
A.
Water: Potable.
MANUFACTURED REPAIR MATERIALS
Brick Patching Compound: Factory-mixed cementitious product that is custom manufactured
for patching brick masonry.
1.
2.
Use formulation that is vapor and water permeable (equal to or more than the masonry
unit), exhibits low shrinkage, has lower modulus of elasticity than masonry units being
repaired, and develops high bond strength to all types of masonry.
Formulate patching compound in colors and textures to match each masonry unit being
patched.
3.
2.4
A.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
Setting Buttons and Shims: Resilient plastic, nonstaining to masonry, sized to suit joint
thicknesses and bed depths of masonry units, less the required depth of pointing materials
unless removed before pointing.
B.
Other Products: Select materials and methods of use based on the following, subject to
approval of a mockup:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Previous effectiveness in performing the work involved.

Minimal possibility of damaging exposed surfaces.
Consistency of each application.
Uniformity of the resulting overall appearance.
Do not use products or tools that could leave residue on surfaces.
2.5
A.
MORTAR MIXES
Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious materials and sand in a dry condition by
volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in
a clean, mechanical batch mixer.
B.
Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using specified ingredients. Do not alter
specified proportions without Architect's approval.
1.
Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not add pigment
exceeding 10 percent by weight of the cementitious or binder materials, except for
carbon black which is limited to 2 percent.
C.
Do not use admixtures in mortar unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Mixes: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions:
Page 4 of 7
Blockwork Repair
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar by Volume: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, 1 part

portland cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts sand
Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar by Type: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N
unless otherwise indicated; with cementitious material limited to portland cement and
lime
Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar by Property: ASTM C 270, Property Specification, Type N
unless otherwise indicated; with cementitious material limited to portland cement and
lime masonry cement or mortar cement.
Pigmented, Colored Mortar: Add mortar pigments to produce exposed, setting
(rebuilding) mortar of colors required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PROTECTION
Remove gutters and downspouts adjacent to masonry and store during masonry repair.
Reinstall when repairs are complete.
1.
3.2
A.
Provide temporary rain drainage during work to direct water away from building.
BRICK REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

At locations indicated, remove bricks that are damaged, spalled, or deteriorated. Carefully
remove entire units from joint to joint, without damaging surrounding masonry, in a manner
that permits replacement with full-size units.
B.
Support and protect remaining masonry that surrounds removal area.
C.
Maintain flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged

condition.
D.
Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids, cracks, bulges, and
loose units in existing masonry backup, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated
items.
E.
Remove in an undamaged condition as many whole bricks as possible.

1.
2.
Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from brick by cleaning with hand chisels,
brushes, and water.
Remove sealants by cutting close to brick with utility knife and cleaning with solvents.
F.
Clean masonry surrounding removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in
preparation for brick replacement.
G.
Replace removed damaged brick with other removed brick in good condition, where
possible, matching existing brick. Do not use broken units unless they can be cut to usable
size.
Page 5 of 7
Blockwork Repair
Project:
Works:
Title:

H.
Install replacement brick into bonding and coursing pattern of existing brick. If cutting is
required, use a motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped
edges.
1.
2.
I.
Lay replacement brick with rebuilding (setting) mortar and with completely filled bed, head,
and collar joints. Butter ends with enough mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Wet
both replacement and surrounding bricks that have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption
(suction) of more than 30 g/194 sq. cm per min. Use wetting methods that ensure that units
are nearly saturated but surface is dry when laid.
1.
2.
3.
J.
Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding existing
brickwork.
Rake out mortar used for laying brick before mortar sets according to
Section 040120.64 "Brick Masonry Repointing." Point at same time as repointing of
surrounding area.
When mortar is hard enough to support units, remove shims and other devices
interfering with pointing of joints.
Curing: Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive
hours, including weekends and holidays.
1.
3.3
A.
Maintain joint width for replacement units to match existing joints.

Use setting buttons or shims to set units accurately spaced with uniform joints.
Hairline cracking within the mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint is

unacceptable. Completely remove such mortar and repoint.
MASONRY UNIT PATCHING

Patching Bricks:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove loose material from masonry surface. Carefully remove additional material so
patch does not have feathered edges but has square or slightly undercut edges on area
to be patched and is at least 6 mm thick, but not less than recommended in writing by
patching compound manufacturer.
Mask adjacent mortar joint or rake out for repointing if patch extends to edge of
masonry unit.
Mix patching compound in individual batches to match each unit being patched.
Combine one or more colors of patching compound, as needed, to produce exact
match.
Rinse surface to be patched and leave damp, but without standing water.
Brush-coat surfaces with slurry coat of patching compound according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
Place patching compound in layers as recommended in writing by patching compound
manufacturer, but not less than 6 mm or more than 50 mm thick. Roughen surface of
each layer to provide a key for next layer.
Page 6 of 7
Blockwork Repair
Project:
Works:
Title:

7.
8.
3.4
A.
Trowel, scrape, or carve surface of patch to match texture and surrounding surface
plane or contour of masonry unit. Shape and finish surface before or after curing, as
determined by testing, to best match existing masonry unit.
Keep each layer damp for 72 hours or until patching compound has set.
FINAL CLEANING
After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar
and foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water, applied
by low pressure spray.
1.
2.
Do not use metal scrapers or brushes.

Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.
Page 7 of 7
Blockwork Repair
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 040120.64 BLOCKWORK REPOINTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
GENERAL..
SUMMARY..
UNIT PRICES..
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS...
ACTION SUBMITTALS..
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
PRODUCTS..
MORTAR MATERILAS
MORTAR MIXES.
3
3
3
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXECUTION.
PROTECTION.
REPOINTING MASONRY.
FINAL CLEANING.
4
4
4
5
Division 04 Section 040120.64
Page 1 of 6
Mansonry Repponting
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 040120.64 BLOCKWORK REPOINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes repointing joints with mortar.
1.2
A.
UNIT PRICES
Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Section 012200 "Unit Prices."
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
1.5
A.
Quality-control program.
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Brick Masonry Repointing Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced brick masonry
repointing firm to perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful inservice performance. Experience in only installing masonry is insufficient experience for
masonry repointing work.
B.
Quality-Control Program: Prepare a written quality-control program for this Project to

systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow methods and use
materials and tools without damaging masonry. Include provisions for supervising
performance and preventing damage.
C.
Mockups: Prepare mockups of brick masonry repointing to demonstrate aesthetic effects and
to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Repointing: Rake out joints in two separate areas, each approximately 900 mm high
by 1200 mm wide, unless otherwise indicated, for each type of repointing required,
and repoint one of the areas.
Page 2 of 6
Mansonry Repponting
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MORTAR MATERIALS
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for
cold-weather construction; white or gray, or both where required for color matching of mortar.
1.
Provide cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested
according to ASTM C 114.
B.
C.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M.

1.
D.
Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329/C 1329M.

1.
E.
2.
2.2
A.
Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as possible.
Blend several sands if necessary to achieve suitable match.
Color: Provide natural sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone of color
necessary to produce required mortar color.
Mortar Pigments: ASTM C 979/C 979M, compounded for use in mortar mixes, and having a
record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars.
1.
G.
Mortar Sand: ASTM C 144.

1.
F.
Water: Potable.
MORTAR MIXES
Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious materials and sand in a dry condition by
volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in
a clean, mechanical batch mixer.
1.
Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious materials and sand together
before adding any water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a
damp, unworkable mix that retains its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar
in this dampened condition for 15 to 30 minutes. Add remaining water in small
portions until mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within one hour of final
mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material.
Page 3 of 6
Mansonry Repponting
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using specified ingredients. Do not alter
specified proportions without Architect's approval.
1.
Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not add pigment
exceeding 10 percent by weight of the cementitious or binder materials, except for
carbon black which is limited to 2 percent.
C.
Do not use admixtures in mortar unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Mixes: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions:

1.
2.
3.
Pointing Mortar by Volume: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, 1 part portland

cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts sand
Pointing Mortar by Type: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N unless
otherwise indicated; with cementitious material limited to portland cement and lime
masonry cement Add mortar pigments to produce mortar colors required.
Pointing Mortar by Property: ASTM C 270, Property Specification, Type N unless
otherwise indicated; with cementitious material limited to portland cement and lime
masonry cement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PROTECTION
Remove gutters and downspouts and associated hardware adjacent to masonry and store
during masonry repointing. Reinstall when repointing is complete.
1.
3.2
A.
Provide temporary rain drainage during work to direct water away from building.
REPOINTING MASONRY
Rake out and repoint joints to the following extent:
1.
2.
3.
All joints in areas indicated.

Joints indicated as sealant-filled joints. Seal joints according to Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."
Joints at locations of the following defects:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
B.
Holes and missing mortar.

Cracks that can be penetrated 6 mm or more by a knife blade 0.7 mm thick.
Cracks 1.6 mm 3 mm or more in width and of any depth.
Hollow-sounding joints when tapped by metal object.
Eroded surfaces 6 mm or more deep.
Deterioration to point that mortar can be easily removed by hand, without tools.
Joints filled with substances other than mortar.
Do not rake out and repoint joints where not required.
Page 4 of 6
Mansonry Repponting
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Rake out joints as follows, according to procedures demonstrated in approved mockup:

1.
2.
3.
Remove mortar from joints to depth of 2 times joint width but not less than 13 mm or
not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar. Do not remove
unsound mortar more than 50 mm deep; consult Architect for direction.
Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with
square backs and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum,
or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris.
Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace or patch damaged
masonry units as directed by Architect.
D.
Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids in mortar joints, cracks,
loose masonry units, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.
E.
Pointing with Mortar:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Rinse joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time rinsing
application so, at time of pointing, joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water.
If rinse water dries, dampen joint surfaces before pointing.
Apply pointing mortar first to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths
greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 9 mm until a uniform
depth is formed. Fully compact each layer, and allow it to become thumbprint hard
before applying next layer.
After deep areas have been filled to same depth as remaining joints, point joints by
placing mortar in layers not greater than 9 mm Fully compact each layer and allow to
become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing masonry units
have worn or rounded edges, slightly recess finished mortar surface below face of
masonry to avoid widened joint faces. Take care not to spread mortar beyond joint
edges onto exposed masonry surfaces or to featheredge the mortar.
When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints as
demonstrated in approved mockup. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by
brushing.
Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive
hours, including weekends and holidays.
Hairline cracking within mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint is unacceptable.
Completely remove such mortar and repoint.
F.
Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing masonry, allow mortar to harden at
least 30 days before beginning cleaning work.
3.3
A.
FINAL CLEANING
After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar
and foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water, applied
by low pressure spray.
1.
Do not use metal scrapers or brushes.
Page 5 of 6
Mansonry Repponting
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.
Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.
END OF SECTION 040120.64
Page 6 of 6
Mansonry Repponting
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 042000 UNIT MASONRY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL..
SUMMARY..
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING..
ACTUAL SUBMISSION.
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
PROJECT CONDITION.
2
2
2
2
3
4
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
PRODUCTS...
MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS...
CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS..
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERILAS
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCCESSORIES..
MASONRY-CELL INSULATION
CAVITY-WALL INSULATION.
MASONRY CLEANERS.
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
4
4
4
5
5
6
7
7
8
8
8
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
EXECUTION.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL...
TOLERANCES.
LAYING MASONRY WALLS.
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING.
COMPOSITE MASONRY.
CAVITY WALLS..
ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS.
FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE AND VENTS...
PARGING
REPAIRING, POINTING AND CLEANING
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
9
9
9
10
11
11
12
13
13
14
15
15
15
Page 1 of 15
Unit Masonry
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 042000 UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Concrete masonry units (CMU's).

Mortar and Grout
Ties and Anchors
Embedded Flashing
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.2
A.
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to
perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with
specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
A.
B.
Section 071354 Thermoplastic Sheet waterproofing

Section 055000 Metal Fabrications for Metal Flashings
Section 09113 -Interior Paint.
Section 09123 -Exterior Paint.
Section 072500- Weather Barriers
Section 078413- Penetration Fire Stopping
Section 079200- Joint Seals
Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 67 for
compressive strength.
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140
for compressive strength.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention,
and ASTM C 91 for air content.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780
for compressive strength.
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to
ASTM C 1019.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Page 2 of 15
Unit Masonry
Project:
Works:
Title:

Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with
requirements for regional materials indicating location and distance from Project of material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include
statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is
considered regional.
C.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
Stone Trim Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each stone trim unit required.
Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.
Samples for Verification:

1.
2.
Weep holes/vents.
Accessories embedded in masonry.
E.
F.
Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with

requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards.
Provide for each type and size of the following:
1.
2.
G.
Masonry units.
a.
Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.
Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions
of ingredients.
1.
2.
Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water
retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.
Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply
with compressive strength requirement.
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
B.
Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one
source from a single manufacturer for each product required.
Page 3 of 15
Unit Masonry
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
D.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to

those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and
inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality
Requirements" for mockups.
1.
2.
3.
1.5
A.
Build sample panels for typical exterior and interior walls in sizes approximately 48
inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full thickness.
Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;
relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints;
aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities
specifically approved by Architect in writing.
a.
Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are
specifically approved by Architect in writing.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units
where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
B.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fireresistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by
equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.2
A.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

Regional Materials: CMUs shall be manufactured within 800 km of Project site from
aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within 800 km of Project site.
Page 4 of 15
Unit Masonry
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints,
headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
C.
Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water repellent
admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength For all Enternal walls, Wet Areas and
where Indicated.
1.
D.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 50kg/sqm unless otherwise specified on the drawings.
2. Density Classification: 1350 kg/cu.m Unless otherwise specified on the drawings.
2.3
A.
CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS

General: Provide one of the following:
B.
Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification;
and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength not less
than CMUs.
C.
Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requirements in

Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete," and with reinforcing bars indicated.
D.
Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs
with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout.
2.4
A.
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime shall be extracted,
harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 800 km of Project site.
B.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
C.
D.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing
no other ingredients.
E.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.

1.
Products: Subject to be in compliance with ASTM codes,
Page 5 of 15
Unit Masonry
Project:
Works:
Title:

F.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for
use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of
satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
G.
Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime and
mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other
ingredients.
H.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1.
2.
3.
For joints less than 6 mm thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the
1.18-mm sieve.
White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to
produce required mortar color.
I.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
J.
Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use as
pointing mortar for structural-clay tile facing units (and approved for such use by manufacturer
of units); in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's colors.
K.
Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with

ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry
mortar of composition indicated.
L.
Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with
CMUs containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.
M.
Water: Potable.
2.5
A.
EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing
and Trim and as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 76 mm into wall and 13
mm out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.
Metal Sealant Stop: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 76 mm into wall and
out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 19
mm and down into joint 6 mm to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:

1.
Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a

polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy.
Page 6 of 15
Unit Masonry
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim.
D.
Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products
or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other
and to substrates.
2.6
A.
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from PVC
B.
Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry
wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C.
Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D.
Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:

1.
2.
3.
E.
Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant

polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 3 mm less
than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.
3 mm less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from manufacturer's standard.
Vinyl Weep Hole/Vent: T-shaped units made from flexible PVC, consisting of a
louvered vertical leg, flexible wings to seal against ends of masonry units, and a top
flap to keep mortar out of the head joint; in color selected by Architect.
Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not
degrade within the wall cavity.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

a.
b.
2.7
A.
Strips, full-depth of cavity and 250 mm high, with dovetail shaped notches 175
mm deep.
Strips, not less than 19 mm 38 mm thick and 250 mm high, with dimpled
surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from
clogging with mortar.
MASONRY-CELL INSULATION
Loose-Granular Fill Insulation: Perlite complying with ASTM C 549, Type II (surface treated for
water repellency and limited moisture absorption) or Type IV (surface treated for water
repellency and to limit dust generation).
Page 7 of 15
Unit Masonry
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Molded-Polystyrene Insulation Units: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion
of polystyrene-resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C 578, Type I.
Provide specially shaped units designed for installing in cores of masonry units.
2.8
A.
CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, closed-cell product extruded with an
integral skin.
B.
Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated.
2.9
A.
MASONRY CLEANERS
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing
mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry
without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for
intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
2.10
A.

General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.
For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar.
For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar.
Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
A.
Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
B.
C.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of Portland cement and hydrated lime containing
no other ingredients.
D.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.

1.
E.
Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.

1.
Page 8 of 15
Unit Masonry
Project:
Works:
Title:

F.
Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from Portland cement and hydrated lime
masonry cement or mortar cement and mortar pigments, all complying with specified
requirements, and containing no other ingredients.
1.
Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:

a.
2.
Colored Masonry Cement:

a.
G.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1.
2.
3.
For joints less than 6 mm thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the
1.18-mm sieve.
White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to
produce required mortar color.
H.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
I.
Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with
CMUs, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.
1.
2.
Water: Potable only
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install
cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
B.
Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
3.2
A.
TOLERANCES
Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1.
For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 12 mm or
minus 6 mm.
Page 9 of 15
Unit Masonry
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.
3.
B.
Lines and Levels:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 12 mm.
For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus
or minus 6 mm in a story height or 12 mm total.
For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 6
mm in 3 m, or 12 mm maximum.
For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not
vary from level by more than 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 12 mm maximum.
For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 6 mm in 3 m, 9
For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 3 mm in 3 m, 6
For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 6 mm in 3 m, 9 mm in 6
m, or 12 mm maximum.
Joints:
1.
2.
3.
For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 3 mm,
with a maximum thickness limited to 12 mm.
For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 9
mm or minus 6 mm.
For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or
minus 3 mm.
3.3
A.
LAYING MASONRY WALLS

Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B.
Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 100-mm horizontal face dimensions at
corners or jambs.
C.
Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
D.
Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 600 mm under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and
similar items unless otherwise indicated.
Page 10 of 15
Unit Masonry
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.4
A.
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed
joints.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course
on footings where cells are not grouted.
B.
Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head
joints.
C.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than
paint) unless otherwise indicated.
3.5
A.
COMPOSITE MASONRY
Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods:
1.
2.
Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less
than one metal tie for of wall area spaced not to exceed o.c. horizontally and 406
mm o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 305
mm of openings and space not more than 914 mm apart around perimeter of
openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 610 mm o.c.
vertically.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.
a.
b.
Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending
across both wythes tab-type reinforcement.
Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type
reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.
B.
Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shoving
units of other wythe into place.
C.
Collar Joints in Clay Tile Masonry: After each course is laid, fill the vertical, longitudinal joint
between wythes solidly with mortar at exterior walls, except cavity walls and interior walls
and partitions.
D.
Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners unless
otherwise indicated.
Page 11 of 15
Unit Masonry
Project:
Works:
Title:

E.
Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at
juncture, bond walls together as follows:
1.
2.
3.
3.6
A.
Provide individual metal ties not more than 203 mm

Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated T-shaped
units.
Provide rigid metal anchors not more than 610 mm o.c. If used with hollow masonry
units, embed ends in mortar-filled cores.
CAVITY WALLS
Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:
1.
2.
Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less
than one metal tie for of wall area spaced not to exceed o.c. horizontally and 406
mm o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 305
mm of openings and space not more than 915 mm apart around perimeter of
openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 610 mm o.c.
vertically.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.
a.
b.
c.
Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending
across both wythes.
Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type
reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.
Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use
adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in
facing wythe attached to ties to allow for differential movement regardless of
whether bed joints align.
B.
Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds
away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or
remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.
C.
Parge cavity face of backup wythe in a single coat approximately 10 mm thick. Trowel face
of parge coat smooth.
D.
Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Section 071113 "Bituminous
Dampproofing."
E.
Apply air barrier to face of backup wythe to comply with Section 072726 "Fluid-Applied
Membrane Air Barriers.
F.
Installing Cavity-Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 300
mm o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners
designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining
obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside
wythe of masonry or other construction as shown.
Page 12 of 15
Unit Masonry
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.7
A.
ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and concrete and masonry backup with seismic
masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.8
A.
B.
FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE AND VENTS

General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at
shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where
indicated.
Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Fasten screw-attached and seismic anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to
concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners
unless anchor design only uses one fastener.
Embed tie sections connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide
not less than 50 mm of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of
sheathing.
Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and
down.
Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 406 mm o.c. vertically and 813 mm
o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each m 0.25 sq. m of wall area. Install
additional anchors within 305 mm of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 914
mm, around perimeter.
Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on
sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer.
At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 150 mm into masonry at each
end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 150 mm at ends and turn up not less than 50
mm to form end dams.
Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible
flashing 13 mm back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of
metal drip edge.
Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 13 mm back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to
top of metal flashing termination.
Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately
above embedded flashing and as follows:
1.
2.
Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.

Space weep holes 600 mm o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
Page 13 of 15
Unit Masonry
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.
Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with
loose-fill insulation.
D.
Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity
drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.
E.
Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent
products to form vents.
1.
Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install
through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.
3.9
A.

Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections
and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to
perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified
requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B.
Inspections: Level 1 Level 2 special inspections according to the "International Building

Code."
1.
2.
3.
Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of siteprepared mortar.
Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of
grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
C.
Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
D.
Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 464 sq. m of wall area or portion thereof.
E.
Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for
F.
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for
G.
Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to
ASTM C 780.
H.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test
mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.
I.
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.
Page 14 of 15
Unit Masonry
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.10
A.
PARGING
Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a
total thickness of 19 mm.
B.
Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface. Form a wash at top of
parging and a cove at bottom.
C.
Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.
3.11
A.
B.
REPAIRING, POINTING AND CLEANING

In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.12
A.
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soilcontaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill
material as fill is placed.
1.
B.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes.
Protect surfaces from contact with cleaner.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical
Notes 20.
Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable
to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 450 mm of finished grade.
Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
Page 15 of 15
Unit Masonry
DIVISION 05
________________________________________________________________________
METALS
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 051213 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
GENERAL..
SUMMARY..
DEFINITIONS.
ACTION SUBMITTALS..
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
FIELD CONDITION
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
PRODUCTS...
BOLTS CONNECTORS AND ANCHORS.
FILLER...
PRIMER.
FABRICATION
SHOP CONNECTORS..
GALVANIZING..
SHOP PRIMING.
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
EXECUTION.
EXAMINATION..
PREPARATION
ERECTION..
FIELD CONNECTIONS.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
Page 1 of 8
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel

Framing
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 051213 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes architecturally exposed structural-steel (AESS).
1.
Requirements in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" also apply to AESS.
1.2
A.
DEFINITIONS
AESS: Structural steel designated as "architecturally exposed structural steel" or "AESS" in the
Contract Documents.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of AESS components. Shop Drawings for structural steel
may be used for AESS provided items of AESS are specifically identified and requirements
below are met for AESS.
1.
2.
Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field
welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to
be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. Indicate
grinding, finish, and profile of welds.
Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections. Indicate
orientation of bolt heads.
B.
1.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.2: For primers, documentation indicating that
of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard
Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from
Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
C.
Samples: Submit Samples of AESS to set quality standards for exposed welds.
1.
2.
Two steel plates, 9.5 by 200 by 100 mm, with long edges joined by a groove
weld and with weld ground smooth.
Steel plate, 9.5 by 200 by 200 mm, with one end of a short length of rectangular steel
tube, 100 by 150 by 9.5 mm, welded to plate with a continuous fillet weld and with
weld ground smooth and blended.
Page 2 of 8

Framing
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.5
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality
Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD, or is
accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC 172).
B.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification
Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, [Category ACSE] [Category CSE].
C.
Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint SSPC-QP 3,

"Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."
1.6
A.

Use special care in handling to prevent twisting, warping, nicking, and other damage. Store
materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
1.
1.7
A.
Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Where AESS is indicated to fit against other construction, verify actual
dimensions by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
BOLTS, CONNECTORS AND ANCHORS

Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, roundhead assemblies, consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel
nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.
1.
B.
2.2
A.
Finish: Plain
Corrosion-Resisting (Weathering Steel), Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer

Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 3, round-head assemblies, consisting of steel structural bolts
with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.
FILLER
Filler: Polyester filler intended for use in repairing dents in automobile bodies.
Page 3 of 8

Framing
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.3
A.
PRIMER
Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California
Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile
Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
B.
Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting," Section 099123 "Interior Painting,"
C.
Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: MPI#25.
D.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M
2.4
A.
FABRICATION
In addition to special care used to handle and fabricate AESS, comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes
including pitting, rust, scale, and roughness.
Grind sheared, punched, and flame-cut edges of AESS to provide smooth surfaces and
edges.
Fabricate AESS with exposed surfaces free of mill marks.
Fabricate AESS with exposed surfaces free of seams to maximum extent possible.
Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning,
treating, and shop priming.
Fabricate with piece marks fully hidden in the completed structure or made with media
that permits full removal after erection.
Fabricate AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is not designated
AESS.
Seal-weld open ends of hollow structural sections with 9.5-mm closure plates.
Curved Members: Fabricate indicated members to curved shape by rolling to final shape in
fabrication shop.
1.
2.
Distortion of webs, stems, outstanding flanges, and legs of angles shall not be visible
from a distance of 6 m under any lighting conditions.
Tolerances for walls of hollow steel sections after rolling shall be approximately 13
mm.
C.
Coping, Blocking, and Joint Gaps: Maintain uniform gaps of 3.2 mm with a tolerance of 0.8
mm.
D.
Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to
metal surfaces.
E.
Cleaning Corrosion-Resisting Structural Steel: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to
remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Page 4 of 8

Framing
Project:
Works:
Title:

F.
Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to
pass through steel members.
1.
2.
3.
2.5
A.
SHOP CONNECTIONS
High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1.
B.
Joint Type: Pretensioned
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances,
appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting
welding work, and comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.6
A.
Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes
or enlarge holes by burning.
Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to
steel surfaces.
Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other
work.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of
axes without exceeding specified tolerances.
Use weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment for AESS that limit distortions to
allowable tolerances.
Provide continuous, sealed welds at angle to gusset-plate connections and similar
locations where AESS is exposed to weather.
Provide continuous welds of uniform size and profile where AESS is welded.
Grind butt and groove welds flush to adjacent surfaces within tolerance of plus 1.5
mm, minus zero mm.
Make butt and groove welds flush to adjacent surfaces within tolerance of plus 1.5
mm, minus zero mm. Do not grind unless required for clearances or for fitting other
components, or unless directed to correct unacceptable work.
Remove backing bars or runoff tabs; back-gouge and grind steel smooth.
At locations where welding on the far side of an exposed connection of AESS occurs,
grind distortions and marking of the steel to a smooth profile aligned with adjacent
material.
Make fillet welds oversize and grind to uniform profile with smooth face and transition.
Make fillet welds of uniform size and profile with exposed face smooth and slightly
concave. Do not grind unless directed to correct unacceptable work.
GALVANIZING
Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel
according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
Page 5 of 8

Framing
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
2.7
A.
SHOP PRIMING
Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Do not quench or apply post-galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
Galvanize lintels attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls.
Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 50 mm.
Surfaces to be field welded.
Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
Galvanized surfaces.
Surface Preparation for Nongalvanized Steel:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 14/NACE No. 8, "Industrial Blast Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning."
C.
Preparing Galvanized Steel for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean steel of
grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
D.
Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.038 mm. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners,
edges, and exposed surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Verify, with steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and
locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with
requirements.
1.
B.
Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other
embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.
Page 6 of 8

Framing
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep AESS
secure, plumb, and in alignment.
1.
3.3
A.
If possible, locate welded tabs for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling
where they will be concealed from view in the completed Work.
ERECTION
Set AESS accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and
AISC 360.
1.
Erect AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is designated AESS.
B.
Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut
sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M
3.4
A.
FIELD CONNECTIONS
High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1.
2.
B.
Weld Connections: Comply with requirements in "Weld Connections" Paragraph in "Shop

Connections" Article.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
A.
B.
Joint Type: Pretensioned

Orient bolt heads in same direction for each connection and to maximum extent
possible in same direction for similar connections.
Remove backing bars or runoff tabs; back-gouge and grind steel smooth.
Remove erection bolts, fill holes, and grind smooth.
Fill weld access holes and grind smooth.

Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to inspect AESS as specified in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing." The
testing agency is not responsible for enforcing requirements relating to aesthetic effect.
Architect will observe AESS in place to determine acceptability relating to aesthetic effect.
3.6
A.

Remove welded tabs that were used for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling and
that are exposed to view in the completed Work. Grind steel smooth.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
Page 7 of 8

Framing
Project:
Works:
Title:

Page 8 of 8

Framing
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL..
SUMMARY..
ACTION SUBMITTALS...
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
PRODUCTS...
MANUFACTURERS.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS...
COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL....
LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING...
EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING.
FRAMING ACCESSORIES....
ANCHORS, CLIPS AND FASTENERS..
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS.
3
3
3
3
3
4
5
5
5
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
EXECUTION.
PREPARATION
LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION..
EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION....
6
6
6
7
8
9
9
Page 1 of 9
Cold Formed Metal Framing
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
Load-bearing wall framing.

Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.
B.
LEED Submittals:
1.
Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation
indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.
C.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
1.3
A.
Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing;
fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping,
bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining
work.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Product test reports.
D.
Research reports.
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M,

"Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
C.
Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for
One and Two Family Dwellings."
Page 2 of 9
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.
2.2
A.
AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply
with AISI S100 and AISI S200.
B.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.
1.
Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of
another qualified testing agency.
2.3
A.
COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade
and coating weight as follows:
1.
2.
C.
Steel Sheet for [Vertical Deflection] [Drift] Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc
coated, of grade and coating as follows:
1.
2.
2.4
A.
Grade: As required by structural performance.

Coating: As Prescribed by Structural engineer.
LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,
with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Grade: As required by structural performance

Coating: As prescribed by Structural Engineer.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [0.84 mm] [1.09 mm] [1.37 mm] [1.72 mm] [2.45
mm].
Flange Width: [35 mm] [41 mm] [51 mm] [63 mm].
Section Properties: <Insert minimum allowable calculated section modulus, moment of
inertia, and allowable moment>.
Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with straight flanges, and matching minimum base-metal thickness of steel studs.
Page 3 of 9
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header
beams, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
2.5
A.
mm].
EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,
with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
mm].
B.
Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and matching minimum base-metal thickness of steel
studs.
C.
Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard [bypass] [head] clips, capable of

accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through
positive mechanical attachment to stud web.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the

following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following]:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc.

ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc.
Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company.
MarinoWARE.
SCAFCO Corporation.
Steel Network, Inc. (The).
Steeler, Inc.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
D.
Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched,
with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement,
with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure.
E.
Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting
of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.
Page 4 of 9
Project:
Works:
Title:

F.
Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from
upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through
positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.
2.6
A.
FRAMING ACCESSORIES
Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural
Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing
members.
B.
Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration.
2.7
A.
ANCHORS, CLIPS AND FASTENERS

Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
B.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, threaded carbon-steel headless bolts, with encased end
threaded,and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by [hot-dip
process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C] [mechanically deposition according to
ASTM B 695, Class 50].
C.
Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or

strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than
or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a
qualified testing agency.
D.
Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICCES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.
E.
Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping,

steel drill screws.
1.
2.8
A.
Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
B.
Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand,
ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum
water required for placement and hydration.
C.
Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout

containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and
Page 5 of 9
Project:
Works:
Title:

plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid
consistency and 30-minute working time.
D.
Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-formed

steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.
E.
Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 6.4 mm thick, selected from manufacturer's
standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PREPARATION
Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track
and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 6 mm to ensure a
uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.
B.
Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of
foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
3.2
A.
Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
assembled.
B.
Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written
instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C.
Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened.
D.
Install framing members in one-piece lengths.
E.
Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in
intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,
undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent
connections to framing are secured.
F.
Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame
both sides of joints.
G.
Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior

framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are
inaccessible on completion of framing work.
H.
Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's
approved or standard punched openings.
Page 6 of 9
Project:
Works:
Title:

I.
Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1:960 and as follows:
1.
3.3
A.
LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and
securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:
1.
B.
Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 3 mm from plan
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
Anchor Spacing: To match stud spacing or As shown on Shop Drawings.
Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 3 mm between
the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and
bottom tracks. Space studs as follows:
1.
Stud Spacing: As indicated on drawing.
C.
Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or
warped surfaces and similar configurations.
D.
Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs
cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.
E.
Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously
reinforce track to transfer loads.
F.
Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting
structure as indicated.
G.
Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings
as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to
supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.
1.
2.
H.
Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as
indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute
loads.
Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to
jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height
wall studs.
Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support
fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring
attachment to framing.
Page 7 of 9
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
I.
If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's

written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or
load resulting from item supported.
Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced vertically as indicated on Shop Drawings.
Fasten at each stud intersection.
1.
2.
3.
Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of

punched studs with a minimum of two screws into each flange of the clip angle for
framing members up to 150 mm deep.
Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated
and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to
stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
J.
Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to
reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of
bracing and anchor to structure.
K.
Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web

stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and
stable wall-framing system.
3.4
A.
EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to
supporting structure as indicated.
B.
Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs
as follows:
1.
Stud Spacing: As indicated on shop drawing.
C.
Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or
warped surfaces and similar requirements.
D.
Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical
loads while providing lateral support.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure.

Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure.
Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing/infill studs and anchor to building
structure.
Connect drift clips to cold-formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.
Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings
but not more than 1220 mm apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
Page 8 of 9
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within [305
mm] [450 mm] of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or
stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or
flanges.
a.
2.
3.
4.
Install solid blocking at centers indicated on Shop Drawings.
Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of

punched studs.
Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated
and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to
stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
F.
Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip
angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wallframing system.
3.5
A.

Testing: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
C.
Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D.
Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
E.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.6
A.

Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780
and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time
of Substantial Completion.
Page 9 of 9
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
GENERAL..
SUMMARY..
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
PRODUCTS...
METALS
FASTENERS.....
FABRICATION, GENERAL.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORT...
METAL LADDERS....
LADDER SAFETY CAGES...
METAL FLOOR PLATE.
ELEVATOR PIT SUMP COVERS.
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM.
METAL BOLLARDS..
WIRE ROPE PARKING GARAGE GUARDS
PIPE GUARDS..
ABARASIVE METAL NOSINGS TREADS AND THRESHOLDS..
LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES.
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
FINISHES, GENERAL..
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES.
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
9
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
EXECUTION.
INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS...
INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING....
9
9
10
10
10
10
10
Page 1 of 10
Metal Fabrications
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.2
A.
Loose steel lintels.

Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts
indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are
not specified in other Sections.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.

Metal ladders.
Ladder safety cages.
Metal floor plate and supports
Elevator pit sump covers.
Miscellaneous steel trim.
Metal bollards.
Abrasive metal nosings
Loose bearing and leveling plates.
Prefabricated building columns.

Metal nosings and treads.
Paint products.
Grout.
1.
2.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For primers, documentation indicating that
Page 2 of 10
Metal Fabrications
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections,
and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory
items.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing and tread.
E.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, to design ladders.
B.
Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders, including landings, shall

withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in
ANSI A14.3.
C.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
2.2
A.
METALS
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C.
Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276,
D.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from

ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
E.
Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
F.
Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive material metallically bonded to steel.
1.
plate
complying
with
G.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.
H.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M,
unless otherwise indicated.
Page 3 of 10
Metal Fabrications
Project:
Works:
Title:

J.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T6.
K.
Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
L.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
2.3
A.
FASTENERS
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide [Type 304] [Type 316] stainless-steel fasteners
for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class
required.
1.
2.
3.
Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.

Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.
2.4
A.
Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099600 "High-Performance
Coatings."
B.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
1.
Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich
primer.
C.
Water-Based Primer: Emulsion type, anticorrosive primer for mildly corrosive environments
that is resistant to flash rusting when applied to cleaned steel, complying with MPI#107 and
compatible with topcoat.
D.
Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
E.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and

compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
F.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
G.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous

grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.5
A.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections
that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
Page 4 of 10
Metal Fabrications
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove
sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
D.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or
welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
E.
Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
2.6
A.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction.
2.7
A.
METAL LADDERS
General:
1.
B.
Steel Ladders:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.8
A.
Comply with ANSI A14.3
Space siderails 406 mm apart unless otherwise indicated.

Siderails: Continuous, 12.7-by-64-mm steel flat bars, with eased edges.
Rungs: 25-mm- square steel bars.
Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung.
Galvanize exterior ladders, including brackets.
Prime exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners, primer specified in
Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."
LADDER SAFETY CAGES

Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or with
stainless-steel fasteners.
Page 5 of 10
Metal Fabrications
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 6 m o.c.
Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 1200 mm o.c. between primary
hoops.
C.
Galvanize steel ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners.
D.
Prime steel ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners, primer specified in
2.9
A.
METAL FLOOR PLATE

Fabricate from rolled-stainless-steel floor plate of thickness indicated below:
1.
Thickness: 6.4 mm
B.
Provide stainless-steel angle supports as indicated.
C.
Provide flush stainless-steel bar drop handles for lifting removable sections, one at each end of
each section.
2.10
A.
ELEVATOR PIT SUMP COVERS

Fabricate from 4.8-mm rolled-steel floor plate with four
drainage and for lifting.
2.11
A.
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles
shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use
concealed field splices where possible.
B.
Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation
with other work.
C.
Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
D.
Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with

2.12
A.
25-mmdiameter holes for water
zinc-rich
primer.
Primer
specified
in
METAL BOLLARDS
Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe, 6.4-mm wall-thickness rectangular steel
tubing, steel shapes as indicated in drawings.
1.
Cap bollards with 6.4-mmthick steel plate.
2.
3.
Use stainless steel 316 type wherever it is applicable.

Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide necessary
cutouts for controls and holes for wire.
Page 6 of 10
Metal Fabrications
Project:
Works:
Title:

4.
B.
Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide necessary cutouts for
fixtures and holes for wire.
Fabricate bollards with 9.5-mmthick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab.
baseplates at all four corners for 19-mm anchor bolts.
1.
Drill
Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for
plumb alignment of bollards.
C.
Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel tubing with 6.4-mmthick steel plate
welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 200 mm deep and 19 mm larger
than OD of bollard.
D.
Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 6.4-mm wallthickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1.5 mm less than ID of bollards. Match drill
sleeve and bollard for 19 mm steel machine bolt.
E.
Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.
F.
ITEM
LOCATIONS
GALVANIZED STEEL BOLLARDS
AT 0.9M AROUND WATER TANKS IN

BASEMENT 3
STAINLESS STEEL BOLLARDS
AT 0.9M AS PROTECTION AT ALL

EXTERNAL GLASS FACES IN BASEMENT
LOBBIES. PROMENADE AND FASHION
LEVELS.
REMOVABLE METAL BOLLARDS
AT 0.9M AS ROAD CLOSURES AT RMU

ROOMS.
2.13
A.
WIRE ROPE PARKING GARAGE GUARDS

Wire Rope Parking Garage Guards: 19-mmdiameter, zinc-coated steel wire ropes with wire
rope fittings for securing to parking garage columns and walls and for tightening wire rope.
2.14
A.
PIPE GUARDS
Fabricate pipe guards from 9.5-mmthick by 300-mm- wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against
the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 50-mm clearance between pipe
and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 19-mm anchor bolts.
B.
Galvanize pipe guards.
C.
Prime pipe guards with zinc-rich primer.
Page 7 of 10
Metal Fabrications
Project:
Works:
Title:

D.
Locations: All exposed pipes in basements.
2.15
A.
ABRASIVE METAL NOSINGS TREADS AND THRESHOLDS

Cast-Metal Units: Cast aluminum, with an integral-abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of
aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both.
B.
Extruded Units: Aluminum with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or
a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder.
1.
2.
Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1.5 mm above aluminum
extrusion.
Provide solid-abrasive-type units without ribs.
C.
Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as
standard with manufacturer.
D.
Drill for mechanical anchors and countersink. Locate holes not more than 100 mm from ends
and not more than 300 mm o.c.
E.
Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units.
F.
Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units.
2.16
A.
LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
2.17
A.
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B.
Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
C.
Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with primer specified in Section 099600
"High-Performance Coatings."
2.18
A.
STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from
concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than
two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
2.19
A.
FINISHES, GENERAL
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
Page 8 of 10
Metal Fabrications
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.20
A.
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for
steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
B.
Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be
embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1.
C.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Shop prime with universal shop primer indicated.
Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial
Blast Cleaning."
Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance
Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;
with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established
lines and levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size
limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of
adjacent surface.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.
Page 9 of 10
Metal Fabrications
Project:
Works:
Title:

E.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
3.2
A.
INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS

Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before
installing.
B.
Anchor bollards to existing construction with anchor bolts provide four 19-mm bolts at each
bollard unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Anchor bollards in concrete in formed or core-drilled holes. Fill annular space around bollard
solidly with nonshrink grout.
D.
Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for
consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.
E.
Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
3.3
A.
INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B.
Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members
have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims
but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink
grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.4
A.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
B.
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
Page 10 of 10
Metal Fabrications
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
GENERAL..
SUMMARY..
SUBMITTALS
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCTS
METALS
FABRICATION
FINISHES.
3
3
3
4
5
3.0
3.1
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION
5
5
Page 1 of 6
Pipe and Tube Railings
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
Stainless-steel pipe and tube railings.
2.
Steel pipe and tube railings.
1.2
A.
Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads
and the loads and stresses within limits and under conditions according to the following:
1.
Completion of design: Finalize details to meet structural and safety requirements of BS
5395.
B.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating
metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
C.
Complying Division 1 section 018113 Sustainability requirements
D.
Complying with IBC 2009 all relevant Railing requirements
1.3
A.
B.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data:
products.
For mechanically connected railings, grout, anchoring cement, and paint
Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product
having recycled content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.2: For primers, documentation
indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of
Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile
Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
Chambers."
C.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
Page 2 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

D.
Samples: For each exposed finish required.
E.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
METALS
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Stainless Steel:
1.
Chemical composition and physical properties: To BS EN 10088-1.
2.
Sheet, strip and plate: To BS EN 10088-2.
3.
Semi-finished products bars, rods and sections: To BS EN 10088-3.
4.
Wire: To BS EN 1088-3.
5.
Tubes:
a.
Welded circular: To BS EN 10296-2.
b.
Seamless circular: To BS EN 10297-2.
C.
Steel and Iron:

1.
Tubing:
a.
Seamless circular: To BS EN 10297-1.
b.
Seamless cold drawn: To BS EN 10305-1.
c.
Welded and cold sized square and rectangular: To BS EN 10305-5.
d.
Welded circular: To BS EN 10296-1.
e.
Welded cold drawn: To BS EN 10305-2.
f.
Welded cold sized: To BS EN 10305-3.
2.
Hot rolled structural steels (excluding structural hollow sections and tubes): To BS EN
10025-1.
3.
Hot dip zinc coated low carbon steel sheet and strip for cold forming: To BS EN
10327 and BS EN 10143.
4.
Hot dip zinc coated structural steel sheet and strip: To BS EN 10143 and BS EN
10326.
5.
Plates and wide flats, high yield strength steel: To BS EN 10025-6.
2.2
A.
Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners, unless unavoidable or standard for railings indicated.
1.
Aluminum Railings: Stainless-steel fasteners, type 304 for internal applications and
316 for external applications.
2.
Stainless-Steel Railings: Stainless-steel fasteners, type 304 for internal applications and
316 for external applications.
3.
Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for
electrodeposited zinc coating.
Page 3 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Anchors: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete,
as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency acceptable to the Engineer.
1.
Cast-In-Place Anchors: For floor-mounted installations where indicated on drawings.
2.
Expansion Torque-Controlled Anchors: For floor-mounted, wall-mounted to concrete
walls and stringer mounted installations.
3.
Chemical Anchors: For wall-mounted installations to masonry walls.
C.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to the BS standards for metal alloy
welded as the following:
1.
Welding of Steel
a.
Method: Metal arc welding to BS EN 1011 -1 and -2.
2.
Welding of Stainless Steel
a.
Method: TIG welding to BS EN 1011-3.
b.
Butt welds: Double bevel.
3.
Welding of Aluminium Alloys
a.
Method: TIG or MIG welding to BS EN 1011 -4.
D.
Zinc-Rich Primer:
topcoat.
E.
Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer compatible with finish paint
systems indicated, and complying with SSPC-Paint 5.
F.
Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout complying

with ASTM C 1107; or water-resistant, nonshrink anchoring cement; recommended by
manufacturer for exterior use.
2.3
A.
FABRICATION
General: Fabricate railings to comply with design, dimensions, and details indicated, but not
less than that required to support structural loads.
B.
Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
C.
Nonwelded Connections:
fittings.
D.
Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
E.
Form curves by bending in jigs to produce uniform curvature; maintain cross section of
member throughout bend without cracking or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces.
F.
Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with
Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and
Page 4 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

G.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous
fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.4
A.
B.
FINISHES
Stainless Steel:
1.
Directional Satin Finish: No. 4, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
Steel and Iron:
1.
Galvanized Railings: Hot-dip galvanize exterior and where indicated railings, after
fabrication. Provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other
ferrous components.
2.
Shop-Primed Galvanized Railings: After galvanizing, clean railings, treat with metallicphosphate process, and apply primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1.
3.
Filed-Applied Finishes:
a.
Internal Assemblies: Epoxy or polyurethane based coating system as specified in
Division 9, Section Painting.
b.
External Assemblies: UV-resistant polyurethane based coating system as
specified in Division 9, Section Painting.
c.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturers full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation.
1.
Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 2 mm in 1 m.
2.
Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 5 mm in 3 m.
B.
Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges.
C.
Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing ends
and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts.
D.
Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets.

1.
Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 38 mm, unless
otherwise indicated, clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
2.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support
structural loads.
3.
Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows:
a.
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and
hanger or lag bolts.
Page 5 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

b.
E.
For hollow masonry anchorage, use chemical anchors.
Adjusting and Cleaning:

1.
Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting.
2.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
Page 6 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 055300 METAL GRATINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
GENERAL..
RELATED DOCUMENTS....
SUMMARY......
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
PROJECT CONDITIONS
COORDINATION..
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS.
FERROUS METALS..
FASTENERS.
FABRICATION.
METAL BAR GRATINGS.
GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORT.
STEEL FINISHES..
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXECUTION..
INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS..
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING.
7
7
7
8
Page 1 of 8
Metal Gratings
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 055300 METAL GRATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
Metal bar gratings.
2.
Extruded Metal gratings
3.
Metal frames and supports for gratings.
B.

1.
Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for structural-steel framing system
components.
2.
Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube handrails and
railings.
1.3
A.
Structural Performance of Gratings: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the effects of
gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions
indicated:
1.
Floors: Uniform load of 6.00 kN/sq. m or concentrated load of 8.90 kN, whichever
produces the greater stress.
2.
Walkways and Elevated Platforms Other Than Exits: Uniform load of 2.87 kN/sq. m.
3.
Walkways and Elevated Platforms Used as Exits: Uniform load of 4.79 kN/sq. m.
4.
Sidewalks and Vehicular Driveways, Subject to Trucking: Uniform load of 11.97
kN/sq. m or concentrated load of 35.60 kN, whichever produces the greater stress.
5.
Limit deflection to L/360 or 6.4 mm, whichever is less.
1.4
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Formed-metal gratings.
2.
Extruded metal gratings.
3.
Clips and anchorage devices for gratings.
4.
Paint products.
B.
LEED/EHS SUBMITTALS:
1.
Page 2 of 8
Metal Gratings
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.
C.
1.5
A.
B.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.2: For primers, documentation indicating that
of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard
1.
Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating
Manual" and NAAMM MBG 532, "Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual."
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2.
AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel."
1.6
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
gratings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
1.
Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
1.7
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Furnish
setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Metal Bar Gratings:
2.
Expanded-Metal Gratings:
2.2
A.
FERROUS METALS
B.
Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510M.
Page 3 of 8
Metal Gratings
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 230, with Z275
coating.
D.
Expanded Metal, Carbon Steel: ASTM F 1267, Class 1.
E.
Expanded Metal, Galvanized Steel: ASTM F 1267, Class 2, Grade A.
F.
Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type [304] [316].
G.
Expanded Metal, Stainless Steel: ASTM F 1267, Class 3, made from stainless-steel sheet
complying with ASTM A 666, Type [304] [316].
2.3
A.
FASTENERS
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior
use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at
exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for
type, grade, and class required.
B.
Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts,
and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 738M for bolts and ASTM F 836M for nuts,
Alloy Group A1.
C.
Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22M.
D.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.2M.
E.
Anchors: Provide torque-controlled expansion anchors with capability to sustain, without

failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal
to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to
comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
2.
Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group A1 stainless-steel bolts
complying with ASTM F 738M and nuts complying with ASTM F 836M.
2.4
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
that is welded.
B.
Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections.
C.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79.
D.
Zinc-Rich Primer: Zinc-rich primer, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and

compatible with topcoat.
Page 4 of 8
Metal Gratings
Project:
Works:
Title:

E.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing welds in steel,

complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
F.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.5
A.
FABRICATION
Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize
field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark
units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1 mm, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
C.
Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to
support indicated loads.
D.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.
E.
Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following:

1.
2.
3.
F.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and
space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to
support indicated loads.
2.6
A.
METAL BAR GRATINGS

Welded Steel Grating:
1.
Bearing Bar Spacing: 60 mm o.c.
2.
Bearing Bar Depth: 25 mm
3.
Bearing Bar Thickness: 9.5 mm
4.
Crossbar Spacing: 102 mm o.c.
5.
Traffic Surface: Plain or as indicated.
6.
Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 550 g/sq. m of
coated surface.
B.
Pressure-Locked Steel Grating: Fabricated by either pressing rectangular flush-top crossbars

into slotted bearing bars or swaging crossbars between bearing bars.
1.
2.
Bearing Bar Depth: 51 mm.
3.
Bearing Bar Thickness: 4.8 mm.
4.
Page 5 of 8
Metal Gratings
Project:
Works:
Title:

5.
6.
Traffic Surface: Plain or as indicated.

Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 550 g/sq. m of
coated surface.
C.
Pressure-Locked, Stainless-Steel Grating: Fabricated by either pressing rectangular flush-top

crossbars into slotted bearing bars or swaging crossbars between bearing bars.
1.
2.
Bearing Bar Depth: 51 mm.
3.
Bearing Bar Thickness: 4.8 mm.
4.
5.
Traffic Surface: Plain or As indicated.
6.
Finish: Mill finish.
D.
Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire
perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not
indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports.
1.
Provide not less than four weld lugs for each heavy-duty grating section, with each lug
shop welded to two bearing bars.
2.
Furnish threaded bolts with nuts and washers for securing grating to supports.
E.
Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts to permit
grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings.
F.
Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation.
2.7
A.
B.
2.8
A.
B.
GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS

Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of
welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to
receive hardware and similar items.
1.
Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings.
2.
Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally
welded anchors. Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 600 mm o.c. and provide
minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 32 mm wide by 6 mm thick by 200
mm long.
Galvanize steel frames and supports in the following locations:
1.
Exterior.
2.
Interior, where indicated.
STEEL FINISHES
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly.
Page 6 of 8
Metal Gratings
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the hot-dip
process complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M.
D.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1.
Exteriors SSPC Zone 1B and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPCSP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2.
Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."
E.
Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of gratings, frames, and supports, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and
Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and
masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
B.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from
established lines and levels and free of rack.
C.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete
or masonry.
D.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

1.
Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded
because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of
exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or
screwed field connections.
E.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1.
2.
3.
3.2
A.
INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS

General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating
standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation
clearances and standard anchoring details.
Page 7 of 8
Metal Gratings
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners
indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of
installation conditions shown.
C.
Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same;
otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above.
3.3
A.

Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 0.05-mm dry film thickness.
B.
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
Page 8 of 8
Metal Gratings
DIVISION 06
___________________________________________________________________________________
WOODS, PLASTICS COMPOSITES
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL..
SUMMARY......
DEFINITIONS..
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
2
2
2
2
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
PRODUCTS
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL...
RIGID SHEETS.
PRESERVATIVE-TREATED WOOD.
LAMINATED PLASTICS VENEERED BOARDS / PANELS..
WOOD VENEERED BOARDS / PANELS
FASTENERS.
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS..
CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF TIMBER
FABRICATION.
3
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
6
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION
WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS...
WOOD FURRING..
7
7
7
8
Page 1 of 8
Rough Carpentry
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section specifies rough carpentry required for support or attachment of other construction
and not specified in another Section
1.2
A.
DEFINITIONS
Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work (wood, MDF or cork) not specified in other Sections and
not exposed, is required to fix, support, and install, suspend or complete works specified in
other specification sections.
1.3
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
1. Include data for wood-preservative and fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment
manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with
requirements.
B.
1.
Certificates for Credit MR 6 / Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates indicating that

products specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest certification
requirements. Include documentation that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody
by an FSC-accredited certification body. Include statement indicating cost for each
certified wood product.
2.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For composite wood products, documentation
indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.
3.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For composite-wood products, documentation
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C.
Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use.
D.
Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency acceptable to the Engineer,
indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood
products with requirements indicated.
Page 2 of 8
Rough Carpentry
Project:
Works:
Title:

E.
Shop drawings for furrings and supporting rough carpentry work as requested by the
Engineer. Shop drawings shall indicate dimensions of wood sections, jointing details, fixing
intervals, fixation details and other details as directed.
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for approval, an independent testing agency must
demonstrate to the Engineer's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria,
that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without
delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

Softwood shall be free from decay and insect attack, except pinhole borers, with no knots
wider than half the width of the section. Softwood shall comply with BS EN 942 softwood
spices to be used in external locations are to be recommended for the purpose.
B.
Hardwood shall comply with BS EN 942. Hardwood to be used in internal locations are to
be recommended for the purpose.
C.
Wood used for exterior applications or for interior applications in wet areas shall be factory
treated to prevent moisture absorption
2.2
A.
RIGID SHEETS
Plywood: BS EN 636:Part 1, face grade for general use. Bonding is to be to BS 1203, type
WBP for external use and type MR or INT for internal use.
B.
Marine Quality Plywood: to BS 1088 and BS 4079, excluding plywood made from gaboon.
2.3
A.
PRESERVATIVE-TREATED WOOD
Organic solvent preservative treatment, moisture content of timber at the time of treatment
shall be as specified for the component at time of delivery. Timber surface shall be dry before
use. Application shall be with double vacuum/low pressure.
B.
Water based microemulsion preservative treatment, moisture content of timber at the time of
treatment shall be as specified for the component at time of delivery. Timber surface shall be
dry before use. Application shall be with double vacuum/low pressure.
C.
Creosote preservation treatment, moisture content of timber at time of treatment shall be not
more than 28%. Allow timber to dry before use. Application shall be with double vacuum
/low pressure.
Page 3 of 8
Rough Carpentry
Project:
Works:
Title:

D.
Born compound preservation treatment, moisture content of timber at time of treatment shall
be not more than 28%. Allow timber to dry before use. Application shall be with double
vacuum /low pressure.
E.
Fire retardant treatment: Moisture content at time of treatment shall be as specified for the
timber at time of fixing. After treatment, timber shall be dried slowly at temperatures not
exceeding 65C to minimize degradation and distortion. Application shall be with
vacuum/pressure.
F.
Leach resistant flame retardant treatment, moisture content at time of treatment shall be as
specified for the timber at time of fixing. Application shall be with vacuum/pressure.
G.
Re-treat all treated wood which is sawn along the length, ploughed, thickness, planed or
otherwise extensively processed. Treat wood surfaces exposed by minor cutting and drilling
with two flood coats of solution recommended for the purpose by the treatment solution
manufacturer.
H.
Cutting and machining: Completed as far as possible before treatment.
I.
Extensively processed timber: Retreat timber sawn lengthways, thicknessed, planed, ploughed,
etc.
J.
Surfaces exposed by minor cutting and/ or drilling: Treat with two flood coats of a solution
recommended by main treatment solution manufacturer.
2.4
A.
LAMINATED PLASTICS VENEERED BOARDS/ PANELS

Fabrication: To British Laminated Plastics Fabricators Association Ltd (BLF) fabricating
standards.
B.
Balancing veneer: From decorative veneer manufacturer and of similar composition. Applied
to reverse side of core.
C.
Finished components: Free from defects, including bow, twist, scratches, chipping, cracks,
pimpling, indentations, glue marks, staining and variations in colour and pattern.
D.
Joints visible in completed work: Tight butted, true and flush.
2.5
A.
WOOD VENEERED BOARDS/ PANELS

Core material and veneers: Conditioned before bonding.
B.
Setting out: Veneer features and grain pattern aligned regularly and symmetrically unless
instructed otherwise.
C.
Balancing veneer: Applied to reverse side of core material.

1.
Moisture and temperature movement characteristics: As facing veneer.
Page 4 of 8
Rough Carpentry
Project:
Works:
Title:

D.
Veneer edges: Tight butted and flush, with no gaps.
E.
Tolerance of veneer thickness (maximum): 0.5 mm.
F.
Finished components: Free from defects, including bow, twist, scratches, chipping, splits,
blebs, indentations, glue marks and staining.
G.
Surface finish: Fine, smooth, free from sanding marks.
2.6
A.
FASTENERS
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified.
1.
Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with BS EN ISO 1461 or type 304 stainless steel.
2.
Materials to have bimetallic corrosion resistance appropriate to items being fixed
3.
Nailed Timber Fixing: Nails penetration to be fully driven in without splitting or
crushing timber.
4.
Nailed Timber Joints: Two nails per joint (minimum) opposite skew driven)
B.
Nails: to BS 1202, Part 1, 2 or 3 generally, but non-ferrous types of Parts 2 or 3 for external
use.
C.
Wood Screws: to BS 1210 generally, but non-ferrous types for external use.
1.
Pattern Self-tapping, metallic drive screw, or power driven screws.
D.
Self-Tapping Screws: to BS 4174.
E.
Dowels: mild steel, 10 mm diameter, 100 mm long, galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 after
fabrication.
F.
Cramps Fixings:
1.
Cramp Positions: maximum 150 mm form each end of frame sections and at 600 mm
maximum fixings
2.
Cramp fixings in masonry works to be fully bedded in mortar.
G.
Plugs: either traditional hardwood plugs, shaped to twist and grip when driven, or proprietary
fibre or plastics plugs, or other approved type.
2.7
A.
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated and of products of manufacturers listed.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified
independent testing agency.
Page 5 of 8
Rough Carpentry
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with BS EN ISO 1461
coating designation.
C.
Types: Unless otherwise indicated:

1.
Expansions for use in substrate strong enough to resist forces generated by expansion
anchors.
2.
Chemical:
a.
For use in substrate where expansion of anchor would fracture substrate.
b.
For use in irregular substrate where expansion anchors cannot transfer load on
anchor
2.8
A.
Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill
sealer; 25-mm nominal thickness, compressible to 0.8 mm; selected from manufacturer's
standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
B.
Adhesive for Joinery: shall be close contact type to BS EN 301 or BS EN 302 suitable for the
purpose. Obtain manufacturer's confirmation that adhesive is compatible with preservative
treatment.
2.9
A.
B.
2.10
A.
CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF TIMBER

General: Dimensions on drawings are finished sizes.
Maximum permitted deviations from finished sizes:
1.
Softwood sections: To BS EN 1313-1:
a.
Clause 6 for sawn sections
b.
Clause NA.2 for further processed sections.
2.
Hardwood sections: To BS EN 1313-2:
a.
Clause 6 for sawn sections.
b.
Clause NA.3 for further processed sections.
FABRICATION
Standard: To BS 1186-2.
B.
Sections: Accurate in profile and length, and free from twist and bowing. Formed out of solid
unless shown otherwise.
1.
Machined surfaces: Smooth and free from tearing, wooliness, chip bruising and other
machining defects.
C.
Joints: Tight and close fitting.
D.
Assembled components: Rigid. Free from distortion.
E.
Screws: Provide pilot holes.
Page 6 of 8
Rough Carpentry
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
F.
Screws of 8 gauge (4 mm diameter) or more and screws into hardwood: Provide

clearance holes.
Countersink screws: Heads sunk at least 2 mm below surfaces visible in completed
work.
Adhesives: Compatible with wood preservatives applied and end uses of timber.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too
small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted.
C.
Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.
Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow
attachment of other construction.
D.
Apply field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood.
E.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated.
F.
Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish
materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood;
predrill as required.
G.
Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.
3.2
A.
WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS

Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for
screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line
and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B.
Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where
possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
C.
Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 138 mm wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish
material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
Page 7 of 8
Rough Carpentry
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.3
A.
WOOD FURRING
Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as
required for tolerance of finish work.
1.
Firestop furred spaces of walls at each floor level and at ceiling with wood blocking or
noncombustible materials, accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
B.
Furring to Receive Wood or Plastic Sheets or Boards: Install 19-by-63-mm actual-size furring
at 600 mm o.c., horizontally and vertically. Select furring with no knots capable of
producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
C.
Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 19-by-38-mm actual-size furring at 400 mm o.c.,
vertically.
D.
Furring to Receive Plaster Lath:

vertically.
Install 19-by-38-mm actual-size furring at 400 mm o.c.,
Page 8 of 8
Rough Carpentry
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
GENERAL..
SUMMARY......
ACTION SUBMITTALS......
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
PRODUCTS
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL...................
WOOD PRESERVATIVES...................
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS...............
DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING..............
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER...................
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS...................
FASTENERS........................
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS....................
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
6
3.0
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION, GENERAL...................
PROTECTION........................
6
6
7
Page 1 of 7
Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Framing with dimension lumber.
2.
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
3.
Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
4.
Wood furring and grounds.
5.
Wood sleepers.
6.
Utility shelving.
7.
Plywood backing panels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
LEED Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
A.
Certificates for Credit MR 6/Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates indicating that

Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1.
2.
3.
Preservative-treated wood.
Fire-retardant-treated wood.
Power-driven fasteners.
Page 2 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

Certified Wood: Lumber and plywood shall be produced from wood obtained from forests
certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC
Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
B.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading

agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any ruleswriting agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp
on end or back of each piece
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent for 38-mm actual thickness or less, no limit
for more than 38-mm actual thickness unless otherwise indicated.
2.2
A.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not
in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no

arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC
Board of Review.
D.
Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.Items indicated on

Drawings, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, [furring,] and similar concealed members in contact
with masonry or concrete.
Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
Wood framing members that are less than 460 mm above the ground in crawl spaces
or unexcavated areas.
Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
Page 3 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.3
A.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread
index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant
progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the
flame front not extending more than 3.2 m beyond the centerline of the burners at any time
during the test.
1.
2.
3.
Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fireretardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and
where indicated.
Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where
exterior type is not indicated.
Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according
ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to
ASTM D 6841. For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where high
temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment
factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in
bending for Project's climatological zone.
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry

plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
C.
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated. Items indicated on
Drawings, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Framing for raised platforms.

Concealed blocking.
Roof framing and blocking.
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members
in connection with roofing.
Plywood backing panels.
2.4
A.
DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: grade of any species.
B.
Other Framing: Construction, grade the following species:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Hem-fir (north); NLGA.

Southern pine; SPIB.
Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
Page 4 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.5
A.
Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
Douglas fir-south; WWPA.
Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA.
Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of
other construction, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Blocking.
Nailers.
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
Cants.
Furring.
Grounds.
Utility shelving.
B.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction grade lumber of any species.
C.
For utility shelving, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of eastern
white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium grade; NeLMA,
NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
D.
For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and [any
of the following species and grades:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.6
A.
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not
indicated, not less than 19-mm nominal thickness.
1.
2.7
A.
Mixed southern pine, [No. 2] grade; SPIB.

Eastern softwoods, [No. 2] Common grade; NELMA.
Northern species, [No. 2] Common grade; NLGA.
Western woods, Construction; WCLIB or WWPA.
Plywood shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
FASTENERS
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
Page 5 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative

treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless
steel.
B.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
C.
Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002 length as recommended by screw
manufacturer for material being fastened.
2.8
A.
Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density
polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of
not less than 0.6 mm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
B.
Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install

continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
C.
Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities
requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with
classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.
E.
Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
G.
Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,

complying with the following:
1.
2.
3.
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.

Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and TwoFamily Dwellings.
Page 6 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.2
A.
PROTECTION
Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate
treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
Page 7 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 061063 EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL..
SUMMARY......
QUALITY ASSURANCE....
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
PRODUCTS
LUMBER, GENERAL......
LUMBER......
POSTS.....
PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT....
FASTENERS....
METAL ACCESSORIES.....
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
3.0
3.1
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION, GENERAL......
6
6
Page 1 of 6
Exterior Rough Carpentry
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 061063 EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
1.
1.2
A.
B.
LEED Submittals:
2.
3.
1.4
A.
Certificates for Credit MR 6 / Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates indicating that

Material Certificates:
1.
B.
Section 061533 "Wood Patio Decking."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For preservative-treated wood products.
1.
1.3
A.
Wood fences.
Wood shutters
For preservative-treated wood products. Indicate type of preservative used and net
amount of preservative retained.
Evaluation Reports: For preservative-treated wood products, from ICC-ES.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
Lumber Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of
custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
Page 2 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Lumber Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSCaccredited certification body.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
LUMBER, GENERAL
Comply with DOC PS 20 and with grading rules of lumber grading agencies certified by
ALSC's Board of Review as applicable. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the
applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by ALSC's Board of Review.
1.
2.
3.
Factory mark each item with grade stamp of grading agency.

For items that are exposed to view in the completed Work, mark grade stamp on end
or back of each piece.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Regional Materials: Wood products shall be milled within 800 km of Project site from wood
that has been harvested within 800 km of Project site.
C.
Certified Wood: Boards and dimension lumber shall be certified as "FSC Pure"[ or "FSC
Mixed Credit"] according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest
Stewardship," and to FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification."
D.
Maximum Moisture Content:

1.
2.
3.
2.2
A.
LUMBER
Dimension Lumber: Construction grade and any of the following species:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Boards: 19 percent.
Dimension Lumber: 19 percent for 38-mm actual thickness or less; no limit for more
than 38-mm actual thickness.
Timber. 19 percent.
Hem-fir or hem-fir (North); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir-larch (North), or Douglas fir-south; NLGA, WCLIB, or
WWPA.
Redwood; RIS.
Boards:[ Any of the following species and grades:]

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Douglas fir, C & Btr finish or C Select; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

Hem-fir, C & Btr finish or C Select; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
Redwood, [Heart Clear] [Heart B or Select Heart]; RIS.
Southern pine, B & B finish; SPIB.
Western red cedar, [Clear Heart] [Grade A] [Grade B]; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
Page 3 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Boards:[ Any of the following species and grades:]

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
A.
Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; [Premium or
No. 2 Common (Sterling)] [Standard or No. 3 Common] grade; NeLMA, NLGA,
WCLIB, or WWPA.
Mixed southern pine;[No. 1] [No. 2] grade; SPIB.
Hem-fir or hem-fir (North); [Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common] [Construction or
No. 2 Common] grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
Northern white cedar, [No. 1 Common] [No. 2 Common]; NeLMA or NLGA.
Spruce-pine-fir (South) or spruce-pine-fir; [Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common]
[Construction or No. 2 Common] grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
POSTS
Dimension Lumber Posts: Construction grade and any of the following species:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir-larch (North), or Douglas fir-south; NLGA, WCLIB, or

WWPA.
Northern species; NLGA.
Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.
Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
B.
Timber Posts: Balsam fir, Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir-larch (North), eastern hemlock
tamarack (North), hem-fir, southern pine, western hemlock, or western hemlock (North);
[No. 1] [No. 2], NeLMA, NLGA, SPIB, WCLIB, or WWPA.
C.
Timber Posts: Southern pine; [No. 1] [No. 2], SPIB.
2.4
A.
B.
PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
Pressure treat boards and dimension lumber with waterborne preservative according to
AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and
Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
Pressure treat timber with
Category UC4a.
1.
C.
preservative
according
to
AWPA U1;
Use
Treatment with CCA shall include post-treatment fixation process.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.
D.
waterborne
Do not use chemicals containing arsenic or chromium [except for timber posts] [except
for poles] [except for timber posts and poles].
After treatment, redry boards or dimension lumber to 19 percent maximum moisture content.
Page 4 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

E.
Mark treated wood with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's
Board of Review.
1.
F.
2.5
A.
Application: Treat all wood unless otherwise indicated items indicated on Drawings.
FASTENERS
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and
manufacture. Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length, to penetrate not less than 38 mm
into wood substrate.
1.
2.
B.
For items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark each piece on surface
that will not be exposed or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment
compliance issued by inspection agency.
Use stainless steel fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying

ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 unless otherwise indicated.
For pressure-preservative-treated wood, use stainless-steel fasteners.
with
Postinstalled Anchors: Stainless-steel, chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors with

capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed
in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete
as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent
testing and inspecting agency.
1.
Stainless-steel bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M,
Grade A1 or Grade A4.
2.6
A.
METAL ACCESSORIES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, that may be incorporated into the
Works include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated

on Drawings for engineers approval.
C.
Galvanized-Steel
Sheet:
Hot-dip,
zinc-coated
steel
sheet
ASTM A 653/A 653M, [Z180] [Z270] [Z550] coating designation.
D.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, [Type 304] [Type 316].
Page 5 of 6
complying
with
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Set work to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
work to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
B.
Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA WCD1 unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Apply copper naphthenate field treatment to comply with AWPA M4, to cut surfaces of
preservative-treated lumber.
F.
Securely attach exterior rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated, complying with the following:
1.
2.
3.
ICC-ES AC70 for power-driven fasteners.

"Fastening Schedule" in ICC's International Building Code.
"Fastener Schedule for Structural Members" and "Alternate Attachments" in ICC's
International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.
Page 6 of 6
DIVISION 07
________________________________________________________________________
THERMAL AND MOISTURE

PROTECTION
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
GENERAL..
SUMMARY......
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
WARRANTY
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS..
DAMP-PROOF COURSE
4
4
4
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
EXECUTION.
EXAMINATION..
SURFACE PREPARATION..
PREPARATION AT TERMINATION..
JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT
WATERPROOFING APPLICATION..
CURING, PROTECTING AND CLEANING.
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
Page 1 of 6
Bituminous Damproofing
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Single Component, Rubber reinforced Bitumen Emulsion.
2. Applications include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
a. Damp Proofing and vertical vapor barrier.
b. Below ground surfaces.
B. Related Sections include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation.
1.3
Provide waterproofing membrane that is intended to resist hydrostatic pressure (regardless of
application type) when protected in-service from physical abuse and exposure to weathering,
that is manufactured primarily for concealed in-service applications to horizontal decks or vertical walls and prevents the passage of water.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.
B. LEED/EHS Submittals:
i.
ii.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.2: For dampproofing, documentation including printed
statement of VOC content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For dampproofing, documentation indicating
that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
C. Samples: For the following products: 300-by-300-mm square of cured finished membrane.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by product manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,
authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install his products.
E. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out successfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturers representative.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer.
G. Product Test Reports: For waterproofing, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
Page 2 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality System: Provide the products of a manufacturer holding valid ISO 9001
certification.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section
with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or
licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials, protection course from single source
from single manufacturer.
D. Mockups: Before beginning installation, install waterproofing to 9.3 sq. m of deck to
demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, thickness,
texture, and execution quality.
E. If Engineer determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reapply waterproofing
and reinstall overlaying construction until mockups are approved.
F. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations in
writing.
G. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
H. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and
pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and
flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and
repairs.
1.6

A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life,
and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to
a damp or wet substrate or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent.
1. Do not apply waterproofing in rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are
imminent during application and curing period.
B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials.
1.8
WARRANTY
Page 3 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

A. Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturers standard warranty in which Manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace, without limitations, all or any part of the liquid applied system
which fails or becomes defective in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes, but is not limited to: water penetration, deterioration in membranes
and coatings; other than due to normal ageing and weathering; and any defects in adhesion, sealants, flashings, fixings, coverings and other components of the work.
1. Warranty includes base flashings, accessories, and other components of liquid
applied system.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate
prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks
in substrate that exceed 1.6 mm in width.
4. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board in wet areas.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A. All products shall be manufactured under BS EN ISO 9001 / ISO 14001 conditions and
have a proven successful track record of use in similar applications under local ambient
conditions.
2.2
DAMP-PROOF COURSE
SINGLE-COMPONENT RUBBERISED BITUMIN EMULSION
1. General:
Provide waterproofing materials recommended by manufacturer to be compatible with one
another and able to develop bond to substrate under conditions of service and application,
as demonstrated by waterproofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
1. Produce waterproofing materials suitable for application to vertical, horizontal,
and sloped substrates, as applicable.
2. High adhering to concrete surface to prevent lateral migration of water.
3. High resistance to oxidation and embrittlement.
2. Single component rubberized bitumen emulsion:

The liquid applied membrane shall comply with concrete curing requirements of ASTM
C309 when applied at rate of 4m2/liter.
Thickness shall be 600 microns and shall exhibit the following physical properties:
2
Property
Result
Specific gravity
1.00
Solids content
60 to 65 %
Rubber content
10%
Page 4 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

10 Drying time
11 30 mins at 25 oC
Over coating time
1 hour at 25 oC
3. Primer: Manufacturers Standard.

4. Thickness and Application:
a. Thickness: 600 microns minimum dry film thicknesses on horizontal and 200 microns/coat for vertical surfaces, in addition to the preparatory work.
b. Application:
Method: brush or squeegee to horizontal and vertical surfaces.
Number of Coats: One for horizontal surfaces and three for vertical surfaces
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
1. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
a. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by
waterproofing manufacturer.
b. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
c. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
SURFACE PREPARATION
1. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.
2. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or overspray
affecting other construction.
3. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
a. Abrasive blast clean concrete surfaces uniformly to expose top surface of fine
b. Aggregate according to ASTM D 4259 with a self-contained, recirculating, blast cleaning apparatus. Remove material to provide a sound surface free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, or form-release agents. Remove
remaining loose material and clean surfaces according to ASTM D 4258.
4. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and
other voids.
3.3
PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS
1. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations through waterproofing and at
expansion joints according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Prime substrate unless otherwise instructed by waterproofing manufacturer.
3. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in
the first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
Page 5 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.4

1. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898 and
waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and
cracks, complying with ASTM D 4258, before coating surfaces.
a. Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation.
b. Apply bond breaker between sealant and preparation strip.
c. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation strip extending a minimum
of 75 mm along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications
and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat.
3.5
WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
1. Apply waterproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply primer over prepared substrate.
3. Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by brush or
squeegee.
a. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of
entrapped gases, with an average dry film thickness of 600 microns at any point.
b. Verify wet film thickness of waterproofing every 9.3 sq. m.
3.6

1. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in
ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before overlaying construction is
placed. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with
potable water.
a. Flood to an average depth of 64 mm with a minimum depth of 25 mm and not
exceeding a depth of 100 mm. Maintain 50 mm of clearance from top of sheet
flashings.
b. Flood each area for 48 hours.
c. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until
waterproofing installation is watertight.
2. Observe flood testing and examine underside of decks and terminations for evidence of
leaks during flood testing. Prepare an inspection report for each building and submit to the
Engineer.
3.7
CURING, PROTECTING AND CLEANING

1. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to
prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing.
a. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.
2. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
3. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
Page 6 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 071326 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
GENERAL..
SUMMARY......
PREINSATALLATION MEETINGS.
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
WARRANTY
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCTS
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING..
AUXILLARY MATERIALS.
MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS.
INLSULATION DRAINAGE PANELS.
2
2
3
4
5
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXECUTION..
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING APPLICATION.
MOLDED SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION
INSULATION DRAINAGE PANEL INSULATION
PROTECTION, REPAIR AND CLEANING
5
5
6
6
7
Page 1 of 7
Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 071326 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes self-adhering modified bituminous sheet waterproofing.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing and details of substrate joints
and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining
waterproofing, and other termination conditions.
1.4
A.
Sample warranties.
1.5
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by waterproofing manufacturer.
1.6
A.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard materials-only warranty in which
manufacturer agrees to furnish replacement waterproofing material for waterproofing that
does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty
period.
1.
Warranty Period: Ten to Fifteen years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING

Modified Bituminous Sheet: Minimum 60-mil (1.5-mm) nominal thickness, self-adhering sheet
consisting of 56 mils (1.4 mm) of rubberized asphalt laminated on one side to a 4-mil- (0.10mm-) thick, polyethylene-film reinforcement, and with release liner on adhesive side
; formulated for application with primer or surface conditioner that complies with VOC limits
of authorities having jurisdiction.
Page 2 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
Verify that products retained in subparagraphs above comply with requirements in

"Physical Properties" Subparagraph below; revise to suit Project.
3.
Physical Properties:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
4.
B.
Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt strips of same material and thickness as

sheet waterproofing.
Modified Bituminous Sheet, Fabric Reinforced: Minimum 60-mil (1.5-mm) nominal thickness,
self-adhering sheet consisting of rubberized-asphalt membrane with embedded fabric
reinforcement, and with release liner on adhesive side.
1.
2.
Physical Properties:
a.
b.
c.
3.
2.2
A.
Tensile Strength, Membrane: 250 psi (1.7 MPa) minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C,
modified.
Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg C);
ASTM D 1970.
Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch (3-mm) movement;
ASTM C 836.
Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf (180 N) minimum; ASTM E 154.
Water Absorption: 0.2 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at
70 deg F (21 deg C); ASTM D 570.
Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms (2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) maximum;
ASTM E 96/E 96M, Water Method.
Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 200 feet (60 m) minimum; ASTM D 5385.
Pliability: No cracks when bent 180 degrees over a 1-inch (25-mm) mandrel at
minus 25 deg F (minus 32 deg C); ASTM D 146.
Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf (180 N) [100 lbf (445 N) minimum; ASTM E 154.
Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms (2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) maximum;
ASTM E 96/E 96M, Water Method.
Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, reinforced, rubberized-asphalt strips of same material and

thickness as sheet waterproofing.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for
intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.
1.
Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Page 3 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Primer: Liquid waterborne or solvent-borne primer recommended for substrate by sheetwaterproofing material manufacturer .
C.
Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by

sheet-waterproofing material manufacturer.
D.
Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, of trowel grade or
low viscosity.
E.
Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, modified asphalt coating.
F.
Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick,
predrilled at 9-inch (229-mm) centers.
G.
Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforcedasphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm) nominal.

Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm), nominal, for vertical applications; 1/4 inch (6 mm),
nominal, elsewhere.
Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for
protection course type.
H.
Protection Course: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation faced on
both sides with plastic film, nominal thickness 1/4 inch (6 mm), with compressive strength of
not less than 8 psi (55 kPa) per ASTM D 1621, and maximum water absorption by volume of
0.6 percent per ASTM C 272.
I.
Protection Course: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation, unfaced, ASTM C 578, Type X,

1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
J.
Protection Course: Molded-polystyrene board insulation, ASTM C 578, Type I, 0.90-lb/cu. ft.
(15-kg/cu. m) minimum density, 1-inch (25-mm) minimum thickness.
2.3
A.
B.
MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS

Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Section 334600 "Subdrainage."
Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Composite subsurface drainage
panel consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a
nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding
No. 70 (0.21-mm) sieve laminated to one side of the core and a polymeric film bonded to the
other side; and with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm per ft. (112 to 188 L/min. per m).
1.
Page 4 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Composite subsurface drainage

panels consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a
woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 (0.425-mm)
sieve laminated to one side of the core and a polymeric film bonded to the other side; and
with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm per ft. (35 L/min. per m).
1.
2.4
A.
INSULATION DRAINAGE PANELS

Unfaced Wall-Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying
with ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa) minimum compressive strength; unfaced;
fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with one side having grooved drainage
channels.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following provide one
of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but
are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
DiversiFoam Products; CertiFoam 25 SL [CertiFoam 40 (with channel edges).

Dow Chemical Company (The); STYROFOAM Brand PERIMATE Insulation
Styrofoam Perimate.
<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.
B.
Geotextile-Faced, Wall-Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation

complying with ASTM C 578, [Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa)] [or] [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)]
minimum compressive strength; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with one side
having grooved drainage channels faced with nonwoven geotextile filter fabric.
C.
Unfaced Plaza-Deck Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation

complying with ASTM C 578, Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa) or Type VII, 60-psi (414-kPa)
minimum compressive strength; unfaced; fabricated with shiplapped, channel, or tongue-andgroove edges and with one side having ribbed drainage channels.
D.
Geotextile-Faced, Plaza-Deck Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board

insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] [or] [Type VII, 60-psi
(414-kPa)] minimum compressive strength; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with
one side having grooved drainage channels faced with manufacturer's standard, nonwoven
geotextile filter fabric.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET-WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

Prepare surfaces and install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing
manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in ASTM D 6135.
Page 5 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will
be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24
hours.
C.
Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets
and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- (64-mm-) minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and
seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.
1.
When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F (minus 4
and plus 5 deg C), install self-adhering, modified bituminous sheets produced for lowtemperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate
temperature is higher than 60 deg F (16 deg C).
D.
Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low to high points of decks to ensure that laps shed
water.
E.
Apply continuous sheets over already-installed sheet strips, bridging substrate cracks,
construction, and contraction joints.
F.
Seal edges of sheet-waterproofing terminations with mastic.
G.
Install sheet-waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing.
H.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit
and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches (150
mm) beyond repaired areas in all directions.
I.
Immediately install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane.
1.
3.2
A.
MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE-PANEL INSTALLATION

Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or
deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives or other
methods that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain
continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction.
1.
3.3
A.
B.
Insulation drainage panels may be used in place of a separate protection course to

vertical applications when approved by waterproofing manufacturer and installed
immediately.
For vertical applications, install protection course before installing drainage panels.
INSULATION DRAINAGE-PANEL INSTALLATION

Install insulation drainage panels over waterproofed surfaces; cut and fit to within 3/4 inch
(19 mm) of projections and penetrations.
Ensure that drainage channels are aligned and free of obstructions.
Page 6 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
On vertical surfaces, set insulation drainage panels in adhesive or tape applied according to
D.
On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation drainage panels according to manufacturer's

written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
3.4
A.
PROTECTION, REPAIR AND CLEANING

Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.
B.
Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is
subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
immediately after installation.
C.
Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements;
repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.
D.
Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
Page 7 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 071416 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
GENERAL..
RELATED DOCUMENTS.......
SUMMARY......
SUBMITTALS...
QUALITY ASSURANCE........
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING.......
PROJECT CONDITION........
WARRANTY..........
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
PRODUCTS
TWO COMPONENTS POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING....
AUXILLARY MATERIALS........
PROTECTION COURSE........
4
4
4
4
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
EXECUTION..
EXAMINATION............
SURFACE PREPARATION.........
PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS....
JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT......
WATERPROOFING APPLICATION........
CURING, PROTECTION AND CLEANING.......
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
Page 1 of 7
Cold Fluid Applied Waterproofing
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 071416 - COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
Areas of Application
Toilets
Kitchen Area
Garbage Rooms
BOH Rooms
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Two-component polyurethane waterproofing.
B.
Related Section:
1.
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation.
1.3
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written instructions
for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and
performance properties of waterproofing.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate
joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with
adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.
1.
Include setting drawings showing layout, sizes, sections, profiles, and joint details of
pedestal-supported concrete pavers.
C.
Samples: For the following products:

1.
Membrane-reinforcing fabric, 250 by 200 mm.
D.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
Page 2 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

E.
Field quality-control reports.
F.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: A firm that is acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer for
installation of waterproofing required for this Project.
B.
Mockups: Before beginning installation, install waterproofing to 10 sq. m of deck to

demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, thickness,
texture, and execution quality.
1.
2.
3.
C.
If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reapply

waterproofing until mockups are approved.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

1.
Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition

and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special
details and flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and
protection and repairs.
1.5
A.

Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with
manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and
directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B.
Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected
location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
C.
Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
D.
Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.6
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a
damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are
less than 3 deg C above dew point.
Page 3 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
B.
1.7
A.
Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather
conditions are imminent during application and curing period.
Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials.

WARRANTY
Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form, signed by Installer, covering Work of this
Section, for warranty period of 10 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
TWO-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING

Two-Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing: Comply with ASTM C 836 and with
manufacturer's written physical requirements.
2.2
A.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
General: Provide auxiliary materials recommended by manufacturer to be compatible with
one another and with waterproofing, as demonstrated by waterproofing manufacturer, based
on testing and field experience.
B.
Primer: As Manufacturer's recommendations.
C.
Membrane-Reinforcing Fabric: Woven glass fibre mesh as Manufacturer's recommendations.
D.
Joint Reinforcing Strip: Woven glass fibre mesh as Manufacturer's recommendations.
E.
Joint Sealant: Single component polyurethane sealant, compatible with waterproofing as

recommended by manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions.
1.
2.3
A.
B.
Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam.
PROTECTION COURSE
Protection Course: Proprietary bitumen based protection board 6mm thick.
Protection Course: Proprietary twin wall extruded polypropylene protection board 4mm thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
Page 4 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by
waterproofing manufacturer.
Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
3.2
A.
SURFACE PREPARATION
Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Provide
clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.
B.
Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or overspray
affecting other construction.
C.
Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of
waterproofing fluids.
D.
Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues,
and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
1.
Abrasive blast clean concrete surfaces uniformly to expose top surface of fine
aggregate according to ASTM D 4259 with a self-contained, recirculating, blastcleaning apparatus. Remove material to provide a sound surface free of laitance,
glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, or form-release agents.
Remove remaining loose material and clean surfaces according to ASTM D 4258.
E.
Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other
voids.
3.3
A.
PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS

Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through
waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898,
ASTM C 1471 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Prime substrate unless otherwise instructed by waterproofing manufacturer.
C.
Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the
first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
1.
3.4
A.
Provide sealant cants around penetrations and at inside corners of deck-to-wall butt
joints when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898,
ASTM C 1471 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt
from joints and cracks, complying with ASTM D 4258, before coating surfaces.
Page 5 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
3.5
A.
Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation.

Apply bond breaker between sealant and preparation strip.
Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation strip extending a minimum
of 75 mm along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications
and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat.
WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
Apply waterproofing according to ASTM C 898, ASTM C 1471 and manufacturer's
B.
Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.
C.
Apply primer over prepared substrate.
D.
Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray,

roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of substrate.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of

entrapped gases, with an average dry film thickness of 1.5 mm and a minimum dry
film thickness of 1.3 mm at any point.
Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces.
Verify wet film thickness of waterproofing every 10 sq. m or as indicated by the
Supervising Engineer.
Reinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by roller,

notched squeegee, trowel, or other suitable application method.
1.
2.
3.
Apply first coat of waterproofing, embed membrane-reinforcing fabric, and apply

second coat of waterproofing to completely saturate reinforcing fabric and to obtain a
seamless reinforced membrane free of entrapped gases, with an average dry film total
thickness of 1.8 mm.
Apply reinforced waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces.
Verify wet film thickness of waterproofing every
F.
Install protection course with butted joints over nominally cured membrane before starting
subsequent construction operations.
3.6
A.
CURING, PROTECTION AND CLEANING

Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to
prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing.
1.
B.
Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.
Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
Page 6 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
Page 7 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 071800 TRAFFIC COATINGS FOR EXPOSED DECKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
GENERAL..
RELATED DOCUMENTS.......
SUMMARY......
SUBMITTALS...
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING.......
PROJECT CONDITIONS..........
WARRANTY..........
2
2
2
2
3
4
4
4
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS.....
TRAFFIC COATING..........
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS........
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
5
5
5
6
6
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
EXECUTION..
PREPARATION..........
TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS....
JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT......
TRAFFIC COATING APPLICATION........
PAVEMENT MARKING........
PROTECTING AND CLEANING..
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
Page 1 of 8
Traffic Coatings for Exposed Decks
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 071800 TRAFFIC COATINGS FOR EXPOSED DECKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes traffic coatings for the following applications:
1.
2.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
A.
B.
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete substrates.

Division 03 Section "Concrete Topping" for traffic-bearing toppings applied over base
slabs or precast concrete units.
Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for permanent metal forms for concrete substrates.
Division 07 Section "Expansion Control" for expansion and seismic joints in surfaces to
receive traffic coatings.
Division 09 Section "Resinous Flooring" for general-use commercial, high-performance
resinous floorings.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each product indicated.
LEED Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Vehicular traffic.
Pavement markings.
Product Test Reports for Credit SS 7.2: For traffic coatings that are roof coverings,
documentation indicating compliance with Solar Reflectance Index requirement.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.2: For interior field-applied traffic coatings and
pavement-marking paints, documentation including printed statement of VOC
content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For interior traffic coatings and pavementmarking paints, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using SmallScale Environmental Chambers."
Shop Drawings: Show extent of each traffic coating. Include details for treating substrate
joints and cracks, flashings, deck penetrations, and other termination conditions.
Page 2 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
Indicate layout of pavement markings.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish indicated.
E.
Samples for Verification: For each type of traffic coating required, prepared on rigid backing
and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.
1.
Provide stepped Samples on backing large enough to illustrate buildup of traffic

coatings.
F.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
G.
Material Test Reports: For each traffic coating.
H.
Material Certificates: For each traffic coating, signed by manufacturers.
I.
Maintenance Data: For traffic coatings to include in maintenance manuals. Identify

substrates and types of traffic coatings applied. Include recommendations for periodic
inspections, cleaning, care, maintenance, and repair of traffic coatings.
J.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4
A.
B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications:
Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for installation of traffic coatings required for this Project.
Source Limitations:
1.
2.
C.
Mockups: Apply mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Obtain traffic coatings from a single manufacturer.

Obtain primary traffic coating materials, including primers, from traffic coating
manufacturer. Obtain secondary materials including aggregates, sheet flashings, joint
sealants, and substrate repair materials of type and from source recommended in
writing by primary material manufacturer.
Architect will select one representative surface for each traffic coating and each
substrate to receive traffic coatings. Apply each coating to at least 20 sq. m of each
substrate to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and crack treatment, thickness,
texture, color, and standard of workmanship.
Remove and reapply mockups until they are approved by Architect.
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
Page 3 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
1.5
A.
Before installing traffic coatings, meet with representatives of authorities having

jurisdiction, manufacturer's technical representative, Owner, Architect, consultants,
independent testing agency, and other concerned entities. Review requirements for
traffic coatings. Notify participants at least seven days before conference.

Deliver materials in original packages and containers with seals unbroken and bearing
manufacturer's labels showing the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Manufacturer's brand name.

Type of material.
Directions for storage.
Date of manufacture and shelf life.
Lot or batch number.
Mixing and application instructions.
Color.
B.
Store materials in a clean, dry location protected from exposure to direct sunlight. In storage
areas, maintain environmental conditions within range recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
1.6
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Apply traffic coatings within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not apply traffic coatings to
damp or wet substrates. Recommended substrate temperatures are in the range of +12 deg C
to +35 deg C.
1.
B.
1.7
A.
Do not apply traffic coatings in high humidity conditions (exceeding 85%), or when
such weather conditions are imminent during the application and curing period.
Do not install traffic coating until items that will penetrate membrane have been installed.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which traffic coating manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace traffic coatings that deteriorate during the specified warranty
period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of traffic coating due to unusual
weather phenomena, failure of prepared and treated substrate, formation of new substrate
cracks exceeding 1.6 mm in width, fire, vandalism, or abuse by maintenance equipment, and
truck traffic.
1.
Deterioration of traffic coatings includes the following:

a.
b.
c.
Adhesive or cohesive failures.

Abrasion or tearing failures.
Surface crazing or spalling.
Page 4 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

d.
2.
Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids into
deck substrate.
Warranty Period 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS
Traffic Coatings: Complying with ASTM C 957.
B.
Material Compatibility:
Provide primers; base, intermediate, and topcoats; and
miscellaneous materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and
field experience.
2.2
A.
TRAFFIC COATING
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
1.
Elongation DIN 53504 100%
2.
Shore A Hardness 80
3.
Taber abration DIN 51963 17mg
4.
Skid resistance ( TRL Test to BS 7976-2:2002) >95
5.
Crack Bridging ( To ASTM C 836) Tested for Dynamic Crack bridging
6.
Tensile Strength <4.5N/sqm
7.
Fire Resistance B2
B.
Primer: Manufacturer's standard factory-formulated primer recommended for substrate and

conditions indicated.
1.
Material: Epoxy primer with Polyurethane base and topcoats.
C.
Primer and Base Coats: Primer is multi component epoxy. Base Coat is multi-component,
liquid polyurethane elastomeric membrane.
D.
Intermediate Coat: Single-component, liquid polyurethane elastomer.
E.
Topcoat: Single-component, liquid polyurethane elastomer with UV inhibitors.

1.
F.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
Component Coat Consumption: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service

conditions indicated, but not less than the following (measured excluding aggregate):
1.
2.
Primer: 0.15-0.3kg/m2 depending on surface texture and porosity.

Wearing aggregate: SRA Aggregate total of 1.6kg/m2.
Page 5 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.
4.
5.
G.
Base: Elastomeric waterproofing membrane not less than 0.5kg/m2 and suffice
enough to provide the required crack bridging properties.
Intermediate: 0.35kg/m2 minimum
Topcoat: 0.4kg/m2 per coat (2 coats minimum)
Aggregate: Mastertop SRA No.3 graded high quality quartz aggregate with a particle size
in the range of 0.3-0.9 mm. It is used as a multi-function mechanical key, wear enhancer and
to provide skid resistance.
1.
Spreading Rate:
As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service
conditions indicated, but not less than the following:
a.
b.
2.3
A.
Primer Coat: 0.6 kg/m2.

Base:1.0kg/m2
Joint Sealants: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
B.
Adhesive: Contact adhesive recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer.
C.
Reinforcing Strip: Fiberglass mesh recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer.
2.4
A.
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Pavement-Marking Paint: Mastertop TC 44 LM based on a mixture of modified Alkyd resin
and chlorinated rubber.
B.
Select colors from options in first subparagraph below; show locations of each on Drawings if
more than one color is required.
a.
Color: Standard colour as per manufacturers colour chart.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and for other
conditions affecting performance of traffic coatings.
1.
2.
3.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions
detrimental to performance.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates.
Begin coating application only after minimum concrete curing and drying period
recommended by traffic coating manufacturer has passed, after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected, and after surfaces are dry.
Page 6 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

4.
Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture using either of the following
options:
a.
b.
5.
Test for moisture vapor transmission by plastic sheet method according to

ASTM D 4263.
Test for moisture content by measuring with an electronic moisture meter.
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Clean and prepare substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written
recommendations to produce clean, dust-free, dry substrate for traffic coating application.
B.
Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings, deck drains, and other deck substrate
penetrations to prevent spillage, leaking, and migration of coatings.
C.
Concrete Substrates: Using a Captive Blasting Machine, mechanically prepare concrete

surfaces to a uniform profile according to ASTM D 4259. Do not acid etch.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete.
Remove concrete fins, ridges, and other projections.
Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, formrelease agents, and other incompatible materials that might affect coating adhesion.
Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean surfaces
according to ASTM D 4258.
3.3
A.
TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS

Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through traffic
coatings and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1127 and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Provide sealant cants at penetrations and at reinforced and non-reinforced, deck-to-wall butt
joints.
C.
Terminate edges of deck-to-deck expansion joints with preparatory base-coat strip.
3.4
A.

Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and
manufacturer's written recommendations. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from
joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
1.
3.5
Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation.
TRAFFIC COATING APPLICATION
Page 7 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

A.
Apply traffic coating material according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written
recommendations.
1.
2.
Start traffic coating application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.

Verify that wet film thickness of each component coat complies with requirements of the
Manufacturers recommendations (random sampling).
B.
Apply traffic coatings to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to height indicated,
and omit aggregate on vertical surfaces.
C.
Cure traffic coatings according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

contamination and damage during application and curing stages.
Prevent
3.6
A.
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Do not apply traffic paint for striping and other markings until traffic coating has cured
according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Apply traffic paint for striping and other markings with mechanical equipment to produce
uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates for a minimum dry film
thickness of 100 microns (0.1mm).
3.7
A.

Final Traffic Coating Inspection: Arrange for traffic coating manufacturer's technical
personnel to inspect membrane installation on completion.
1.
B.
3.8
A.
B.
Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
PROTECTING AND CLEANING
Protect traffic coatings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
Clean spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
Page 8 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 071900 WATER REPELLENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL..
SUMMARY......
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
PRODUCTS
PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS......
2
2
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXECUTION..
APPLICATION.....
CLEANING........
3
3
3
4
4
Page 1 of 4
Water Repellents
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 071900 WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes penetrating water-repellent treatments for the following vertical and
horizontal surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.2
A.
B.
Cast-in-place concrete.
Precast concrete.
Cast stone.
Concrete unit masonry.
Natural stone.
Portland cement plaster (stucco).
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Samples: For each type of water repellent and substrate indicated.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS

Silane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 20 percent or more solids of
alkyltrialkoxysilanes; with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier;
and with 400 g/L or less of VOCs.
B.
Silane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 20 percent or more solids of

alkyltrialkoxysilanes; with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier;
and with 600 g/L or less of VOCs.
C.
Siloxane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 10 percent or more solids of

oligomerous alkylalkoxysiloxanes; with alcohol, ethanol, mineral spirits, water, or other
proprietary solvent carrier; and with 400 g/L or less of VOCs.
Page 2 of 4
Water Repellents
Project:
Works:
Title:

D.
Siloxane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 10 percent or more solids of

oligomerous alkylalkoxysiloxanes; with alcohol, ethanol, mineral spirits, water, or other
proprietary solvent carrier; and with 600 g/L or less of VOCs.
E.
Silane/Siloxane-Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, silane and siloxane blend with
400 g/L or less of VOCs.
F.
Silane/Siloxane-Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, silane and siloxane blend with
600 g/L or less of VOCs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent manufacturer's
requirements. Check moisture content in representative locations by method
recommended by manufacturer.
Inspect for previously applied treatments that may inhibit penetration or performance of
water repellents.
Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be trapped
beneath the application of water repellent.
Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water
repellent.
B.
Test pH level according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure

chemical bond to silica-containing or siliceous minerals.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could
impair penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent manufacturer's
B.
Coordination with Mortar Joints: Do not apply water repellent until pointing mortar for joints
adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment has been installed and cured.
C.
Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints
adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.
1.
Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and
compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and
sealant materials identical to those required.
Page 3 of 4
Water Repellents
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.3
A.
APPLICATION
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product
and application method to be used.
B.
Apply a heavy-saturation coating of water repellent, on surfaces indicated for treatment, using
low-pressure spray to the point of saturation. Remove excess material; do not allow material to
puddle beyond saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application
procedure unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Precast Concrete and Cast Stone: At Contractor's option, first application of water
repellent on units may be completed before installing them. Mask mortar and sealant
bond surfaces to prevent water repellent from migrating onto joint surfaces.
C.
Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of
surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions
are not applicable to Project conditions.
3.4
A.
CLEANING
Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by
water-repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades
caused by water-repellent application.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.

Page 4 of 4
Water Repellents
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
GENERAL..
RELATED DOCUMENTS....
SUMMARY......
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING........
QUALITY ASSURANCE.......
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
PRODUCTS
INSULATION RQUIREMENTS......
FOAM PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
MINERAL WOOL BLANKET INSULATION.
SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION..
RADIANT BARRIERS
VAPOR RETARDERS...
INSULATION FASTENERS.
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION, GENERAL..........
INSTALLATION OF BELOW GRADE INSULATION
INSTALLATION OF CAVITY WALL INSULATION..
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION..
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION...
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATE...
INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS.
PROTECTION..
INSULATION USES / OPTIONS..
6
6
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
9
Page 1 of 10
Thermal Insulation
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
1.3
A.
B.
Foam-plastic board insulation.

Mineral-wool board insulation.
Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
Mineral-wool blanket insulation.
Spray polyurethane foam insulation.
Radiant barriers.
Vapor retarders.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 042000 "Unit Masonry"
2.
Section 074113 Standing seam Metal roof
ACTION SUBMITTALS
LEED Submittals:
1.
1.4
A.
testing agency, for each product.
1.5
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
Page 2 of 10
Thermal Insulation
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.6
A.
B.

Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and
concealment.
Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to
Project site before installation time.
Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each
area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
INSULATION REQUIREMENTS
1.
2.
3.
Roofing: 150mm (XPS)

Insulated walls 110mm (EPS)
Acoustic insulation (Mineral wool insulation)
a.
Ceiling lining: 50mm Acoustic lining
2.2
A.
FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation (XPS): ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive
strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75
and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1.
Type VII, 60 psi (414 kPa).
2.
Thermal resistance should achieve 4.5 m2k/w at 150mm thick
B.
Expanded Polystyrene board insulation (EPS): ASTM C 578, with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1.
Type VIII, 20 psi (138 kPa).
2.
Thermal resistance should achieve 1.28 m2k/w at 50mm thick
3.
Average density: 25 kg / cu.m
C.
Sustainability Requirements:
1.
2.
Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and
no formaldehyde, no chlorine
Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less
than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde.
Page 3 of 10
Thermal Insulation
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.3
A.
MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
B.
Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled

content not less than 25 percent.
C.
Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25
and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
D.
Reinforced-Foil-Faced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective

faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84);
Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim
polyethylene.
2.4
A.
SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION

Closed-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, with maximum flamespread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

1.
2.5
A.
Minimum density of 24 kg/cu. m, thermal resistivity of 43 K x m/W at 24 deg C.
RADIANT BARRIERS
Sheet Radiant Barriers: ASTM C 1313 and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Interior Radiation Control Coating System: Silver-colored, not thickness-dependent, lowemissivity, solvent or water-based coating; formulated for adherence to substrates indicated
and with a surface emittance value of 0.25 or less as measured per ASTM C 1371.
1.
2.6
A.
Sheet Construction: Foil on one side of substrate.

Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes
of 5 and 10, respectively.
Water-Vapor Transmission:

VAPOR RETARDERS
Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 0.15 mm, 0.25 mm thick, with maximum
permeance rating of 7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m.
Page 4 of 10
Thermal Insulation
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Two outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to

an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not
less than 12 kg/100 sq. m, with maximum permeance rating of 2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m.
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following
C.
Fire-Retardant, Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Two outer layers of polyethylene

film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nonwoven grid of nylon cord
or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 10 kg/100 sq. m, with maximum permeance
rating of 7.56 ng/Pa x s x sq. m and with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of not
more than 5 and 60, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1.
D.

Foil-Polyester-Film Vapor Retarders: Two layers of 0.013-mm thick polyester film laminated to
an inner layer of 0.025-mm thick aluminum foil, with maximum water-vapor transmission rate
in flat condition of 0.0 g/h x sq. m and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.
1.

E.
Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder

manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
F.
Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.
G.
Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25,
Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates.
H.
Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and

has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.
2.7
A.
INSULATION FASTENERS
Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type plastic Anchors: capable of holding insulation of specified
thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place.
B.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking plastic washers, sized as required to hold

insulation securely in place, but not less than 38 mm square or in diameter.
1.
Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations:
a.
Crawl spaces.
Page 5 of 10
Thermal Insulation
Project:
Works:
Title:

b.
c.
d.
Ceiling plenums.
Attic spaces.
Where indicated.
C.
Insulation Standoff: Spacer for fitting over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space
of between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached.
D.
Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely
to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.
1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PREPARATION
Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including
removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation
attachment.
3.2
A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to
ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C.
Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around
obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D.
Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness
indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION

On vertical surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
B.
If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 610 mm below exterior

grade line.
On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
Page 6 of 10
Thermal Insulation
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
3.4
A.
If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 610 mm in from exterior

walls.
INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 610 mm o.c.
both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation
between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press
units firmly against inside substrates.
1.
Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall

ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."
B.
Cellular-Glass Board Insulation: Install with closely fitting joints using adhesive pad
attachment method according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5
A.
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's
written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive
or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B.
Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or
sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in
completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
C.
Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members

according to the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
Maintain 76-mm clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for
or protected from contact with insulation.
Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces
at vented eaves.
For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 2438 mm, support unfaced
blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to
flanges of metal studs.
For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as
follows:
a.
With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling
flanges to sides of framing members.
Page 7 of 10
Thermal Insulation
Project:
Works:
Title:

b.
7.
Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and

seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.
a.
b.
D.
With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of
adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is
installed over it.
Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed as indicated on Drawings.

Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed as indicated on Drawings.
Loose-Fill Insulation:
Apply according to ASTM C 1015 and manufacturer's written
instructions. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to
uniform density, but do not compact excessively.
1.
For cellulosic-fiber loose-fill insulation, comply with CIMA's Bulletin #2, "Standard
Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation."
E.
Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and
electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not
indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face
of studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer.
F.
Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1.
Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum
volume equaling a density of approximately 40 kg/cu. m.
2.
Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6
A.
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION

Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket
insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation 1219 mm up
either side of partitions.
3.7
A.
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATES

Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation
anchors as follows:
1.
2.
Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive

according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to
insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and
application indicated.
Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between
concrete substrate and insulation.
Page 8 of 10
Thermal Insulation
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.
4.
3.8
A.
B.
After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position
over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking
care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness.
Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped
washers to tips of spindles.
INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS

Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders
to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place
with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover
miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs.
1.
2.
3.
Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of
wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 406 mm o.c.
Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing
including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings.
Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vaporretarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape.
Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.
Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder
fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
C.
Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and
vapor retarders.
D.
Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.
3.9
A.
PROTECTION
Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures
where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent
construction immediately after installation.
3.10
A.
INSULATION USES / OPTIONS

Insulation Type, extruded-polystyrene board insulation: roof below high u-value option
B.
Insulation Type, mineral-wool board insulation: roof below stainless steel cladding
C.
Insulation Type, Polyurethane spray foam insulation: gap-filling
Page 9 of 10
Thermal Insulation
Project:
Works:
Title:

D.
Insulation Type, expanded-polystyrene board insulation: insulated masonry blocks high uvalue option
Page 10 of 10
Thermal Insulation
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 072726 FLUID-APPLIED, AIR AND WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
GENERAL..
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS..
SECTION INCLUDES.......
RELATED SECTIONS.....
DFINITIONS..........
REFERENCES........
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
PROJECT / SITE CONDITION..
WARRANTY
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
5
5
6
6
7
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS.......
MATERIALS..
AUXILLARY MATERIALS..
7
7
7
7
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
EXECUTION..
MIXING
APPLICATION....
CLEANING AND PROTECTION..
7
7
8
8
8
9
Page 1 of 10
FLUID-APPLIED, AIR AND WATERRESISTIVE BARRIER
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 072726 FLUID-APPLIED, AIR AND WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Instructions to Bidders and Division One
General Requirements shall be read in conjunction with and govern this section.
B.
This specification shall be read as a whole by all parties concerned. Each Section may
contain more or less than the complete Work of any trade. The Contractor is solely
responsible to make clear to the Subcontractors the extent of their Work.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Ready mixed resilient, fluid applied, air/water-resistive barrier for use behind most exterior
wall claddings.
B. Materials and installation methods to bridge and seal air leakage pathways and gaps
including:
1. Connections of walls to foundations
2. Connections of walls to the roof air barrier
3. Seismic and expansion joints
4. Openings and penetrations in the building envelope
5. Masonry ties, screws, bolts and similar penetrations
6. All other leakage pathways through opaque walls
C. Materials and installation methods to create a water-resistive barrier suitable for use as part
of a secondary drainage system for brick, natural and manufactured stone veneers, EIFS,
metal composite, siding and most other cladding systems.
D. Refer to all drawings and other sections of this specification to determine the type and extent
of work therein affecting the work of this section, whether or not such work is specifically
mentioned herein.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 00 00 Concrete substrate
B. Section 04 00 00 Masonry substrate
C. Section 05 40 00 Cold-formed metal framing
D. Section 06 11 00 Wood framing
E. Section 06 16 00 Sheathing
,
F. Section 07 62 00 Sheet metal flashing and trim
G. Section 07 65 00 Flexible flashing
H. Section 07 90 00 Joint protection
I.
Section 08 00 00 Openings
J. Section 08 50 00 Windows
K. Section 09 22 16 Non-structural metal framing
L. Section 09 29 00 Gypsum board
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A. Air Barrier Material: A building material that is designed and constructed to provide the
primary resistance to airflow through an air barrier assembly.
B. Air Barrier Assembly: The collection of air barrier materials and auxiliary materials applied
to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air
movement through the wall.
C. Water-Resistive Barrier Assembly: The collection of water-resistive materials and accessories
that direct incidental water that may pass the primary rain screen out of the wall cladding
while providing protection for underlying sheathing materials.
1.5
REFERENCES
A. Building Codes
Page 2 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
B.
1.6
ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria for Water Resistive Coatings used as Water Resistive
Barrier Over Exterior Sheathing, AC 212
ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria for Flexible Flashing Materials, AC 148/AAMA 711-07
Massachusetts Building Code
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards

1. C920 Specifications for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
2. C1177 Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing
3. C1396 Standard Specification for Gypsum Board
4. C1193 Guide for Use of Joint Sealants
5. D412 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension
6. D4258 Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating
7. D4263 Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method
8. D4541 Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable
Adhesion Testers
9. E84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
10. E96 Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
11. E283 Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences across the Specimen
12. E330 Standard Test Method for the Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Pressure Difference
13. E331 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
14. E1105 Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed
Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air
Pressure Difference
15. E2178 Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials
16. E2357 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies
A. General: Air/water-resistive barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vaporimpermeable air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the
exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. At wall cladding transitions, the
air/water-resistive barrier shall form a continuous air barrier and shall make provision for
water drainage, either by creation of an unobstructed drainage plane that extends across
the cladding transition or by flashing to discharge to the exterior at the transition. Air barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits, or interruption of the drainage plane.
B. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Building Code Requirements: Comply with the following
subsections of 780 CMR 13, Section 1304.3 Air Leakage.
1304.3.1
Air Barriers:
The building envelope shall be designed and constructed with a continuous air
barrier to control air leakage into, or out of the conditioned space. An air
barrier shall also be provided for interior partitions between conditioned space
and space designed to maintain temperature or humidity levels which differ
from those in the conditioned space by more than 50% of the difference
between the conditioned space and design ambient conditions. The air barrier
shall have the following characteristics:
1. It must be continuous, with all joints made airtight.

2
2. It shall have an air permeability not to exceed 0.02 l/m under a pressure
2
differential of 75 Pa (equal to 0.004 cfm/ ft @ 1.57 psf) when tested in
accordance with ASTM E2178.
3. It shall be capable of withstanding positive and negative combined design
wind, fan and stack pressures on the envelope without damage or
Page 3 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
displacement, and shall transfer the load to the structure. It shall not displace
adjacent materials under full load.
4. It shall be durable or maintainable.
5. The air barrier shall be joined in an airtight and flexible manner to the air barrier material of adjacent systems, allowing for the relative movement of systems
due to thermal and moisture variations and creep. Connection shall be made
between:
a. Foundation and walls.
b. Walls and windows or doors.
c. Different wall systems.
d. Wall and roof.
e. Wall and roof over unconditioned space.
f. Walls, floor and roof across construction, control and expansion joints.
g. Walls, floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations.
6. All penetrations of the air/water-resistive barrier and paths of air infiltration/exfiltration shall be made airtight.
Fluid-Applied Membrane Performance Requirements
TEST
REQUIREMENTS
Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies - Maximum 0.21 l/s.m ASTM E 2357 (0.04 cfm/ft2
@ 1.57 psf)
Air Permeance of Building Materials - Maximum 0.02 l/s.m2 @ 75 Pa ASTM E 2178
(0.004 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57 psf)
Rate of Air Leakage - Maximum 0.02 l/sm2 @ 75 Pa ASTM E 283 (0.004 cfm/ft2 @ 1.57
psf)
Pull-Off Strength of Coatings - Minimum 110 kPa (15.9 psi) adhesion or substrate ASTM D
4541 failure
Surface Burning Flame spread <25
ASTM E 84 - Smoke developed < 450
Nail Sealability - No water penetration at galvanized roofing nail
ASTM D 1970 - penetration under 127 mm (5) head of water after 3 days at 4 C (40 F)
Water Vapor Transmission - Maximum 0.1 perms
ASTM E 96 Method A
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) - Maximum 50 g/l
ASTM D 2369
ICC-ES AC 212 Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Coatings used as Water-Resistive Barriers over Exterior Sheathing
Sequential Testing - Structural, Racking, Restrained Environmental Conditioning and Water Penetration
1. Structural: ASTM E 1233 Procedure A - No cracking at joints or interface of flashing after 90 min @ 137 Pa
(2.86 psf)
2. Racking: ASTM E 72 - No cracking at joints or interface of flashing after 90 min @ 137 Pa (2.86 psf)
3. Restrained Environmental - No cracking at joints or interface of flashing after 90 min @ 137 Pa (2.86 psf)
Conditioning: ICC-ES AC 212
4. Water Penetration: ASTM E 331 - No water penetration after Structural, Racking and Restrained Environmental Conditioning
Conditioning
Sequential Testing - Weathering
1. UV Light Exposure: ICC-ES AC 212
No cracking or bond failure to substrate
2. Accelerated Aging: ICC-ES AC 212
No cracking or bond failure to substrate
3. Hydrostatic Pressure Test:
No water penetration AATCC 127-1985
Freeze-Thaw - No visible effects (cracking checking, delamination, erosion) after 10 cycles when viewed at 5X
magnification
Page 4 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

ASTM E 2485 (Method B)

Water Resistance - No sign of deleterious effects after 14 day exposure
ASTM D 2247
Tensile Bond - >103 kPa (15 psi) avg; no failure of the lamina after 10 cycles
ASTM C 297
Tensile Bond (before & after freeze-thaw) - >103 kPa (15 psi) avg; no failure of the lamina after 10 cycles
freeze-thaw
ASTM C 297
ICC-ES AC 148 Acceptance Criteria for Flexible Flashing Materials
Sequential Testing - Weathering
1. UV Light Exposure: ICC-ES AC 148 - No visible surface or structural changes when observed under 5X
magnification
2. Accelerated Aging: ICC-ES AC 148 - No visible surface or structural changes when observed under 5X
magnification
3. Hydrostatic Pressure Test: - No signs of failure after UV and Accelerated Aging AATCC 127-1985
Peel Adhesion - All samples meet the minimum requirement of .263 N/mm (1.5 lbs/in)
ASTM D 3330 Method F
UV Exposure - No visible surface or structural changes when observed under 5X magnification
Accelerated Aging - No visible surface or structural changes when observed under 5X magnification
After Elevated Temperature - No visible surface or structural changes when observed under 5X magnification
After Water Immersion - No signs of failure after UV and Elevated Temperature Exposure
Nail Sealability after Thermal Cycling - No water penetration at galvanized roofing nail penetration under 32
mm (1.25) head ASTM D 1970 (Modified), AAMA 711 of water after 24 hours at 4 C (40 F)
Tensile Strength after UV Exposure - All samples meet the minimum requirement of 3.5 N/mm (20 lbs/in)
ASTM D 5034, AAMA 711
Cold Temperature Pliability - No cracking after bending around a 25 mm (1) mandrel after 2 hour exposure to -18
C (0 F) ASTM D 1970, AAMA 711
Resistance to Peeling - No signs of distress or failure after 24 hours of exposure at room temperature, 50 C (122
F),
AAMA 711 65 C (149 F), 80 C (176 F)
1.7
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section [01 33 00]
B. Manufacturers technical data sheets and material safety data sheets for products and
accessories.
C. Shop drawings showing locations and extent of air/water-resistive barrier system including
details of typical conditions, intersection and transitions with other envelope systems and
materials.
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Minimum 10 - years experience in the production and marketing of
B. waterproofing materials.
C. Air/water-resistive barrier membrane manufacturer shall provide an ICC-ES Evaluation
Report confirming compliance with AC 212 Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive
Coatings used as Water-Resistive Barriers over Exterior Sheathing.
D. Applicator Qualifications: An applicator experienced in applying air barrier materials
similar in material, design and extent to those indicated for this project, whose work has
resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
1.
Knowledgeable in the proper use and handling of BASF Wall Systems products.
2.
Employ skilled installers who are experienced and knowledgeable in air/water
Page 5 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

resistive barrier application, and familiar with the requirements of the specified work.
Provide the proper equipment, manpower and supervision on the job site to install the
system in compliance with BASF Wall Systems published specifications.
E. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code requirements for air/water-resistive
barriers.
F. Primary materials including fluid-applied air/water-resistive barrier membrane, sheathing
fabric, flashing primer and transition membranes shall be sourced from one manufacturer
regularly engaged in production of air barrier materials.
G. Mockups: Before beginning installation of air/water-resistive barrier, provide air/waterresistive barrier work for exterior wall assembly mockups, incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, window, door frame and sill, insulation, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and
penetrations of air barrier membrane.
1. Coordinate construction of mockup to permit inspection by Owners testing agency of
air/water-resistive barrier before external insulation and cladding is installed.
2. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with project requirements, reconstruct
mockups and apply air/water resistive barrier until mockups are approved.
H. Pre-Installation Conference: A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to commencement of field operations to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and
to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. Pre-installation conference shall include the Architect, General Contractor and Applicator. Agenda for meeting shall include
but not be limited to the following:
1. Review of submittals.
2. Review of surface preparation, minimum curing period and installation procedures.
3. Review of special details and flashings.
4. Sequence of construction, responsibilities and schedule for subsequent operations.
5. Review of mock-up requirements.
6. Review of inspection, testing, protection and repair procedures.
I.
Coordination of trades
1. The Architect, General Contractor and Applicator shall evaluate adjacent materials such as
windows, doors, etc. for conformance to project details. Adjacent trades shall provide
scaled shop drawings for review by the Architect.
2. The General Contractor shall make provision for installation of air seals between the primary air barrier and other wall components (penetrations, etc.) in order to maintain continuity
of an air barrier system.
3. The Applicator shall provide protection of rough openings before installing windows,
doors, and other penetrations through the wall.
3.
1.9

A. Deliver, store and handle products under provisions of Section [01 65 00] [01 66 00] [ ].
B. Deliver all materials in original unopened packages with manufacturers labels intact.
C. Protect all materials during transportation and installation to avoid physical damage.
D. Store materials in cool, dry place protected from freezing. Store at no less than 4C (40F).
E. Store materials away from direct sunlight and extreme heat.
F. Store all accessory products in a cool, dry place protected from exposure to moisture.
1.10 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Do not apply materials in ambient temperatures below 4C (40F). Provide properly vented,
supplementary heat during installation and drying period when temperatures less than 4C
(40F) prevail.
B. Do not apply materials to frozen surfaces.
C. Maintain ambient temperature at or above 4C (40F) during and at least 24 hours after
application of all materials and until dry.
Page 6 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.11 WARRANTY
A. Provide the Manufacturers minimum 5-year Limited Materials warranty under provisions of
Section [01 70 00]
1. Comply with Manufacturers applicator registration requirements and notification
procedures to assure qualification for warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
The fluid applied vapor-impermeable, air/water-resistive barrier membrane, sheathing fabric,
transition membrane and flashing primer shall be obtained or approved as a single-source from
the membrane manufacturer to ensure system compatibility and integrity.
2.2
MATERIALS
A. Fluid-applied air/water-resistive barrier membrane.
B. SHEATHING FABRIC reinforced non-woven polyester fabric.
C. Transition membranes: TF MEMBRANE polyester-faced 30-mil thick self-sealing, self-healing
rubberized asphalt coating; TF WRAP 20-mil thick self-sealing rubberized asphalt coating
laminated to polyethylene film.
D. Flashing Primer: FLASHING PRIMER water-based primer.
2.3
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Flashing: provide flashing that complies with prevailing local building codes.
C. Sealant: must meet ASTM C920 criteria and be approved for this application by the sealant
manufacturer.
D. Polyurethane Foam Sealant: Approved by polyurethane foam sealant manufacturer for
compatibility with air/water-resistive barrier materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. General Contractor shall verify project site conditions under provisions of Section [01 00 00].
B. Walls
1. Substrates
a. Air/water-resistive barrier acceptable substrates: ASTM C1177 type sheathingsWall
sheathing must be securely fastened per applicable building code and sheathing manufacturers requirements.
b. Examine surfaces to receive air/water-resistive barrier and verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry, clean, sound, and free of releasing agents, paint, or other residue or coatings. Verify substrate is flat, free of fins or planar irregularities greater than
6.4 mm in 3 m (1/4 in 10). Verify that no excess mortar exists on masonry ties, shelf
angles and other obstructions.
c. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture.
d. Verify that masonry joints are struck flush and completely filled with mortar.
2. Flashings
a. All flashings must be installed in accordance with specific design and building code requirements. Where appropriate, end-dams must be provided.
b. Openings must be flashed prior to window/door, HVAC, etc. installation. Windows and
openings shall be flashed according to design and building code requirements.
c. Individual windows that are ganged to make multiple units require continuous head
Page 7 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

flashing and the joints between the units must be fully sealed.
3. Kick-out flashing
Kick-out flashing must be installed leak-proof and angled (min 100) to allow for proper
drainage and water diversion.
4. Air Seals
Install between the primary air/water-resistive barrier and other wall components (penetrations, etc.) in order to maintain continuity of the air barrier system.
A. Report all unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor. Application of fluid-applied
air/water-resistive barrier shall not proceed until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Protect all surrounding areas and surfaces from damage and staining during application of
air/water-resistive barrier.
B. Protect finished work at end of each day.
3.3
MIXING
General: No additives are permitted unless specified in product mixing instructions. Close containers when not in use. Prepare in a container that is clean and free of foreign substances. Do
not use a container which has contained or been cleaned with a petroleum-based product.
Clean tools and equipment with water immediately after use. Dried material can only be removed mechanically.
3.4
APPLICATION
General: Apply products in accordance with current application procedures and in accordance
with project requirements. Refer to Wall Systems Air/Water-Resistive/Vapor Barrier Application
Guidelines technical bulletin
A.
Air/water-resistive barrier
1. Substrate shall be installed per substrate manufacturers instructions. Substrate shall be
dry, clean, sound and free of release agents, paint or other residue or coatings. Verify
substrate is flat, free of fins or planar irregularities greater than 6.4 mm in 3 m (1/4 in
10). Unsatisfactory conditions shall be reported to the general contractor and corrected before application of the air/water-resistive barrier materials.
2. Wrap openings with sheathing fabric by applying mixed Air/Water barrier solution to
all surfaces and immediately embedding sheathing fabric. If necessary, apply a second
coat of solution over the sheathing fabric ensuring a continuous, void- and wrinkle- free
membrane application (wet-on-wet spray application is acceptable).
3. Spot all fasteners and precoat sheathing joints, terminations, inside and outside corners
with mixed air/water barrier solution. using a 101 mm (4) wide by 20 mm (3/4)
nap roller, brush or spray.
4 a. Immediately place and center SHEATHING FABRIC over wet solution at all sheathing joints, terminations, inside and outside corners, as well as knot holes and
check cracks that may exist in plywood or OSB. Ensure sheathing fabric extends
evenly on both sides of the sheathing joint.
b. Lap sheathing fabric 63.5 mm (2 1/2) minimum at intersections.
c. Allow to dry to the touch before applying solution to entire wall surface. If spraying, wet-on-wet application is acceptable.
5. Apply solution to sheathing fabric, cement-board by National Gypsum and other
cement-boards (ASTM C1325 Type A Exterior), gypsum sheathing (ASTM C79/ ASTM
C1396), plywood, OSB or CMU substrate(s) with a 20 mm (3/4") nap roller or spray
to a consistent, minimum 13 wet mil thickness. Prior to application of the second coat,
visually inspect to assure sheathing surface is blister free and coating is free of
Page 8 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

voids and pinholes. Repair if needed and then apply a second coat after the initial
coating is sufficiently dry. A minimum of two (2) 13-mil wet coats of weather barrier solution is required. SolutionI may be sprayed to a 26-mil thickness in one wet application. Back-rolling may be needed to produce a pinhole-free film. If back-rolling is required, a second spray application may be needed. Note: Refer to Spray Application
technical bulletin for spray application equipment and application instructions.
6. Limit the weather exposure of weather/air barrier solution to a maximum of 180 days.
Verify surfaces are free of dirt, contaminants, or other deleterious conditions before
application of cladding. Report and correct any such conditions prior to cladding application. Dry/cure times of adhesively applied EPS insulation board installed over solution may be prolonged, particularly in cool and/or damp weather. Non-cementitious
adhesives are not recommended for EPS insulation board attachment to ENERSHIELD-I.
Proper application is the responsibility of the user.
B.
Transition material installation

1. Install Weather/air barrier solution and/or TF WRAP/TF MEMBRANE and sealant in
accordance with project details & specifications to form a seal with adjacent
construction and maintain a continuous air/water-resistive barrier.
a. General Contractor shall make provision to coordinate the installation of air
barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure
continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.
b. General Contractor shall make provision to install strip on roofing membrane or
base flashing so that a minimum of 75 mm (3) of coverage is achieved over both
substrates.
2. Apply primer to substrates scheduled to receive transition membrane as required and at
required amount. Apply TF WRAP OR TF MEMBRANE as soon as possible after primer
is dry and tacky. Limit priming to areas that will be covered with TF WRAP or TF
MEMBRANE on the same day. Re-prime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. Using
a wallpaper roller, extension-handled counter top roller or weighted hand roller, firmly
roll the TF WRAP OR TF MEMBRANE to the area being sealed. As the TF WRAP OR TF
MEMBRANE is applied, pull more of the release film from the TF WRAP OR TF
MEMBRANE, exposing the adhesive surface, pressing down on the TF WRAP OR TF
MEMBRANE with a roller and keeping the TF WRAP OR TF MEMBRANE smooth.
3. General Contractor shall make provision to:
a. Connect and seal exterior wall air/water-resistive barrier membrane continuously
to roofing membrane air/water-resistive, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to
floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall
systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other
construction interfaces used in exterior walls, using accessory materials.
b. Apply joint sealants forming part of air/water-resistive barrier assembly within
sealant manufacturers recommended application procedures.
c. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and
doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air/water-resistive barrier membrane
with foam sealant.
4.
Flashing Membranes: As required by project design, prime perimeter frame surfaces
of windows, curtain walls, store fronts, and doors. Apply TF WRAP or TF
MEMBRANE transition strip so that a minimum of 75 mm (3) of coverage is
achieved over both.
5.
Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit
and flatten fish mouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 150 mm
(6) beyond repaired areas in strip direction.
Page 9 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.5

A.
Clean and protect completed construction under provisions of Sections
[01 74 00] [01 76 00]
B.
Applicator shall protect air/water-resistive barrier system from damage during application.
General Contractor shall make provision to protect air/water-resistive barrier during the
remainder of construction period. Repair any damage that may occur after installation in a
manner consistent with the scope and intent of this specification.
C.
Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the
completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of
affected construction.
D.
Remove masking materials after installation.
Page 10 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS...
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS..
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
WARRANTY
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
PRODUCTS
SHEET METALS...
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS..
MANUFACTURED REGLETS.
FABRICATION, GENERAL.
ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATION.
LOW SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATION
STEEP SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS.
WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATION
3
3
4
5
6
7
7
8
9
10
11
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
EXECUTION
UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION..
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
11
11
12
13
14
14
15
Page 1 of 15
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Manufactured reglets with counterflashing.

Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.
Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
Formed steep-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
1.2
A.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site <Insert location>.
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
LEED Submittals:
1.
C.
Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
1.4
A.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.
Include identification of finish for each item.
Include pattern of seams and details of termination points, expansion joints and
expansion-joint covers, direction of expansion, roof-penetration flashing, and
connections to adjoining work.
B.
C.
Sample warranty.
Page 2 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.5
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing
and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
1.
B.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1.
1.7
A.
For copings and roof edge flashings that are SPRI ES-1 tested, shop shall be listed as
able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.
Build mockup of typical roof edge eave, including built-in gutter fascia fascia trim
apron flashing, approximately 3.0 m long.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal
flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
1.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural
movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed
sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B.
Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions
and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C.
Sheet Metal Standard for Copper: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook."
Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
D.
SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings roof edge flashings tested
according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure:
1.
Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.
Page 3 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

E.
Recycled Content of Copper-Sheet Flashing and Trim: Postconsumer recycled content plus onehalf of preconsumer recycled content not less than 40 percent.
F.
Recycled Content of Steel-Sheet Flashing and Trim: Postconsumer recycled content plus onehalf of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
G.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes.
1.
2.2
A.
B.
SHEET METALS
General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by
applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 or H01 temper.
1.
2.
C.
Temperature Change: 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces.
Nonpatinated Exposed Finish: Mill.

Prepatinated Copper-Sheet Finish: as selected by Architect from the manufactures full
range prepatinated according to ASTM B 882.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209M, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with
temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
As-Milled Finish: One-side bright mill.

Alclad Finish: Metallurgically bonded surfacing alloy on both sides, forming aluminum
sheet with reflective luster.
Factory Prime Coating: Where painting after installation is required, pretreat metal with
white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat; minimum dry film
Clear Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm
or thicker.
Color Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018
mm or thicker.
a.
6.
Color: as se;ected by Architect from manufactures full range.
Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a.
b.
Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less

than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and
apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturers' written instructions.
Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
Page 4 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

c.
7.
Siliconized Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel

topcoat; with dry film thickness of not less than 0.005 mm for primer and 0.02
mm for topcoat.
D.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; 4
(polished directional satin) finish.
E.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to

ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating designation prepainted by coil-coating process to
comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1.
2.
Surface: Manufacturer's standard clear acrylic coating on both sides.

Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a.
b.
c.
3.
2.3
A.
Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less

than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and
apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturers' written instructions.
Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
Siliconized Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel
topcoat; with dry film thickness of not less than 0.005 mm for primer and 0.02
mm for topcoat.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt; nonperforated.
B.
Synthetic Underlayment: Laminated or reinforced, woven polyethylene or polypropylene,

synthetic roofing underlayment; bitumen free; slip resistant; suitable for high temperatures over
111 deg C; and complying with physical requirements of ASTM D 226/D 226M for Type I
and Type II felts.
C.
Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 0.76 mm thick, consisting of a slip-resistant

polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified
asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal
temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of
1.
2.
Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 116 deg C or higher.
Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 29 deg C or
lower.
Page 5 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

D.
Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 0.16 kg/sq. m minimum.
2.4
A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and
other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation
and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by
manufacturer of primary sheet metal.
1.
General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers
under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.
Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal
being fastened.
Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching
internal gutter width.
Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze or passivated Series 300
stainless steel.
Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip
galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
Solder:
1.
2.
3.
For Copper: ASTM B 32, content of 0.2 percent.

For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn96, with acid flux of type recommended by
stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead
or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead with maximum lead content of 0.2
percent.
D.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape
with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape
13 mm wide and 3 mm thick.
E.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and
remain watertight.
Page 6 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

F.
Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
G.
Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,

recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted
joints.
H.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.
I.
Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for
application.
2.5
A.
MANUFACTURED REGLETS
Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure interlocking of
separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with
factory-mitered and -welded corners and junctions and with interlocking counterflashing on
exterior face, of same metal as reglet.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering
following:
2.
Material: Stainless steel, 0.48 mm thick Copper, Aluminum, Galvanized steel, 0.56
mm thick.
Finish: Mill.
3.
2.6
A.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and
recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,
metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and
trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.

Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges
folded back to form hems.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed
fasteners on faces exposed to view.
Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1.
2.
Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 25 mm deep, filled
with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
Page 7 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide
for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.
D.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
E.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal
standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
F.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form
seams, and solder.
G.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended
use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
H.
Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal
with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
2.7
A.
ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes,
and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 2400-mm- long sections. Furnish
flat-stock gutter brackets and gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as gutters,
of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less than twice the
gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories
from same metal as gutters.
1.
B.
Accessories: Continuous, removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame and hardware
cloth screen Wire-ball downspout strainer Valley baffles.
Built-in Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, with riveted and soldered joints, complete
with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum
2400-mm- long sections. Fabricate expansion joints and accessories from same metal as
gutters unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Accessories: Continuous, removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame and hardware
cloth screen Bronze wire-ball downspout strainer Wire-ball downspout strainer.
Fabricate from the Following Materials:
a.
b.
C.
Copper: 0.55 mm thick.

Stainless Steel: 0.40 mm hick.
Downspouts: Fabricate round downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitered

elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors. Shop
fabricate elbows.
1.
Hanger Style. See Drawings.
Page 8 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.
D.
Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers to dimensions required, with closure flange trim to
exterior, 100-mm- wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 100 mm beyond cant or
tapered strip into field of roof. Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Aluminum: 0.81 mm thick.

Stainless Steel: 0.40 mm thick.
Galvanized Steel: 0.71 mm thick.
Splash Pans: Fabricate to dimensions and shape required and from the following materials:
1.
2.
2.8
A.

Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and
of dimensions and shape required, complete with outlet tubes. Fabricate from the following
materials:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Fabricate from the following materials:

a.
b.
c.

LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

Roof Edge Flashing Gravel Stop and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 2400-mm- long, but
not exceeding 3.6-m- long sections. Furnish with 150-mm- wide, joint cover plates. Shop
fabricate interior and exterior corners.
1.
a.
b.
c.
B.

Copings: Fabricate in minimum 2400-mm- long, but not exceeding 3.6-m- long, sections.
Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support
edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners. Shop fabricate interior and exterior
corners.
1.
a.
b.
c.

Page 9 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following
materials:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Counterflashing and Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:

1.
2.
3.
E.

Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following materials:

1.
2.
3.
D.
Copper: 0.55 mm thick .

Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.56 mm thick.
Valley Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1.
2.
C.
STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

Apron, Step, Cricket, and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.

Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1.
2.9
A.

Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1.
2.
F.


Eave, Rake, Ridge, and Hip Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
Page 10 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.
3.
2.10
A.
WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 2400-mm- long, but not
exceeding 3.6-m- long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate discontinuous
lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 150 mm beyond each side of wall openings; and
form with 50-mm- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
B.
Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to
extend 100 mm beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 50-mm- high, end
dams. Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
2.
3.
C.


Wall Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following materials:

1.
2.
3.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of
mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed
water, with lapped joints of not less than 50 mm.
B.
Synthetic Underlayment: Install synthetic underlayment, wrinkle free, according to

manufacturers' written instructions, and using adhesive where possible to minimize use of
mechanical fasteners under sheet metal.
C.
Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free.

Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature
restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing
underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of
not less than 150 mm staggered 600 mm between courses. Overlap side edges not less than
90 mm. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
Page 11 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.2
A.
General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet
metal flashing and trim system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts
pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent
separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
1.
2.
C.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform,
neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
Space cleats not more than 300 mm apart. Attach each cleat with at least two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of
buckling and tool marks.
Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
Coat concealed side of stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous
coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious
construction.
Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious
or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at maximum of 3 m with no joints within 600 mm of corner or intersection.
1.
2.
Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 25 mm deep, filled
with sealant concealed within joints.
Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
D.
Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener
manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
E.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to
minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight
installation.
F.
Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply
with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Page 12 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

G.
Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin
edges of sheets with solder to width of 38 mm; however, reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned
surface would show in completed Work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
Do not solder metallic-coated steel and aluminum sheet.

Do not use torches for soldering.
Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely.
Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless steel
and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering.
Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and
neutralization.
Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for copper.
Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.
3.3
A.
ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system
according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of
roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.
B.
Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints. Provide for thermal
expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end
closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.
1.
2.
C.
Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 15.24 m
apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, removable for
cleaning gutters.
Built-in Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints. Provide for thermal expansion.
Slope to downspouts. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant.
1.
2.
Install underlayment layer in built-in gutter trough and extend to drip edge at eaves and
under underlayment on roof sheathing. Lap sides minimum of 50 mm over underlying
course. Lap ends minimum of 100 mm. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses
at least 1830 mm. Fasten with roofing nails. Install slip sheet over underlayment.
Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 15.24 m
apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
D.
Downspouts: Join sections with 38-mm telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners
designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at
approximately 1500 mm o.c.
E.
Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low-slope roofs. Set in asphalt roofing
cement or elastomeric sealant compatible with the substrate.
Page 13 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

F.
Parapet Scuppers: Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to
interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane.
G.
Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall, with elevation of conductor head rim at minimum
of 25 mm below scupper or gutter discharge.
H.
Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration

indicated. Lap joints minimum of 100 mm in direction of water flow.
3.4
A.
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet
metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide
concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work
with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.
B.
Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations
in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge
flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate.
C.
Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited
sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top
edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 100 mm over base flashing. Install
stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
E.
Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.

Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend
counterflashing 100 mm over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 100 mm.
F.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation

of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric butyl sealant and clamp
flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.
3.5
A.
WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of
wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and
louvers.
B.
Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Section 042000

"Unit Masonry."
C.
Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

Section 042000 "Unit Masonry." Section .
Page 14 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

D.
Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar
flashings to extend 100 mm beyond wall openings.
3.6
A.

Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B.
Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C.
Clean off excess sealants.
D.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
Page 15 of 15
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
SUMMARY
ACTION SUBMITTALS
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS...
WARRANTY.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
PRODUCTS
METAL MATERIALS.
ROOF CURBS..
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
ROOF HATCH.
HEAT AND SMOKE VENTS..
2
2
4
4
5
6
7
3.0
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION
REPAIR AND CLEANING..
9
9
10
Page 1 of 10
Roof Accessories
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
A.
Roof curbs.
Equipment supports.
Roof hatches.
Hatch-type heat and smoke vents.
Dropout-type heat and smoke vents.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.
C.
1.3
A.
B.
Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roofmounted items.
1.4
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and maintenance data.
1.5
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
METAL MATERIALS
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating designation.
1.
Mill-Phosphatized Finish: Manufacturer's standard for field painting.
Page 2 of 10
Roof Accessories
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.
3.
4.
B.
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZM150 coated.

1.
2.
3.
C.
Factory Prime Coating: Where field painting is indicated, apply pretreatment and
white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat, with a minimum
dry film thickness of 0.005 mm.
Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish; AAMA 621; system
consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70
percent PVDF resin by weight.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on
finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.025 mm for topcoat.
percent PVDF resin by weight
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on
finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.025 mm for topcoat.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209M, manufacturer's standard alloy for finish required, with
temper to suit forming operations and performance required.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mill Finish: As manufactured.

Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
percent PVDF resin by weight.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film
D.
Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221M, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper
for type of use, finished to match assembly where used, otherwise mill finished.
E.
Stainless-Steel Sheet and Shapes: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
F.
Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M
Page 3 of 10
Roof Accessories
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.2
A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
B.
Acrylic Glazing: ASTM D 4802, thermoformable, monolithic sheet, manufacturer's standard,

Type UVA (formulated with UV absorber), Finish 1 (smooth or polished).
C.
Polycarbonate Glazing: Thermoformable, monolithic polycarbonate sheets manufactured by

extrusion process, burglar-resistance rated according to UL 972 with an average impact
strength of 640 to 854 J/m of width when tested according to ASTM D 256, Method A
(Izod).
D.
Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or
chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 38 mm thick.
E.
Security Grilles: 19-mm diameter, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M steel bars spaced 150 mm o.c.
in one direction and 300 mm o.c. in the other; factory finished with manufacturer's or
fabricator's standard, universal shop primer compatible with substrate and field-applied finish
paint system indicated.
F.
Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and
metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being
fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners.
G.
Sealants: As recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated.
2.3
A.
B.
ROOF CURBS
Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb units with integral spring-type vibration isolators
and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads
and other construction indicated on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and
sealed corner joints, integral metal cant, stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of
roof insulation, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.
Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 2.01 mm thick.
1.
2.
C.
Material: Aluminum sheet, 2.28 mm thick.

1.
2.
D.
Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat .

Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.

Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range..
Material: Stainless-steel sheet, 1.98 mm thick.

1.
Finish: No. 2D, directional polish finish.
Page 4 of 10
Roof Accessories
Project:
Works:
Title:

E.
Construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.4
A.
B.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
Equipment Supports: Internally reinforced metal equipment supports capable of supporting
superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction
indicated on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner
joints, integral metal cant, stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation,
and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.
Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) 2.01 mm thick.
1.
2.
C.

Material: Stainless-steel sheet, 1.98 mm thick.

1.
E.

Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .
Material: Aluminum sheet, 2.28 mm thick.

1.
2.
D.
Insulation: Factory insulated with 38-mmthick glass-fiber board insulation.

Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.
Factory-installed wood nailer at top of curb, continuous around curb perimeter.
On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to
conform to roof profile.
Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 300 mm unless otherwise indicated.
Top Surface: Level around perimeter with roof slope accommodated by sloping the
deck-mounting flange.
Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter curb
height tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surface of perimeter curb is
level. Equip unit with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow.
Security Grille: Provide where indicated.
Finish: No. 2D, directional polish finish .
Construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Insulation: Factory insulated with 38-mmthick glass-fiber board insulation.

Liner: Same material as equipment support, of manufacturer's standard thickness and
finish.
Factory-installed continuous wood nailers 140 mm wide at tops of equipment supports.
Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal
and finish as equipment support.
On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to
conform to roof profile.
Page 5 of 10
Roof Accessories
Project:
Works:
Title:

6.
7.
8.
2.5
A.
Fabricate equipment supports to minimum height of 300 mm unless otherwise

indicated.
Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate each support with height to
accommodate roof slope so that tops of supports are level with each other. Equip
supports with water diverters or crickets on sides that obstruct water flow.
ROOF HATCH
Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated double-walled curbs, welded or
mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing and
weathertight perimeter gasketing, integral metal cant, stepped integral metal cant raised the
thickness of roof insulation, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.
B.
Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 750 by 900 mm 750 by 1370 mm.
C.
Type and Size: Double-leaf lid, 1830 by 2440 mm
D.
Loads: Minimum 1.9-kPa external live load and 0.95-kPa internal uplift load.
1.
E.
Hatch Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 2.01 mm thick.

1.
2.
F.

Hatch Material: Stainless-steel sheet, 1.98 mm thick.

1.
H.

Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .
Hatch Material: Aluminum sheet, 2.28 mm thick.

1.
2.
G.
Dome Glazing: Minimum 1.9-kPa external live load and 0.95-kPa internal uplift load.
Finish: 2D, directional polish finish .
Construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Insulation: Glass-fiber board.

Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard metal
liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid.
Hatch Lid: Glazed, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard metal
liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid.
Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal curb.
On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof
profile.
Page 6 of 10
Roof Accessories
Project:
Works:
Title:

7.
I.
Hatch-Lid Glazing: Double glazing of thickness capable of resisting indicated loads.

1.
2.
3.
J.
Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter
curb height that is tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surfaces of perimeter
curb are level. Equip hatch with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water
flow.
Single-Dome Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range.

Outer Double-Dome Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range.
Inner Double-Dome Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range.
Hardware: Galvanized-steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system,
and padlock hasps inside and outside.
1.
2.
Provide two-point latch on lids larger than 2130 mm.

Provide remote-control operation.
K.
Safety Railing System: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard system including rails, clamps,
fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a complete
installation; attached to roof hatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements and
authorities having jurisdiction.
L.
Ladder-Assist Post: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard device for attachment to roof-access

ladder. Post locks in place on full extension; release mechanism returns post to closed
position.
2.6
A.
HEAT AND SMOKE VENTS

Hatch-Type Heat and Smoke Vents: Manufacturer's standard, with double-walled insulated
curbs, welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, integral condensation
gutter, and cap flashing. Fabricate with insulated double-walled lid and continuous
weathertight perimeter lid gaskets, and equip with automatic self-lifting mechanisms and ULlisted fire-suppression system smoke-detection system.
1.
2.
3.
Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 750 by 1370 mm

Type and Size: Double-leaf lid, 1830 by 2440 mm
a.
b.
4.
5.
When release is actuated, lid shall open against 0.5-kPa snow or wind load
and lock in position.
Hatch-Lid Glazing: Minimum 1.9-kPa external live load and 0.95-kPa internal
uplift load.
Heat and Smoke Vent Standard: Provide units that have been tested and listed to
comply with UL 793 and are FM Approved.
Curb, Framing, and Lid Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) First option in first
subparagraph below applies only to zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
Page 7 of 10
Roof Accessories
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
6.
Curb, Framing, and Lid Material: Aluminum sheet, 2.28 mm thick.

a.
b.
7.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
10.
B.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard No. 2D, directional polish finish .
Construction:
a.
b.
9.

Curb, Framing, and Lid Material: Stainless-steel sheet, 1.98 mm thick.

a.
8.

Color As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .

Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard
metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid.
Hatch Lid: Glazed, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard
metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid.
Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as
metal curb.
Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with
perimeter curb height that is tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top
surfaces of perimeter curb are level. Equip hatch with water diverter or cricket on
side that obstructs water flow.
Hatch-Lid Glazing: Double glazing of thickness capable of resisting indicated loads; As

selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion resistant or hot-dip galvanized; with
hinges, hold-open devices, and independent manual-release devices for inside and
outside operation of lids.
Dropout-Type Heat and Smoke Vents: Manufacturer's standard, gravity operated and
automatic; with double-walled insulated curbs and frame, welded or mechanically fastened
and sealed corner joints, integral condensation gutter, cap flashing, and heat-sensitive dome
glazing that will deform and drop out of vent opening according to heat and smoke vent
standard indicated.
1.
a.
2.
3.
Dome Glazing: Minimum

uplift load.
1.9-kPa external live load and
0.95-kPa internal
Heat and Smoke Vent Standard: Provide units that have been tested and listed to
comply with UL 793 and are FM Approved.
Curb and Framing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 2.01 mm thick.
Page 8 of 10
Roof Accessories
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
4.
Curb and Framing Material: Aluminum sheet, 2.28 mm thick.

a.
b.
5.
c.
d.

Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as
metal curb.
Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with
perimeter curb height that is tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top
surfaces of perimeter curb are level. Equip unit with water diverter or cricket on
side that obstructs water flow.
Dome Glazing: Double polycarbonate glazing of thickness capable of resisting

indicated loads.
a.
b.
c.
8.
Finish: No. 2D, directional polish finish .
Construction:
a.
b.
7.

Curb and Framing Material: Stainless-steel sheet, 1.98 mm thick.

a.
6.

Single-Dome Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

Outer Double-Dome Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
Inner Double-Dome Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion resistant or hot-dip galvanized; with

hinges, hold-open devices, and independent manual-release devices for inside and
outside operation of lids.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. Install roof accessories
1.
2.
Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping,
jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated
loads.
Page 9 of 10
Roof Accessories
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.
4.
B.
Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to

complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or
loosening of fasteners and seals.
Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from
contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1.
2.
Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum stainless-steel roof accessories with

bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious
construction.
Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a
course of polyethylene sheet.
C.
Security Grilles: Weld bar intersections and, using tamper-resistant bolts, attach the ends of
bars to structural frame or primary curb walls.
D.
Seal joints with sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.
3.2
A.
REPAIR AND CLEANING

galvanizing according to ASTM A 780.
B.
Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to
Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
C.
Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
Page 10 of 10
Roof Accessories
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
SUMMARY
ACTION SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS, GENERAL..
SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS..
3
3
4
4
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
EXECUTION...
EXAMINATION
PREPARATION.
APPLICATION..
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.
CLEANING AND REPAIRING
4
4
4
4
5
5
Page 1 of 5
Applied Fireproofing
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
SUMMARY
Section includes sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRM).
1.
2.
Section 078123 "Intumescent Fireproofing" for mastic and intumescent fire-resistive

coatings.
Section 099646 "Intumescent Painting" for intumescent paints that are fire retarding
but not fire resistive.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
LEED Submittals:
1.
2.
1.4
A.
Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, documentation including
printed statement of VOC content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For paints and coatings used inside the
weatherproofing system, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing
and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
B.
Evaluation reports.
C.
1.5
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by
fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install
manufacturer's products according to specified requirements.
Page 2 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of
each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according ASTM E 119 or UL 263 by a

qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
1.
C.
Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise.
VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having
jurisdiction and the following VOC limits when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24):
1.
2.
3.
4.
Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.

Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
D.
Low-Emitting Materials: Fireproofing used within the weatherproofing system shall comply with
the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using
Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
E.
Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.
2.2
A.
SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

SFRM : Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying with
indicated fire-resistance design, and mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar
before conveyance and application or conveyed in a dry state and mixed with atomized
water at place of application.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Application: Designated for exterior use by a qualified testing agency acceptable to

Bond Strength: Minimum 20.59-kPa cohesive and adhesive strength based on field
testing according to ASTM E 736.
Density: Not less than and 350 kg/cu. m and and as specified in the approved fireresistance design, according to ASTM E 605.
Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to
requirements of fire-resistance design or ASTM E 605, whichever is thicker, but not less
than 9 mm.
Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 10 or
less according to ASTM E 84.
Page 3 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
2.3
A.
Compressive Strength: Minimum

68.9 kPa 689 kPa 2068 kPa according to
ASTM E 761.
Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion according to ASTM E 937.
Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 759.
Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to
ASTM E 760.
Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.270 g/sq. m in 24 hours according to
ASTM E 859.
Fungal Resistance: Treat products with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial
formulation to result in no growth on specimens per ASTM G 21 or rating of 10
according to ASTM D 3274 when tested according to ASTM D 3273.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and
are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.
B.
Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer.
C.
Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer
D.
Topcoat: Suitable for application over applied fireproofing; of type recommended in writing
by fireproofing manufacturer for each fire-resistance design.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and
according to each fire-resistance design.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during
application.
B.
Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing
by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in
satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.
3.3
A.
APPLICATION
Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and
products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, sealers,
topcoats, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work.
Page 4 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application
procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as
applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance
ratings indicated.
C.
Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in
each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method
recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.
D.
Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied,
inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications.
3.4
A.

Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special
inspections:
1.
B.
Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
1.
2.
C.
3.5
A.
Test and inspect as required by the IBC, 1704.10.
Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest.
Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results
indicate insufficient thickness, and retest.
Prepare test and inspection reports.

Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of
Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean
exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.
B.
Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.
C.
Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using

manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.
Page 5 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 078123 - INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
SUMMARY
ACTION SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
PRODUCTS
MASTIC AND INTUMESCENT FIRE RESISTIVE COATINGS.
3
3
3
4
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXECUTION..
PREPARATION.
APPLICATION..
4
4
4
5
5
Page 1 of 5
Intumescent Fireproofing
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 078123 - INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
SUMMARY
Section includes mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coatings (MIFRC).
1.
2.
Section 078100 "Applied Fireproofing" for sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRM).

Section 099646 "Intumescent Painting" for intumescent paints that are fire retarding,
but not fire resistive.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
1.
2.
C.
1.4
A.
Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, documentation including
printed statement of VOC content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For paints and coatings, documentation
B.
Evaluation reports.
C.
1.5
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by
fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install
manufacturer's products according to specified requirements.
Page 2 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of
each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263

by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing agency.
1.
C.
Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise.
VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having
jurisdiction and the following VOC limits when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Fireproofing Exterior Coatings: 350 g/L.
D.
Low-Emitting Materials: Fireproofing used within the weatherproofing system shall comply with
E.
Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.
2.2
A.
MASTIC AND INTUMESCENT FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS

MIFRC: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, multicomponent system consisting of
intumescent base coat and topcoat, and complying with indicated fire-resistance design.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Application: Designated for "exterior" "interior general purpose" and "conditioned

interior space purpose" use by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to
requirements of fire-resistance design.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and
50, respectively, or less according to ASTM E 84.
Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard finishes.
a.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range <.
Page 3 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.3
A.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and
are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.
B.
Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer.
C.
Topcoat: Suitable for application over applied fireproofing; of type recommended in writing
by fireproofing manufacturer for each fire-resistance design.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PREPARATION
Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during
application.
B.
Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing
by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in
satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.
C.
For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface

imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of
fireproofing.
3.2
A.
APPLICATION
requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and
according to each fire-resistance design. Verify that objects penetrating fireproofing are
securely attached to substrates and that substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by
ducts, piping, equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing
application.
B.
Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and
products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers,
topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work.
C.
Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in
each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method
recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.
D.
Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied,
inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications.
E.
Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes:
Page 4 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
A.

Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special
inspections:
1.
B.
3.4
A.
Test and inspect as required by the IBC, 1704.11.
Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
1.
2.
C.
Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written

instructions for each finish selected.
Spray-Textured Finish: Finish left as spray applied with no further treatment.
Rolled, Spray-Textured Finish: Even finish produced by rolling spray-applied finish with
a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness.
Skip-Troweled Finish: Even leveled surface produced by troweling spray-applied finish
to smooth out the texture and neaten edges.
Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest.
Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results
indicate insufficient thickness, and retest.

Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of
Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean
exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.
B.
Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.
C.
Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using

manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.
Page 5 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
SUMMARY
ACTION SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS....
PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING...
3
3
3
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION
IDENTIFICATION.
PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING SCHEDULE
4
4
4
5
5
Page 1 of 7
Penetration Firestopping
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
A.
B.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.
2.
C.
B.
1.4
A.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For penetration firestopping sealants and sealant
primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For penetration firestopping selants and
sealant primers, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1.
1.3
A.
Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.

Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
Penetrations in smoke barriers.
Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting

agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit
illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping
manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fireresistance-rated assembly.
Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in
compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to
FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to
comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."
Page 2 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following

requirements:
1.
2.
C.
Penetration firestopping tests are performed a qualified testing agency acceptable to

Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in
"Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems bearing marking of qualified
testing and inspection agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
2.2
A.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire
according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain
original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall
be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating
items if any.
B.
Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479,

based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 2.49 Pa.
1.
C.
Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479,

based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 2.49 Pa.
1.
2.
D.
F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per
UL 1479.
1.
E.
F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
L-Rating: Not exceeding 0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m of penetration opening at 74.7 Pa
at both ambient and elevated temperatures.
Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed

indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
Page 3 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

F.
VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the
following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
1.
2.
3.
Sealants: 250 g/L.

Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
G.
Low-Emitting Materials: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply
with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
H.
Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to
install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by
penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting
agency for firestopping indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B.
Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions

and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
C.
Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials
during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and
depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1.
D.
After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of
firestopping.
Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1.
2.
3.
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
Page 4 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.2
A.
IDENTIFICATION
Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels
permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 150 mm of firestopping edge so labels will be
visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical
fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels
to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.3
A.
The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building

Management of Any Damage."
Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
Date of installation.
Manufacturer's name.
Installer's name.

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of

testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.
C.
Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection
reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
3.4
A.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE

Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.
B.
Where Intertek ETL SEMKO-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers in
Intertek ETL SEMKO's "Directory of Listed Building Products" under "Firestop Systems."
C.
Where FM Global-approved systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers listed in FM
Global's "Building Materials Approval Guide" under "Wall and Floor Penetration Fire Stops."
D.
Firestopping with No Penetrating Items FS-<#>:

1.
2.
3.
E.
UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- F-A- F-B- F-C- W-J- W-L- <Insert four-digit number>
0001-0999.
Intertek ETL SEMKO-Listed Systems: <Insert design numbers>.
FM Global-Approved Systems: <Insert design numbers>.
Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing FS-<#>:

1.
2.
UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- C-BK- F-A- F-B- F-C- F-E- W-J- W-K- W-L- W-N- <Insert
four-digit number> 1001-1999.
Intertek ETL SEMKO-Listed Systems: <Insert design number>.
Page 5 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.
F.
Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing FS-<#>:

1.
2.
3.
G.
2.
3.
2.
3.
2.
3.
UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- F-A- W-L- W-J- <Insert four-digit number> 6001-6999.
FM Global-Approved Systems: <Insert design number>.
Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants FS-<#>:

1.
2.
3.
L.
UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- C-BK- F-A- F-B- F-C- F-E- W-J- W-L- W-N- <Insert fourdigit number> 5001-5999.
Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants FS-<#>:

1.
2.
3.
K.
UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- F-A- F-B- F-C- W-J- W-K- W-L- <Insert four-digit
number> 4001-4999.
Firestopping for Insulated Pipes FS-<#>:

1.
J.
UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- C-BK- F-A- F-B- F-C- F-E- W-J- W-K- W-L- <Insert fourdigit number> 3001-3999.
Firestopping for Cable Trays with Electric Cables FS-<#>:

1.
I.
UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- C-BK- F-A- F-B- F-C- F-E- W-J- W-K- W-L- W-N- <Insert
four-digit number> 2001-2999.
Firestopping for Electrical Cables FS-<#>:

1.
H.
UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- F-A- F-B- F-C- F-E- W-J- W-L- W-N- <Insert four-digit
number> 7001-7999.
Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants FS-<#>:

1.
2.
UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- F-A- F-B- F-C- F-E- W-J- W-L- <Insert four-digit number>
8001-8999.
Page 6 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.

Page 7 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 079100 PREFORMED JOINT SEALS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
SUMMARY
ACTION SUBMITTALS
WARRANTY....
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
PRODUCTS
PREFORMED, FOAM JOINT SEALS..
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS.....
2
2
3
3.0
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION..
PREPARATION.
INSTALLATION
3
3
3
Page 1 of 4
Preformed Joint Seals
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 079100 PREFORMED JOINT SEALS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes preformed, foam joint seals.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each preformed joint seal product.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type and color of preformed joint seal required.
C.
Preformed joint seal schedule.
1.3
A.
B.
1.4
A.
Sample warranties.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace preformed joint seals that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1.
B.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish preformed joint seals to

repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified
in this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PREFORMED, FOAM JOINT SEALS

Preformed, Foam Joint Seals: Manufacturer's standard joint seal manufactured from urethane
or EVA (ethylene vinyl acetate) foam with minimum density of 160 kg/cu. m and
impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed
sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths based on design criteria indicated, with factory- or
field-applied adhesive for bonding to substrates.
1.
Design Criteria:
Page 2 of 4
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.

Minimum Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.
Maximum Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.
Movement Capability: As indicated on Drawings -25 percent/+25 percent.
Joint Seal Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.2
A.
Primer: Material recommended by preformed-joint-seal manufacturer for joint substrates
indicated.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to preformed joint seal
manufacturer, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint
substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote best adhesion to joint
substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with preformed joint seals
and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PREPARATION
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing preformed joint seals
to comply with preformed joint seal manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
1.
2.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by preformed joint seal
manufacturer or as indicated by tests or prior experience.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of adhesive or primer
with adjoining surfaces.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Comply with preformed joint seal manufacturer's written installation instructions for
products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Installation of Preformed, Foam Joint Seals:

1.
Install each length of seal immediately after removing protective wrapping.
Page 3 of 4
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.
3.
4.
Firmly secure compressed joint seals to joint gap side to obtain full bond using exposed
pressure-sensitive adhesive or field-applied adhesive as recommended by
manufacturer.
Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at splices, ends, turns, and
intersections of joints.
For applications at low ambient temperatures, heat foam joint seal material in
compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.
Page 4 of 4
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS.
SUMMARY
SUBMITTALS.
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING..
PROJECT CONDITION..
WARRANTY.
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS..
JOINT SEALANT BACKING..
2
2
2
2
3
4
5
5
5
5
6
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
PRODUCTS
SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS.
URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS.
MS JOINT SEALANTS
PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS
PREFORMED TAPE SEALANTS.
6
6
7
8
8
9
10
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
EXECUTION..
EXAMINATION..
PREPARATION
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS.
CLEANING..
PROTECTION..
JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE.
10
10
10
11
12
13
13
14
Page 1 of 15
Joint Sealants
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes joint sealants for all applications, exterior or interior, included in the Project
documents including those specified by reference to this Section. Types of sealants used in this
Section include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
1. Silicone joint sealants.
2. MS joint sealants.
3. Urethane joint sealant.
4. Acrylic/polyurethane sealants.
5. Preformed joint sealants.
6. Acoustical joint sealants.
B. Related Sections include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets.
2. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems".
3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames".
4. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
5. Sections of Division 9 Specifying suspended ceilings.
6. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints.
7. Other Specifications Sections where cross reference is made to this Section.
C. Definitions:
1. Trafficable Sealant: To qualify for traffic use under ASTM C 920 requirements, elastomeric
sealants must demonstrate a shore A hardness of not less than 25 nor more than 50.
2. Low Modulus: Tensile strength of 310 kPa or less.
3. Medium Modulus: Tensile strength of not less than 310 kPa or more than 517 kPa. Movement capabilities of 50 percent.
4. High Modulus: Tensile strength of more than 517 kPa. Joint movement is limited to 25
percent or less.
5. Testing Laboratory: an independent testing laboratory/ agency approved by the Engineer
to carry out the testing required in this specification.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. LEED/EHS Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants and sealant primrs used inside the weather
proofing system, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
Page 2 of 15
Joint Sealants
Project:
Works:
Title:

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the
and product requirements of the California Department of Public Healths Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor
Sources using Environmental Chambers
C. Installer Certificates: Signed by product manufacturer certifying that installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install his products.
D. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out successfully by
the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturers representative.
E. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's colour charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colours available for each product exposed to view.
F.
Samples for Verification: For each kind and colour of joint sealant required, provide Samples
with joint sealants in 13-mm- wide joints formed between two 150-mm- long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
G. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant colour.
H. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency to demonstrate their capabilities
and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of engineers and employers, and any other information specified or required by
Engineer.
I. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.
J. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.
K. Field quality control test reports.
L. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
M. Warranties
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality System: Provide the products of a manufacturer who holds valid ISO 9001 certification.
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.
D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for
testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
Page 3 of 15
Joint Sealants
Project:
Works:
Title:

1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each kind of material, including joint substrates,
shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that
are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion
to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.
E. Product Testing: Obtain test results for Product Test Reports Paragraph in Submittals
Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a
36-month period preceding the Work.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C
1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM
C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
3. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard
specifications and test methods.
F.
Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated.
3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.
4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative
present.
a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C 1521.
1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;
extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure
for opposite side.
5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data
on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail
adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive
failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements,
will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates
during testing.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Page 4 of 15
Joint Sealants
Project:
Works:
Title:

A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, colour, expiration date, pot life, curing time,
and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent
their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer or are below 5 deg C.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from
joint substrates.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Provide manufacturers standard warranty in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace, without limitations, all or any part of the elastomeric joint sealant assembly that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. Failure includes, but is not limited to: water penetration, adhesive and cohesive
failures, deterioration in sealants; other than due to normal ageing and weathering; and any
other defects in other components of the work.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturers standard but not less than 3 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Extended warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint
sealants from the following:
1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural
settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
1.8 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.9 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
Page 5 of 15
Joint Sealants
Project:
Works:
Title:

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are non-staining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: Closed-cell polyethylene with a surface skin), and of size and
density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
D. Compressible Filler: Cross-linked, closed-cell, non-absorbent, semi-rigid polyethylene that meets
performances specified in ASTM D 1752 and the following requirements:
1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 0.15 N/mm2 to ASTM D 3575.
2. Recovery: Minimum 98% after 50% compression to ASTM D 3575.
3. Water Absorption: Less than 0.05% to ASTM 3575.
4. Weathering Test: No disintegration.
5. Chemical Resistance: Resistant to acids alkalis, oxidizing agents and biological degradation.
1.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application,
as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated
for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
Page 6 of 15
Joint Sealants
Project:
Works:
Title:

C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be non-staining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248
and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
D. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for
joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that are qualified for
the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920, Class 1 or 2.
E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with BS6920 part 1 2000.
F.
Suitability As Sanitary Sealant: Shall be designed and recommended for sealing joints
around shower-tub enclosures, tubs, sinks, urinals whirlpools, plumbing fixtures, rimless
sinks and tile grouting:
1. Testing Standards:
a. ASTM C 920.
b. FDA Regulation No. 21 CFR 177.2600.
c. National Sanitation Foundation (NFS) Standard 51.
G. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
H. Colours of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, medium modulus Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C
920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Weatherseal Sealant: Uses NT, G, A, and O; chemically curing silicone formulation that is
compatible with other system components with which it comes in contact; weather sealsealant, and glazed curtain-wall manufacturers for this use:
2. Application Ambient Temperature Range -25 Deg C to +50 Deg C, as recommended by
sealant manufacturer.
3. Applications weather sealing applications.
4. Minimum proprieties as follows:
Color Translucent
Durometer - Shore A ASTM D 22 = 45 Shore A
Elongation ASTM D 412 = 500 %
Peel Strength ASTM C 794 = 446 kg/m
Room Temperature Cure Hours 168 Hours to 336 Hours
Service Temperature High = 177 Deg C
Page 7 of 15
Joint Sealants
Project:
Works:
Title:

Service Temperature Low = -62 Deg C

Shelf Life = 360 Days
Tack-Free Time-50% RH 15 Minutes
Tensile Strength ASTM D 412 = 1.40 MPa
Water Resistant yes
Working Time 5 to 10 Minutes
B. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. Comply with requirements of Clause 2.2/F of this Section
2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. One component gun-grade polyurethane elastomeric sealant for Expansion and control joints.
Complying with ASTM C-920 Types S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT-A, Use M-A and Use 0-A.
Property
Test Method
Result
MAF
25%
Sag
ASTM 639
Non-sagging
Shore A hardness
ASTM C661
25-35
Application temperature
Service temperature range
5-50 oC
-40 - 100 oC
Effect to heat aging
ASTM C792
No cracking/chalking
Stain & color

change
Tack free time
ASTM C510
No stain
18 minutes
2.4 MS JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Are to be produced based on hybrid Silyl Modified Polyether technology.
1. Single component.
2. Prime less unless recommended by manufacturer for certain uses.
B. Reference Standard:
1. ASTM C 793 for accelerated weathering.
2. ISO 11600 Type F, 25 HM.
C. MS FLOOR SEALANTS
General Properties:
Property
Solids content
Test Method
-
Result
100%
MAF
Butt joints 25% (unprimed)

50% (primed)
Page 8 of 15
Joint Sealants
Project:
Works:
Title:

Shore A hardness
ASTM C661
45
5-50 oC
-40 - 100 oC
UV resistance
excellent
Modulus
high
Traffic time
Sound reduction
index, dB
BS EN ISO 7171:97
24 hours light traffic

4 days heavy traffic
55(-1;-4) Db = Rw(C;Ctr)
Performance:
1. Good adhesion to silicone/PU/polysulphide contaminant
2. Suitable for saw cut joints
3. Tough and abrasion resistant.
4. Abrasion resistant
5. Prime-less*
D. MS NON TOXIC SEALANTS

General Properties:
Property
Test Method
Result
Solids content
100%
MAF
Shore A hardness
ASTM C661
Butt joints 25% (unprimed)

50% (primed)
32
5-50 oC
DRY : -30 - 80 oC
WET : up to 60 oC
Biological and
anti-fungus resistance
UV resistance
resistant
excellent
1. Sealant should be WRAS listed product; Approved for use in contact with potable water
2.5 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS
Page 9 of 15
Joint Sealants
Project:
Works:
Title:

A. Preformed Silicone Joint Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealant consisting of procured lowmodulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral- curing
silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.
B. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open cell
foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 160 kg/cu. M and
impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes
in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive
adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.
2.6 PREFORMED TAPE SEALANTS
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Tape Sealant: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape sealant with a solids content of 100 percent; non-staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces;
with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape manufacturers for application
indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C
1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Tape Sealant: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape sealant; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. Type 1, for applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. Type 2, for applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid
sealant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
joint-sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested
and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old
joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water surface dirt and frost.
Page 10 of 15
Joint Sealants
Project:
Works:
Title:

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a

combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of
joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer, or
as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer
with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to
joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
Page 11 of 15
Joint Sealants
Project:
Works:
Title:

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F.
Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to
form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do
not discolour sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile, per ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per ASTM C 1193.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per
ASTM C 1193.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
G. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system.
2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with
preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a
bonding area of not less than 10 mm. Hold edge of sealant bead 6 mm inside masking
tape.
3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet
extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform
contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate.
4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical
joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion
with a razor knife.
H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at
ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply
heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
I.
Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal

construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a
continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at
perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field-test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
Page 12 of 15
Joint Sealants
Project:
Works:
Title:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 300 m of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint
substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each 300 m of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per
elevation.
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C 1521.
a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;
extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure
for opposite side.
3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements.
c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of
product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes
sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether
joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.
5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and
that new sealant contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements, will be considered satisfactory.
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants
and of products in which joints occur.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealant during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants
are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint
sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the
original work.
Page 13 of 15
Joint Sealants
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior and Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces except in
natural stone surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Other joints as indicated.
2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Multicomponent, non-sag, traffic grade, Class 50.
3. Preformed Joint Sealant: Preformed foam sealant.
4. Joint-Sealant Colour: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colours.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior and interior joints in Natural Stone horizontal surfaces.
1. MS Joint Sealant: One part, high modulus floor joint traffic grade MS sealant.
C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Perimeter joints between structure and frames of doors and windows.
2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, non-sag, neutral curing, Class 25.
3. Preformed Joint Sealant: Preformed silicone.
D.
Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions.
d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows and elevator entrances.
e. Other joints as indicated.
2. Silicone Joint Sealant for vertical applications: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 25.
3. Urethane Joint Sealant: Multicomponent, nonsag, Class 50.
4. Acrylic/Polyurethane sealant for paintable applicable.
5. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors.
E. Joint-Sealant Application: Horizontal joints in toilets and other wet areas.

F.
Joint-Sealant Application: Vertical joints in toilets and other wet areas.

1. MS Joint Sealant: One part, primer-less, non-staining faade sealant for vertical surfaces.
2. Silicone Joint Sealant for vertical applications: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 25.
Page 14 of 15
Joint Sealants
Project:
Works:
Title:


G. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior and interior joints in surfaces subject to water immersion.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Joints in horizontal traffic surfaces subject to water immersion.
H. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Sealant Location:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
2. Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Silicone
complying with requirements of Clause 2.1/F of this Section.
I.
Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Location:
a. Acoustical joints where indicated.
2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
Page 15 of 15
Joint Sealants
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 079500 - EXPANSION CONTROL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
GENERAL
SUMMARY
ACTION SUBMITTALS
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
PRODUCTS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..
INTERIOR EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEM..
EXTERIOR WALL EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS.
ACCESSORIES.
MATERIALS..
ALUMINUM FINISHES
2
2
2
3
6
8
8
9
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXECUTION..
PREPARATION
INSTALLATION
PROTECTION..
9
9
9
10
Page 1 of 10
Expansion Control
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 079500 - EXPANSION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
Interior expansion control systems.

Exterior wall expansion control systems.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: For each expansion control system specified. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, splices, blockout requirement, attachments to other work, and line
diagrams[ and a tabular schedule of expansion control systems].
B.
Samples: For each exposed expansion control system and for each color and texture
specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
General: Provide expansion control systems of design, basic profile, materials, and operation
indicated. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces.
1.
2.
B.
2.2
A.
Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. Install with
hairline mitered corners where expansion control systems change direction or abut
other materials.
Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, T-joints, corners,
curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous
expansion control systems.
Coordination: Coordinate installation of exterior wall[ and soffit] expansion control systems
with roof expansion control systems to ensure that wall transitions are watertight. Roof
expansion joint assemblies are specified elsewhere.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide expansion control systems with fire barriers
identical to those of systems tested for fire resistance per UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966 by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Hose Stream Test: Wall-to-wall and wall-to-ceiling systems shall be subjected to hose
stream testing.
Page 2 of 10
Expansion Control
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Seismic Performance: Expansion control systems shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to [ASCE/SEI 7] <Insert requirement>.
1.
2.
The term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any
parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified[ and the system will be fully
operational after the seismic event]."
Component Importance Factor is [1.5] [1.0].
2.3
A.
INTERIOR EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following]
[provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated

or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Architectural Art Mfg., Inc.; Division of Pittcon Industries.

Balco, Inc.
Construction Specialties, Inc.
JointMaster/InPro Corporation.
Michael Rizza Company, LLC.
MM Systems Corporation.
Nystrom, Inc.
Watson Bowman Acme Corp.; a BASF Construction Chemicals business.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source from single
manufacturer.
D.
[Floor-to-Floor] [Floor-to-Wall] <Insert drawing designation>:

1.
2.
Basis-of-Design Product: [Indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product

name or designation>.
Design Criteria:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Nominal Joint Width: [As indicated on Drawings] [As scheduled] <Insert width>.
Minimum Joint Width: [As indicated on Drawings] [As scheduled] <Insert
width>.
Maximum Joint Width: [As indicated on Drawings] [As scheduled] <Insert
width>.
Movement Capability: [As indicated on Drawings] [As scheduled] [-25
percent/+75 percent] <Insert percentage>.
Type of Movement: [As indicated on Drawings] [As scheduled] [Thermal]
[Seismic].
Load Capacity:
1)
Uniform Load: [150 lb/sq. ft. (732 kg/sq. m)] <Insert load>.
Page 3 of 10
Expansion Control
Project:
Works:
Title:

2)
3)
g.
3.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide expansion control system and fire-barrier

assembly with a rating not less than [that indicated] [that of adjacent
construction] [1 hour] [1-1/2 hours] [2 hours] [3 hours] [4 hours] <Insert rating>.
Type: [Cover plate] [Center plate] [Glide plate] [Hidden sightline] [Pan] [Elastomeric
seal, recessed] [Elastomeric seal, surface mounted] [Dual elastomeric seal].
a.
Cover-Plate Design: [Plain] [Serrated] [Abrasive filled] [Recessed to accept fieldapplied finish materials].
1)
b.
c.
Cover-Plate Recess Depth: [As required to accommodate adjacent

flooring] [1/8 inch (3 mm)] [3/8 inch (10 mm)] <Insert depth>.
Metal: Aluminum.
1)
Finish: [Mill] [Clear anodic, Class I] [Clear anodic, Class II] [Color
anodic, Class I] [Color anodic, Class II] [Manufacturer's standard] <Insert
finish>.
Seal Material: [Santoprene] [Manufacturer's standard] <Insert material>.

1)
E.
Concentrated Load: [2000 lb (907 kg)] <Insert load>.

Maximum Deflection: [0.5 inch (13 mm)] <Insert deflection>.
Color: [Black] [Brown] [Beige] [Tan] [Gray] [White] [As selected by

Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>.
[Wall-to-Wall] [Wall Corner] <Insert drawing designation>:

1.
2.

Design Criteria:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
width>.
width>.
[Seismic].
Type: [Cover plate] [Glide plate] [Snap-on cover] [Clip-in cover] [Elastomeric seal]
[Dual elastomeric seal] [Accordion] [Flat seal].
Page 4 of 10
Expansion Control
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
Metal: Aluminum.
1)
b.
Seal Material: [Santoprene] [PVC] [Manufacturer's standard] <Insert material>.

1)
F.
finish>.

[Wall-to-Ceiling] [Ceiling-to-Ceiling] <Insert drawing designation>:

1.
2.

Design Criteria:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
width>.
width>.
[Seismic].
Type: [Cover plate] [Glide plate] [Snap-on cover] [Clip-in cover] [Elastomeric seal]
[Dual elastomeric seal] [Accordion] [Flat seal].
a.
Metal: Aluminum.
1)
b.
Seal Material: [Santoprene] [PVC] [Manufacturer's standard] <Insert material>.

1)
finish>.

Page 5 of 10
Expansion Control
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.4
A.
EXTERIOR WALL EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following]
[provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated

or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Architectural Art Mfg., Inc.; Division of Pittcon Industries.

Balco, Inc.
Chase Construction Products; Division of Chase Corporation.
Construction Specialties, Inc.
D. S. Brown Company (The).
EMSEAL Corporation.
Erie Metal Specialties, Inc.
JointMaster/InPro Corporation.
LymTal International, Inc.
Michael Rizza Company, LLC.
MM Systems Corporation.
Nystrom, Inc.
RJ Watson, Inc.
Schul International Company, Inc.
Tremco Incorporated.
Watson Bowman Acme Corp.; a BASF Construction Chemicals business.
Williams Products, Inc.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source from single
manufacturer.
D.
[Wall-to-Wall] [Wall Corner]<Insert drawing designation>:

1.
2.

Design Criteria:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
width>.
width>.
[Seismic].
Page 6 of 10
Expansion Control
Project:
Works:
Title:

f.
3.

Type: Cover plate.

a.
Metal: Aluminum.
1)
4.
Type: Flat seal.

a.
b.
Metal: Aluminum.
Seal Material: [Santoprene] [Neoprene] [Manufacturer's standard].
1)
c.
5.

Pantograph Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard pantographic wind-load

support mechanism with stainless-steel fasteners.
Type: Preformed cellular foam.

a.
Foam Material: [Manufacturer's standard] [Non-extruded, low-density,

crosslinked, nitrogen-blown, ethylene-vinyl-acetate copolymer] [Polyurethane].
1)
E.
finish>.
Color: [Manufacturer's standard] [As selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>.
[Wall-to-Soffit] [Soffit-to-Soffit] <Insert drawing designation>:

1.
2.

Design Criteria:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
width>.
width>.
[Seismic].
Page 7 of 10
Expansion Control
Project:
Works:
Title:

f.
3.

Type: Cover plate.

a.
Metal: Aluminum.
1)
4.
Type: Flat seal.

a.
b.
Metal: Aluminum.
Seal Material: [Santoprene] [Neoprene] [Manufacturer's standard].
1)
5.
finish>.

Type: Preformed cellular foam.

a.
Foam Material: [Manufacturer's standard] [Non-extruded, low-density,

crosslinked, nitrogen-blown, ethylene-vinyl-acetate copolymer] [Polyurethane].
1)
Color: [Manufacturer's standard] [As selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>.
2.5
A.
ACCESSORIES
Moisture Barriers: Manufacturer's standard moisture barrier consisting of a continuous,
waterproof membrane within joint and attached to substrate on sides of joint below the
primary cover. Equip moisture barrier with drain tubes and seals to direct collected moisture
to exterior-wall expansion control system.
2.6
A.
MATERIALS
Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209
(ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6 for sheet and plate.
1.
Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in

contact with cementitious materials.
B.
Elastomeric Seals: ASTM E 1783; preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions to be

installed in metal frames.
C.
Compression Seals: ASTM E 1612; preformed elastomeric extrusions having an internal

baffle system and designed to function under compression.
Page 8 of 10
Expansion Control
Project:
Works:
Title:

D.
Cellular Foam Seals: Extruded, compressible foam designed to function under compression.
E.
Elastomeric Concrete: Modified epoxy or polyurethane extended into a prepackaged

aggregate blend, specifically designed for bonding to concrete substrates.
F.
Fire Barriers: Any material or material combination to meet performance criteria for required
fire-resistance rating.
G.
Moisture Barrier: Flexible elastomeric material.
H.
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.
I.
Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, and other accessories as

indicated or required for complete installations.
2.7
A.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
Mill finish.
B.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm] [AA-M12C22A31,
Class II, 0.010 mm] or thicker.
C.
Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm] [AAM12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm] or thicker.
1.
Color: [Light bronze] [Medium bronze] [Dark bronze] [Black] [Match Architect's
sample] [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities]
<Insert color>.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PREPARATION
Prepare substrates according to expansion control system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing
expansion control systems.
C.
Cast-In Frames: Coordinate and furnish frames to be cast into concrete.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing expansion
control systems and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
B.
Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install expansion control
systems.
Page 9 of 10
Expansion Control
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished
surfaces measured from established lines and levels.
Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to
ambient temperature at time of installation. Notify Architect where discrepancies occur
that will affect proper expansion control system installation and performance.
Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without
buckling of frames.
Repair or grout blockout as required for continuous frame support using nonmetallic,
shrinkage-resistant grout.
Install frames in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces.
a.
6.
C.
Shimming is not permitted.
Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches
(75 mm) from each end and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in frames to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints.
1.
2.
3.
Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections.

Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions. Vulcanize or heat-weld
field-spliced joints as recommended by manufacturer.
Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with adhesive or
pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Foam Seals: Install with adhesive recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Terminate exposed ends of expansion control systems with field- or factory-fabricated

termination devices.
F.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Coordinate installation of expansion control system

materials and associated work so complete assemblies comply with assembly performance
requirements.
1.
G.
3.3
A.
B.
Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance
throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices.
Moisture Barrier: Provide [at all exterior joints and ]where indicated on Drawings. Provide
drainage fittings[ at a maximum of 50 feet (15.2 m) or] where indicated on Drawings.
PROTECTION
Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete.
Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections.
Page 10 of 10
Expansion Control
DIVISION 08
________________________________________________________________________
OPENINGS
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
SUMMARY
DEFINITION.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
2
2
2
2
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS....
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES...
EXTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES...
FRAME ANCHORS.
MATERIALS..
FABRICATION.
STEEL FINISHES..
ACCESSORIES.
3
3
3
4
5
5
6
6
8
8
3.0
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING.....
9
9
10
Page 1 of 10
Hollow Metals Door and Frames
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes hollow-metal Doors and Frames Including but not limited to codes from the
door schedule as listed below:
08MD01- Unrated Metal Door
08MD02-60Min Fire Rated Metal Door
08MD03-90Min Fire Rated Metal Doors
08MF01- Unrated Metal Frame
08MF02- 60Min Fire Rated Metal Frame
08MF03- 90Min Fire Rated Metal Frame.
1.2
A.
DEFINITIONS
Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
B.
Standard Hollow Metal

ANSI/SDI A250.8.
C.
Custom Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMMHMMA 861
1.3
A.
B.
Hollow
metal
work
fabricated
according
to
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.
C.
Work:
Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1.
Elevations of each door design.
2.
Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.
Page 2 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal
thicknesses.
Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
Details of each different wall opening condition.
Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
Details of accessories.
Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
E.
Samples for Verification:

1.
For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 75mm
by 125 mm.
2.
For the following items, prepared on Samples about 300 by 300 mm to demonstrate
compliance with requirements for quality of materials and construction:
a.
Doors: Show vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; core construction; and
hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement. Include separate section
showing glazing if applicable.
b.
Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers.
Include separate section showing fixed hollow metal panels and glazing if
applicable.
F.
Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for
details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with Door Hardware Schedule
1.4
A.
testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
2.2
A.
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated,
based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1.
Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and
labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to
Page 3 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in

compliance with NFPA 105.
B.
Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection
ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.
2.3
A.
INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

Standard-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 1. At locations indicated in the Door
and Frame Schedule
1.
2.
Physical Performance: Level C according to SDI A250.4.

Doors:
a.
Door Face Sheets: Fabricated from powder coated steel sheet, minimum 0.8mm
thick
b.
Fire Rated Doors: Thickness of face sheets is to be as recommended by
manufacture to obtain fire rating indicated in Door Schedule but not less than
1.3 mm.
c.
Core: 0.7-mmthick, steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets
extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 152 mm
apart, spot welded to face sheets a maximum of 127 mm o.c. Spaces filled
between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation.
d.
Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise
ratings indicated.
e.
Edge Construction: Full Flush
3.
Frames:
a.
b.
B.
Materials: Powder Coated cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 1.0 mm.
Construction
Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Door and
Frame Schedule.
1.
2.
Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.

Doors:
a.
Door Face Sheets: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum 1.3 mm
thick.
b.
1.3 mm.
c.
Page 4 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

d.
e.
3.
Frames:
a.
b.
2.4
A.

ratings indicated.
Construction
EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Door and
Frame Schedule.
1.
2.

Doors:
a.
Door Face Sheets: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum 1.3 mm
thick.
b.
1.3 mm.
c.
d.
ratings indicated.
e.
3.
Frames:
a.
b.
Construction.
2.5
A.
FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1.
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 1.0 mm thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 50 mm wide
by 250 mm long; or wire anchors not less than 4.5 mm thick.
2.
Post installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 9.5-mm
diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to
wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
B.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 1.0 mm thick, and as
follows:
1.
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
Page 5 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.
Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,

allowing not less than 50-mm height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish
floor surface.
2.6
A.
MATERIALS
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable
for exposed applications.
C.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of
scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
D.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
E.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 12G coating designation;
mill phosphatized.
1.
For
anchors
built
into
exterior walls,
steel
sheet
complying
with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according
to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
F.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
G.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-resistant materials.
H.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 102 mm, as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
I.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).
J.
Glazing: Section 088000 "Glazing."
K.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 0.4-mm dry film thickness
per coat.
2.7
A.
FABRICATION
Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project
site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B.
Hollow-Metal Doors:
Page 6 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
C.
Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit

moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required
by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness
metal as frames.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face
seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at
crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per
anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes
at bottoms of jambs.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 406 mm from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 813 mm o.c., to match coursing, and as
follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 457 mm from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 813 mm o.c. and as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
c.
d.
6.
Two anchors per jamb up to 1524 mm high.

Three anchors per jamb from 1524 to 2286 mm high.
Four anchors per jamb from 2286 to 3048 mm high.
Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 610
mm or fraction thereof above 3048 mm high.
Three anchors per jamb up to 1524 mm high.

Four anchors per jamb from 1524 to 2286 mm high.
Five anchors per jamb from 2286 to 2438 mm high.
Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 610
mm or fraction thereof above 2438 mm high.
Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame.

Post-installed Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 152 mm from top
and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 660 mm o.c.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers.
a.
Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
Page 7 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

b.
D.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised

hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to
SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1.
2.
E.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.
Factory Finish: SDI A250.3.

1.
2.9
A.
Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollowmetal work.
Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each
glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors
and frames.
Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and
installation types indicated.
STEEL FINISHES
Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1.
B.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted

door hardware.
Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for
preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where
indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.
1.
2.8
A.
Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
ACCESSORIES
Louvers: Provide sightproof louvers for interior doors, where indicated, which comply with
SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.5-mmthick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.8mm- thick steel frame.
1.
Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Movable blades closed by actuating fusible link, and
listed and labeled for use in fire-rated door assemblies of type and fire-resistance rating
indicated.
B.
Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical
anchors.
C.
Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.4 mm thick.
Page 8 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.
1.
Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary
braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,
and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled

expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.

Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with grout.
Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber
insulation.
In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
b.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1.6 mm, measured at door rabbet on a line 90

degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1.6 mm, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
Page 9 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

c.
d.
B.
Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
C.
Twist: Plus or minus 1.6 mm, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1.6 mm, measured at jambs at floor.
Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 3.2 mm plus or minus 0.8 mm.
Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 3.2 mm to 6.3 mm plus or minus 0.8 mm.
At Bottom of Door:plus or minus 6.5mm 0.8 mm.
Between Door Face and Stop: 1.6 mm to 3.2 mm plus or minus 0.8 mm.
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with
hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 230 mm o.c. and not more than 51 mm o.c. from each corner.
3.2
A.

Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise
unacceptable.
B.
Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after
installation.
C.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D.
Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair
paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in
painting Sections.
Page 10 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 081213 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
SUMMARY
DEFINITION.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
2
2
2
2
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS....
INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES...
EXTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES...
FRAME ANCHORS.
MATERIALS..
FABRICATION.
STEEL FINISHES..
ACCESSORIES.
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
5
6
3.0
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING.....
6
6
7
Page 1 of 7
Hollow Metal Frames
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 081213 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
SUMMARY
Section includes hollow-metal frames.
1.
Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in hollow-metal frames.
1.2
A.
DEFINITIONS
Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to
NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
1.
C.
Shop Drawings: Include elevations, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for
hardware, and other details.
D.
Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for
details and openings as those on Drawings.
1.4
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements
2.2
A.
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and
Page 2 of 7
Hollow Metal Frames
Project:
Works:
Title:

temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252
or UL 10C.
1.
Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and
labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in
B.
Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection
ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.
2.3
A.
INTERIOR FRAMES
Standard-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 1. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame
Schedule
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
A.
EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL FRAMES

Heavy-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. [At locations indicated in the Door and Frame
Schedule]
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
A.
Physical Performance: Level C according to SDI A250.4.

Materials: Metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 1.0 mm.
Construction: Full profile welded.
Exposed Finish: Factory.

Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 1.3 mm, with minimum
ZF120 coating.
Construction: Full profile welded.
Exposed Finish: Factory.
FRAME ANCHORS
Jamb Anchors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 1.0 mm thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 51 mm wide
by 254 mm long; or wire anchors not less than 4.5 mm thick.
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 1.0
mm thick.
Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 9.5-mmdiameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to
wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
Page 3 of 7
Hollow Metal Frames
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 1.0 mm, and as
follows:
2.6
A.
MATERIALS
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than [25] percent.
B.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
C.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
D.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
E.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 12G coating designation;
mill phosphatized.
1.
For
anchors
built
into
exterior walls,
steel
sheet
complying
with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according
to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
F.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
G.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-resistant materials.
H.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 102 mm, as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
I.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).
J.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
K.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 0.4-mm dry film thickness
per coat.
2.7
A.
FABRICATION
Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project
site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness
metal as frames.
Page 4 of 7
Hollow Metal Frames
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face
seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at
crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per
anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes
at bottoms of jambs.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
C.
Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware.

Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for
preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where
indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.8
A.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised

hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to
SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1.
2.
D.
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 406 mm from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 813 mm o.c., to match coursing.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 457 mm from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 813 mm o.c.
Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame.
Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 152 mm from top
and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 660 mm o.c.
Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollowmetal work.
Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each
glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior
frames.
Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and
installation types indicated.
STEEL FINISHES
Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
Page 5 of 7
Hollow Metal Frames
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
B.
Factory Finish: SDI A250.3.

1.
2.9
A.
B.
Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.
ACCESSORIES
Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical
anchors.
Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.4 mm thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
a.
3.
4.
At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled

expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.

Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with grout.
Page 6 of 7
Hollow Metal Frames
Project:
Works:
Title:

5.
6.
7.
8.
Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber
insulation.
on exposed faces.
In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1.6 mm, measured at door rabbet on a line 90

degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1.6 mm, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1.6 mm, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1.6 mm, measured at jambs at floor.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with
hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 230 mm o.c. and not more than 51 mm o.c. from each corner.
3.2
A.

Final Adjustments: Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is
warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after
installation.
C.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D.
Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair
paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in
painting Sections.
Page 7 of 7
Hollow Metal Frames
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 081216 ALUMINUM FRAMES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
SUMMARY
ACTION SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
2
2
2
2
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS....
COMPONENTS..
ACCESSORIES...
FABRICATION....
ALUMINUM FINISHES...
3
3
3
3
3
4
3.0
3.1
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION
4
4
Page 1 of 5
Aluminum Frames
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 081216 ALUMINUM FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes interior aluminum frames for doors and glazing installed in gypsum board
partitions or block work.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
Shop Drawings: For interior aluminum frames. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
C.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 300 mm long
in size.
D.
Schedule: For interior aluminum frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
Coordinate with door hardware schedule and glazing.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
1.5
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
B.
Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Where indicated At corridors, smoke barriers, and
smoke partitions, provide assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in
1.
C.
Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 3 cu. m per minute/sq. m at the tested
pressure differential of 75 Pa of water.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site]
Page 2 of 5
Aluminum Frames
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
2.2
A.
COMPONENTS
Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temper required to suit
structural and finish requirements, not less than 1.6 mm thick.
B.
Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers.
1.
90-Minute Fire-Protection Rating: Fabricate aluminum frame assemblies with a coldformed, primed, interior steel liner.
C.
Glazing Frames: Extruded aluminum, for glazing thickness indicated.
D.
Ceiling Tracks: Extruded aluminum.
E.
Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 1.6 mm thick, with removable snap-in casing trim
glazing stops and door stops without exposed fasteners.
1.
2.3
A.
Trim Style
ACCESSORIES
Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners
compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other
items being fastened.
B.
Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals.
C.
Smoke Seals: Intumescent strip or fire-rated gaskets.
D.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded plastic, to accommodate

glazing thickness indicated.
E.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." Section 087111
"Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification).
F.
Hardware: Comply with requirements in Section 087100

Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."
2.4
A.
"Door
Hardware"
and
FABRICATION
Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline
joints at butted or mitered connections.
Page 3 of 5
Aluminum Frames
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Factory prepare interior aluminum frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include
cutouts, reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware
Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."
1.
C.
Fabricate frames for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement without
dismantling frame.
1.
D.
2.5
A.
B.
D.
Locate removable stops on the inside of spaces accessed by keyed doors.
Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners.

ALUMINUM FINISHES
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
1.
C.
Locate hardware as required by fire-rated label for assembly.
Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry-film thickness
of 0.025 mm. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,
conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
1.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
2.
Only a few manufacturers offer high-performance finishes; verify availability. If specific

products are required, name coating manufacturers and products.
High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604
and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat,
and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
INSTALLATION
General: Install interior aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely
fastened in place; comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Set frames accurately in position and plumbed, aligned, and securely anchored to substrates.
Page 4 of 5
Aluminum Frames
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
At fire-protection-rated openings, install interior aluminum frames according to

NFPA 80 and NFPA 105.
C.
Install frame components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 2450 mm long
must be one piece.
D.
Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods
recommended by frame manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610.
E.
Touch up marred frame surfaces so touchup is not visible from a distance of 1220 mm.
Remove and replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
Page 5 of 5
Aluminum Frames
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
SUMMARY
ACTION SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
2
2
2
3
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS....
FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL.
DOORS AND OPAQUE FINISHES...
PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS......
LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS...
FABRICATION.
SHOP PRIMING..
FACTORY FINISHING
3
3
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
3.0
3.1
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION
7
7
Page 1 of 8
Flush Wood Doors
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.2
A.
B.
Solid-core doors with hardboard and plastic-laminate faces.

Hollow-core doors with hardboard and plastic-laminate faces.
Factory finishing flush wood doors.
Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
1.
Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
2.
Section 087100 Door Hardware
3.
Section 078123 Intumescent fire proofing.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of door. Include factory-finishing specifications
1.
2.
Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply
with requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material.
Include statement indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional material, and
fraction by weight that is considered regional.
with requirements for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating
cost for each regionally manufactured material.
a.
b.
3.
4.
Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and distance to Project for

each regionally manufactured material.
Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and point of extraction,
harvest, or recovery for each raw material used in regionally extracted and
manufactured materials. Indicate distance to Project and fraction by weight of
each regionally manufactured material that is regionally extracted.
Certificates for Credit MR 6 Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates indicating that

flush wood doors comply with forest certification requirements. Include documentation
that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification
body. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For adhesives and composite wood products,
documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.
Page 2 of 8
Flush Wood Doors
Project:
Works:
Title:

5.
6.
7.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of
door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation indicating
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, documentation
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.4: For composite wood products,
documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
Dimensions and locations of blocking.

Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
Dimensions and locations of cutouts.
Undercuts.
Requirements for veneer matching.
Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
Samples: For plastic-laminate door faces and factory-finished doors.
1.3
A.
Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by
an FSC-accredited certification body and is a certified participant in AWI's Quality
Certification Program.
B.
Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited

certification body.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Page 3 of 8
Flush Wood Doors
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.2
A.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural
Wood Flush Doors]."
1.
Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with
requirements of grades specified.
B.
Certified Wood: Flush wood doors shall be certified as "FSC Pure"[ or "FSC Mixed Credit"]
according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and to
FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification."
C.
Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do
not contain urea formaldehyde.
D.
Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with [adhesives] [and] [composite wood products]
that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health
Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
E.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:

1.
2.
F.
Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.

Standard Duty: Closets (not including janitor's closets) private toilets and where
indicated.
Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252.
1.
2.
3.
Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection

rating indicated.
Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by
outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated
without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent
seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
G.
Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control,
based on testing according to UL 1784.
H.
Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1.
Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.

a.
b.
I.
Screw Withdrawal, Face: 3100 N.

Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 1780 N.
Mineral-Core Doors:
Page 4 of 8
Flush Wood Doors
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
J.
Hollow-Core Doors:
1.
2.3
A.
B.
Interior Solid-Core Doors: Refer Door schedules for locations.- Heavy Duty rooms and Fire
rated doors, all doors on the enternal face, unless otherwise mentioned on the schedule
5.
Grade: Premium
Faces: Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option.
Core: [Structural composite lumber
Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is
abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.
Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded.
Interior Hollow-Core Doors: Refer Door schedules for locations- Light Duty non fire rated
doors.
1.
2.
2.4
A.
Construction: Standard hollow core.
DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH

Exterior Solid-Core Doors NOT APPLICABLE
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced

quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.
Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability
approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate
through-bolting hardware.
Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved
screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for
exposed edges.
Grade: Premium.
Faces: Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED DOORS
Interior Solid-Core Doors : Refer Door schedules for locations. Wet Areas Fire rated doors
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Grade: Premium.
Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with
NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's
full range of products.
Exposed Vertical Edges: Hardwood edges for staining to match faces
Core: Structural composite lumber.
Construction: Three plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is
abrasive planed before faces are applied. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.
Page 5 of 8
Flush Wood Doors
Project:
Works:
Title:

7.
B.
Interior Hollow-Core Doors : Wet Areas Non Fire rated Doors

1.
1.
1.
2.
2.5
A.
B.
Grade: Premium.
Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with
NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's
full range of products.
Exposed Vertical Edges: Plastic laminate that matches faces, applied before faces.
LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS

Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed
of 1.2-mmthick, cold-rolled steel sheet; factory primed for paint with baked-enamel- or
powder-coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated.
Metal Louvers:
1.
Manufacturers: NOT APPLICABLE
2.
Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 1.0 mm thick, factory primed for paint with
baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish.
Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum with Class II, clear anodic finish, AAM12C22A31.
Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum with light bronze Class II, color anodic finish, AAM12C22A32/A34.
3.
4.
2.6
A.
Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive
planed before faces and crossbands are applied. Faces are bonded to core using a
hot press.
FABRICATION
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
C.
Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1.
2.
3.
Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with
applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
Page 6 of 8
Flush Wood Doors
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.7
A.
SHOP PRIMING
Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises
with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 099123" Interior Painting."
2.8
A.
FACTORY FINISHING
General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,
including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,
before finishing.
1.
Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be
omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B.
Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish.
C.
Use only paints and coatings that comply with the testing and product requirements of the
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
INSTALLATION
Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1.
2.
C.
Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.

Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.
Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as
indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or
permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of
cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.
1.
Clearances: Provide 3.2 mm at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 3.2
mm from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise
indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 6.4 mm from bottom of
door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a.
Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
D.
Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E.
Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at

Project site.
Page 7 of 8
Flush Wood Doors
Project:
Works:
Title:

Page 8 of 8
Flush Wood Doors
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
GENERAL
SUMMARY
ACTION SUBMITTALS
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
PRODUCTS
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS..
FLOOR ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES...
MATERIALS........
FABRICATION.
FINISHES..
2
2
2
4
5
6
6
3.0
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION
ADJUSTING
7
7
Page 1 of 7
Access Doors and Frames
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.

Floor access doors and frames.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
C.
Samples: For each door face material.
D.
Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to
installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 tested according to the
following test method:
1.
2.
2.2
A.
NFPA 252 or UL 10B for fire-rated access door assemblies installed vertically.
NFPA 288 for fire-rated access door assemblies installed horizontally.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS

B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single
manufacturer.
C.
Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges (see drawing):

1.
Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide frame with plaster
beads for concealed flange installation.
2.
Locations: Wall and ceiling
3.
Door Size: See drawings.
4.
Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 1.52 mm, 16 gage
a.
Finish: Factory finish.
Page 2 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

5.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 1.63 mm, 16 gauge .

a.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door.

Hinges: Manufacturer's standard
Hardware: Lock.
Recessed Access Doors

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Basis-of-Design Product: Indicated on Drawings.

Assembly Description: Fabricate door in the form of a pan recessed [25 mm] for plaster
infill. Provide frame with plaster bead for concealed flange installation.
Locations: Wall and ceiling.
Door Size: See Drawings.
Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 1.52 mm, 16 gage.
a.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door

Hardware: Lock.
Aluminum Flush Access Doors :See drawing:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's
standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size.
Locations: Wall and ceiling.
Door Size: See Drawings
Aluminum Sheet for Door: Nominal 1.15 mm.
a.
6.
7.
8.
F.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 1.63 mm, 16 gage.

a.
E.
Finish: Clear anodic.
Frame Material: [Same material, thickness, and finish as door].

Hardware: Lock
Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges See drawing designation:
1.
2.

Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineral-fiber
insulation enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic closer and
interior latch release. Provide frame with plaster beads for concealed flange
installation.
Page 3 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.
4.
5.
6.
Locations: Wall and ceiling

Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than [that of adjacent construction].
Temperature-Rise Rating: 250 deg C at the end of 30 minutes.
Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: [Nominal 0.91 mm, 20 gage.
a.
7.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 1.02 mm, 20 gage.

a.
8.
9.
10.
G.
Finish: [Factory finish].
Frame Material: [Same material, thickness, and finish as door].

Hinges: Manufacturer's standard.
Hardware: Lock.
Hardware:
1.
2.
Latch: Self-latching bolt as shown on Drawings with interior release.

Lock: Mortise cylinder [As indicated in schedule]
a.
2.3
A.
Finish: [Factory finish].
Lock Preparation: Prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in

[Section 087100 "Door Hardware."] [Section 087111 "Door Hardware
(Descriptive Specification)."]
FLOOR ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements
C.
Floor Doors, General: Equip each door with adjustable counterbalancing springs, heavy-duty
hold-open arm that automatically locks door open at 90 degrees, release handle with red
vinyl grip that allows for one-handed closure, and recessed lift handle.
D.
Aluminum Floor Door: Double-leaf opening. Extruded-aluminum angle frame with 6.4-mmthick, diamond-pattern, aluminum tread plate door; non-watertight; loading capacity to
support 14.4-kN/sq. m pedestrian live load AASHTO H20 concentrated wheel load, without
impact.
E.
Watertight Aluminum Floor Door: [Single] or [Double]-leaf opening. Extruded-aluminum gutter

frame with DN 40 drainage coupling and 6.4-mmthick, diamond-pattern, aluminum tread
plate door; watertight; loading capacity to support [14.4-kN/sq. m pedestrian live load]
[AASHTO H20 concentrated wheel load, without impact].
F.
Steel Angle-Frame Floor Door: [Single] [Double]-leaf opening. Galvanized structural-steel

frame with [6.4-mm-] thick, diamond-pattern, galvanized structural - steel tread plate door;
nonwatertight; loading capacity to support [14.4-kN/sq. m pedestrian live] [AASHTO H20
concentrated wheel] load.
Page 4 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction .

a.
G.
Watertight Steel Gutter-Frame Floor Door: Single or Double -leaf opening. Galvanized
structural-steel channel frame forming gutter with DN 40 drainage coupling and 6.4-mmthick, diamond-pattern, galvanized structural - steel tread plate door; watertight; loading
capacity to support 14.4-kN/sq. m pedestrian live AASHTO H20 concentrated wheel load.
1.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.

a.
H.
Finish: Yellow with wording "FIRE DOOR - DO NOT STORE MATERIALS ON

SURFACE."
Finish: Yellow with wording "FIRE DOOR - DO NOT STORE MATERIALS ON

SURFACE."
Hardware: Provide the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Hinges: Heavy-duty, stainless-steel butt hinges with stainless-steel pins.

Latch: Stainless-steel slam latch.
Lock: Keyed deadbolt lock
Hardware Material: Stainless steel, including latch and lifting mechanism assemblies,
hold-open arms, and all brackets, hinges, pins, and fasteners.
I.
Insulation: Urethane with liner pan.
J.
Safety Accessories: Safety chains, net and railing.
2.4
A.
MATERIALS
B.
"Rolled-Steel Floor Plate" Paragraph below specifies minimum yield point of 30 ksi (205
MPa); revise if a higher strength is required.
C.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from

ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
D.
Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled
steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS),
exposed.
E.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum Z180 or ZF180 metallic coating.
F.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T6.
G.
Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
Page 5 of 7
plate
complying
with
Project:
Works:
Title:

H.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209M, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and
finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than strength and durability
properties of Alloy 5005-H15; with minimum sheet thickness according to ANSI H35.2M.
I.
Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.
J.
Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners:

ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
Hot-dip
galvanized
steel
according
to
2.5
A.
FABRICATION
General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
B.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C.
Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish
attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports
indicated.
D.
Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish.
Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.
1.
E.
For recessed doors with plaster infill, provide self-furring expanded metal lath attached
to door panel.
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
1.
2.
For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish
plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
F.
Extruded Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on

aluminum that will come in contact with concrete.
2.6
A.
FINISHES
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
Page 6 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

D.
Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:

1.
2.
E.
Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free,

universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
Factory Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat,
with a minimum dry-film thickness of 0.025 mm for topcoat.
Aluminum Finishes:
1.
2.
Mill finish.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
B.
INSTALLATION
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
ADJUSTING
Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.
Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
Page 7 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 083213 HORIZONTAL SLIDING WALL SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
GENERAL
SUMMARY
ACTION SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
WARRANTY.
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS....
HORIZONTAL SLIDING WALL SYSTEM..
GLAZING....
FABRICATION.
ALUMINUM FINISHES...
3
3
3
6
6
7
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXECUTION..
INSPECTION
INSTALLATION
ADJUST AND CLEAN.
7
7
7
8
Division 08 Section083213
Page 1 of 8
Horizontal Sliding Wall System
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 083213 HORIZONTAL SLIDING WALL SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes Horizontal sliding aluminum framed glass wall system for exterior locations.
B.
This specification shall be reviewed and coordinated with project Faade specifications. If
there is a duplication of items all faade elements shall be in accordance with the faade
specifications.
1.2
A.
General: Provide sliding aluminum-framed glass wall system capable of complying with
performance requirements indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Design Wind Loads: Resistance to wind load (Class B3), according to EN 12211.
Suitable to use in maximum wind load environments 1700 Pa and 133 km/h.
Thermal Transmittance: Thermal transmittance (UD) of 1.5 W/m2K, based on 3-leaf
complete door system 2900mm x 2500mm (WxH). Thermal transmittance value (Uf)of
3.8 W/m2K for profiles
Sound Protection: Sound protection value of min 27dB, based on a four-panel
installation.
Durability of Sliding panels: Tested to 10,000 cycles according to EN 1527:1998
Additional panel functions: Tested to 50,000 cycles
Air permeability: Class 2, according to EN 1206
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard literature and details for proof of compliance
with specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: For sliding aluminum framed glass doors. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, hardware, attachments to other work, and operational clearances.
C.
1.4
A.
B.
1.5
A.
Sample warranty.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
Page 2 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
MANUFACTURE'S QUALIFICATIONS: Manufacturer shall provide documented reliability tests
and list of present users, and have been in the sliding folding partition business for at least ten
(10) years.
B.
INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Engage an installer who is an authorized representative of

the sliding folding systems manufacturer with at least five (5) years experience specifically
with sliding folding systems for both the installation and maintenance of the type of units
required for this project.
C.
BUILDING CODES: Provide horizontal sliding aluminum-framed glass wall system that will
comply with DIN standards and other applicable local building codes.
D.
Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.
E.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and

with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.7
WARRANTY
1.
Warranty Period:
a.
b.
c.
Sliding Door: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

Glazing: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
Metal Finish: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Provide products for Horizontal Sliding Wall subject to compliance with
requirements.
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product

indicated on Drawings.
2.2
A.
HORIZONTAL SLIDING WALL SYSTEM

Product: Product to be a comprehensive system top hung individual framed double glazed
panels produced by a single manufacturer.
1. The panels shall be of nominal thickness 64mm, system height up to 3000 mm with
individual panel weights unto 120Kg and width up to 1100mm.
2. The individual panels can also be of differing widths. The largest width should not exceed
maximum 115% of the smallest width.
3. Each panel can be moved with no need of guided or channels on the floor.
Page 3 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

4. Each panel should be secured in its closed position by bolts or locks.

5. All profiles should be thermally sealed profiles, enabling double-glazing upto 49mm.The
glazing to be double glazed, tempered 6mm inside with 12 air space and 6mm outside
glass.
6. Special seals to be fitted around the panels to ensure effective draught exclusion and
maintain the thermal barrier.
7. Top and bottom profiles to have ejectable seals to seal the system properly.
8. Installation-efficient Manufacturer standard substructure 75mm x 72mm to accommodate
track rail mounting requirements(optional)
9. Track to be of size 75mm x 72mm, bolted to the sub-structure, made of aluminum,
in powder coated finish as selected by the architect.
10. Carrier with suspension assembly and bearing profile for safe and easy sliding of the
panels.
11. Sealed double glazing unit shall be fitted with interlocking multiple-lip seals plus
automatically extending rubber seal along with the insulated strips (24mm x 3 mm) in the
thermal-break profile.
12. The precise dimensions of the sealed double glazing units to be ordered should be
exclusively taken from the approval drawing released by the system manufacturer.
13. The single action door with wall connection arm assembly can be swung round 170
degree, so leaving the entire operating zone free. The closed panel is secured by multipoint
locks with central locking system
14. All operating parts to be made of corrosion resistant stainless steel
15. Two preselected panels to be single action sliding panels, to act as normal single action
doors, with cam action slide channel door closer TS 92 and when needed to be slided and
stacked away
16. Stacking area to be as shown in plans
B.
Framing Members:
1.
Single Action Door with wall connection: Single action panel, non-sliding, operates
independently of the rest of the system.
Page 4 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

Bottom frame:
Extruded Aluminium, 2mm thick, 64 mm x 128 mm with thermal break profile and
automatically extending rubber seal.
Stile Design: 123mm x 64 mm extruded aluminium with thermal break and interlocking
profile, as indicated on the drawings.
Top Frame:
automatically extended rubber seal.
2.
Sliding Panel: Sliding panels that are movable, but are locked down when the frontage
or partition is closed.
Bottom frame:
Top Frame:
Stile Design:
77 mm x 64 mm, extruded aluminium with thermal break and interlocking profile, as
indicated on the drawings.
3.
Single Action sliding panel: Single action sliding panel fitted with concealed door
closer, Manufacturer standard ITS 96
Bottom frame:
Top Frame:
Stile Design:
81 mm x 64 mm, extruded aluminium with thermal break and interlocking profile, as
indicated on the drawings.
4.
Fixed Screen: Non-sliding side screen with that decouples from the rest of the system.
Bottom frame:
Page 5 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

Stile Design:
Extruded aluminium with thermal break and interlocking profile, as indicated on the
drawings.
64mm x 76mm vertical stile connecting the next panel
At wall side, 64mm x 59mm, for fixed screen
64mm x 77mm, for fixed screen with wall connection profile.
Top Frame:
2.3
A.
GLAZING
Glass and Glazing System: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing" for safety glass,
insulating-glass units, laminated glass, and glazing requirements applicable to glazed sliding
aluminum-framed glass doors.
B.
Glass: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing" for requirements applicable to safety glazing,
insulating-glass units, and laminated glass units.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Clear, insulating-glass units.

Clear, insulating-glass units, with low-E coating pyrolytic on second surface or sputtered
on second or third surface.
Clear, insulating-glass units, argon gas filled, with low-E coating pyrolytic on second
surface or sputtered on second or third surface.
Clear, insulating-glass units; outer lite consisting of laminated glass unit with PVB
interlayer for windborne-debris resistance.
Clear, insulating-glass units, with low-E coating pyrolytic on second surface or sputtered
on second or third surface; outer lite consisting of laminated glass unit with PVB
interlayer for windborne-debris resistance.
Monolithic laminated glass unit, with PVB interlayer, complying with windborne-debris
resistance.
C.
Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weather tight
seal.
2.4
A.
FABRICATION
Fabricate sliding aluminum-framed glass doors that are reglazable without dismantling panel
framing.
B.
Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal drainage passages to conduct infiltrating water
to exterior.
Page 6 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.5
ALUMINUM FINISHES
Retain one of two options in first paragraph below. Class II finish is standard with many manufacturers;
Class I finish is heavy anodized and may be unavailable. Verify availability with manufacturers.
A.
Anodized or powder coated finish, as per the instructions from the architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSPECTION
Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which the sliding folding framed glass
partitions are to be installed and inform the contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to
the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until all
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.
B.
The manufacturer should have a local office to co-ordinate and extend services like
installation, commissioning and maintenance through their dealers to contractors at site.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing
doors, hardware, accessories, and other components.
B.
Install sliding aluminum-framed glass doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without
distortion, warp or rack of frames and panels, or impeding thermal movement, anchored
securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing, vapor retarders,
air barriers, water/weather barriers, and other adjacent construction.
C.
Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, to provide weather tight
construction.
D.
Install sliding aluminum-framed glass doors and components to drain condensation, water
penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within doors to the exterior.
E.
Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic
action at points of contact with other materials according to ASTM E 2112, Section 5.12
"Dissimilar Materials."
F.
Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
G.
Adjust operating panels and screens to provide a tight fit at contact points and weather
stripping for smooth operation, without binding, and a weather tight closure.
H.
Adjust hardware for proper alignment, smooth operation, and proper latching without
unnecessary force or excessive clearance.
Page 7 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

I.
Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing sliding doors. Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Avoid
damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
J.
Clean glass immediately after installing sliding aluminum-framed glass doors. Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
K.
Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during construction period.
L.
Protect sliding door surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. During construction, monitor sliding door surfaces adjacent to and
below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits,
stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact sliding door surfaces,
remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.
M.
Refinish or replace sliding aluminum-framed glass doors with damaged finishes.
N.
Replace damaged components.
3.3
A.
B.
ADJUST AND CLEAN

All the systems must be wiped clean and free of handprints, grease and oil.
Advise contractor of protective treatment and other precautions required through the
remainder of the construction period, to ensure that the systems will be without damage or
deterioration and the time of acceptance.
Page 8 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 083473.13 METAL SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
GENERAL
SUMMARY
ACTION SUBMITTALS
WARRANTY.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
PRODUCTS
STEEL SOUND CONTROL DOORS..
SOUND CONTROL FRAMES
HARDWARE.
FABRICATION.
2
2
3
3
4
4
3.0
3.1
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION
5
5
Page 1 of 6
Metal Sound Control Door Assemblies
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 083473.13 METAL SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes metal sound control door assemblies.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
Shop Drawings: For sound control door assemblies. Include elevations, details, seals,
anchorages, and accessories.
C.
Samples: For units with factory-applied finishes.
D.
Schedule: Provide a schedule of sound control door assemblies prepared using same
reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
1.4
A.
B.
1.5
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
1.6
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sound control
door assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: [Five] years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
STC Rating: [As indicated on Drawings] [As indicated in the Door Schedule] as calculated by
ASTM E 413 when tested in an operable condition according to ASTM E 90.
Page 2 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.2
A.
B.
STEEL SOUND CONTROL DOORS

Doors: Flush-design sound control doors, thickness as required to provide STC rating, of
seamless construction; with manufacturer's standard sound-retardant core as required to
provide STC rating indicated. Construct doors with smooth, flush surfaces without visible joints
or seams on exposed faces or stile edges. Fabricate according to NAAMM-HMMA 865.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Interior Doors: Fabricate from cold-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated, 1.21mm nominal thickness or thicker as required to achieve STC rating indicated.
Core: Manufacturer's standard sound control core.
Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Doors: Same material as face sheets.
Top and Bottom Channels: Closed with continuous channels of same material as face
sheets, spot welded to face sheets not more than 152 mm o.c.
Hardware Reinforcement: Same material as face sheets.
C.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
D.
Materials:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Glazing: As required by sound control door assembly manufacturer to comply with
sound control requirements.
Finishes:
1.
2.
Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and
pretreating.
Factory-Applied Paint Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer and finish coats,
complying with SDI A250.3 for performance and acceptance criteria.
a.
2.3
A.
SOUND CONTROL FRAMES

Frames: Fabricate sound control door frames with corners mitered, reinforced, and
continuously welded the full depth and width of frame. Fabricate according to NAAMMHMMA 865.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Weld frames according to NAAMM-HMMA 820.

Interior Frames: Fabricate from cold-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated, 1.90mm nominal thickness or thicker as required to provide STC rating indicated.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to NAAMM-HMMA 865 of same
material as face sheets.
Materials:
Page 3 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
C.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or
glass fibers.
Finishes:
1.
2.
Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and
pretreating.
Factory-Applied Paint Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer and finish coats,
complying with SDI A250.3 for performance and acceptance criteria.
a.
2.4
A.
HARDWARE
Sound Control Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard sound control system, including
head and jamb seals, door bottoms, cam-lift hinges, and thresholds, as required by testing to
achieve STC rating indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
2.5
A.
Compression Seals: One-piece units consisting of closed-cell sponge neoprene or

silicone seal held in place by metal retainer, with retainer cover of same material as
door frame; attached to door frame with concealed screws.
Magnetic Seals: One-piece units consisting of closed-cell sponge neoprene seal and
resiliently mounted magnet held in place by metal retainer, with retainer cover of same
material as door frame; attached to door frame with concealed screws.
Automatic Door Bottoms: Neoprene or silicone gasket, held in place by metal housing,
that automatically drops to form seal when door is closed.
Door Bottoms: Neoprene or silicone gasket held in place by metal housing; mortised
into bottom edge of door.
Cam-Lift Hinges: Full-mortise template type that raises door 13 mm when door is fully
open; with hardened pin; fabricated from stainless steel.
Thresholds: Flat, smooth, unfluted type as recommended by manufacturer; fabricated
from stainless steel.
Other Hardware: Comply with requirements in [Section 087100 "Door Hardware."]

[Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."]
FABRICATION
Steel Sound Control Door Fabrication:
1.
2.
Seamless Edge Construction: Fabricate doors with faces joined at vertical edges by
welding; welds shall be ground, filled, and dressed to make them invisible and to
provide a smooth, flush surface.
Glazed Lites: Factory install glazed lites according to requirements of tested assembly
to achieve STC rating indicated. Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure
side of door.
Page 4 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare sound control doors to receive templated

mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping.
a.
b.
4.
B.
Reinforce doors to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door

hardware.
Locate door hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to NAAMMHMMA 831, "Recommended Hardware Locations for Custom Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames."
Tolerances: Fabricate doors to tolerances indicated in NAAMM-HMMA 865.
Sound Control Frame Fabrication:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and
invisible. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated from same
thickness metal as frames.
Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as indicated in NAAMMHMMA 865.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare sound control frames to receive templated
mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping.
a.
b.
5.
Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door

hardware.
Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to NAAMMHMMA 831, "Recommended Hardware Locations for Custom Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames."
Tolerances: Fabricate frames to tolerances indicated in NAAMM-HMMA 865.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Frames: Install sound control door frames in sizes and profiles indicated.
1.
a.
b.
Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations,

field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill,
and dress; make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Install sound control frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side
of opening.
Page 5 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove temporary braces only after frames or bucks have been properly set and
secured.
Check squareness, twist, and plumbness of frames as walls are constructed.
Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Apply corrosion-resistant coating to backs of frames to be filled with mortar,
grout, and plaster containing antifreezing agents.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Fully fill frames with mineral-fiber insulation.
on exposed faces.
In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion
anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to supporting
construction above unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at
each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting
construction above. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb
members.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust sound control door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumbness as indicated in NAAMM-HMMA 865.
B.
Doors: Fit sound control doors accurately in frames, within clearances as indicated in
NAAMM-HMMA 865.
C.
Sound Control Seals: Where seals have been factory prefit and preinstalled and subsequently
removed for shipping, reinstall seals and adjust according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
D.
Cam-Lift Hinges: Install hinges according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
F.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with sound
control door assembly manufacturer's written instructions.
Page 6 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 084413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
GENERAL
SUMMARY
ACTION SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
WARRANTY.
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
4
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
PRODUCTS.
PRODUCT SELECTION...
DESIGN CRITERIA..
MANUFACTURERS.
FRAMING.
GLAZING.
FABRICATION.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
4
4
5
6
8
8
9
9
10
3.0
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION
11
11
11
Page 1 of 12
Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 084413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
SUMMARY
Section includes glazed aluminum curtain walls.
specifications.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
1.
2.
C.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For glazing sealants used inside the weatherproofing
system, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.1: For glazing sealants used inside the
and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other
work.
1.
Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
barriers.
D.
Samples: For each exposed finish required.
E.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.4
A.
B.
Energy Performance Certificates:
manufacturer.
NFRC-certified
energy
performance
values
from
Page 2 of 12
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
D.
Sample warranties.
1.5
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer, A specialist, who has at least 10 years successful experience in
performing similar work, and is certified to BS EN ISO 9001, or operates a similar quality
system acceptable to the Engineer. Operatives must have service or repair facilities not more
than two hours from the Project Site. Powder coating applicator to be approved by powder
coating manufacturer. Refer also to Section 050513.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated and
accredited by DAC, UKAS and ENAS under ISO 17025.
C.
Standards: Comply with the design, fabrication and installation requirements of BS 8200 and
the Centre for Window & Cladding Technology (CWCT) Standard for Systemized Building
Envelopes.
D.
Certifications:
1. Off-Site testing:
a) The Contractor may provide data from previous independently certified tests to
demonstrate that the Contractor's proposed systems meet the performance
requirements of the Architectural Specification. The information shall be to the
entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
b) If suitable data to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements is
not available provide prototypes of each type and have they independently tested
in accordance with the testing criteria indicated in the Architectural Specification.
c) Independently certified test data, as applicable, shall include static and dynamic
results, and Agreement certificates.
d) Submit to the Engineer test certificates to confirm compatibility of the sealant used
with all substrate materials including aluminium, finishes, glass, glass coatings,
gaskets, setting blocks, backing rods, etc. These certificates shall relate to tests
carried out by the sealant manufacturer.
E.
Provide mock-ups, prototypes, quality benchmark installations, testing and inspections in

accordance with Division 01 Quality Requirements.
1. Mock-ups:
a) To be agreed with the Engineer.
2. Prototypes:
b) To be agreed with the Engineer.
Page 3 of 12
Project:
Works:
Title:

2. Quality Benchmark Installation: First completed full height structural bay of each type of
system in location to be agreed.
F.
Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for

aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated
by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.
1.
1.7
A.
WARRANTY
Special Assembly Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of glazed
aluminum curtain wall that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
B.
Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data
to Architect for review.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or
replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: 10years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PRODUCT SELECTION
Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall:
1. Thermally broken, glazed aluminium curtain wall. Location, layout, profile, configuration all as indicated on the Design Drawings.
2. Indicative system / product:
a) System reference: Stick Curtain Wall 60mm width to the Engineers approval.
b) Glass: As indicated on drawings and Glazing section 088000.
c) Metal: Thermally broken Aluminium.
3. Finish: The Contractor shall provide samples from the manufacturer's range for the Engineer for approval.
5. Colour: The Contractor shall provide colour samples from the manufacturer's range for
the Engineer for approval.
6. Size: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
7. Fixing: Concealed fixed, as recommended by the manufacturer.
8. Other special requirements: As indicated on the Design Drawings or as advised by the
Engineer.
a) Manifestation: Safety manifestation and pattern as indicated on the Design
Page 4 of 12
Project:
Works:
Title:

b) Drawings and type as advised by the Engineer.

c) Others, as indicated on the Design Drawings or as advised by the Engineer.
B.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Glazed trapezoidal tapered steel fabricated curtain walls:

1. Glass surfaces are faceted and vertically defined by a cylindrical surface of large radius.
2. Painted steel fabricated trapezoidal tapered box sections as primary mullions
3. Transoms not required, Glass to be carried by a cruciform steel bracket.
4. Pressure equalised aluminium carrier frame
5. Mullions & transoms of carrier frame in PPC or similar approved RAL 9006 metallic finish
6. All gaskets, sealants and associated components
7. All vapour barriers interfacing with roof system and perimeters.
8. All flashings, trims and clips
9. All brackets and fixings
10. Insulation
11. Fittings and ironmongery: Refer to Door and Ironmongery Schedule
12. Accessories: To include all products, fixings, accessories and interfaces to complete the
fabrication and installation of a watertight and acoustically sealed glazed aluminium
assembly. Performance criteria to comply with Design / Performance Requirements and
Testing subsections
13. Manifestation pattern (Applied graphics) To Architects Design refers to Glazing Spec
088000.
DESIGN CRITERIA
The works shall over sail the slab edge and be either fixed to primary structure or secondary
support structure.
Unless otherwise specified, aluminium framing shall provide four-sided support for the glazedin panels of the Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall, except where glass to glass corners occur.
Unless otherwise specified, aluminium framing shall provide two-sided support for the glazedin panels of the Glazed trapezoidal tapered steel fabricated curtain walls and cruciform steel
bracket for the horizontals, except where glass to glass corners occur.
Framing profiles and other visible components shall utilize similar profiles throughout such
that glazed walling systems are consistent and matching in appearance.
Joints shall align and continue through interfacing curtain walling. Visually open, recessed
horizontal and vertical joints between units shall be uniform and equal to a nominal width as
indicated on the Design Drawings.
Glass to glass external corners shall have joint seals to the manufacturer's recommendation
and to the acceptance of the Engineer.
All support systems shall be of adequate thickness and strength to meet the structural requirements and eliminate risk of distortion in finished surfaces.
Secondary support:
1. Support shall be configured as indicated on the Design Drawings, suitably fixed back
to the primary structure in methods acceptable to the Engineer. Where secondary
support is required and visible and not indicated as part of the Engineer's Design,
Page 5 of 12
Project:
Works:
Title:

I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
provide details at Tender. Acceptance from the Engineer is required in terms of

appearance.
2. Mild steel secondary support members shall be fabricated and protected against
corrosion in accordance with the Structural Engineer's requirements:
a) If visible it shall be polyester powder coat finished, colour to Engineer's acceptance.
b) All joints, as necessary with regard to visual intent, shall be welded and ground
smooth. Protective coatings, where specified, and the associated finish to joints
shall be to the same standard as the main assemblies.
Glazed/ infill panels shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings using codes as indicated
below.
Dimensions are deemed to be nominal but indicative to the design intent. The Contractor shall
maintain these dimensions and clearly state them on the Shop Drawings; deviations to these
shall be stated with the Tender.
Materials used for fixing shall be stainless steel grade as per the manufacturer's recommendations Fixings shall be concealed or inconspicuous to the acceptance of the Engineer.
Systems shall include supports, brackets, fixings, insulation, fire stops, acoustic breaks, vapour barriers, breather and waterproofing membranes, drainage channels, spigots / antirotation pins, seals, sealants, compressible fills, clips, glazing bridges, spacers, isolators,
gaskets, flashings, closures and all other accessories/ components necessary to complete the
installation.
Fire breaks/ insulation and acoustic insulation to floor slabs and ceiling void edge, complete
with metal encapsulation finished to match the curtain walling framing.
Provide all necessary waterproofing membranes at openings and interfaces with adjoining
trades. Membranes shall be compatible with adjoining trades. The Contractor shall liaise with
the appropriate sub-contractor to ensure a fully waterproof integration is achieved.
The Contractor shall undertake the Detailed Design and provide copings and cappings to
parapets, to nominal sizes and profiles as indicated on the Design Drawings.
Agree with the Engineer the period during which the sealant shall not change in appearance
or colour. Any discolouration of sealant during this time shall not be acceptable.
Sealant performance shall be verified by provision of current independent test certificates.
2.3
A.
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional design team, as defined in
Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazed aluminum curtain walls have
more than 10 years experience in faade design of similar projects.
B.
General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by

testing of glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project without
failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1.
2.
Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structure

including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and
deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
Failure also includes the following:
Page 6 of 12
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Structural Loads:
1.
2.
D.
Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1.
2.
Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular

to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual
glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to,
whichever is less.
Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or, whichever is
smaller.
a.
3.
2.
3.
When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress,
or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:

1.
Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a.
G.
Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus for
spans greater than or 1/175 times span, for spans less than.
Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1.
F.
Operable Units: Provide a minimum clearance between framing members and

operable units.
Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as follows:

a.
E.
Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.

Glass breakage.
Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
Failure of operating units.
Maximum air leakage of at a static-air-pressure differential of .
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:
1.
No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when
tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive
wind-load design pressure, but not less than .
Page 7 of 12
Project:
Works:
Title:

H.
Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:
1.
2.
3.
I.
Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested
according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 1 Wind
Zone 2 Wind Zone 3 Wind Zone 4.
1.
2.
J.
Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor
of not more than as determined according to NFRC 100.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat
gain coefficient of no greater than 0.35 0.40 0.45 as determined according to
NFRC 200.
Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRCcertified condensation resistance rating of no less than 15 25 35 45 as determined
according to NFRC 500.
Large-Missile Test: For glazed openings located within of grade.

Small-Missile Test: For glazed openings located more than above grade.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface
temperature changes:
1.
Temperature Change:, ambient;, material surfaces.
2.4
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:
2.5
A.
FRAMING
Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of
thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Construction: Thermally broken.

Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
Glazing Plane: Front.
Finish: Baked-enamel or powder-coat finish.
Fabrication Method: Factory-fabricated unitized system.
Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically retain

glazing.
1.
Include snap-on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners.
C.
Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
D.
Materials:
Page 8 of 12
with
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer

complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface
preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to
recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable
SSPC standard.
a.
b.
c.
2.6
A.
Sheet and Plate:.

Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes:.
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
GLAZING
Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."
B.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,

resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
C.
Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or
less.
E.
Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing
and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using
2.7
A.
FABRICATION
Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B.
Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration

of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
C.
Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1.
2.
3.
Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
Page 9 of 12
Project:
Works:
Title:

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Fabricate components to resist water penetration as follows:

1.
2.
E.
3.
4.
5.
2.8
A.
B.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities
Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness
of.
1.
D.
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.

Prepare surfaces that are in contact structural sealant according to sealant
manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.
Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
Install glazing to comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
1.
2.
C.
Internal guttering system or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation
occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum
curtain wall to exterior.
Pressure-equalized system or double barrier design with primary air and vapor barrier
at interior side of glazed aluminum curtain wall and secondary seal weeped and
vented to exterior.
Factory-Assembled Frame Units:

1.
2.
F.
Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances.
Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for
spandrel glazing panels.
Provisions for safety railings mounted between mullions at interior.
Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
Components curved to indicated radii.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range <Insert color
and gloss.
High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604
and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.
Page 10 of 12
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
E.
High-Performance Organic Finish: Four-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605
and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear
topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

Do not install damaged components.
Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
Where welding is required, weld components in concealed locations to minimize
distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding.
Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
Metal Protection:
1.
2.
Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
Where aluminum is in contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C.
Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.
D.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E.
Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."
3.2
A.
B.

Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
Test Area: Perform tests on representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain walls.
Page 11 of 12
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of glazed
aluminum curtain walls.
1.
Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated
by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water
penetration.
a.
Perform a minimum of three tests in areas as directed by Architect.
D.
Glazed aluminum curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
E.

Page 12 of 12
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
3.0
DESIGN, MATERIALS AND FINISHES.
4.0
FIXING DEVICES.
5.0
HINGES..
6.0
LOCK AND LATCHES....
7.0
CYLINDER..
8.0
LEVER HANDLES.
9.0
PULL HANDLES
10.0
PUSH PLATES..
11.0
BOLTS.
12.0
DOOR STOP.
13.0
DOOR CLOSING DEVICES..
14.0
FIRE RATING REQUIREMENTS
15.0
SUBMITTAL PROCESS FOR APPROVAL.
Page 1 of 7
Door Hardware
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE
1.0 GENERAL
1.1
All Hardware should be from one manufacturer and combination of sources is not acceptable.
Supplier should confirm in writing that proposed hardware is from a reputable branded
manufacturer and supplier and must identify the source of production by presenting a
documented letter from the manufacturer. Hardware schedule provide convenience of use and
maintenance of the building security against unauthorized access (and in some cases exit),
escape from, protection against and prevention of fire, smoke spread of toxic atmospheres of
other hazards and protection to doors and other surfaces. The contractor shall ensure that
hardware supplied meets with the Engineers requirements and if any item proposed or
specified detracts there from the Engineer shall be informed. Unless stated, hardware to
aluminum units shall be by the Aluminum fabricator in accordance with this specification but
with finishes to match his sections. Floor spring units and cover plates, master keyed cylinders
and access control hardware shall be by general hardware supplier.
2.1 The Contractor shall provide approved weatherproof storage facilities for all hardware delivered to
the Worksite.
2.2 The Contractor shall check the hardware on installation for correct operation, maintain each item in
accordance with the Manufacturers instructions, protect it against damage by other trades and ad
just, clean and lubricate it on completion of the Works.
2.3 The Contractor shall not fix hardware until background finishes are complete. Hardware previously
fixed shall be removed before any finishing process.
2.4 Hardware shall be supplied complete with all mounting fixings.
2.5 European norms E.N set the minimum requirements. Unless more stringent standards are specified,
all hardware shall comply with the following European Standards.
Standard
Title
EN179
EN1125
EN1154
EN1155
EN1158
EN1303
EN1527
EN1634-1
EN1670
EN1906
EN1935
Emergency Exit Devices (Manufacturer standard)

Panic exit devices
Door closing devices
Electrically powered door holders
Door co-coordinators
Cylinders for locks
Sliding door gear
Fire testing
Corrosion resistance
Lever handles and knobs
Single axis hinges
Page 2 of 7
Door Hardware
Project:
Works:
Title:

BSEN12209
BSEN12051
BSEN12320
BS8424
Locks and latches for doors in buildings

Door and window bolts
Padlocks and padlock fittings
Pull Handles
2.6. Hardware installed on fire rated doors must be CERTIFIRE approved and labeled hardware.
3.0 DESIGNS, MATERIALS AND FINISHES

3.1 Regardless of other provisions, materials shall meet fire safety requirements and not be subject to
bimetallic corrosion. Each items design and finish shall reflect the nature and quality of the project.
Every finished surface of one material, whether extruded, rolled, cast or stamped, shall match
exactly in colour and texture all other items.
3.2 Ironmongery finish: Satin Stainless Steel Grade 316. Other Grade Stainless Steel material is not
acceptable. Zinc alloy base material with a stainless steel plating surface or a brass base material
with satin chrome plating is not acceptable.
4.0 FIXING DEVICES

4.1 Provide suitable, matching, metric, rust proofed fixing devices to suit the location and background,
of Allen key, SUPADRIV, POSIDRIV or equivalent positive locating drive types. Pull handle fixing
shall be bolt through type, unless otherwise specifically required.
5.0 HINGES
5.1 Hinges shall be suitable to match other items on the doors. Hinges shall be triple knuckle ball bearing type to minimize closing friction and prevent wear.
5.2 Aluminium hinges are not acceptable.
5.3 All hinges shall be independently tested to EN1935 Grade 13 and fire standard EN1634 -1.
5.4 Hinge size to be 4X3X3mm thickness.
5.5 Where indicated on the hardware schedule, supply 4.5mmX4.5mmX3.4mm thick, ANSI dimensioned hinges, ball bearing, fire rated to EN1634-1, minimum fire rating 120 minutes.
5.6 Independent test certificates indicating conformity with above mentioned indicated standards must
be provided at the time of submittal as evidence that the hinges proposed conform to hardware industry certification, EN1935 Grade 13 and EN1634-1
5.7 All hinges to be CERTIFIRE labeled and approved and CE marked.
6.0 LOCK AND LATCHES

6.1 Lock suites for use on fire rated door assemblies shall be independently tested and certified as not
Page 3 of 7
Door Hardware
Project:
Works:
Title:

compromising fire rating and shall not contain plastics, zinc or other low melting point components
6.2 Mortise locks and latches shall conform to industry performance requirement BS EN 12209 and
industry fire rating standard EN 1634-1, 60 minutes
6.4 Independent certificates indicating conformity with indicated standards must be provided.
6.4 Furthermore the proposed mortice lockcase should conform to:
a. Deadbolts incorporating anti-sawing hardened steel rollers, 16mm thick.
b. If for lever handles, special springing against progressive lever droop (levers with
sprung roses are unacceptable due to potential for damage and corrosion.)
c. Facility for full reversal of hand, without opening the case.
d. Suitable forends, strike plates and rebate components if for rebated meeting styles, of non-corroding
materials to match handles.
e. All locks to have backset of 60mm.
6.5 All mortice lock and latches to be CERTIFIRE labeled and approved.
7.0 CYLINDERS
7.1 Cylinders shall be 6 pin, 61mm in length or 61mm Length with practically infinite differs, finished to
match handles and trim (includes coloured finishes), easily removable with the door open, without
dismantling trim but not removable if closed. Three keys per cylinder required. The cylinder shall
have Para centric keyways and TG pins to prevent picking and hardened steel drives pins and
body insert to overcome drilling.
7.2 Cylinder to conform to performance standard EN1303 grade 3 & fire rating EN1634.
7.3 Independent test certificate indicating conformity with above mentioned standards must be provided
at the time of submittal confirming cylinders proposed conform to hardware industry certification,
EN1303 grade 3 and EN1634-1.
7.4 Include for master keying for all cylinders, details to be provided by architect.
8.0 LEVER HANDLES

8.1 Lever Handles shall be as per the design intent described below. All lever handles to be made from
Satin stainless steel material grade 316. The levers shall be supplied complete with H.T. spindle
suitable for door thickness between 35mm and 54mm.
8.2 Lever handles shall be as per the described lever handle model in the hardware specification
schedule.
8.3 The lever handles should be solid body grade 316 stainless steel unless stated otherwise in the
hardware schedules. The lever handles should be on non-sprung unless stated other wise in the
hardware schedules.
8.4 In general lever edges and surfaces to be smooth and curved.
8.5 Approved lever handles are as described and indicated in the hardware schedule.
Page 4 of 7
Door Hardware
Project:
Works:
Title:

8.6 All lever handles to be supplied on a 4mm thick, 50mm diameter roses, and 8mm thick, 55mm
diameter roses with polished edges, capable of being rigidly fixed to door.
8.7 Concealed fixing base for roses should be rigid and allow for bolt thru fixing.
8.8 Independent test certificate indicating conformity with Industry performance standard EN1906 to be
provided at the time of submittal confirming proposed lever handles conform to this specific
certification standard.
9.0 PULL HANDLES

Pull handles should be as specified in the hardware schedule for all doors including but not limited to
wardrobe doors, kitchen sliding doors and other doors.
They shall be supplied with bolt through fixings employing countersunk corrosion proofed bolts cup
washers and locking patches. Approved pull handle is as per dimensions and other product details as
described and indicated in the hardware schedule. All pull handles must be tested and comply with
BS8424.
10.0 PUSH PLATES

They shall be manufactured from the specified finish indicated in this document. All plates to be 1.6mm
thick and shall be fixed with flush countersunk screws located 5mm from the edge corner. The plates
shall have curved smooth polished edges. Approved push plate is as per product details as described
and indicated in the hardware schedule.
11.0 BOLTS
To be fitted at top and bottom of non-active leaf of door pairs. Flush bolts to be provided having a
19mm throw and a 225mm body with a dovetail return ensuring no damage to the door. Acceptable
flush bolts as per product details described and indicated in the hardware schedule. Flush bolt must be
tested to EN1634-1 fire rating, supply testing evidence conforming to performance standard EN12051.
Suitable easy clean dirt excluding spring type sockets to be provided as described in the hardware
schedule.
12.0 DOOR STOP

All doorstops should be robust matching other ironmongery, concealed fixing. Dimensions and other
product details as described and indicated in the hardware schedule.
13.0 DOOR CLOSING DEVICES
Door closer to be adjustable, hydraulic check types, incorporating following features:
13.1 Closing speed fully adjustable between two and thirty seconds (if delayed closing is specified the
door, when opened to 90 degrees or beyond, shall stand motionless for a period adjustable up to
60 seconds, before starting to close).
Page 5 of 7
Door Hardware
Project:
Works:
Title:

13.2 Opening and closing from any angle up to 180 degrees with check adjustable to operate from
any angle between 135 degrees and closed.
13.3 Ten year guarantee in use of local ambient conditions, including positions of extreme exposure
and, for back check closers, even if stops are not specified.
13.4
They shall have plain, rectilinear bodies finished identically to other items on the door, suitable
rust proof arms, fully concealed fixings and adjustment controls. All closers to meet EN1154a
and be fire rated to EN1634-1 60 minute fire rating. Gray colour door closers are not
acceptable unless specifically specified in the hardware schedules. Dimensions and other
product details as described and indicated in the hardware schedule.
13.5
Upon submittal of proposed door closer for approval, submit independent fire test certificate
indicating closer conforms to EN1634-1, 60 minutes fire resistant.
13.6
Floor mounted closers shall be of suitable for single or double action, wood or metal doors by
use of compatible fittings, with concealed fixing cover plates.
13.7
All door closers to be CERTIFIRE labeled and approved.
14.0 FIRE RATING REQUIREMENTS:

14.1 For fire rated doors, supply CERTIFIRE Certificates and CE Certificates approved door hardware
for the following hardware items; Mortice locks, mortice latches, hinges and door closers.
15.0 SUBMITAL PROCESS FOR APPROVAL:

15.1 All hardware submittals must be accompanied by the following:
a. Complete hardware sample board showing major components proposed.
b. 3 marked original copies of the product catalogue. Items proposed must be in the original
product catalogue. Catalogue photocopies not are acceptable.
c. All items must be supplied through the same manufacturer. Supply verification.
15.2 Submit valid product testing performance certificates verifying individual products are
successfully tested as follows:
o Hinges certified to EN1935 grade 13.
o Mortice locks and & bathroom locks to BSEN12209.
o Cylinders to EN1303 grade 3.
o Lever handles and knobs to EN1906.
o Pull handles to BS8424.
15.3
Submit valid fire testing certificates verifying products successfully certified to EN1634-1
fire rating and CERTIFIRE approved.
15.4
Where fire rating label requires fire certification longer than 60 minutes, submit separate fire
certificate indicating 120 minute fire certification for the following items: mortice locks,
cylinders and hinges in addition to CERTIFIRE approved certification.
Page 6 of 7
Door Hardware
Project:
Works:
Title:

15.5
The supplier must confirm in writing what custom design software program is available within
his organization to assist in rapidly implementing changes to the hardware schedules as
needed during the course of the project. Word, excel or similar commercial software programs
are not acceptable.
15.6
The supplier shall offer full technical support and have qualified staff able to prepare or amend
hardware schedules and advise on technical issues, while coordinating with the contractor &
architect on all matters including master key systems, technical problems of specification,
installation and operation.
Page 7 of 7
Door Hardware
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 088000 GLAZING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
GENERAL
SUMMARY..
COORDINATION..
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
WARRANTY.
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
MANUFACTURERS.
GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL.
GLASS PRODUCTS.
LAMINATED GLASS
INSULATING GLASS..
GLAZING SEALANTS.
GLAZING TAPES.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS...
4
4
4
4
5
6
6
6
7
7
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
DESIGN, MATERIALS AND FINISHES.

GLAZING, GENERAL.
TAPE GLAZING..
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
SEALANT GLAZING..
CELANING AND PROTECTION..
MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE
LAMINATED GLASS..
INSULATING GLASS.
8
8
8
9
9
9
10
10
11
Page 1 of 11
Glazing
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 088000 GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes:
1.
2.
3.
Glass for windows doors interior borrowed lite, storefront framing, glazed curtain
walls.
Glazing sealants and accessories.
Glazing Schedule.
B.
specifications.
1.2
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge
and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
1.
2.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For field-applied glazing sealants, documentation
including printed statement of VOC content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.1: For glazing sealants, documentation
California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health
Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic
Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
C.
Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 300
mm square.
D.
Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings.
E.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements

and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
Page 2 of 11
Glazing
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.4
A.
Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.
1.5
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
1.6
A.
Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant,
gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with
elastomeric glazing sealants.
1.
1.7
A.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace
coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated
glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass
breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written
instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in
coating.
1.
B.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace

laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of
laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to
glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's
written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing
vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass
standard.
1.
C.
Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current
sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace

insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of
insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to
glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's
written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on
interior surfaces of glass.
1.
Page 3 of 11
Glazing
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in glass schedules or
comparable product
2.2
A.
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design glazing.
B.
Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and
under conditions indicated determined according to the International Building Code and
ASTM E 1300.
1.
2.
C.
Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.

Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential
shading within individual glass lites.
Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Exterior glazing shall comply with enhanced-protection

testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 3 when tested according to
ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated
for use on Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on
Project.
1.
2.
Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 9.1 m of grade.

Small-Missile Test: For glazing located more than 9.1 m above grade.
D.
Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with
16 CFR 1201, Category II.
E.
Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated
below:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
A.
U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as W/sq. m x K.
Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,
according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product
manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See
these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced
standards.
Page 4 of 11
Glazing
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
4.
GANA Publications: ["Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and ]"Glazing Manual."

AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and
AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped
Glazing."
IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing
Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
B.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with
certification label of [the SGCC] [the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction] [or] [manufacturer]. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name,
type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
C.
Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least

one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
D.
Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum.[ Provide glass that complies
with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.]
E.
Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heatstrengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass [as needed to comply with "Performance
Requirements" Article]. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heatstrengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass [as needed to comply with "Performance
Requirements" Article]. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered
float glass.
2.4
A.
GLASS PRODUCTS
Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.
B.
Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class I (clear), Quality-Q3; and with visible
light transmission of not less than 91 percent [and solar heat gain coefficient of not less than
0.87].
C.
Tinted Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3.
D.
Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated)
unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, QualityQ3.
E.
Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I,

Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted)
as indicated, Quality-Q3.
F.
Pyrolytic-Coated, Low-Maintenance Glass: Clear float glass with a coating on first surface
having both photocatalytic and hydrophilic properties that act to loosen dirt and to cause
water to sheet evenly over the glass instead of beading.
Page 5 of 11
Glazing
Project:
Works:
Title:

G.
Ceramic-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2
(tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3; and complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in GANA's
"Engineering Standards Manual."
H.
Reflective-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C 1376.
I.
Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I, Condition B, Quality-Q3.
J.
Silicone-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I, Condition C, Quality-Q3.
K.
Reflective-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1376, Kind CS.
2.5
A.
LAMINATED GLASS
Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to
bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistant Laminated Glass: Comply with requirements specified

above for laminated glass except laminate glass with one of the following to comply with
interlayer manufacturer's written instructions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.6
A.
Polyvinyl butyral interlayer.

Polyvinyl butyral interlayers reinforced with polyethylene terephthalate film.
Ionomeric polymer interlayer.
Cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer.
Cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer reinforced with polyethylene
terephthalate film.
INSULATING GLASS
Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by
a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.
1.
2.
2.7
A.
Construction: Laminate glass with [polyvinyl butyral interlayer] [ionomeric polymer

interlayer] [or] [cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer] to comply with
interlayer manufacturer's written instructions.
Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to
comply with requirements.
Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
Sealing System: Dual seals.

Spacer: Aluminum with black finish
GLAZING SEALANTS
General:
Page 6 of 11
Glazing
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.8
A.
GLAZING TAPES
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric
tape; non staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without
spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application
indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
B.
AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.

AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1.
2.
2.9
A.
Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact,
including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates,
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing
at time of installation.
Field-applied sealants shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L.
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services')
"Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary
sealant.
AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination
with a full bead of liquid sealant.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
B.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
C.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
D.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
Page 7 of 11
Glazing
Project:
Works:
Title:

E.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
GLAZING, GENERAL
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with
edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair
performance, or impair appearance.
C.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
D.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
E.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
F.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 1270 mm.
G.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
3.2
A.
TAPE GLAZING
Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are
flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B.
Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C.
Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.
D.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E.
Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
Page 8 of 11
Glazing
Project:
Works:
Title:

F.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting
dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable
stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
G.
Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.3
A.
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B.
Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C.
Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed
and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at
corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight
seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant
recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D.
Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.4
A.
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between
glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from
extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or
spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to
edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or
bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.5
A.
B.

Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
Page 9 of 11
Glazing
Project:
Works:
Title:

surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup
of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
1.
C.
3.6
A.
Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE
Glass Type: Clear fully tempered, double silver coated float glass.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Minimum Thickness: 6 mm
LT: 52%
LRo: 14%
LRi: 15%
SHGC : 0.27
SC: 0.31
U-Val(sum): 1.9 W/m2K
Glass Type: Reflective-coated spandrel glass; fully tempered float glass.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.7
A.
Minimum Thickness: 6 mm
LT: 79%
LRo: 14%
LRi: 15%
SHGC : 0.38
SC: 0.44
U-Val: 1.9 W/m2K
Glass Type: Clear fully tempered, double silver coated float glass.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,
remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.
Coating Type: Sputter-coating (vacuum deposition process).

Coating Color: [Silver]
Glass: [Clear]
Minimum Thickness: [6 mm]
Factory apply manufacturer's standard pacifier to coated second surface of lites, with
resulting products complying with Specification No. 89-1-6 in GANA's "Engineering
Standards Manual":
LAMINATED GLASS
Glass Type: Clear laminated glass with two plies of float glass.
1.
Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply [6 mm]
2.
Safety glazing required.
3.
Low-Maintenance Coating: Pyrolytic coating on first surface.
4.
Page 10 of 11
Glazing
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.8
A.
B.
INSULATING GLASS
Glass Type: Clear insulating glass.
1.
Overall Unit Thickness: [25 mm]
2.
Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 4 mm
3.
Outdoor Lite: [Annealed] float glass.
4.
Interspace Content: Argon.
5.
Indoor Lite: Annealed float glass.
6.
U-Value(sum): 1.9 W/m2K
7.
Glass Type: LOW E, Clear insulating glass
Outer pane: 6mm sputter coated on EPG clear treated with vitroglaze self cleaning nanocoating (heat strengthened).
Outer pane: 6mm EFG clear (fully tempered/heat soak tested).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Overall Unit Thickness: [28 mm]

Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm
Outdoor Lite: [Annealed] float glass.
Interspace Content: Argon.
Indoor Lite: Annealed float glass.
U-Value(ASHRAE): 1.41 W/m2K
Light Transmission: 69%
Light Reflection (out): 10%
Light Reflection (in): 11%
Energy Trnsmittance: 34%
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.38
Shading Coefficient: 0.45
RHG: 297 W/m2
Page 11 of 11
Glazing
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 089119 FIXED LOUVERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
GENERAL
SUMMARY..
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
PRODUCTS.
FIXED, EXTRUDED ALUMINUM LOUVERS...
FIXED, FORMED METAL LOUVERS
LOUVER SCREENS..
MATERIALS...
FABRICATION..
ALUMINUM FINISHES
GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES.
STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES..
2
2
3
4
5
6
6
6
7
7
3.0
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION.
ADJUSTING.
7
7
8
Page 1 of 8
Fixed Louvres
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 089119 FIXED LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
SUMMARY
Section includes fixed, [extruded-aluminum] [and] [formed-metal] louvers.
1.
2.
C.
1.2
A.
Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow-metal doors.
Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" for louvers in flush wood doors.
specifications.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.
For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing
specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.
B.
Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.
C.
Samples: For each type of metal finish required.
D.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural[ and seismic]
performance requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.3
A.
B.
Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L.
Windborne-debris-impact-resistance test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, using structural[ and seismic] performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
Page 2 of 8
Fixed Louvres
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation
of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or
permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act
normal to the face of the building.
1.
2.
Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings.

Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of [1436 Pa] acting inward
or outward.
C.
Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Louvers located within 9.1 m of grade shall pass

[enhanced]-protection, large-missile testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for [Wind Zone 3]
when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and
length than louvers indicated for use on Project.
D.
Seismic Performance: Louvers, including attachments to other construction, shall withstand the
effects of earthquake motions determined according to [ASCE/SEI 7].
1.
2.
E.
2.2
A.
Design earthquake spectral response acceleration, short period (Sds) for Project is.
Component Importance Factor: [1.5] [1.0].
Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as

demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for
length and width according to AMCA 500-L.
FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
Horizontal, Nondrainable-Blade Louver <See>:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Louver Depth: [150 mm].

Blade Profile: [Blade with] center baffle.
Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than [2.03 mm]
Mullion Type: [Semirecessed].
Louver Performance Ratings:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Free Area: Not less than [0.70 sq. m] for 1220-mm- wide by 1220-mm- high
louver.
Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than [3.6 m/s].
Air Performance: Not more than [25-Pa] static pressure drop at [3.8-m/s] freearea [exhaust] and/or [intake] velocity.
Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver <See>:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Louver Depth: [150 mm.

Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than [2.03 mm].
Mullion Type: Exposed.
Page 3 of 8
Fixed Louvres
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
C.
AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
Horizontal, Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver <See>:

1.
2.
3.

a.
b.
c.
4.
D.
louver.
Wind-Driven Rain Performance: Not less than [95) percent effectiveness when
subjected to a rainfall rate of [200 mm per hour and a wind speed of
22.4 m/s] at a core-area intake velocity of [2.5 m/s].
Vertical, Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver <See drawing>:

1.
2.
3.

a.
b.
c.
4.
2.3
A.
louver.
Air Performance: Not more than [25-Pa] static pressure drop at 4.3-m/s] freearea [exhaust] and/or [intake] velocity.
louver.
Wind-Driven Rain Performance: Not less than 99 percent effectiveness when
subjected to a rainfall rate of [200 mm per hour and a wind speed of 22.4 m/s]
at a core-area intake velocity of [2.5 m/s].
FIXED, FORMED-METAL LOUVERS

Horizontal, Nondrainable-Blade Louver <See>:
1.
2.

Blade Profile: [Blade with] center baffle.
Page 4 of 8
Fixed Louvres
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.
4.
5.
6.
Frame and Blade Material and Nominal Thickness: Galvanized-steel sheet, not less
than [1.63 mm].
Frame and Blade Material and Nominal Thickness: Stainless-steel sheet, not less than
[1.59 mm].
Mullion Type: [Semirecessed].
a.
b.
c.
B.
Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver <See drawing>:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Frame and Blade Material and Nominal Thickness: Galvanized-steel sheet, not less
than [1.63 mm].
Frame and Blade Material and Nominal Thickness: Stainless-steel sheet, not less than
[1.59 mm].
Mullion Type: Exposed.
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
2.4
A.
louver.
Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than [2.8 m/s.
louver.
Air Performance: Not more than [37-Pa] static pressure drop at [5.1-m/s] freearea velocity.
LOUVER SCREENS
General: Provide screen at [louvers indicated].
1.
2.
Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.

Screening Type: Bird screening.
B.
Louver Screen Frames: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens
are attached.
C.
Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:

1.
2.
3.
Bird Screening: Aluminum, 13-mm- square mesh, 1.60-mm wire.

Bird Screening: Stainless steel, 13-mm- square mesh, 1.19-mm wire.
Bird Screening: Flattened, expanded aluminum, 19 by 1.27 mm thick.
Page 5 of 8
Fixed Louvres
Project:
Works:
Title:

D.
Louver Screening for Galvanized-Steel Louvers:

1.
2.
E.
Louver Screening for Stainless-Steel Louvers:

1.
2.5
A.
Bird Screening: Galvanized steel, 13-mm- square mesh, 1.04-mm wire.

MATERIALS
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
B.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209M, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming,
or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, [Z180] zinc coating, mill phosphatized.
D.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, [No. 4 finish, with grain running
perpendicular to length of blades and parallel to length of frame members].
E.
Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Use [Phillips flat-head] [hex-head or Phillips pan-head] [tamper-resistant] screws for

exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized steel or 300 series stainless-steel
fasteners.
For fastening stainless steel, use 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
2.6
A.
FABRICATION
Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances
made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter
sealant joints.
B.
Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds [concealed from
view] unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections
between frame members necessary.
2.7
A.
B.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm] or thicker.
Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018mm) or thicker.
Page 6 of 8
Fixed Louvres
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
C.
High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with

[AAMA 2604] and containing not less than [70] percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and
resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1.
D.
Color and Gloss: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].
High-Performance Organic Finish: [Four]-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with

AAMA 2605 and containing not less than [70] percent PVDF resin by weight in both color
coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1.
2.8
A.
Color: [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities].
Color: [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities].
GALVANIZED-STEEL SHEET FINISHES

Finish louvers after assembly.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and
other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating compatible with the organic
coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and
repair according to ASTM A 780.
C.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply

manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting
topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.
1.
2.9
A.
STAINLESS-STEEL SHEET FINISHES

Repair sheet finish by grinding and polishing irregularities, weld spatter, scratches, and
forming marks to match surrounding finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
INSTALLATION
Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws
where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
Page 7 of 8
Fixed Louvres
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
D.
Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete,
masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy
coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic
flashing.
3.2
A.
ADJUSTING
Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of
corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove
damaged units and replace with new units.
Page 8 of 8
Fixed Louvres
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 089516 WALL VENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
GENERAL
SUMMARY
ACTION SUBMITTALS....
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
PRODUCTS.
WALL VENTS (BRICK VENTS) ..
MATERIALS...
2
2
2
3.0
3.1
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION
3
3
Page 1 of 3
Wall Vents
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 089516 WALL VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes wall vents.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
WALL VENTS (BRICK VENTS)

Extruded-Aluminum Wall Vents:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Cast-Aluminum Wall Vents:

1.
2.
3.
2.2
A.
Extruded-aluminum louvers and frames, not less than 3.18-mm nominal thickness,
assembled by welding; with 1.4-by-1.8-mm- mesh, aluminum insect screening on
inside face.
Dampers: Aluminum blades and frames mounted on inside of wall vents.
Finish: [Mill).
One-piece, cast-aluminum louvers and frames; with 1.4-by-1.8-mm- mesh, aluminum

insect screening on inside face.
Dampers: Aluminum blades and frames mounted on inside of wall vents.
Finish: Mill.
MATERIALS
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
B.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209M, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming,
or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 319.
D.
Page 2 of 3
Wall Vents
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Protect unpainted surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals
from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint.
B.
Build vents into masonry work as construction progresses; comply with requirements in
Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."
Page 3 of 3
Wall Vents
DIVISION 09
________________________________________________________________________
FINISHES
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 092116.23 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
GENERAL
SUMMARY
ACTION SUBMITTALS
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
PRODUCTS
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
PANEL PRODUCTS.
NON-LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING
3
3
3
4
4
4
3.0
3.1
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION..
5
5
Division 09 Section 092113.23 SF
Page 1 of 6
Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 092116.23 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each component of gypsum board shaft wall assembly.
B.
LEED Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
with requirements for regionally manufactured[ and regionally extracted and
manufactured] materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally
manufactured material.
a.
b.
4.

Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For gypsum board shaft wall systems,
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
Page 2 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies

tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and
inspecting agency.
C.
Low-Emitting Materials: Gypsum shaft wall assemblies shall comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
2.2
A.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES

Fire-Resistance Rating: [As indicated].
B.
STC Rating: [As indicated]
C.
Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and
fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.
1.
2.
D.
Depth: [As indicated] Second option in "Minimum Base-Metal Thickness"

Subparagraph below corresponds to 25 gage; third option corresponds to 20 gage.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated].
Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with manufacturer's standard long-leg
length, but at least 51 mm long and matching studs in depth.
1.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated] [Matching steel studs]
E.
Firestop Tracks: Provide firestop track at head of shaft wall on each floor level.
F.
Elevator Hoistway Entrances: Manufacturer's standard J-profile jamb strut with long-leg length
of 76 mm, matching studs in depth.
G.
Room-Side Finish: [As indicated] [Gypsum board]
H.
Shaft-Side Finish: [Gypsum shaftliner board, moisture- and mold-resistant Type X] & [As
indicated by fire-resistance-rated assembly design designation].
I.
Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets.
Page 3 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.3
A.
PANEL PRODUCTS
Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 10 percent by weight.
B.
Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 800 km of Project
site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within 800 km of Project site.
C.
Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 800 km of Project
site.
D.
Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and that correspond with support system indicated.
E.
Gypsum Shaftliner Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; manufacturer's proprietary fireresistive liner panels with paper faces.
1.
F.
Gypsum Shaftliner Board, Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M;
manufacturer's proprietary fire-resistive liner panels with moisture- and mold-resistant core and
surfaces.
1.
2.
3.
G.
2.4
A.
one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following]:
Thickness: 25.4 mm.

Long Edges: Double bevel.
Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board."

NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
Recycled Content of Steel: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content not less than [25] < > percent.
B.
Steel Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal.
C.
Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract
with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly
indicated.
2.5
A.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
Trim Accessories: Material and shapes as specified in [Section 092900 "Gypsum Board"]
that comply with gypsum board shaft wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations
for application indicated.
B.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
Page 4 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading
conditions.
D.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in [Section 092900 "Gypsum Board."]
E.
Acoustical Sealant: As specified in [Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants."]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated,
manufacturer's written installation instructions, and ASTM C 754 other than stud-spacing
requirements.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold
damaged.
C.
Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Patch or replace sprayed fire-resistive materials removed or

damaged during installation of shaft wall assemblies. After application, remove only to extent
necessary for installation of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.
D.
Building Expansion Joints: Frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other
support.
E.
Install supplementary framing around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and
support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, handrails, and similar items.
1.
Elevator Hoistway: Provide jamb struts on each side of door frame.
F.
Penetrations: Install supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration behind

boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar
items.
G.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure, while maintaining continuity of firerated construction.
H.
Firestop Tracks: Install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.
I.
Control Joints: Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings] while maintaining fireresistance rating of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.
J.
Sound-Rated Shaft Wall Assemblies: Seal with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each
assembly and at joints and penetrations.
K.
Cant Panels: At projections into shaft exceeding 102 mm, install 13- or 16-mmthick gypsum
board cants covering tops of projections.
Page 5 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

L.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 3
mm from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
M.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
Page 6 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 092400 CEMENT PLASTERING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
SUMMARY
ACTION SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
PROJECT CONDITIONS
2
2
2
2
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
PRODUCTS
METAL LATH
ACCESSORIES
PLASTER MATERIALS.
PLASTER MIXES..
3
3
3
4
5
6
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
EXECUTION..
PREPARATION.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL....
INSTALLING METAL LATH.
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES.
PLASTER APPLICATION.
PLASTER REPAIRS...
7
7
8
8
8
8
10
Division 09 Section 092400 SF
Page 1 of 10
Portland Cement Plastering
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 092400 CEMENT PLASTERING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
B.
Interior portland cement plasterwork on [metal lath] [unit masonry] [and] [monolithic
concrete].
Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on [metal lath] [unit masonry] [and]
[monolithic concrete].
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.
2.
3.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For sealants, documentation indicating that
C.
Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including
plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.
D.
Samples: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated.
1.3
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster assemblies
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
B.
Sound-Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster

assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for STC ratings per ASTM E 90 and
classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified testing agency.
C.
Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 9.3 sq. m in surface area to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
Page 2 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
1.4
A.
B.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.
Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for
environmental conditions for applying finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
METAL LATH
Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z180, hot-dip galvanized
zinc coating.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Wire-Fabric Lath:
1.
2.
C.
B.
Welded-Wire Lath: ASTM C 933; self-furring, [1.1 kg/sq. m].

Woven-Wire Lath: ASTM C 1032; self-furring, with stiffener wire backing, [0.8
kg/sq. m].
Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790, Type I, [Grade B, Style 1a vapor-retardant paper]

1.
2.2
A.
Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled

content not less than [25] percent.
Diamond-Mesh Lath: [Self-furring], [1.8 kg/sq. m].
Flat Rib Lath: Rib depth of not more than 3.1 mm, [1.8 kg/sq. m].
9.5-mm Rib Lath: [ [2.2 kg/sq. m].
Provide paper-backed lath [unless otherwise indicated]
ACCESSORIES
General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with
thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
Metal Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet,

ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z180 zinc coating.
Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z180, hot-dip
galvanized zinc coating.
External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
Z180, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
Cornerbeads: Fabricated from [zinc-coated (galvanized) steel].
Page 3 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
[Small-nose] style; use unless otherwise indicated.
Casing Beads: Fabricated from[zinc-coated (galvanized) steel]; square-edged style;

with expanded flanges.
Control Joints: Fabricated from [zinc-coated (galvanized) steel]; one-piece-type, folded
pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and
removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.
Expansion Joints: Fabricated [or] [zinc-coated (galvanized) steel]; folded pair of
unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges.
Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from [zinc-coated (galvanized) steel]; formed to
produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal that is adjustable from 6.34 to 16 mm
wide; with perforated flanges.
Plastic Accessories: Fabricated from high-impact PVC.

1.
Cornerbeads: With perforated flanges.

a.
2.
Casing Beads: With perforated flanges in depth required to suit plaster bases indicated
and flange length required to suit applications indicated.
a.
3.
4.
[Small-nose] style; use unless otherwise indicated.
[Square-edge] style; use unless otherwise indicated.
Control Joints: One-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped

configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of
control joint.
Expansion Joints: Two-piece type, formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged [13mm-] wide reveal; with perforated concealed flanges.
2.3
A.
Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of
damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.
B.
Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 13 mm long, free of
contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster.
C.
Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.
D.
Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required
by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths
required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no fewer than three exposed
threads.
E.
Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063.
Page 4 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

F.
Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 1.21-mm
diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1.
2.
H.
Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants."

1.
2.
2.4
A.
Sealants shall have a VOC content of [250] g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
PLASTER MATERIALS
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, [Type I]
1.
B.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

content not less than <10> percent by weight.
Color for Finish Coats: [White]
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type N.

1.
Color for Finish Coats: [White].
C.
Plastic Cement: ASTM C 1328.
D.
Colorants for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: Colorfast mineral pigments that produce finish plaster
color [to match Architect's sample].
E.
Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S.
F.
Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.

1.
Color for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: [White] [In color matching Architect's sample].
G.
Perlite Aggregate: ASTM C 35.
H.
Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents,

and proprietary ingredients.
1.
I.
Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].
Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating systems, formulated

with colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over portland cement plaster
Page 5 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

base coats. Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylicbased finishes.
1.
2.5
A.
PLASTER MIXES
General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.
1.
B.
Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].
Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two
minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in
mixes, but do not exceed 0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m of cementitious materials.
Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork
as follows:
1.
Portland Cement Mixes:

a.
b.
2.
Masonry Cement Mixes:

a.
b.
3.
b.
Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part
masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious
material.
Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part
masonry cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material,
but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.
Plastic Cement Mixes:

a.
b.
5.
Scratch Coat: 1 part masonry cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.

Brown Coat: 1 part masonry cement and 3 to 5 parts aggregate, but not less
than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.
Portland and Masonry Cement Mixes:

a.
4.
Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement [3/4 to 11/2] parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious
material.
Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and [3/4 to
1-1/2] parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material,
Scratch Coat: 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.

Brown Coat: 1 part plastic cement and 3 to 5 parts aggregate, but not less than
volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.
Portland and Plastic Cement Mixes:
Page 6 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
C.
Base-Coat Mixes: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows:

1.
2.
3.
D.
2.
3.
Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4
to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
Masonry Cement Mix: Use 1 part masonry cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes:

1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to
3/4 part lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland
cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of
cementitious material.
Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
Base-Coat Mixes: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows:

1.
E.
Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part
portland cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious
material.
Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part
portland cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material,
Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and [11/2 to 2] parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
Masonry Cement Mix: 1 part masonry cement and 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate.
Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland
cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of
cementitious material.
Plastic Cement Mix: 1 part plastic cement and 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate.
Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For [ready-mixed finish-coat plasters], comply with

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PREPARATION
Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful
effects caused by plastering.
B.
Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability
required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.
Page 7 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.2
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design
designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.
B.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unless
blankets are readily installed after lath has been installed on one side.
C.
Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting
construction with acoustical sealant.
3.3
A.
INSTALLING METAL LATH

Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
A.
B.
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.
Reinforcement for External Corners:
1.
2.
C.
Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install [flat diamond-mesh lath.

Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install [flat diamond-mesh] lath.
Curved-Ceiling Framing: Install [flat diamond-mesh] lath.
On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring, [diamond-mesh] lath.
Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations.

Install cornerbead at interior and exterior locations.
Control Joints: Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings.] Retain subparagraphs
below if retaining last option in paragraph above.
1.
As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum

sizes:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.5
A.
Vertical Surfaces: 13.4 sq. m.

Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 9.3 sq. m.
At distances between control joints of not greater than 5.5 m o.c.

As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of
not greater than 2-1/2:1.
Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster.
Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas
(panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension
change.
PLASTER APPLICATION
General: Comply with ASTM C 926.
Page 8 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Bonding Compound: Apply on [unit masonry] [and] [concrete] plaster bases.
C.
Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat
plasterwork[, on masonry] [, on concrete]; 19-mm thickness.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Ceilings; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat
plasterwork;
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Portland cement mixes.

Masonry cement mixes.
Portland and masonry cement mixes.
Plastic cement mixes.
Portland and plastic cement mixes.
Walls; Base-Coat Mix: Scratch coat for two-coat plasterwork[, 10 mm thick on concrete
masonry].
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.


Ceilings; Base-Coat Mix: Scratch coat for two-coat plasterwork, 6 mm thick on concrete.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

G.
Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide [float] finish to match Architect's sample.
H.
Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and
sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I.
Concealed Exterior Plasterwork: Where plaster application will be used as a base for
adhered finishes, omit finish coat.
J.
Concealed Interior Plasterwork:
Page 9 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
3.6
A.
Where plaster application will be concealed behind built-in cabinets, similar

furnishings, and equipment, apply finish coat.
Where plaster application will be concealed above suspended ceilings and in similar
locations, finish coat may be omitted.
Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhesive application of tile and
similar finishes, omit finish coat.
PLASTER REPAIRS
Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check
cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate
has failed.
Page 10 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
GENERAL
SUMMARY
ACTION SUBMITTALS
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
PRODUCTS
GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD.
SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD...
EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS...
TILE BACKING PANELS.
TRIM ACCESSORIES..
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
TEXTURE FINISHES.
3
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
3.0
3.1
EXECUTION..
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS.
7
7
Page 1 of 8
Gypsum Board
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
A.
B.
Interior gypsum board.

Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
Tile backing panels.
Texture finishes.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.
2.
3.
with requirements for regionally manufactured[ and regionally extracted and
manufactured] materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally
manufactured material.
a.
b.
4.
5.

Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board panels
to substrates, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board
panels to substrates, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing
and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
Page 2 of 8
Gypsum Board
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Samples:
1.
Textured Finishes: [Manufacturer's standard size] for each textured finish indicated and
on same backing indicated for Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
C.
Low Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements
of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
2.2
A.
GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than <10> percent.
B.
Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project
site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.
C.
Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project
site.
2.3
A.
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
B.
Thickness: 1/2 inch.

Long Edges: [Tapered] [Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling].
Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1.
2.

Long Edges: [Tapered]
Page 3 of 8
Gypsum Board
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to
be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.
1.
2.
D.
Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1.
2.
E.
Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings.

Long Edges: Tapered.
Glass-Mat Interior Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1658/C 1658M. With fiberglass mat laminated
to both sides. Specifically designed for interior use.
1.
2.
3.
2.5
A.
Core: [5/8 inch, Type X].

SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD

Gypsum Board, Type C: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have increased fireresistive capability.
1.
2.
B.

Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and
mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
A.
Core: [Type C as required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings].

Long Edges: [Tapered].
Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, [Level 1] [Level 2] [Level 3].
1.
2.
3.
G.

Foil-Backed Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1.
2.
F.

Core: [5/8 inch, abuse resistant].

EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS

Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard
edges.
Page 4 of 8
Gypsum Board
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
B.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with fiberglass mat
laminated to both sides and with manufacturer's standard edges.
1.
2.6
A.
2.8
A.
B.
Material: [Paper-faced galvanized steel sheet].
Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1.
C.
Core: [Type C as required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings].
TRIM ACCESSORIES
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
B.
Thickness: [5/8 inch]

Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's

standard edges.
1.
2.7
A.

Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's
standard edges.
1.
2.
C.
TILE BACKING PANELS

Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's
standard edges.
1.
2.
B.
Material: [Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc]
Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.

JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
Joint Tape:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Page 5 of 8
Gypsum Board
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
2.9
A.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering
gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
1.
2.
Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of [50] < > g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Laminating adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
B.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).
1.
D.
Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than <10> percent.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound
transmission through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according to
ASTM E 90.
1.
2.
Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of [250] <> g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Acoustical joint sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
E.
Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
F.
Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
2.10
A.
B.
TEXTURE FINISHES
Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
Polystyrene Aggregate Ceiling Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, polystyrene aggregate finish
with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 25 when tested according
to ASTM E 84.
1.
C.
Texture: [Fine]
Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray
application.
Page 6 of 8
Gypsum Board
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
D.
Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application.

1.
E.
Texture: [Light spatter]
Texture: [Light] [Spatter]
Acoustical Finish: Water-based, chemical-setting or drying-type, job-mixed texture finish for

spray application.
1.
2.
Application Thickness: [1/2 inch]

Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
a.
b.
3.
Flame-Spread Index: [25] <> or less.

Smoke-Developed Index: [50] or less.
NRC: [0.55] according to ASTM C 423.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
D.
Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners
used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
Aluminum Trim: Install in locations [indicated on Drawings].

Control Joints: Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings].
E.
Prefill open joints[, beveled edges,] and damaged surface areas.
F.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as
not intended to receive tape.
G.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1.
2.
3.
Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

Level 2: [Where indicated on Drawings]
Page 7 of 8
Gypsum Board
Project:
Works:
Title:

4.
Level 4: [At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated]
a.
5.
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior
Painting."

a.
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior
Painting."
H.
Texture Finish Application: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces
receiving texture finishes. Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a
uniform texture[ matching approved mockup and] free of starved spots or other evidence of
thin application or of application patterns.
I.
Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove
from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise
damaged during drywall application.
J.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
Page 8 of 8
Gypsum Board
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 093013 CERAMIC TILES

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES..
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
SUBMITTALS.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING..
2
2
2
2
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
MANUFACTURERS....
MATERIALS...
EXTRA STOCK....
3
3
3
3
8
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
EXECUTION..
INSPECTION AND PREPARATION..
INSTALLATION, GENERAL.
SETTING-OUT..
INSTALLATION
CLEANING.
FINISHING..
CURING
PROTECTION..
8
8
8
9
9
10
11
11
11
Page 1 of 11
Ceramic Tiling
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 093013 CERAMIC TILES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1
Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, apply to work of this Section.
1.1.2
Supply and installation of ceramic walls, floors and skirting at locations shown on the
drawings and schedules.
1.1.3
This section covers the Ceramic tiles works as indicated on Drawings and required by
the Contract and shall include the following items:
Glazed Ceramic Wall Tiles
Unglazed Floor Ceramic Tiles
Extent of Ceramic tiles is indicated on the Drawings and finishing tables.

1.2.1
lnstaller's Qualifications: Engaged in the installation of ceramic tile systems, work, and
who has proven experience of at least five (5) years experience in this type of work as
specified in this section of the specifications.
1.2.2
Mockup: At location in the building where designated by Engineer, install mockups of

each type of wall and floor material, complete, fully grouted, for Engineers approval.
Modify mockup as necessary to obtain approval. Approved mockup may remain as
part of the completed work.
1.2.3
Environmental Conditions: Don't perform work when temperature and humidity in the
work area is likely to exceed the application and curing ranges of the mortars and
adhesives.
1.2.4
Performance of adhesion test on site to recommended International Standard.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.3.1
Samples:
Page 2 of 11
Ceramic Tiling
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
Shop drawings: Shop drawings showing floor patterns, wall designs, border tiles, etc.
shall be submitted to Engineer for approval.
b.
Tiles: Submit two 600 mm x 600 mm samples of each material, special pieces, colour
and finish, mounted on tempered hardboard, grouted to approved colours.
c.
Grout: Submit samples of grout colours for approval. Actual cured grout must be submitted, pictures and colour charts not acceptable.
d.
Re-submit samples until approved. When approved, the samples will serve as the standard
for subsequent work.
1.3.2 Test Reports: Material test report from qualified testing laboratory indicating test results
relative to compliance of tile, tile setting and grouting products with requirements of British
Standards.
1.3.3 Maintenance Manuals: Submit three copies of maintenance manuals for inclusion in the
data book at the completion of works. Give specific warning of any maintenance practice
or materials that may damage the finished work.
1.3.4 Certificate: Submit manufacturers certificate stating that installed work is in accordance
with the requirements of this Section and own printed instruction.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Handle, deliver and store tiles adhesive, and cementitious materials in manner to ensure no
discoloration and damages occur.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
The design and installation shall be in accordance with BS 5385 Part 1, 2 and 3. Tiling should
be carried out in accordance with BS5385. Adhesives and grouts should conform to EN12004.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
Subject to compliance with the specification requirements of this section, provide products by one
of the attached list of manufacturers or approved equal shown in Section 01295.
2.3 MATERIALS
2.3.1 General:
All ceramic tiles shall be fully vitrified.
Colour and type of Ceramic tile to be selected by the Engineer from manufacturers
standard range.
Page 3 of 11
Ceramic Tiling
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.3.2 Ceramic Floor/Wall Tiles

2.3.2.1
Ceramic floor tiles shall be matt finish, vitrified plain clay tiles manufactured in
accordance with BS 6431. Skirtings shall be coved edge type 100 mm high.
Acid resistant tiles shall be used where specified. Tile pattern and colour shall
be to the Engineers Selection. The tile sizes and make shall be as detailed on
drawings.
2.3.2.2
Glazed wall tiles shall conform to the requirements of BS 6431 and the size
shall be as shown on the schedule of finishes or the Drawings and of an
acceptable pattern and colour. Single edge and double edge rounded tiles,
coves and corner pieces shall be of the same quality, colour, and
finish. The tile sizes and make shall be as detailed on drawings.
2.3.2.3
Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile
and to comply with the following requirements:
Size:
2.3.2.4
As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile

where applicable.
Special Pieces: Provide Special units to match characteristics of adjoining flat

tile and to comply with following requirements.
External and internal corners bull-nose shape
Tapered transition tile, with shape assigned to effect transition

between thickness of tile and adjoining finishes of different thickness.
2.3.2.5
Curved units for transition from wall to horizontal floor.
Ceramic Skirting: Units are prepared in the same way as ceramic tiles, but must
also have one top surface and bull-nose glazed. Units shall be of the same colour
and length of the adjoining floor tiles, and the height shall be as required.
2.3.2.6
Cement: To BS 1200: non-staining Portland cement, Class 42.5 to BS12.
2.3.2.7
Sand: to BS 1200: fine granular material composed of hard, strong, durable

mineral particles which shall be free from injurious amounts of saline, alkaline,
organic or other deleterious substances, and passing a 1.25 mm mesh.
2.3.2.8
Water: Free from salt and other deleterious foreign matter.
2.3.2.9
Latex Portland Cement Mortar: Modified Portland cement mortar and polymers
to BS 5385 and to conform to the requirements of EN12004.
2.3.2.10 Colour Pigments: Pure mineral pigment, lime-proof, non-staining.

2.3.2.11
Adhesive for Tiles:

Tile Adhesives and Grout for internal areas:
Page 4 of 11
Ceramic Tiling
Project:
Works:
Title:

Wet Areas Only Include the Following WPM:

WPM
As specified in section
071416
071613
Cold Fluid-applied waterproofing

Polymer modified cement
waterproofing
The product should follow the following criteria for performance.
- Resistant to Lime Water
- Can used on floors and walls
- Solvent Free
- Crack bridging
- Load bearing
Floors The screed system must perform according to the following criteria:
- IMPACT RESISTANT TO CAT A (BRE HAMMER) <3MM INDENTATION
- CT-C35-F6 IN ACCORDANCE WITH DIN EN 13813
- INSENSITIVE TO MOISTURE
- TEMP RESISTANCE -30C TO +80C
- MINIMUM APPLIED THICKNESS 10MM 160MM
- 1 HOUR WORKABILITY AT HIGH TEMPERATURES
- BONDED; UNBONDED OR FLOATING TO BS8204-1
- READY TO RECEIVE TILING AFTER 3 DAYS
- SHRINKAGE COMPENSATED
Adhesive:
Tile Type
Water Absorption/Porosity
Recommended Adhesive Type
Non-vitrified tiles (B111)

> 10 %
>10%
Adhesive
Semi Vitrified tiles (B11b)

6 - 10 %
6-10%
Vitrified tiles (B11a)

3-6%
3-6%
Impervious (B1)
< 3%
<3%
Adhesive
Glazed mosaic
1 - 3%
1-3%
2. flexible cement based polymer modified tile adhesive

mortar for fixing porcelain
1.cement based polymer modified tile adhesive mortar: Factory proportioned pre-blended
mixture of cements, graded
aggregates, synthetic resins
and special additives in a dry
blend to be mixed and applied as per manufacturers
instructions. Products to meet
the requirements of EN
12004 C1TE and have the
Page 5 of 11
Ceramic Tiling
Project:
Works:
Title:

Porcelain tile
0,5 - 1%
0.5-1.0%
Fully vitrified tile

< 0,3%
<0.3%
Glass mosaic
0%
0%
and fully vitrified tiles: Factory

proportioned pre-blended mixture of cements, graded aggregates, synthetic resins and
special additives in a dry
12004 C2TE and have the
Adhesive
3. Deformable multi purpose
tile adhesive for all ceramic
coverings and substrates: Factory proportioned pre-blended
mixture of cements, graded
aggregates, synthetic resins
and special additives in a dry
12004 C2TE S1 and have the
Grout:- Grout engineered for the grouting of ceramic tile, which has the
following additional performance properties:
2.3.2.12
Internal and external use
Can be used on walls and floors
For joint widths 1-6mm
Crack free
Waterproof
Formulated for swimming pools
Middle East formulation
Conforms to ANSI A118.7
Sealer: apply protective finish clear sealer coat of BASF Masterseal 1430 Silconal
or similar product to floor tiles at locations shown in Room Finish Schedule.
Page 6 of 11
Ceramic Tiling
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.3.2.13
Sealants for /Control Joints: Silicone Sealant:- BASF PCI Silcoferm Silicon
Sealant engineered for use with ceramic tile that has the following additional
characteristics:
2.3.2.14
Suitable for use in swimming pools
Contains fungicides
UV/weather resistant
Resistant to hot and boiling water
Temperature resistant from -40 to +165 C
Electrical Conduits Within The Floor
Conduit pipes should be properly cleaned to remove any loose material which could
reduce bond strength of the BASF Epoxy Adhesive
Conduits should be fixed to the floor in 2m intervals using stainless steel clamps
ensuring each conduit is clamped individually leaving a minimum of 3mm between
each conduit
-
BASF PCI VG7 Epoxy should be applied to the conduit pipe and
while wet, blinded with silica sand
Once dry, unbounded silica should be removed
BASF Mastertop 518 Screed System should be applied upto the

conduits leaving a conduit channel
D49 Stainless Steel Mesh should be incorporated 150mm into

each side of the screed above the conduits at a screed depth of
50% of the screed thickness ensuring a minimum screed thickness
of 15mm above the conduit pipes
Fill the conduit channel until flush with the screed surface using
BASF 528 Self Levelling Compound
2.3.2.15
Epoxy Adhesive & Grout

Floors/Walls:- BASF Mastertile 707 Epoxy Adhesive & Grout which is an
epoxy adhesive and grout engineered specifically for the installation of floor
coverings made of ceramic tile, glass, mosaics, to produce a chemical resistant
and water impermeable floor or wall finish.
The resin based adhesive and grout conforms to an R2T class according to EN
12004 as well as having the following additional characteristics:
-
Resistant to chemicals, acids, lyes, grease, and oil
Water impermeable and water vapour barrier
Page 7 of 11
Ceramic Tiling
Project:
Works:
Title:

- Highly wear resistant to rolling and grinding loads, and insensitive to jet steam
cleaning
- Crack free curing
- Ultra high adhesion to tile edges
- Shrinkage free
- Weather resistant when used externally
- Low modulus of elasticity and high mechanical strength
- Temperature shock resistant
2.4 EXTRA STOCK
Prior to issuance of completion certificate, deliver to the job site for storage as directed by Engineer,
extra stock equal to 5% of each colour and component of all ceramic tile materials used on the project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
3.1.1
Before commencing erection, examine the base work to which the tile work
applied.
3.1.2
Report immediately in writing to Engineer all discrepancies in accuracy and

Suitability in the location, bearing and retaining of structural members which will
adversely affect the installation and permanency of the work of this Section.
3.1.3
Preparation of Walls: Where concrete block walls and concrete walls are to be
finished with tile, apply a leveling coat of cement mortar minimum 12 mm thick,
sufficient to cover the unevenness of the substrate and to make walls true vertical.
Trowel mortar smooth to leave a surface suitable for use of adhesive.
3.1.4
Preparation of Floors: Cast-in-place concrete substrates shall be sufficiently smooth

and level such that when thin-set mortar to accept tiles is applied, no voids under
the tiles occur. Grind off high spots and fill-in low spots as necessary to ensure no
voids occur. All toilets and pantries to receive waterproofing type W.P-1 U.O.N.
and shall be tested before and after the installation of tiles.
3.1.5
Commencement of installation shall indicate acceptance of the work of other

Section, upon which the work of this Section depends.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

3.2.1
Comply with the requirements of BS 5385 wall and floor tile.
Page 8 of 11
Ceramic Tiling
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.2.2
Check that there are no unintended colour/shade variations within the tiles for use
in each area. Thoroughly mix variegated tiles.
3.2.3
Check that adhesive is compatible with background/base.
3.2.4
Unless specified otherwise fix tiles so that there is adhesion over the whole of the
background/base and tile backs.
3.2.5
Before bedding material sets make adjustments necessary to give true, regular
appearance to tiles and joints when viewed under final lighting conditions.
3.3 SETTING-OUT
3.3.1 Joints to be true to line, continuous and without steps.
3.3.2 Joints on walls to be truly horizontal, vertical and in alignment round corners.
3.3.3 Joints in walls and floors to be in alignment.
3.3.4 Before laying tiles obtain approval of setting out by Engineer.
Provide symmetry about center lines of the space or areas and adjust to minimize
tile cutting.
3.3.5 Lay out tile work so that tiles less than 1/2 full size do not occur and with
minimum of cutting. Carefully grind edges of cut tile. Ensure cut tiles are in corners and
are equal on each wall face.
3.3.6 Joint widths:
a. For ceramic tiles of all sizes: 2 mm.
b. The joint width shall be determined according to manufacturers
recommendation and the material used for grouting.
3.4 INSTALLATION
3.4.1 Tiles
a. Mortar bedding walls mix cementious bedding materials thoroughly to a uniform consistence in a suitable forced action mechanical mixer. Do not use a free fall type
(tilting drum) mixer. Use the minimum amount of water necessary to give required
workability.
b. Use mortar within two hours of mixing at normal temperatures. Do not use after the
initial set has taken place and do not retemper.
c.
Tile Skirtings: Bed solid to wall (before laying floor tiles for skirtings). Ensure joints in
skirtings match and align with joints in floor tiling.
d. Thin Bed Adhesive-Walls: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry background in areas
of approximately 1 M2 and comb the surface with the recommended solid bed trowel.
Page 9 of 11
Ceramic Tiling
Project:
Works:
Title:

Apply thin even coat of adhesive to backs of dry tiles. Press tiles onto bedding with
twisting/sliding action to give finished bed thickness of not more than 3 mm.
e. Thick Bed Adhesive-Walls: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry background and
comb the surface with the recommended solid bed trowel. Fill any keys and apply thin
even coat of adhesive over the entire back of each tile. Press tiles onto bedding with
twisting/sliding action to give finished bed thickness within the range recommended by
the manufacturer.
f.
Thick Bed Adhesive - Floors: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry base and comb the
surface with the recommended solid bed trowel. Fill any keys and apply thin even coat
of adhesive over the entire back of each tile. Press tiles onto bedding with twisting/sliding action to give finished bed thickness within the range recommended by the
manufacturer. Tile floors shall finish flush with the gratings, strainers and drains.
3.4.2 Grouting
a. Allow bedding material to harden sufficiently before grouting.
b. Ensure that joints are 6 mm deep (or the depth of the tile if less), and are free from
dust and debris.
c.
Force grout and fill joints completely to entire depth, tool to an approved profile,
clean off surface and leave free from blemishes.
d. Polish wall tiling with a dry cloth when joints are hard.
e. Coloured Grout: Check the potential risk of staining by applying the grout to a few
tiles in a small trial area. If discolouration occurs apply a protective sealer to the
tiles and repeat the trial.
f.
Control Joints: Provide Control Joints 6mm minimum width in large tile areas at a
maximum of 4.5m in each direction and at the perimeter walls. Do not saw-cut
joints after installing tiles.
3.5 CLEANING
3.5.1
Keep installed work clean as work progresses.
3.5.2
After grouting and pointing, clean tile with stiff fibre brushes and water in
accordance with the Marble Institute of America written recommendations.
The use of wire brushes or acids shall not be permitted. Flush down at
completion.
3.5.3
Clean and make good to the approval of Engineer, surfaces soiled or

otherwise damaged in connection with the work of this Section. Pay the cost
of replacing finishes or materials that cannot be satisfactorily cleaned or
which have been damaged by improper cleaning materials and techniques.
3.5.4
Remove mortar and alkali wash-offs on surfaces as work progresses.
Page 10 of 11
Ceramic Tiling
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.5.5
Upon completion of the work of this Section, remove all debris, equipment
and excess material resulting from the work of this Section from the site.
3.5.6
Close grouted tile floors to traffic for 24 hours after installation.
3.6 FINISHING
3.6.1
Apply two coats of sealer finish to flooring and stairs. Follow sealer finish
manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.7 CURING
Water shall not be allowed on new tilling until bedding and grouting have completely set.
Tiled surfaces shall be kept moist for a period of five (5) days to adequately cure the
cement mortar.
3.8 PROTECTION
Provide tile protection wherever required, material likely to stain or deface tile shall not be
used. Completely close grouted tile floors to traffic for 24 hours after installation.
Thereafter permit traffic on ceramic tile floors only over protective covering of cardboard
or equivalent.
Page 11 of 11
Ceramic Tiling
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
PREINSTALLATION MEETING
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCTS
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING, GENERAL.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS...
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM....
3
3
3
3
4
3.0
3.1
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION
4
4
Page 1 of 4
Accoustic Panel Ceilings
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
1.
2.
C.
1.4
A.
Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For ceiling systems, documentation indicating
B.
Evaluation reports.
C.
1.5
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP.
B.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings.
Page 2 of 4
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to [ASCE/SEI 7]
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for [Class A] materials.

2.2
A.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL

Low-Emitting Materials: Acoustical panel ceilings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
B.

content not less than <10> percent.
C.
Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
D.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
E.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.
F.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
2.3
A.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS
Classification: <Insert type, form, and pattern>.
B.
Color: [As selected from manufacturer's full range]
C.
LR: <Insert LR>.
D.
NRC: <Insert NRC>, Type E-400 mounting according to ASTM E 795.
E.
CAC: <Insert CAC>.
F.
AC: <Insert AC>.
Page 3 of 4
Project:
Works:
Title:

G.
Edge/Joint Detail: [Flush reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members]
H.
Thickness: [38 mm]
I.
Modular Size: [600 by 1200 mm]
2.4
A.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM

Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip
galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than Z90 coating designation; with
prefinished 15-mm- wide metal caps on flanges.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Structural Classification: [Intermediate] -duty system.

End Condition of Cross Runners: [butt-edge] type.
Face Design: [Flat, flush]
Cap Material: [Steel] cold-rolled sheet.
Cap Finish: [Painted in color as selected from manufacturer's full range]
Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with
seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as
that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design
requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling
Systems Handbook."
B.
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths
at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and
comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
1.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as indicated on reflected ceiling

plans.
Page 4 of 4
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCTS
VINYL SHEET FLOORING WITH BACKING
INSTALLATION MATERIALS..
3
3
3
3
4
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXECUTION..
PERPARATION
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
4
4
5
6
Page 1 of 6
Resilient Sheet Flooring
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes [vinyl] sheet flooring.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
LEED /EHS Submittals:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Shop Drawings: For each type of flooring. Include flooring layouts, locations of seams, edges,
columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
1.
D.
Show details of special patterns.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified in
manufacturer's standard size, but not less than [150-by-230-mm] sections.
1.
1.3
A.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives[ and chemical-bonding compounds],
documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of
Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
Chambers."
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For adhesives[ and chemical-bonding compounds],
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For resilient sheet flooring, documentation from an
independent testing agency indicating compliance with the FloorScore standard.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.3: For flooring system[ and chemical bonding
compounds], documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method
for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor
Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than [230
mm] long, of each color required.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
Page 2 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient sheet flooring, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
B.
FloorScore Compliance: Resilient sheet flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore
certification.
C.
Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product requirements
of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
Chambers."
2.2
A.

Product Standard: ASTM F 1303.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Type (Binder Content): [Type I, minimum binder content of 90 percent].

Wear-Layer Thickness: Grade 1.
Overall Thickness: [As standard with manufacturer]
Interlayer Material: [Foamed plastic].
Backing Class: [Class C (foamed plastic)].
B.
Wearing Surface: [Smooth] [Embossed] [Smooth with embedded abrasives] [Embossed with
embedded abrasives].
C.
Sheet Width: [As standard with manufacturer].
D.
Seamless-Installation Method: [Heat welded].
E.
Colors and Patterns: [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors].
2.3
A.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit

resilient sheet flooring and substrate conditions indicated.
1.
2.
Adhesives shall have a VOC content of [50] g/L or less.

Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Page 3 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:


Chambers."
C.
Seamless-Installation Accessories:
1.
Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat welding seams.

a.
2.
Chemical-Bonding Compound: Manufacturer's product for chemically bonding seams.

a.
b.
D.
Bonding compound shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less.

Bonding compound shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using
Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Color: [Match flooring].
Cove Strip: 25-mm radius provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring

manufacturer.
Cap Strip: [Tapered vinyl cap] provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring
manufacturer.
Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by
resilient sheet flooring manufacturer.
Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient sheet
flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
PREPARATION
Prepare substrates according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written instructions to
ensure adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
3.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended
by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by resilient sheet flooring
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range
on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than
[9] pH.
Page 4 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

4.
Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according
to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent
than the following:
a.
b.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed

with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate
of [1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m] in 24 hours.
Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.
Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum [75] percent
relative humidity level.
C.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D.
Do not install resilient sheet flooring until it is the same temperature as the space where it is to
be installed.
E.
Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
sheet flooring.
3.2
A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring.
B.
Unroll resilient sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
C.
Lay out resilient sheet flooring as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Maintain uniformity of flooring direction.

Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at
least 152 mm away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams.
Avoid cross seams.
D.
Scribe and cut resilient sheet flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent
fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend resilient sheet flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on resilient sheet flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent marking device.
G.
Install resilient sheet flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in
installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring
installed on covers and adjoining flooring. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that
abut covers and to cover perimeters.
Page 5 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

H.
Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to
substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and
puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface
imperfections.
I.
Seamless Installation:
1.
2.
J.
Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with
welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare, weld,
and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.
Chemically Bonded Seams: Bond seams with chemical-bonding compound to
permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare seams and apply
compound to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps, overlays, or excess bonding
compound on flooring surfaces.
Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove resilient sheet flooring [152 mm] up vertical surfaces. Support
flooring at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip.
1.
Install metal corners at inside and outside corners.
3.3
A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient sheet
flooring.
B.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from flooring surfaces before applying
liquid floor polish.
1.
C.
Apply [three] coat(s).
Cover resilient sheet flooring until Substantial Completion.

Page 6 of 6
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCTS
INSTALLATION MATERIALS..
3
3
3
3
4
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXECUTION..
PERPARATION
4
4
4
5
Page 1 of 5
Resilient Tile Flooring
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
A.
B.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
LEED /EHS Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
1.3
A.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives [and] [sealants], documentation
Chambers."
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For adhesives, documentation including printed
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For resilient tile flooring, documentation from an
independent testing agency indicating compliance with the FloorScore standard.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.3: For flooring system, documentation
California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using
Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns,
doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
1.
D.
Solid vinyl floor tile.
Show details of special patterns.
Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
Page 2 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
B.
Floor Score Compliance: Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore
certification.
C.
of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
Chambers."
2.2
A.
SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE

Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700.
1.
2.
Class: [Class I, monolithic vinyl tile]

Type: [A, smooth surface]
B.
Thickness [3.2 mm].
C.
Size: [610 by 610 mm]
D.
Colors and Patterns [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors]
2.3
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer
for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit
floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.
1.
Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:
a.
b.
2.
Vinyl Composition Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L or less.

Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L or less.
Chambers."
Page 3 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
PREPARATION
Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure
adhesion of resilient products.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended
by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale
recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than [9] pH.
Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according
to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the
following:
a.
b.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed

with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate
of [1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m] in 24 hours.
Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.
Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum [75] percent
relative humidity level.
C.
Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method
recommended by access flooring manufacturer.
D.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
E.
Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
F.
Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
floor tile.
3.2
A.
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
Page 4 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets,
so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1.
C.
Lay tiles [in pattern indicated]
Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or
deformed tiles.
1.
Lay tiles [in pattern of colors and sizes indicated].
D.
Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent
fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles
to center of door openings.
F.
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking
device.
G.
Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers,
and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern
between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to
substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
H.
Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.3
A.
B.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying
liquid floor polish.
1.
C.
Apply [three] coat(s).
Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.

Page 5 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 096536 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
INFORMAL SUBMITTALS...
PROJECT CONDITION..
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCTS
STATIC-DISSIPATIVE RESILIENT FLOOR COVERING.
CONDUCTIVE RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS.....
3
3
4
4
5
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
EXECUTION..
PERPARATION
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION..
SHEET FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION
CLEANING AND PROTECTION...
5
5
6
6
7
7
7
Page 1 of 8
Static Control Resilient Flooring
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 096536 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
B.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For static-control resilient flooring, documentation from
an independent testing agency indicating compliance with the FloorScore Standard.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.3: For static-control resilient flooring,
requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California
Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of
Chambers."
Shop Drawings: For each type of static-control resilient flooring.

1.
1.3
A.
Static-dissipative, [solid vinyl floor tile]

Conductive, [solid vinyl floor tile].
Samples: For each type of static-control resilient flooring.
B.
1.4
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
Page 2 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.5
A.

Store static-control resilient flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the
weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer.
1.6
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to
receive static-control resilient flooring.
1.
Until Substantial Completion,

recommended by manufacturer.
maintain
ambient
temperatures
within
range
B.
Close spaces to traffic during static-control resilient flooring installation.
C.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after static-control resilient flooring installation.
D.
Install static-control resilient flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have
been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Static-Dissipative Properties: Provide static-control resilient flooring with static-control
properties indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by
an independent testing and inspecting agency.
1.
Electrical Resistance: Test per [ASTM F 150 with 100-V applied voltage
a.
b.
2.
3.
B.
Average greater than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohms
when test specimens are tested surface to ground.
Average greater than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohms
when installed floor coverings are tested surface to ground.
Static Generation: Less than [300] V when tested per AATCC-134 at 20 percent
relative humidity with conductive footwear.
Static Decay: 5000 to zero V in less than [0.25] seconds when tested per FED-STD101C/4046.1.
Conductive Properties: Provide static-control resilient flooring with static-control properties

indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by an
independent testing and inspecting agency.
1.
Electrical Resistance: Test per [ASTM F 150 with 500-V applied voltage] & [NFPA 99,
Annex E].
Page 3 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
2.
3.
Average greater than 25,000 ohms and less than 1 megohm when test
specimens and installed floor coverings are tested surface to surface (point to
point).
Average greater than 25,000 ohms with no single measurement less than
10,000 ohms when installed floor coverings are tested surface to ground.
Static Generation: Less than [100] V when tested per AATCC-134 at 20 percent
relative humidity with conductive footwear.
Static Decay: 5000 to zero V in less than [0.01] seconds when tested per FED-STD101C/4046.1.
C.
FloorScore Compliance: Static-control resilient flooring shall comply with requirements of

FloorScore certification.
D.
of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health
Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
E.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
2.2
A.
STATIC-DISSIPATIVE RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS

Static-Dissipative, Solid Vinyl Floor Tile <see drawing>: ASTM F 1700, Class I (monolithic),
Type A (smooth surface). Several manufacturers also produce low-emissivity products that limit
outgassing. If these products are required, revise products in "Products" Subparagraph above
and product description in "Thickness" and "Size" subparagraphs below. Verify availability
of low-emissivity products with manufacturers.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
A.
Thickness: In manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 2.0 mm.
Size: [610 by 610 mm] Retain "Colors and Patterns" Subparagraph below if colors
and patterns are not indicated in a separate schedule.
CONDUCTIVE RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS

Conductive, Solid Vinyl Floor Tile <see drawing>: ASTM F 1700, Class I (monolithic), Type A
(smooth surface).
1.
2.
3.
Thickness: In manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 2.0 mm.
Size: [610 by 610 mm].
Page 4 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.4
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified portland cement or blended
hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications
indicated.
B.
Static-Control Adhesive: Provided or approved by manufacturer; type that maintains electrical

continuity of floor-covering system to ground connection.
1.
Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:
a.
b.
2.
VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.

Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
C.
Grounding Strips: Provided or approved by manufacturer; type and size that maintains
electrical continuity of floor-covering system to ground connection.
D.
Integral-Flash-Cove Base Accessories:

1.
2.
3.
Cove Strip: 25-mm radius support strip provided or approved by manufacturer.

Cap Strip: [Tapered vinyl cap] provided or approved by manufacturer.
Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by
floor-covering manufacturer.
E.
Maintenance Floor Tiles: Special floor tiles inscribed "Conductive floor. Do not wax."
F.
Floor Polish: Provide protective, static-control liquid floor polish products as recommended by
floor-covering manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PREPARATION
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions[ and with oversight by
manufacturer's representative] to ensure adhesion of static-control resilient flooring and
electrical continuity of floor-covering systems.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710 and as recommended by

manufacturer. Do not use solvents for cleaning substrates.
C.
Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method
recommended by access flooring manufacturer.
Page 5 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

D.
Do not install static-control resilient flooring until it is same temperature as space where it is to
be installed.
1.
Move static-control resilient flooring and installation materials into spaces where they
will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
E.
Sweep and vacuum substrates to be covered by static-control resilient flooring immediately

before installation.
3.2
A.
Install static-control resilient flooring according to manufacturer's written instructions[ and with
oversight by manufacturer's representative].
B.
Embed grounding strips in static-control adhesive. Extend grounding strips beyond perimeter
of static-control resilient floor-covering surfaces to ground connections.
C.
Scribe, cut, and fit static-control resilient flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces
and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
D.
Extend static-control resilient flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar
openings. Extend static-control resilient flooring to center of door openings.
E.
by repeating on static-control resilient flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
F.
Adhere static-control resilient flooring to substrates using a full spread of static-control

adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids,
raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface
imperfections.
G.
Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove static-control flooring [152 mm] up vertical surfaces. Support
static-control resilient flooring at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top
against cap strip.
1.
3.3
A.
B.
Install metal corners at inside and outside corners.
FLOOR-TILE INSTALLATION
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets,
so floor tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using
cut widths that equal less than one-half floor tile at perimeter.
1.
Lay floor tiles [in pattern indicated]
Page 6 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting floor tiles from cartons in same sequence
as manufactured and packaged if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or
deformed floor tiles.
1.
D.
3.4
A.
Lay static-dissipative, vinyl composition floor tiles [in pattern of colors and sizes
indicated].
In each space where conductive, solid vinyl floor tile is installed, install maintenance floor tile
identifying conductive floor tile in locations approved by Architect.
SHEET FLOOR-COVERING INSTALLATION
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing sheet floor coverings.
B.
Unroll sheet floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
C.
Lay out sheet floor coverings as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
A.
Maintain uniformity of sheet floor-covering direction.

Minimize number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at
least 152 mm away from parallel joints in floor-covering substrates.
Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.
Avoid cross seams.

Testing: [Engage] a qualified testing agency to test electrical resistance of static-control
resilient flooring for compliance with requirements.
1.
2.
Arrange for testing after static-control adhesives have fully cured and static-control
resilient flooring has stabilized to ambient conditions and after ground connections are
completed.
Arrange for testing of static-control resilient flooring [before] [and] [after] performing
floor polish procedures.
B.
Static-control resilient flooring will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
C.
3.6
A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of static-control
resilient flooring.
B.
Protect static-control resilient flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
construction period.
Page 7 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Cover static-control resilient flooring until Substantial Completion.

Page 8 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 096900 ACCESS FLOORING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
INFORMAL SUBMITTALS...
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTAL...
QUALITY ASSUIRANCE..
2
2
2
2
3
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
PRODUCTS
FLOOR PANELS..
UNDERSTRUCTURE.
FLOOR PANEL COVERING......
FABRICATION.
ACCESSORIES.
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
3.0
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION..
PREPARATION.
INSTALLATION
7
7
6
Page 1 of 8
Access Flooring
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 096900 ACCESS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
B.
Access-flooring panels and understructure.

Floor panel coverings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For pedestal-installation adhesives, documentation
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For pedestal-installation adhesives, documentation
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For floor panel coverings, documentation from an
independent testing agency indicating compliance with the FloorScore Standard.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For particleboard used in steel-encapsulated, woodcore panels, documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For [access-flooring system with integral
finishes] [pedestal-installation adhesives] [and] [particleboard used in steelencapsulated, wood-core panels], documentation indicating that products comply with
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources
Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C.
Shop Drawings: Include layout, details, sections, and relationship to adjoining Work.
D.
Samples: For each type of product and exposed finish.
1.3
A.
B.
Seismic Design Calculations: For seismic design of access-flooring systems including analysis
preparation.
Page 2 of 8
Access Flooring
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.4
A.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
1.5
A.
Flooring Panels: 10%

Pedestals: 10%.
Stringers: 10%.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
2.
3.
Build mockup of typical access-flooring assembly as shown on Drawings. Size to be an

area no fewer than [five] floor panels in length by [five] floor panels in width.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Seismic Performance: Access flooring shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to [ASCE/SEI 7]
B.
Structural Performance: According to testing procedures in CISCA's "Recommended Test

Procedures for Access Floors":
1.
Concentrated Loads: [4448 N] with the following deflection and permanent set:
a.
b.
2.
3.
Ultimate Loads: 8896 N

Rolling Loads: With local or overall deformation not to exceed 1.02 mm.
a.
b.
4.
5.
6.
Top-Surface Deflection: 2.54 mm.

Permanent Set: 0.25 mm.
CISCA Wheel 1: 10 passes at [4448 N].

CISCA Wheel 2: 10,000 passes at [4448 N]
Stringer Load Test: [1001 N] at center of span with a permanent set not to exceed
0.25 mm.
Pedestal Axial Load Test: [22 240 N]
Pedestal Overturning Moment Test: [113 N x meters].
Page 3 of 8
Access Flooring
Project:
Works:
Title:

7.
8.
C.
Uniform Load Test: [12.0 kPa] with a maximum top surface deflection not to exceed
1.02 mm and a permanent set not to exceed 0.25 mm.
Drop Impact Load Test: [45.5 kg].
Fire Performance:
1.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
a.
b.
2.
Flame-Spread Index: [25] or less.

Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
D.
2.2
A.
FLOOR PANELS
Floor Panels, General: Provide modular panels interchangeable with other field panels without
disturbing adjacent panels or understructure.
1.
2.
Size: Nominal [610 by 610 mm]

Attachment to Understructure: [Bolted]. If retaining "Wood-Core Steel Panels"
Paragraph below and low-emitting materials are required for LEED-NC, LEED-CI, or
LEED-CS Credit IEQ 4.4, retain first option after verifying availability of panels that
comply with requirement. Retain second option if required for LEED for Schools
Credit IEQ 4.
B.
Wood-Core Steel Panels: Fabricated with 25-mmthick particleboard core[, made without
urea formaldehyde][, that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers,"] laminated to
top and bottom steel face sheets, with metal surfaces protected against corrosion by
manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish, and with a flame-spread index of 25 or less
according to ASTM E 84. Provide core edges enclosed with upturned, die-formed, bottomsheet edge or with perimeter steel channel welded to top sheet and welded or bonded to
bottom sheet.
2.3
A.
UNDERSTRUCTURE
Pedestals: Assembly consisting of base, column with provisions for height adjustment, and
head (cap); made of steel.
1.
2.
Provide pedestals designed for use in seismic applications.

Base: Square or circular base with not less than [103 sq. cm] of bearing area.
Page 4 of 8
Access Flooring
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.
4.
5.
Column: Of height required to bring finished floor to elevations indicated. Weld to

base plate.
Provide vibration-proof leveling mechanism for making and holding fine adjustments in
height over a range of not less than 12 inches (300mm)
Head: Designed to support the panel system indicated.
a.
B.
Provide sound-deadening pads or gaskets at contact points between heads and

panels.
Stringer Systems: Modular steel stringer systems designed to bolt to pedestal heads with
manufacturer's standard galvanized or corrosion-resistant paint finish.
1.
Continuous Gaskets: At contact surfaces between panel and stringers to deaden sound,
seal off the underfloor cavity from above, and maintain panel alignment and position.
2.4
A.
FLOOR PANEL COVERINGS

FloorScore Compliance: Floor panel coverings shall comply with requirements of FloorScore
Standard.
B.
High-Pressure Plastic Laminate: Factory applied, NEMA LD 3, High-Wear type, [Grade HDH];
fabricated in one piece to cover each panel face with [integral trim] edging.
1.
2.
2.5
A.
FABRICATION
Fabrication Tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Size: Plus or minus 0.50 mm of required size.

Squareness: Plus or minus 0.38 mm between diagonal measurements across top of
panel.
Flatness: Plus or minus 0.89 mm, measured on a diagonal on top of panel.
Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts in floor panels for cable penetrations and service outlets. Provide
reinforcement or additional support, if needed, to make panels with cutouts comply with
structural performance requirements. Where indicated, fit cutouts with manufacturer's
standard grommets.
1.
2.6
A.
Electrical Resistance: Average no less than 1 megohm and no more than 20,000
megohms when installed floor coverings are surface-to-ground tested according to
NFPA 99.
Colors, Textures, and Patterns: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range].
Number, Size, Shape, and Location: [As indicated.]
ACCESSORIES
Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard adhesive for bonding pedestal bases to subfloor.
Page 5 of 8
Access Flooring
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
B.
Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Service Outlets: Standard UL-listed and -labeled assemblies, for recessed mounting flush with
top of floor panels; for power, communication, and signal services; and complying with the
following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Structural Performance: Cover capable of supporting a [1334-N] [3559-N] [4448-N]

concentrated load.
Cover and Box Type: [Hinged polycarbonate cover with opening for passage of cables
when cover is closed and including frame and steel box or formed-steel plate for
mounting electrical receptacles].
Location: In center of panel quadrant unless otherwise indicated.
Receptacles and Wiring: Electrical receptacles and wiring for service outlets are
specified elsewhere.
Receptacles and Wiring: Heavy-duty duplex, two-pole, three-wire grounding, 20 A,
125 V, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated.
a.
b.
C.
Occupant Adjustable Diffusers: Manufacturer's standard round diffusers, [203 mm] in

diameter, formed from [aluminum] [polycarbonate plastic] to produce a removable one-piece
unit complete with diffuser, manually adjustable flow regulator, dirt and dust receptacle, trim
ring, and underfloor compression mounting ring:
1.
2.
D.
Number of Receptacles for Outlet: [Four]

Wiring Method: [Factory wired].
Air-Distribution Characteristics: [47 L/s] at [24-Pa] static pressure and a maximum

noise criterion rating of [15]
Structural Performance: Capable of supporting a [2669-N] concentrated load.
Floor Grilles: Standard load-bearing grilles formed from [aluminum] to produce removable
one-piece unit precisely fitted in factory-prepared openings of standard field panels, [with
adjustable/removable] dampers:
1.
2.
Air-Distribution Characteristics: 221 L/s at 25-Pa static pressure.

Structural Performance: Capable of supporting a 4448-N concentrated load.
E.
Plenum-Wall Brush Grommets: Self-sealing cable brush grommet with [102-by-330-mm

rectangular] usable area for passage of power and signal cables through plenum walls.
F.
Cavity Dividers: Provide manufacturer's standard metal dividers located where indicated to
divide underfloor cavities.
G.
Closures: Where underfloor cavity is not enclosed by abutting walls or other construction,
provide metal-closure plates with [manufacturer's standard finish].
Page 6 of 8
Access Flooring
Project:
Works:
Title:

H.
Ramps: Not steeper than 1:12, with raised-disc or textured rubber or vinyl-tile floor coverings,
and of same materials, performance, and construction requirements as access flooring.
I.
Steps: Size and arrangement indicated with floor coverings to match access flooring. Apply
nonslip aluminum nosings to treads unless otherwise indicated.
J.
Railings: Standard extruded-aluminum railings at ramps and open-sided perimeter of access

flooring where indicated. Include handrail, intermediate rails, posts, brackets, end caps, wall
returns, wall and floor flanges, plates, and anchorages where required.
1.
K.
Provide railings that comply with structural performance requirements specified in

[Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings."]
Panel Lifting Device: Panel manufacturer's standard portable lifting device for each type of
panel required[ for each computer room].
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PREPARATION
Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
Lay out floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at floor perimeter to a
minimum. Avoid using panels cut to less than 152 mm.
C.
Locate each pedestal, complete any necessary subfloor preparation, and vacuum subfloor to
remove dust, dirt, and construction debris before beginning installation.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Install access-flooring system and accessories under supervision of access-flooring
manufacturer's authorized representative to produce a rigid, firm installation that complies
with performance requirements and is free of instability, rocking, rattles, and squeaks.
B.
Adhesive Attachment of Pedestals: Set pedestals in adhesive, according to access-flooring

manufacturer's written instructions, to provide full bearing of pedestal base on subfloor.
C.
Install flooring panels securely in place, properly seated with panel edges flush. Do not force
panels into place.
D.
Scribe perimeter panels to provide a close fit with adjoining construction with no voids
greater than 3 mm where panels abut vertical surfaces.
1.
To prevent dusting, seal cut edges of steel-encapsulated, wood-core panels with sealer
recommended in writing by panel manufacturer.
Page 7 of 8
Access Flooring
Project:
Works:
Title:

E.
Cut and trim access flooring and perform other dirt-or-debris-producing activities at a remote
location or as required to prevent contamination of subfloor under already-installed access
flooring.
F.
Grounded Flooring Access Panel Systems: Ground flooring system as recommended by

manufacturer and as needed to comply with performance requirements for electrical
resistance of floor coverings. Not more than 10 ohms as measured without floor coverings.
G.
Scribe and install [underfloor-cavity dividers] [and] [closures] to closely fit against subfloor
and other adjacent surfaces, and seal with mastic.
H.
Clean dust, dirt, and construction debris caused by floor installation, and vacuum subfloor
area as installation of floor panels proceeds.
I.
Seal underfloor air cavities at construction seams, penetrations, and perimeter to control air
leakage, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
J.
Install access flooring without change in elevation between adjacent panels and within the
following tolerances:
1.
2.
Plus or minus [1.5 mm] in any 3-m distance.

Plus or minus [3 mm] from a level plane over entire access-flooring area.
K.
Prohibit traffic on access flooring for 24 hours and removal of floor panels for [72] hours after
installation to allow pedestal adhesive to set.
L.
Replace access-flooring panels that are stained, scratched, or otherwise damaged or that do
not comply with specified requirements.
Page 8 of 8
Access Flooring
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
DEFINITIONS...
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTALS....
2
2
2
2
3
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS.
PAINT, GENERAL...
BLOCK FILLERS.
PRIMER / SEALERS........
METAL PRIMERS.
WOOD PRIMERS...
WATER BASED PAINTS.
SOLVENT BASED PAINTS.
TEXTURED AND HIGH-BUILD COATINGS..
ALUMINUM PAINTS
FLOOR COATINGS.
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
EXECUTION..
EXAMINATION..
PREPARATION
APPLICATION.
EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE.
6
6
6
6
6
7
Page 1 of 14
Exterior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on [exterior
substrates.] [the following exterior substrates:]
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Concrete.
Concrete masonry units (CMU).
Steel.
Galvanized metal.
Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
Stainless-steel flashing.
Wood.
Plastic trim fabrications.
Exterior portland cement plaster (stucco).
Exterior gypsum board.
1.2
A.
DEFINITIONS
Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.
C.
Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,
D.
Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E.
F.
Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
B.
Samples: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
C.
Product List: For each product indicated. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products
List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
D.
Page 2 of 14
Exterior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
1.4
A.

Furnish extra materials[, from the same product run,] that match products installed and that
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
1.5
A.
Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, including printed statement of
VOC content.
indicating that they meet the testing and product requirements of the California
Paint: [5] percent, but not less than [3.8 L] of each material and color applied.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected
to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a.
b.
2.
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 9 sq. m.

Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of

additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products] listed in other Part 2
articles for the paint category indicated.
2.2
A.
PAINT, GENERAL
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed
in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B.
Page 3 of 14
Exterior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated
by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C.
VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Colors: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].
2.3
A.
BLOCK FILLERS
Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior:[ MPI #4.]
2.4
A.
PRIMERS/SEALERS
Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based:[ MPI #3.]
B.
Primer, Bonding, Water Based:[ MPI #17.]
C.
Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based:[ MPI #69.]
D.
Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use
in paint system indicated.
2.5
A.
METAL PRIMERS
Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for Metal:[ MPI #79.]
B.
Primer, Alkyd, Quick Dry, for Metal:[ MPI #76.]
C.
Primer, Galvanized, Water Based:[ MPI #134.]
D.
Primer, Galvanized: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
E.
Primer, Quick Dry, for Aluminum:[ MPI #95.]
2.6
A.
WOOD PRIMERS
Primer, Latex for Exterior Wood:[ MPI #6.]
B.
Primer, Alkyd for Exterior Wood:[ MPI #5.]
C.
Primer, Oil for Exterior Wood:[ MPI #7.]
2.7
A.
B.
WATER-BASED PAINTS
Latex, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1):[ MPI #10.]
Latex, Exterior Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #11.]
Page 4 of 14
Exterior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Latex, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6:[ MPI #119.]
D.
Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based (Gloss Level 3):[ MPI #161.]
E.
Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #163.]
F.
Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Gloss (Gloss Level 6):[ MPI #164.]
2.8
A.
SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS
Alkyd, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1):[ MPI #8.]
B.
Alkyd, Exterior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #94.]
C.
Alkyd, Exterior Gloss (Gloss Level 6):[ MPI #9.]
D.
Alkyd, Quick Dry, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #81.]
E.
Alkyd, Quick Dry, Gloss (Gloss Level 7):[ MPI #96.]
2.9
A.
TEXTURED AND HIGH-BUILD COATINGS

Primer for Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
B.
Intermediate Coat for Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: As recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer.
C.
Textured Coating, Latex, Flat:[ MPI #42.]
D.
Primer for Latex, Exterior, High Build: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
E.
Intermediate Coat for Latex, Exterior, High Build: As recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer.
F.
Latex, Exterior, High Build:[ MPI #40.]
2.10
A.
ALUMINUM PAINT
Aluminum Paint:[ MPI #1.]
2.11
A.
FLOOR COATINGS
Sealer, Water Based, for Concrete Floors:[ MPI #99.]
B.
Sealer, Solvent Based, for Concrete Floors:[ MPI #104.]
C.
Floor Paint, Latex, Low Gloss (Maximum Gloss Level 3):[ MPI #60.]
D.
Floor Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss (Gloss Level 6):[ MPI #27.]
Page 5 of 14
Exterior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Concrete: 12 percent.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
Wood: 15 percent.
Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply
tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
3.3
A.
APPLICATION
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Manual."
B.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines
and color breaks.
3.4
A.

Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work
of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect,
and leave in an undamaged condition.
Page 6 of 14
Exterior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
3.5
A.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.
EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Latex Aggregate/Latex System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, high build[, MPI #40].
Latex Aggregate System:

a.
b.
c.
B.
Prime Coat: Textured coating, latex, flat[, MPI #42].

Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #10].
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)[, MPI #15].
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #11].
Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].
High-Build Latex System: Dry film thickness not less than 0.25 mm.
a.
b.
c.
4.
Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.

Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based[, MPI #3].

Topcoat: Textured coating, latex, flat[, MPI #42].
Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:

1.
Latex Floor Paint System:

a.
b.
c.
2.
Prime Coat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss Level 3)[, MPI #60].
Intermediate Coat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #60].
Topcoat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss Level 3)[, MPI #60].
Alkyd Floor Enamel System:
Page 7 of 14
Exterior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Water-Based Clear Sealer System:

a.
b.
c.
4.
Prime Coat: Sealer, solvent based, for concrete floors[, MPI #104].
Intermediate Coat: Sealer, solvent based, for concrete floors[, MPI #104].
Topcoat: Sealer, solvent based, for concrete floors[, MPI #104].
Clay-Masonry Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.

a.
b.
c.


a.
b.
c.
D.
Prime Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors[, MPI #99].
Intermediate Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors[, MPI #99].
Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors[, MPI #99].
Solvent-Based Clear Sealer System:

a.
b.
c.
C.
Prime Coat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #27].
Intermediate Coat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #27].
Topcoat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #27].
Additive: Manufacturer's standard additive to increase skid resistance of painted
surface.

CMU Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Prime Coat: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior[, MPI #4].

Page 8 of 14
Exterior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

e.
f.
2.
Latex over Alkali-Resistant Primer System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.


a.
b.
c.
E.

a.
b.
c.
4.


Steel Substrates:
1.
Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal[, MPI #79].

Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified.
Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching
topcoat.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #161].
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5)[, MPI #163].
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (Gloss
Level 6)[, MPI #164].
Alkyd System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anticorrosive for metal[, MPI #79].

Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #8].
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #94].
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #9].
Page 9 of 14
Exterior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.
Quick-Drying Enamel System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Aluminum Paint System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
F.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal[, MPI #76].
Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, quick dry, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #81].
Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, gloss (Gloss Level 7)[, MPI #96].
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal[, MPI #79].

Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint[, MPI #1].
Topcoat: Aluminum paint[, MPI #1].
Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based[, MPI #134].

Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal[, as recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat
indicated].

indicated].
topcoat.
Level 3)[, MPI #161].
Level 5)[, MPI #163].
Level 6)[, MPI #164].
Alkyd System:
a.

indicated].
Page 10 of 14
Exterior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

b.
c.
d.
e.
G.
Aluminum Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum[, MPI #95].


a.
b.

topcoat.
Level 3)[, MPI #161].
Level 5)[, MPI #163].
Level 6)[, MPI #164].
Alkyd System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
H.


Stainless-Steel Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based[, MPI #69].

Page 11 of 14
Exterior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
I.
Wood Substrates: Including [wood trim] [architectural woodwork] [doors] [windows] [wood
siding] [wood fences] [wood-based panel products] [glued-laminated construction] [exposed
joists] [exposed beams] [wood shingles and shakes (excluding roofs)] <Insert description>.
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
Prime Coat: Primer, latex for exterior wood[, MPI #6].

Latex over Alkyd Primer System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd for exterior wood[, MPI #5].

Prime Coat: Primer, oil for exterior wood[, MPI #7].
Alkyd System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
J.

topcoat.
Level 3)[, MPI #161].
Level 5)[, MPI #163].
Level 6)[, MPI #164].

Wood Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: Including [lumber decking].

1.
Latex System:
a.
b.

Intermediate Coat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch (low gloss).
Page 12 of 14
Exterior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

c.
Topcoat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch (low gloss).

1)
2.

a.
b.
c.

Intermediate Coat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch (low gloss).
Topcoat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch (low gloss).
1)
3.
Additive: Manufacturer's standard additive to increase skid resistance of painted
surface.
Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates:

1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water based[, MPI #17].

Alkyd System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
L.
With additive to increase skid resistance of painted surface.

a.
b.
c.
d.
K.
With additive to increase skid resistance of painted surface.

Portland Cement Plaster Substrates:

1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Page 13 of 14
Exterior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

e.
f.
2.
Latex over Alkali-Resistant Primer System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.

a.
b.
c.
M.


Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates:

1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Page 14 of 14
Exterior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 099114 EPOXY PAINT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTALS....
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS..
3
3
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXECUTION..
INSPECTION...
PREPARATION
APPLICATION.
4
4
4
4
Page 1 of 5
Epoxy Paint
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 099114 EPOXY PAINT

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on [exterior
substrates.] [the following exterior substrates:]
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
A.
Concrete.
Steel.
Galvanized metal.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
instructions.
B.
Samples: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
C.
List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
D.
1.
2.
1.3
A.

contents.
1.
1.4
A.
VOC content.
Paint: [5] percent, but not less than [ 3.8 L] of each material and color applied.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color selected to verify
preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and
set quality standards for materials and execution.
Page 2 of 5
Epoxy Paint
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
each paint system.
a.
b.
2.


a.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
1. All products shall be manufactured under BS EN ISO 9001 / ISO 14001 conditions and
have a proven successful track record of use in similar applications under local ambient
conditions.
2. SERVICE CORRIDORS, MEP ROOMS AND PLANT ROOMS
The coating shall be a Two pack solvent free, epoxy resin coating. (Glossy)
The finished coating shall be pinhole free and have a total minimum dry film thickness of
400 microns. It shall have the following properties:
Property
Test Method
Solids content
Result
100%
Bond strength
ASTM 4541
>2.00 N/mm2
Water absorbtion
ASTM D570
<0.1%
Chemical resistance
ASTM D1308
Resistant to:
Distilled water
Sea water
Sewage
Petrol
Xylene
Sat. sodium chloride
25% sodium hydroxide
25% sulphuric acid
18% hydrochloric acid
Resistant
Resistance to fungal ASTM 3273

and bacterial growth
Resistance to carbon
dioxide diffusion
No carbonation was observed
Resistance to chloride
ion penetration
100%
Page 3 of 5
Epoxy Paint
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 3 - EXECUTION
The manufacturers recommendations shall be followed at all times and the execution process will be
subject to the Engineers approval of a comprehensive method statement, prior to the commencement of
this work.
3.1
INSPECTION
1. The installer shall examine the substrate and conditions under which the coating system is
to be applied. Any unsatisfactory conditions such as weak, friable concrete, laitance and
the presence of contaminants shall be notified to the Engineer in writing. Application shall
not commence until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to the approval of the
Engineer.
2. New concrete Work shall have been cured for a minimum of 28 days prior to the
application of the flooring system.
3.2
PREPARATION
Preparation of Substrate:
1. Weak or damaged concrete is to be removed and replaced with a high strength threecomponent epoxy resin repair mortar. The cured mortar shall achieve a compressive
strength of 70 N/mm2, a flexural strength of 20 N/mm2 and a tensile strength of 10
N/mm2 when tested at 28 days. The water absorption of the cured mortar shall not
exceed 0.2%.
For blow holes, shrinkage cracks and concrete imperfections from 0-10mm, a two
component polymer modified cementitious repair material shall be used.
2.
3.3
The surface to be coated must be clean, dry and free of laitance, oil grease or any other
contaminant that may adversely affect adhesion.
APPLICATION
1. Application of the coating system shall take place in dry conditions with the ambient air
temperature between 5C and 45C.
2. Materials shall be evenly applied by paint roller, squeegee or airless spray.
3. Substrate temperature is to be between 5C and 35C at the time of application.
4. Any mixing required for two component materials shall be thorough to ensure materials are
streak-free. Mixing shall be carried out in a controlled environment and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. No thinning will be allowed.
5. Curing times shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. After final application the flooring system shall be left to cure, totally free of traffic, for a minimum period
of 4 days at 20C.
6. The Contractor shall submit a full method statement for the Engineer's approval prior to the
commencement of application.
Page 4 of 5
Epoxy Paint
Project:
Works:
Title:

7. Application shall only commence following completion of MEP final fix works and all finishing works.
Page 5 of 5
Epoxy Paint
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
DEFINITIONS......
2
2
2
2
3
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS.
PAINT, GENERAL
BLOCK FILLERS.
PRIMERS / SEALERS
METAL PRIMERS..
WATER BASED PAINTS.
SOLVENT BASED PAINTS.
TEXTURED COATING
DRY FOG / FALL COATINGS..
ALUMINUM PAINT
FLOOR COATINGS
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
EXECUTION..
EXAMINATION..
PREPARATION
APPLICATION.
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE.
7
7
7
8
8
8
Page 1 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on [interior
substrates.] [the following interior substrates:]
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Concrete.
Steel.
Cast iron.
Galvanized metal.
Wood.
Gypsum board.
Plaster.
Spray-textured ceilings.
1.2
A.
DEFINITIONS
ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
C.
Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.3
A.
B.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
instructions.
Page 2 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
VOC content.
C.
Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
D.
List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
1.4
A.

contents.
1.
1.5
A.
Paint: [5] percent, but not less than [3.8 L] of each material and color applied.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected
to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a.
b.
2.


a.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements [available products that may be
Page 3 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.2
A.
B.
PAINT, GENERAL
1.
2.
C.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated
by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction[ and,
for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of
colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24)].
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L.
Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
D.
Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
Chambers."
E.
Colors: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]
2.3
A.
BLOCK FILLERS
2.4
A.
PRIMERS/SEALERS
Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior:[ MPI #50.]
B.
Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based:[ MPI #3.]
C.
Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC:[ MPI #149.]
D.
Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood:[ MPI #39.]
Page 4 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

E.
Primer Sealer, Alkyd, Interior:[ MPI #45.]
F.
Primer, Bonding, Water Based:[ MPI #17.]
G.
Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based:[ MPI #69.]
H.
Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint
systems indicated.
2.5
A.
METAL PRIMERS
Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based:[ MPI #107.]
B.
Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive, for Metal:[ MPI #79.]
C.
Primer, Alkyd, Quick Dry, for Metal:[ MPI #76.]
D.
Primer, Galvanized, Water Based:[ MPI #134.]
E.
Primer, Vinyl Wash:[ MPI #80.]
F.
Primer, Quick Dry, for Aluminum:[ MPI #95.]
2.6
A.
WATER-BASED PAINTS
Latex, Interior, Flat, (Gloss Level 1):[ MPI #53.]
B.
Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 2):[ MPI #44.]
C.
D.
E.
Latex, Interior, Semi-Gloss, (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #54.]
F.
Latex, Interior, Gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60

degrees):[ MPI #114.]
G.
Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Flat (Gloss Level 1):[ MPI #143.]
H.
Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2):[ MPI #144.]
I.
Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3):[ MPI #145.]
J.
Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #147.]
K.
Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, (Gloss Level 2):[ MPI #138.]
L.
Page 5 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

M.
N.
Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #141.]
O.
Light Industrial Coating, Interior, Water Based (Gloss Level 3):[ MPI #151.]
P.
Light Industrial Coating, Interior, Water Based, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #153.]
Q.
Light Industrial Coating, Interior, Water Based, Gloss (Gloss Level 6):[ MPI #154.]
2.7
A.
SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS
Alkyd, Interior, Flat (Gloss Level 1):[ MPI #49.]
B.
Alkyd, Interior, (Gloss Level 3):[ MPI #51.]
C.
Alkyd, Interior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #47.]
D.
Alkyd, Interior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6):[ MPI #48.]
E.
Alkyd, Quick Dry, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #81.]
F.
Alkyd, Quick Dry, Gloss (Gloss Level 7):[ MPI #96.]
2.8
A.
TEXTURED COATING
Primer for Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
B.
Intermediate Coat for Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: As recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer.
C.
Textured Coating, Latex, Flat:[ MPI #42.]
2.9
A.
DRY FOG/FALL COATINGS

Dry Fall, Latex, Flat:[ MPI #118.]
B.
Dry Fall, Water Based, for Galvanized Steel, Flat (Gloss Level 1):[ MPI #133.]
C.
Dry Fall, Alkyd, Flat:[ MPI #55.]
2.10
A.
ALUMINUM PAINT
Aluminum Paint:[ MPI #1.]
2.11
A.
FLOOR COATINGS
Stain, Interior, for Concrete Floors:[ MPI #58.]
Page 6 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Sealer, Water Based, for Concrete Floors:[ MPI #99.]
C.
Sealer, Solvent Based, for Concrete Floors:[ MPI #104.]
D.
Floor Paint, Latex, Low Gloss (Maximum Gloss Level 3):[ MPI #60.]
E.
Floor Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss (Gloss Level 6):[ MPI #27.]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Wood: 15 percent.
Plaster: 12 percent.
C.
D.
1.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and
are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of
item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
C.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil,
1.
tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
Page 7 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.3
A.
APPLICATION
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI
Manual."
B.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines
and color breaks.
3.4
A.

Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work
of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect,
and leave in an undamaged condition.
B.

defaced painted surfaces.
3.5
A.
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
Latex over Latex Aggregate System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior[, MPI #50].

Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #53].
Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2)[, MPI #44].
Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #54].
Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units
at 60 degrees)[, MPI #114].
Prime Coat: Textured coating, latex, flat[, MPI #42].

Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
Page 8 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
High-Performance Architectural Latex System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5.
c.
d.
e.

Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching
topcoat.
Topcoat:
Light
industrial
coating,
interior,
water
based
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #151].
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5)[, MPI #153].
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, gloss (Gloss
Level 6)[, MPI #154].
Alkyd System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.

Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching
topcoat.
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #138].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #139].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 4)[, MPI #140].
Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5)[, MPI #141].

a.
b.
6.
Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC[, MPI #149].
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss
Level 1)[, MPI #143].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #144].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #145].
Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5)[, MPI #147].

Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #49].
Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, (Gloss Level 3)[, MPI #51].
Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #47].
Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #48].
Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
Page 9 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
Latex Floor Enamel System:

a.
b.
c.
2.

a.
b.
c.
3.
First Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors[, MPI #99].
Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors[, MPI #99].
Solvent-Based Clear Sealer System:

a.
b.
C.
First Coat: Stain, interior, for concrete floors[, MPI #58].

Topcoat: Stain, interior, for concrete floors[, MPI #58].
Water-Based Clear Sealer System:

a.
b.
5.
Concrete Stain System:

a.
b.
4.
Prime Coat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss Level 3)[, MPI #60].
First Coat: Sealer, solvent based, for concrete floors[, MPI #104].
Topcoat: Sealer, solvent based, for concrete floors[, MPI #104].
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.


a.
b.
Prime Coat: Primer for textured coating, latex, flat[, as recommended in writing
by topcoat manufacturer].
Intermediate Coat: Intermediate coat for textured coating, latex, flat[, as
recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer].
Page 10 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

c.
3.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
c.
d.
e.
f.

topcoat.
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #138].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #139].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 4)[, MPI #140].
Level 5)[, MPI #141].

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
Level 1)[, MPI #143].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #144].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #145].
Level 5)[, MPI #147].

a.
b.
5.

topcoat.
Topcoat:
Light
industrial
coating,
interior,
water
based
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #151].
Level 5)[, MPI #153].
Level 6)[, MPI #154].
Alkyd System:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Page 11 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

e.
f.
D.

CMU Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior[, MPI #4].

Level 1)[, MPI #143].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #144].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #145].
Level 5)[, MPI #147].

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.


topcoat.
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #138].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #139].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 4)[, MPI #140].
Level 5)[, MPI #141].

a.
Page 12 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
Alkyd System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
E.

topcoat.
Topcoat:
Light
industrial
coating,
interior,
water
based
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #151].
Level 5)[, MPI #153].
Level 6)[, MPI #154].

Sealer Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior[, MPI #50].
Steel Substrates:
1.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal[, MPI #79].

Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal[, MPI #79] or primer, alkyd,
quick dry, for metal[, MPI #76].
Water-Based Dry-Fall System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Topcoat: Dry fall, latex, flat[, MPI #118].
Topcoat: Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, flat (Gloss
Level 1)[, MPI #133].
Page 13 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
5.

topcoat.
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #138].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #139].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 4)[, MPI #140].
Level 5)[, MPI #141].

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based[ MPI #107].

Level 1)[, MPI #143].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #144].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #145].
Level 5)[, MPI #147].
Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based[ MPI #107].

topcoat.
Topcoat:
Light
industrial
coating,
interior,
water
based
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #151].
Level 5)[, MPI #153].
Level 6)[, MPI #154].
Alkyd System:
a.
b.

Page 14 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
7.
Quick-Drying Enamel System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
8.
d.
e.

Topcoat: Dry fall, alkyd, flat[, MPI #55].

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
F.
Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, quick dry, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #81].
Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, gloss (Gloss Level 7)[, MPI #96].
Alkyd Dry-Fall System:

a.
b.
c.
9.

1.
Latex over Waterborne Primer System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

Page 15 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

h.
2.
Water-Based Dry-Fall System:

a.
b.
3.
d.
e.
f.

Level 1)[, MPI #143].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #144].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #145].
Level 5)[, MPI #147].

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5.
Prime Coat: Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, flat (Gloss
Level 1)[, MPI #133].
Topcoat: Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, flat (Gloss
Level 1)[, MPI #133].

a.
b.
c.
4.

topcoat.
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #138].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #139].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 4)[, MPI #140].
Level 5)[, MPI #141].
Water-Based Light Industrial Coating Over Waterborne Primer System:

a.
b.
c.
d.

topcoat.
Topcoat:
Light
industrial
coating,
interior,
water
based
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #151].
Level 5)[, MPI #153].
Page 16 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

e.
6.
coating,
interior,
water
based,
gloss
(Gloss

a.
b.
c.
G.
Topcoat: Light industrial

Level 6)[, MPI #154].
Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat

manufacturer for use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated.
Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:

1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.


Level 1)[, MPI #143].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #144].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #145].
Level 5)[, MPI #147].

a.
b.
c.
d.

topcoat.
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #138].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #139].
Page 17 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

e.
f.
4.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
Prime Coat: Primer, vinyl wash[, MPI #80].


a.
b.
c.
H.

topcoat.
Topcoat:
Light
industrial
coating,
interior,
water
based
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #151].
Level 5)[, MPI #153].
Level 6)[, MPI #154].
Alkyd System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
6.
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 4)[, MPI #140].
Level 5)[, MPI #141].

Wood Substrates: Including [wood trim] [architectural woodwork] [doors] [windows] [woodbased panel products] [glued-laminated construction] [exposed joists] [exposed beams]
<Insert description>.
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood[, MPI #39].

Page 18 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

h.
2.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
d.
e.
f.

Level 1)[, MPI #143].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #144].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #145].
Level 5)[, MPI #147].

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5.
Prime Coat: Primer sealer, alkyd, interior[, MPI #45].


a.
b.
c.
4.

topcoat.
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #138].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 3)[. MPI #139].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 4)[, MPI #140].
Level 5)[, MPI #141].
Alkyd System:
a.
b.
c.

Page 19 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

d.
e.
f.
I.
Wood Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:

1.
Latex Floor Paint System:

a.
b.
c.
2.


a.
b.
c.
J.

Fiberglass and Plastic Substrates:

1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.


a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

Level 1)[, MPI #143].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #144].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #145].
Level 5)[, MPI #147].
Page 20 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
4.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5.

topcoat.
Topcoat:
Light
industrial
coating,
interior,
water
based
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #151].
Level 5)[, MPI #153].
Level 6)[, MPI #154].
Alkyd System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
K.

topcoat.
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #138].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #139].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 4)[, MPI #140].
Level 5)[, MPI #141].

[Gypsum Board] [Plaster] Substrates:

1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Page 21 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

f.
g.
h.
i.
2.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
c.
d.
e.
f.

topcoat.
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #138].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #139].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
high
performance
architectural,
(Gloss
Level 4)[, MPI #140].
Level 5)[, MPI #141].

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
Level 1)[, MPI #143].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #144].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #145].
Level 5)[, MPI #147].

a.
b.
4.


topcoat.
Topcoat:
Light
industrial
coating,
interior,
water
based
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #151].
Level 5)[, MPI #153].
Level 6)[, MPI #154].
Alkyd over Latex Primer System:
Page 22 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
L.

Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates:

1.
Latex (Flat) System: Spray applied.

a.
b.
2.
Latex System: Spray applied.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.

Alkyd (Flat) System:

a.
b.
5.


a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
4.
Prime Coat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #53].
Prime Coat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #49].
Alkyd System:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Page 23 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

e.
f.
M.

[Cotton or Canvas] [and] [ASJ] Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including [pipe and duct
coverings] <Insert description>.
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.

Level 1)[, MPI #143].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 2)[, MPI #144].
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #145].
Level 5)[, MPI #147].
Alkyd over Latex Primer System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.



a.
b.
c.

Page 24 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

Page 25 of 25
Interior Painting
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
DEFINITIONS......
2
2
2
2
3
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS.
WOOD FILLERS..
PRIMERS AND SEALERS
STAINS...
WATER BASED VARNISHES.
SOLVENT BASED VARNISHES .
POLYURETHANE VARNISHES..
OIL FINISH..
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
EXECUTION..
EXAMINATION..
PREPARATION
APPLICATION.
EXTERIOR WOOD FINISH SYSTEM SCHEDULE...
6
6
6
6
7
7
SECTION 099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
Page 1 of 11
Staining and Transparent Finishing
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes surface preparation and application of wood finishes[.][ on the following
substrates:]
1.
Exterior Substrates:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Exposed glued-laminated beams and columns.

Exposed dimension lumber (rough carpentry).
Dressed lumber (finish carpentry).
Exposed wood panel products.
Wood decks and stairs.
Wood shingles and shakes (excluding roofs).
Interior Substrates:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Exposed glued-laminated beams and columns.

Exposed dimension lumber (rough carpentry).
Dressed lumber (finish carpentry).
Exposed wood panel products.
1.2
A.
DEFINITIONS
ASTM D 523.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
A.
B.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and
application instructions.
1.
2.
Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For interior stains and coatings, documentation
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For interior stains and coatings,
Page 2 of 11
Project:
Works:
Title:

requirements of the California Department of Health Services "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
C.
Samples: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish indicated.
D.
Product List: For each product indicated, include printout of current "MPI Approved Products
List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use
highlighted.
1.4
A.

contents.
1.
1.5
A.
Stains and Transparent Finishes: [5] percent, but not less than [3.8 L] of each material
and color applied.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Mockups: Apply mockups of each finish system indicated and each color selected to verify
preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and
set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
each type of finish system and substrate.
a.
b.
2.

Final approval of stain color selections will be based on mockups.

a.
If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups
of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available products that may be
articles for the category indicated.
Page 3 of 11
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.2
A.
B.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
1.
2.
C.
Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.
for interior stains and finishes applied at project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of
colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24)].
1.
2.
3.
4.
Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
D.
Low-Emitting Materials: Interior stains and finishes shall comply with the testing and product
Chambers."
E.
Stain Colors: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]
2.3
A.
WOOD FILLERS
Wood Filler Paste:[ MPI #91.]
2.4
A.
PRIMERS AND SEALERS

Primer, Latex for Exterior Wood:[ MPI #6.]
B.
Primer, Alkyd for Exterior Wood:[ MPI #5.]
C.
Primer, Oil for Exterior Wood:[ MPI #7.]
D.
Preservative, for Exterior Wood:[ MPI #37.]
E.
Alkyd, Sanding Sealer, Clear:[ MPI #102.]
F.
Shellac:[ MPI #88.]
Page 4 of 11
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.5
A.
STAINS
Stain, Exterior, Water Based, Solid Hide:[ MPI #16.]
B.
Stain, Exterior, Solvent Based, Solid Hide:[ MPI #14.]
C.
Stain, Exterior, Solvent Based, Semi-Transparent:[ MPI #13.]
D.
Stain, for Exterior Wood Decks:[ MPI #33.]
E.
Stain, Semi-Transparent, for Interior Wood:[ MPI #90.]
2.6
A.
WATER-BASED VARNISHES
Varnish, Water Based, Clear, Satin (Gloss Level 4):[ MPI #128.]
B.
Varnish, Water Based, Clear, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #129.]
C.
Varnish, Water Based, Clear, Gloss (Gloss Level 6):[ MPI #130.]
2.7
A.
SOLVENT-BASED VARNISHES
Varnish, with UV Inhibitor, Exterior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #30.]
B.
Varnish, with UV Inhibitor, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6):[ MPI #29.]
C.
Varnish, Marine Spar, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 7):[ MPI #28.]
D.
Varnish, Interior, Flat (Gloss Level 1):[ MPI #73.]
E.
Varnish, Interior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #74.]
F.
Varnish, Interior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6):[ MPI #75.]
2.8
A.
POLYURETHANE VARNISHES
Varnish, Interior, Polyurethane, Oil-Modified, Satin (Gloss Level 4):[ MPI #57.]
B.
Varnish, Interior, Polyurethane, Oil-Modified, Gloss (Gloss Level 6):[ MPI #56.]
C.
Varnish, Polyurethane, Moisture-Cured, Gloss (Gloss Level 6):[ MPI #31.]
D.
Varnish, Aliphatic Polyurethane, Two-Component (Gloss Level 6 or 7):[ MPI #78.]
2.9
A.
OIL FINISH
Danish Oil:[ MPI #92.]
Page 5 of 11
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Exterior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an
electronic moisture meter.
C.
Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: [15] [13] [10] [9] percent, when
measured with an electronic moisture meter.
D.
E.
Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and

conditions.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. If
removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surfaceapplied protection before surface preparation and finishing.
1.
C.
Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for
each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1.
2.
3.3
A.
After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse
thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks
by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing.
Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal
and as recommended by stain manufacturer.
APPLICATION
Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Manual."
Page 6 of 11
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks,
runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.
3.4
A.

Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by
cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
B.

defaced finished wood surfaces.
3.5
A.
EXTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE

Wood substrates, nontraffic surfaces, including [wood trim] [architectural woodwork] [doors]
[windows] [wood fences] [wood-based panel products] [glued-laminated construction]
[exposed joists] [exposed beams].
1.
Solid Hide, Water-Based Stain System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Solid Hide, Water-Based Stain System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.

Intermediate Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, solid hide, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, solid hide[, MPI #14].
Semitransparent Stain System:

a.
b.
5.

Intermediate Coat: Stain, exterior, water based, solid hide, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Stain, exterior, water based, solid hide[, MPI #16].
Solid Hide, Solvent-Based Stain System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
4.

Prime Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent, matching topcoat.

Topcoat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent[, MPI #13].
Varnish over Semitransparent Stain System:

a.
Stain Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent[, MPI #13].
Page 7 of 11
Project:
Works:
Title:

b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
6.
Varnish System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
7.
c.
d.
Stain Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent[, MPI #13].

First Intermediate Coat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two-component,
matching topcoat.
Second Intermediate Coat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two-component,
matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two-component (Gloss Level 6 or
7)[, MPI #78].
Clear, Two-Component Polyurethane Varnish System:

a.
b.
c.
B.
Prime Coat: Varnish matching topcoat.

First Intermediate Coat: Varnish matching topcoat.
Second Intermediate Coat: Varnish matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Varnish, with UV Inhibitor, Exterior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss
Topcoat: Varnish, with UV Inhibitor, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #29].
Topcoat: Varnish, Marine Spar, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 7)[, MPI #28].
Clear, Two-Component Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System:

a.
b.
8.

Topcoat: Varnish, with UV Inhibitor, Exterior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss
Topcoat: Varnish, with UV Inhibitor, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #29].
Topcoat: Varnish, Marine Spar, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 7)[, MPI #28].
Prime Coat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two-component, matching topcoat.

Intermediate Coat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two-component, matching
topcoat.
7)[, MPI #78].
Wood substrates, traffic surfaces, including wood [decks].

1.
Deck Stain over Wood Preservative System:

a.
b.
c.
2.
Preservative Coat: Preservative, for exterior wood[, MPI #37].

Intermediate Coat: Stain, for exterior wood decks, matching topcoat.
Top coat: Stain, for exterior wood decks[, MPI #33].
Deck Stain System:

a.
b.
Prime Coat: Stain, for exterior wood decks, matching topcoat.

Top coat: Stain, for exterior wood decks[, MPI #33].
Page 8 of 11
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.6
A.
INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE

Wood substrates, nontraffic surfaces, including [wood trim] [architectural woodwork] [doors]
[windows] [wood-based panel products] [glued-laminated construction] [exposed joists]
[exposed beams].
1.
Solid-Color Latex Stain System:

a.
b.
c.
2.
Solid-Color Latex Stain System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Prime Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent, matching topcoat.

Topcoat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent[, MPI #13].
Water-Based Varnish over Stain System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
7.
Prime Coat: Stain, semi-transparent, matching topcoat.

Topcoat: Stain, semi-transparent, for interior wood[, MPI #90].

a.
b.
6.
Prime Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, solid hide, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, solid hide[, MPI #14].

a.
b.
5.

Solid-Color, Solvent-Based Stain System:

a.
b.
4.

Stain Coat: Stain, semi-transparent, for interior wood[, MPI #90].

First Intermediate Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat.
Second Intermediate Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, satin (Gloss Level 4)[, MPI #128].
Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #129].
Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #130].
Water-Based Varnish System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
Prime Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat.

Intermediate Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, satin (Gloss Level 4)[, MPI #128].
Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #129].
Page 9 of 11
Project:
Works:
Title:

e.
8.
Alkyd Varnish over Stain System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
9.
e.

First Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.
Second Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil-modified, satin
Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil-modified, gloss
(Gloss
(Gloss
Polyurethane Varnish System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
13.
Prime Coat: Alkyd, sanding sealer, clear[, MPI #102].

Intermediate Coat: Varnish matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Varnish, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #73].
Topcoat: Varnish, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #74].
Topcoat: Varnish, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #75].
Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
12.

First Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, sanding sealer, clear[, MPI #102].
Alkyd Varnish System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
11.

Alkyd Varnish over Stain System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
10.
Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #130].
Prime Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.

Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil-modified,
Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil-modified,
satin
(Gloss
gloss
(Gloss
Moisture-Cured Clear Polyurethane over Stain System:
Page 10 of 11
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
c.
d.
14.
Moisture-Cured Clear Polyurethane System:

a.
b.
c.
15.
Prime Coat: Moisture-cured polyurethane matching topcoat.

Intermediate Coat: Moisture-cured polyurethane matching topcoat.
Topcoat:
Varnish,
polyurethane,
moisture-cured,
gloss
(Gloss
Clear, Two-Component Polyurethane System:

a.
b.
c.
16.

First Intermediate Coat: Moisture-cured polyurethane matching topcoat.
Second Intermediate Coat: Moisture-cured polyurethane matching topcoat.
Topcoat:
Varnish,
polyurethane,
moisture-cured,
gloss
(Gloss
Prime Coat: Two-component polyurethane matching topcoat.

Intermediate Coat: Two-component polyurethane matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two-component (Gloss Level 6 or Gloss
Danish Oil System:

a.
b.
Prime Coat: Danish oil[, MPI #92].

Topcoat: Danish oil[, MPI #92].
Page 11 of 11
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 099600 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
DEFINITIONS......
2
2
2
2
3
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS.
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL....
BLOCK FILLERS...
INTERIOR PRIMERS / SEALERS
METAL PRIMERS....
EPOXY COATINGS...
POLYURETHANE COATINGS..
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
EXECUTION..
EXAMINATION..
PREPARATION
APPLICATION.
EXTERIOR HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE....
5
5
5
5
6
6
Page 1 of 16
High-Performance Coatings
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 099600 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on
the following substrates:
1.
Exterior Substrates:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Interior Substrates:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
B.
Concrete, vertical and horizontal surfaces.

Steel.
Galvanized metal.
Gypsum board.
DEFINITIONS
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and
application instructions.
LEED / EHS Submittals:
1.
2.
C.
Concrete, vertical and horizontal surfaces.

Steel.
Galvanized metal.
Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For interior coatings, documentation including printed
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4:
For interior coatings, documentation
California Department of Health Services "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Samples: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.
Page 2 of 16
Project:
Works:
Title:

D.
Product List: For each product indicated, include printout of current "MPI Approved Products
List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
1.4
A.

Furnish extra materials from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.5
A.
Coatings: [5] percent, but not less than [3.8 L] of each material and color applied.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections
made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards
for materials and execution.
1.
each coating system specified in Part 3.
a.
b.
2.
Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 9 sq. m.


a.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products listed in other Part 2
2.2
A.
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL

MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and are listed in
"MPI Approved Products List."
B.
1.
2.
3.
Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated.
Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.
Page 3 of 16
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
for interior coatings applied at project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants
added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)].
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
D.
Low-Emitting Materials:
Interior coatings shall comply with the testing and product
Chambers."
E.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
2.3
A.
B.
2.4
A.
B.
2.5
A.
BLOCK FILLERS
Block Filler, Epoxy:[ MPI #116.]
INTERIOR PRIMERS/SEALERS
Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior:[ MPI #50.]
Wood-Knot Sealer: White shellac or other sealer recommended in writing by manufacturer
for this purpose.
METAL PRIMERS
Primer, Zinc-Rich, Inorganic:[ MPI #19.]
B.
Primer, Zinc-Rich, Epoxy:[ MPI #20.]
C.
Primer, Epoxy, Anti-Corrosive, for Metal:[ MPI #101.]
2.6
A.
B.
EPOXY COATINGS
Epoxy, Gloss:[ MPI #77.]
Epoxy, High-Build, Low Gloss:[ MPI #108.]
Page 4 of 16
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
2.7
A.
B.
Epoxy Deck Coating (Slip-Resistant):[ MPI #82.]

POLYURETHANE COATINGS
Polyurethane, Two-Component, Pigmented, Gloss (Gloss Level 6):[ MPI #72.]
Varnish, Aliphatic Polyurethane, Two-Component (Gloss Level 6 or 7):[ MPI #78.]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
1.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture

meter as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Wood: 15 percent.
B.
C.
1.
Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and

conditions.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil,
1.
3.3
A.
tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.
APPLICATION
Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."
Page 5 of 16
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and
color breaks.
3.4
A.

Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by
cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
B.

defaced coated surfaces.
3.5
A.
EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

Concrete Substrates, Vertical Surfaces:
1.
Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Concrete Substrates, Horizontal Surfaces:

1.
Epoxy Slip-Resistant Deck Coating System:

a.
C.
Prime Coat: Epoxy, gloss[, MPI #77].

Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, gloss[, MPI #77].
Topcoat: Epoxy, gloss[, MPI #77].
Topcoat: Epoxy deck coating (slip-resistant)[, MPI #82].
1.
Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Pigmented Polyurethane over Epoxy System:

a.
b.
c.
3.


Topcoat:
Polyurethane, two-component,
pigmented,
gloss
(Gloss
Pigmented Polyurethane System:

a.
b.

Page 6 of 16
Project:
Works:
Title:

c.
D.
two-component,
pigmented,
gloss
(Gloss
gloss
(Gloss
CMU Substrates:
1.
Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Block Filler: Block filler, epoxy[, MPI #116].

Pigmented Polyurethane over High-Build Epoxy System:

a.
b.
c.
E.
Topcoat:
Polyurethane,

Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, high-build, low gloss[, MPI #108].
Topcoat:
Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented,
Steel Substrates:
1.
High-Build Epoxy System:

a.
b.
c.
2.

a.
b.
c.
3.
Prime Coat:
Primer, epoxy, as recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer.

a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive, for metal[, MPI #101].


First Topcoat:
Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss (Gloss
Second Topcoat:

a.
b.
Prime Coat:
manufacturer.
Page 7 of 16
Project:
Works:
Title:

c.
5.
b.
c.
Prime Coat: Primer, zinc-rich, epoxy[, MPI #20].

First Topcoat:
pigmented,
gloss
(Gloss

First Topcoat:

Topcoat:
Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss
(Gloss
Prime Coat:
manufacturer.
Topcoat:
Pigmented Polyurethane over Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer and High-Build Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
10.
(Gloss

a.
9.
gloss

a.
b.
c.
8.
pigmented,
Pigmented Polyurethane over Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer System:

a.
b.
c.
7.
two-component,

a.
b.
c.
6.
First Topcoat:
Polyurethane,

First Topcoat:
Second Topcoat:
Pigmented Polyurethane over Inorganic Zinc-Rich Primer and High-Build Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
Prime Coat: Primer, zinc-rich, inorganic[, MPI #19].

Topcoat:
Page 8 of 16
gloss
(Gloss
Project:
Works:
Title:

F.
1.
Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
3.
c.
b.
c.
Prime Coat:
manufacturer.
Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss (Gloss
Topcoat:
Pigmented Polyurethane over Vinyl Wash and Epoxy Primer System:

a.
b.
c.
d.
6.

Topcoat:

a.
5.
Prime Coat:
manufacturer.

a.
b.
4.


Intermediate Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive, for metal[, MPI #101].
First Topcoat:
Second Topcoat:
Pigmented Polyurethane over Vinyl Wash and Epoxy Primer System:

a.
b.
c.

Intermediate Coat: Primer, epoxy, as recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer.
First Topcoat:
Page 9 of 16
Project:
Works:
Title:

d.
G.

1.
Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
2.
d.
3.
c.
d.

Intermediate Coat: Primer, epoxy, as recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer.
First Topcoat:
Second Topcoat:
Wood Substrates:
1.

a.
b.
c.
A.

Intermediate Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive, for metal[, MPI #101].
First Topcoat:
Second Topcoat:

a.
b.
3.6


a.
b.
c.
H.
Second Topcoat:
Prime Coat:
Topcoat:
INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

Concrete Substrates, Vertical Surfaces:
1.
Epoxy System:
Page 10 of 16
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
c.
2.
Epoxy-Modified Latex System:

a.
b.
c.
B.
Prime Coat: Epoxy-modified latex, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #115].
Intermediate Coat:
Epoxy-modified latex, interior, gloss (Gloss
Level 6)[, MPI #115].
Topcoat: Epoxy-modified latex, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #115].
Concrete Substrates, Horizontal Surfaces.

1.
Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
2.
c.
3.

Topcoat:

a.
b.
c.
4.


a.
b.
Prime Coat: Epoxy, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

Topcoat:
Clear Two-Component Polyurethane System:

a.
b.
c.
C.

Prime Coat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two-component (Gloss Level 6 or

7)[, MPI #78].
Intermediate Coat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two-component (Gloss
Level 6 or 7)[, MPI #78].
7)[, MPI #78].
1.
Epoxy System:
Page 11 of 16
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.
b.
c.
2.

a.
b.
c.
3.
b.
c.
Prime Coat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two-component (Gloss Level 6 or

7)[, MPI #78].
Intermediate Coat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two-component (Gloss
Level 6 or 7)[, MPI #78].
7)[, MPI #78].
CMU Substrates:
1.
Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.


a.
b.
c.
E.
Prime Coat: Epoxy-modified latex, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #115].
Intermediate Coat:
Level 6)[, MPI #115].
Clear Two-Component Polyurethane System:

a.
D.


Intermediate Coat:
Level 6)[, MPI #115].
Steel Substrates:
1.

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.

Topcoat: Epoxy, high-build, low gloss[, MPI #108].
Epoxy System:
a.
Page 12 of 16
Project:
Works:
Title:

b.
c.
3.
Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
4.
c.
b.
c.
c.

Topcoat:

a.
b.
c.
8.
Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, as recommended in writing by topcoat

manufacturer.
Intermediate Coat:
Level 6)[, MPI #115].

a.
b.
7.
Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based[, MPI #107].

Intermediate Coat:
Level 6)[, MPI #115].

a.
6.
Prime Coat:
manufacturer.

a.
b.
5.

Prime Coat:
manufacturer.
Topcoat:
Pigmented Polyurethane over Inorganic Zinc-Rich Primer System:

a.
b.
c.

Topcoat:
Page 13 of 16
gloss
(Gloss
Project:
Works:
Title:

9.
Pigmented Polyurethane over Inorganic Zinc-Rich Primer System:

a.
b.
c.
10.

a.
b.
c.
11.
gloss
(Gloss

Topcoat:

Topcoat:
Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss
(Gloss

a.
b.
c.
F.
pigmented,

a.
b.
c.
13.

Topcoat:

a.
b.
c.
12.

Topcoat:
Prime Coat:
manufacturer.
Topcoat:
1.
Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
2.

Epoxy System:
a.
Prime Coat:
manufacturer.
Page 14 of 16
Project:
Works:
Title:

b.
c.
3.

a.
b.
c.
G.
Prime Coat:
manufacturer.
Topcoat:

1.
Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.


a.
b.
c.

Topcoat:
pigmented,
gloss
(Gloss

a.
b.
c.
H.

Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacture.

Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacture.
Topcoat:
Wood Substrates:
1.
Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
2.


a.
b.
Prime Coat:
Page 15 of 16
Project:
Works:
Title:

c.
I.
Topcoat:
Polyurethane,
two-component,
pigmented,
gloss
(Gloss
[Gypsum Board] [Plaster] Substrates:

1.
Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
2.


a.
b.
c.

Intermediate Coat:
Level 6)[, MPI #115].
Page 16 of 16
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 099601 ANTI CARBONATION PAINT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
SUBMITTALS ......
2
2
2
2
3
2.0
2.1
PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER..
3
3
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXECUTION..
INSPECTION..
PREPARATION
APPLICATION.
4
4
4
5
Page 1 of 5
Anticarbonation Paint
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 099601 ANTI CARBONATION PAINT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint system on interior parking walls.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
2. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.
3. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each colour and gloss of
topcoat indicated.
a. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 200 mm square.
b. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
c. Label each coat of each Sample.
d. Label each Sample for location and application area.
4. LEED/EHS Submittals:
a. "Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2" Subparagraph below applies to LEED-NC, LEED-CI,
and LEED-CS. Coordinate with requirements for paints and coatings.
b. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, including printed statement of
VOC content.
c. "Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4" Subparagraph below applies to LEED for
Schools.
d. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For paints and coatings, documentation indicating that they meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from
Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer (Applicator) Qualifications: An experienced applicator who has specialized in installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and
who is acceptable to manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations:
1. Use coating of a single manufacturer.
2. Obtain primary materials, including primers, sealants and substrate repair materials from
coating manufacturer. Obtain secondary materials of type and from source recommended
by coating manufacturer.
C. Concrete shall be moisture cured for a minimum of 7 days. The concrete must be fully cured
for a minimum of 28 days prior to application of the coating system.
D. Pre Installation Bond Testing:
1. Conduct bond test for surface preparation evaluation prior to application of coating
system.
2. Flooring manufacturer representative shall perform and document the bond testing.
Page 2 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

3. Perform two tests minimum or one bond test per 200m2 of floor area or one in each
location where the concrete is clearly seen to be of different construction
4. Document bond test by locating bond test on record drawings and identifying actual
bond test specimen to location on drawings.
5. Maintain test specimens at project office until completion of work.
E. Mock-ups: Apply each type of coating to at least 10 sq. m of substrate to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and crack treatment, thickness, texture, colour, and standard of
workmanship.
1. Locate mock-up in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed
by the Engineer.
2. Build Mock-up to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If the required standard is not
achieved, the Contractor shall replace (at the contractors cost) until the required standard is achieved as judged by the Engineer
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain written approval of mock-up from the Engineer before starting works
5. Maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. Approved mock-ups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion
may become part of the completed work if approved by the engineer.
1.4

A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers with seals unbroken and bearing
manufacturer's labels showing the following information:
1. Manufacturer's brand name.
2. Type of material.
3. Directions for storage.
4. Date of manufacture and shelf life.
5. Lot or batch number.
6. Mixing and application instructions.
7. Colour.
B. Store materials in a clean, dry location protected from exposure to direct sunlight. In storage areas, maintain environmental conditions within range recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
1. FOSROC LLC
1.01 MATERIALS
A. All products shall be manufactured under BS EN ISO 9001 / ISO 14001 conditions and have
a proven successful track record of use in similar applications under local ambient conditions.
B. Water-based protective coating based on a special acrylic polymer.
Page 3 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

The complete system also includes a film-forming, stabilising primer which is supplied as a clear
liquid and is based on an acrylic resin and a silane-siloxane dissolved in a penetrating organic
carrier and a single component elastomeric pigmented coating, both ready for immediate site
use.
The total dry film thickness of the protective coating system shall be not less than 200 microns,
and shall provide:
(a) CO2 diffusion resistance not less than 240mm equivalent of air thickness and 50cm equivalent of 30N concrete (Taywood method)
(b) A water vapour transmission resistance (SD) of not more than 1.0 metres (Taywood
method)
(c) Static crack accommodation of not less than 2mm (BRE).
(d) Adhesion greater than 1.0 N/mm as per BS 1881.
(e) Tear resistance (ASTM D624 - 94) 15 N/mm
(f) Reduction in water absorption >80%
(g) Reduction in chloride ion penetration >80%
PART 3 EXECUTION
The manufacturers recommendations shall be followed at all times and the execution process will be
subject to the Engineers approval of a comprehensive method statement, prior to the commencement of
this work.
3.1
INSPECTION
1. The installer shall examine the substrate and conditions under which the coating system is
to be applied. Any unsatisfactory conditions such as weak, friable concrete, laitance and
the presence of contaminants shall be notified to the Engineer in writing. Application shall
not commence until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to the approval of the
Engineer.
2. New concrete Work shall have been cured for a minimum of 28 days prior to the application of the flooring system.
3.2
PREPARATION
Preparation of Substrate:
1. Weak or damaged concrete is to be removed and replaced with a high strength threecomponent epoxy resin repair mortar. The cured mortar shall achieve a compressive
strength of 70 N/mm2, a flexural strength of 20 N/mm2 and a tensile strength of 10
N/mm2 when tested at 28 days. The water absorption of the cured mortar shall not exceed
0.2%.
For blow holes, shrinkage cracks and concrete imperfections from 0-10mm, a two component polymer modified cementitious repair material shall be used.
2. The surface to be coated must be clean, dry and free of laitance, oil grease or any other
contaminant that may adversely affect adhesion.
Page 4 of 5
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.3
APPLICATION
1. Application of the coating system shall take place in dry conditions with the ambient air temperature between 5C and 45C.
2. Materials shall be evenly applied by paint roller, squeegee or airless spray.
3. Substrate temperature is to be between 5C and 35C at the time of application.
4. Any mixing required for two component materials shall be thorough to ensure materials are
streak-free. Mixing shall be carried out in a controlled environment and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. No thinning will be allowed.
5. Curing times shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. After final application the flooring system shall be left to cure, totally free of traffic, for a minimum period of 4
days at 20C.
6. The Contractor shall submit a full method statement for the Engineer's approval prior to the
commencement of application.
7. Application shall only commence following completion of MEP final fix works and all finishing
works in the car park.
Page 5 of 5
DIVISION 10
________________________________________________________________________
SPECIALTIES
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS....
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
WARRANTY.
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCTS.
MATERIALS..
WALL GUARDS.........
HANDRAILS....
CORNER GUARDS.
3
3
4
5
6
3.0
3.1
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION...
7
7
Page 1 of 8
Wall and Door Protection
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
A.
Structural Performance: Provide handrails capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
A.
B.
2.
1.4
A.
B.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For adhesives, documentation indicating that
Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit. Include sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1.
D.
Uniform load of 0.73 kN/m applied in any direction.

Concentrated load of 0.89 kN applied in any direction.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.
C.
Wall guards.
Impact-resistant handrails.
Corner guards.
For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
preparation.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 300 mm long.
Material certificates.
Material test reports.
Page 2 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
1.5
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,

NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in [the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines] [and]
[ICC/ANSI A117.1].
D.
1.7
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a.
b.
2.
Structural failures.
Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS
PVC Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impactresistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Impact Resistance: Minimum [1356 J/m] of notch when tested according to

ASTM D 256, Test Method A.
Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to [ASTM D 543] and/or
[ASTM D 1308] <Insert test standard>.
Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Page 3 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

B.
Polycarbonate Plastic Sheet: ASTM D 6098, S-PC01, Class 1 or 2, abrasion resistant; with a
minimum impact-resistance rating of
800 J/m of notch when tested according to
ASTM D 256, Test Method A.
C.
Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated, but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in
ASTM B 221M for Alloy 6063-T5.
D.
Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts,

and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where
exposed to view.
E.
Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer and with

a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
F.
Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer and that

complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health
Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.2
A.
WALL GUARDS
Crash Rail : Heavy-duty assembly consisting of continuous snap-on plastic cover installed over
concealed retainer system; designed to withstand impacts.
1.
2.
3.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products that may be

incorporated into the Work for Engineers approval.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, or comparable
product for the Engineers Approval.
Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 2.5-mm wall thickness; in dimensions and
profiles indicated on Drawings.
a.
b.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Surface: Uniform
Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
Continuous Retainer: Minimum 2.0-mmthick, one-piece, extruded aluminum.

Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-absorbing clips designed for heavyduty performance.
Bumper: Continuous rubber or vinyl bumper cushion(s).
End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; matching color cover;
field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.
Accessories: Concealed splices and mounting hardware.
Mounting: Surface mounted directly to wall.
Bumper Rail: Assembly consisting of continuous snap-on plastic cover installed over
concealed, continuous retainer; designed to withstand impacts.
Page 4 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work.
product Revise description in first subparagraph below to suit product for engineers
approval.
a.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Continuous Retainer: Minimum 2.0-mmthick, one-piece, extruded aluminum.

Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-absorbing clips.
Bumper: Continuous rubber or vinyl bumper cushion(s).
End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; [matching color] cover;
Mounting: [Surface mounted directly to wall]
Rub Rail : Assembly consisting of continuous snap-on cover installed over concealed,
continuous retainer.
1.
2.
3.

product
Cover: Extruded rigid plastic minimum 2.0-mm wall thickness; in dimensions and
a.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.3
A.
Retainer: Minimum 1.6-mmthick, one-piece, extruded aluminum.

End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover;
Mounting: Surface mounted directly to wall.
HANDRAILS
Impact-Resistant Plastic Handrails:Assembly consisting of snap-on plastic cover installed over
continuous retainer.
1.
2.

product
Page 5 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.
Cover: Minimum [2.0-mm-] [2.5-mm-] <Insert dimension> thick, extruded rigid plastic;
in dimensions and profiles indicated on Drawings.
a.
b.
Single Handrail: Cylindrical tube profile cover with continuous retainer; with
mounting brackets supporting bottom of rail.
Bumper Rail: Cover with flat front side; with 38-mmdiameter gripping surface
and finger recess on back side; supported by concealed, continuous retainer
and extended mounting brackets.
1)
c.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.4
A.

Mounting Bracket: Extended mounting on [injection-molded plastic] [anodizedaluminum] <Insert description> mounting brackets.
End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; [matching color]
[contrasting with color] <Insert color> cover; field adjustable for close alignment with
snap-on cover.
Accessories: Concealed splices, cushions, and mounting hardware.
CORNER GUARDS
Surface-Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards <Insert drawing designation>: Assembly
consisting of snap-on plastic cover installed over continuous retainer; including mounting
hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.
1.
2.
3.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements products that may be

product
a.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Bumper Surface: Smooth
Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range Retain
one of first two subparagraphs below.
Retainer: Minimum 1.5-mmthick, one-piece, extruded aluminum

Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-absorbing clips.
Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover;
Fire-Rated, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards: Assembly consisting of snap-on plastic cover that
is flush with adjacent wall surface, installed over continuous retainer and intumescent fire
barrier; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall
condition; full wall height.
Page 6 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
4.

incorporated into the Work
product
Fire Rating: Same rating as wall in which corner guard is installed]; UL listed and
labeled according to UL 2079.
Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum wall thickness; in dimensions and profiles
a.
5.
6.

Aluminum Cove Base: Nominal 150 mm high.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without
distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might
be visible in the finished Work.
1.
2.
Install impact-resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting heights

Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a
complete installation.
a.
b.
c.
Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads.

Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 6.1 m, splice aluminum
retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer
than 305 mm.
Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams.
B.
Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a
standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.
C.
Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by

manufacturer.
Page 7 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

Page 8 of 8
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 104413 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
COORDINATION...
SEQUENCING...
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
PRODUCTS.
FIRE PROTECTION CABINET.......
FABRICATION....
2
2
2
4
3.0
3.1
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION...
4
4
Page 1 of 4
Fire Protection Cabinets
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 104413 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets.
1.3
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
1.4
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire
extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
B.
1.5
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.

SEQUENCING
Apply [decals] [vinyl lettering] on field-painted fire-protection cabinets after painting is
complete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
2.2
A.
FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET
Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
1.
2.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated

into the Work
product
Cabinet Construction: 2-hour fire rated.
Page 2 of 4
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from
0.043-inch- (1.09-mm-) thick cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- (16mm-) thick fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
C.
Cabinet Material: [Cold-rolled steel sheet] [Aluminum sheet] [Stainless-steel sheet].
D.
Recessed Cabinet:
1.
2.
3.
Trimless with Concealed Flange: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with exterior
finished surface of cabinet frame and door, without overlapping trim attached to
cabinet. Provide recessed flange, of same material as box, attached to box to act as
plaster stop
Trimless with Hidden Flange: Flange of same metal and finish as box overlaps
surrounding wall finish and is concealed from view by an overlapping door.
Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge
(backbend).
E.
Cabinet Trim Material: Stainless-steel sheet
F.
Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet
G.
Door Style: Fully glazed, frameless, backless, acrylic panel
H.
Door Glazing: Tempered break glass

1.
2.
3.
Acrylic Sheet Color: [Clear] [Bronze] transparent acrylic sheet.

Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet painted [white] [red] [black] on
unexposed side.
Acrylic Bubble Color: Clear transparent.
I.
Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
J.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and
mounting clip, secured to cabinet.
Door Lock: [Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling
sharply on door handle]
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect.
a.
Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "[FIRE

EXTINGUISHER
1)
2)
Location: Applied to [location indicated on Drawings].

Application Process: Decals
Page 3 of 4
Project:
Works:
Title:

3)
4)
K.
Materials:
1.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

a.
2.
3.
Finish: No. 4 directional satin finish
Copper Alloy, Brass: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy [as standard with manufacturer] <Insert
requirements>.
a.
Finish: [Polished] [Satin] [As selected by Architect from full range of industry
finishes] <Insert finish>.
Copper Alloy, Bronze: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy [as standard with manufacturer]
<Insert requirements>.
a.
2.3
A.
Lettering Color: Red

Orientation: As indicated on Drawings.
Finish: [Mirror polish] [Satin polish] [Satin oxidized oil rub] [Clear baked
enamel] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from full range of
industry finishes] <Insert finish>.
FABRICATION
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door,
and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Prepare recesses for recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet
and trim style.
B.
Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated[ or, if not
indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.]
C.
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
D.
Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated.
E.
Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral
locking devices operate properly.
Page 4 of 4
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
COORDINATION...
WARRANTY.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
PRODUCTS.
PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS...
MOUNTING BRACKETS....
2
2
3
3
3.0
3.1
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION...
4
4
Page 1 of 4
Fire Extinguishers
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire
extinguishers.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.5
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit
and function.
1.6
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1.
Warranty Period: [Six] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
B.
Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Page 2 of 4
Fire Extinguishers
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.2
A.
PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting
bracket indicated.
1.
2.
3.

product
Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections,
maintenance, and recharging.
B.
Stored-Pressure Water Type:UL-rated 2-A, 9.5-L nominal capacity, with water in stainless-steel
container; with pressure-indicating gage.
C.
Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 2.5 gal nominal capacity, with monoammonium
phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.
D.
Carbon Dioxide Type: UL-rated 10-B:C, 6.8-kg nominal capacity, with carbon dioxide in
manufacturer's standard enameled-metal container.
E.
Clean-Agent Type in Steel Container : UL-rated [1-A:10-B:C, 4.5-kg] nominal capacity, with
HFC blend agent and inert material in enameled-steel container; with pressure-indicating
gage.
2.3
A.
MOUNTING BRACKETS
Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard[ galvanized] steel, designed to secure fire
extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated, with plated or [red] [black] baked-enamel finish.
B.
1.

2.
Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable

product for engineers approval.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1.
Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red
letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a.
Orientation: [Vertical] [Horizontal].
Page 3 of 4
Fire Extinguishers
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1.
B.
Install fire extinguishers[ and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
C.
Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
Mounting Brackets: [1372 mm] above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.
Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
Page 4 of 4
Fire Extinguishers
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 105123 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD LOCKERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
ACTION SUBMITTALS ......
FIELD CONDITIONS
COORDINATIONS.
WARRANTY.
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
PRODUCTS.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD WOOD LOCKERS.
MATERIALS...
HARDWARE.
ACCESSORIES.
FABRICATION.
4
4
4
6
6
7
8
3.0
3.1
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION..
8
8
Page 1 of 9
Plastic-Laminate-Clad Lockers
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 105123 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD LOCKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes plastic-laminate-clad wood lockers
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product data.
B.
LEED Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer
and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement
indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional material, and fraction by weight that
is considered regional.
requirements for regionally manufactured and regionally extracted and manufactured
materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material.
a.
b.
4.
5.
6.

manufactured materials. Indicate distance to Project and fraction by weight of each
regionally manufactured material that is regionally extracted.
Certificates for Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates indicating that products specified

to be made from certified wood comply with forest certification and chain-of-custody
requirements. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation indicating that
products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from
Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For adhesives and composite wood products,
documentation indicating that products contain no urea formaldehyde.
Page 2 of 9
Project:
Works:
Title:

7.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.4: For composite wood products, documentation
indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
C.
Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-clad wood lockers. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, attachments to other work, and locker identification system and numbering sequence.
D.
Samples: For each exposed finish.
1.3
A.
Sample warranty.
1.4
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
1.5
A.

Deliver [master and control keys] [combination control charts] to Owner by registered
mail or overnight package service.
1.6
A.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install lockers until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at occupancy levels
during the remainder of the construction period.
1.7
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate sizes and locations of concealed wood support bases.
1.
1.8
A.
Requirements are specified in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry." Section 061053

"Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry."
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of lockers that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
Page 3 of 9
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Accessibility Requirements: For lockers indicated to be accessible, comply with applicable
provisions in [the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA
Accessibility Guidelines and ICC A117.1.
2.2
A.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD WOOD LOCKERS

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on

Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Mediterranean Building Materials.

Creative Technical Services LLC.
DISI LLC.
Hollman, Inc.
Ideal Products, Inc.
Legacy Lockers.
List Industries Inc.
Treeforms.
C.
Forest Certification: Fabricate lockers with wood-based panel products produced from wood
obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
D.
Regional Materials: Lockers shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from
materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500
miles (800 km) of Project site.
E.
Regional Materials: Lockers shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
F.
Locker Body: Fabricated from particleboard-core panels covered on both sides with thermoset
decorative overlay.
1.
2.
3.
Side, Top, and Bottom Panels: Manufacturer's standard 3/4 or 5/8 inch (19 or 16 mm)
thick.
Back Panel: Manufacturer's standard 1/2 or 3/8 inch (13 or 9.5 mm) thick.
Exposed Panel Edges: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS, to match panels.
Page 4 of 9
Project:
Works:
Title:

G.
Plastic-Laminate-Clad Wood Doors: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS, over both
sides of medium-density-fiberboard core.
1.
2.
Thickness: Manufacturer's standard 3/4 or 5/8 inch (19 or 16 mm) thick.

Panel Edges: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS, to match panels.
H.
End Panels: Match style, material, construction, and finish of plastic-laminate-clad wood doors.
I.
Shelves: Fabricated from particleboard-core panels covered on both sides with thermoset
decorative overlay; fixed unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).

Exposed Edges: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS, to match panels.
J.
Drawer Faces: Match style, material, construction, and finish of plastic-laminate-clad wood doors.
Attach drawer faces to subfronts with mounting screws from drawer interior.
K.
Drawer Subfronts, Sides, and Backs: Fabricated from particleboard-core panels covered on both
sides with thermoset decorative overlay.
1.
2.
Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

Exposed Edges: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS, to match panels.
L.
Drawer Bottoms: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, thermoset decorative overlay over particleboard core.
M.
Corners and Filler Panels: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick panels. Match style, material, construction,
and finish of plastic-laminate-clad wood doors.
N.
Continuous Finish Base: Plastic-laminate-clad, 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick panel that matches door
faces; fabricated in lengths as long as practical to enclose base and base ends of lockers.
O.
Continuously Sloping Tops: Plastic-laminate-clad, 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick panel that matches
door faces for installation over lockers with separate flat tops. Fabricate tops in lengths as long as
practical, without visible fasteners at splice locations. Provide fasteners, supports, and closures, as
follows:
1.
P.
Plastic-Laminate Colors, Patterns, and Finishes:

1.
2.
Q.
Closures: Vertical-end type.
As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

MBM 0330 brushed navy.
Refer to Appendix B: Toilet Specification Sheet.
Page 5 of 9
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.3
A.
MATERIALS
Composite Wood: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard
for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Recycled Content of Medium-Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: Postconsumer recycled

content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 5 percent.
Composite Wood Products: Products shall comply with the testing and product
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea
formaldehyde.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.
Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with
thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements
of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for Test Methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as follows:

1.
2.
3.
Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.

Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
C.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
D.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrousmetal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
E.
Wood Support Base: 2-by-6-inch, nominal-size (51-by-152-mm, actual-size) lumber treated with
manufacturer's standard preservative-treatment, nonpressure process.
2.4
A.
HARDWARE
General: Provide manufacturer's standard locker hardware complying with the requirements in
this Section.
B.
Cylinder Locks: Built-in, flush cam locks with five-pin tumbler keyway, keyed separately and
master keyed. Furnish two change keys for each lock and two master keys.
Page 6 of 9
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
C.
Key Type: Grooved, with minimum 2-by-2.68-inch (51-by-68.3-mm) key head for
accessible lockers.
Semiconcealed Hinges: Single-pivot, spring-loaded steel hinges; back mounted.

1.
Provide three hinges for doors.
D.
Wire Pulls: Back mounted; 5 inches (127 mm) long, 2-1/2 inches (62 mm) deep, and 5/16 inch
(8 mm) in diameter.
E.
Accessible Handle: Metal, fixed, graspable lever handle and rose trim; surface mounted.
F.
Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013.
G.
Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball
bearings, and rated for a load of 75 lbf (330 N).
H.
Drawer Locks: Cam lock or deadbolt drawer lock; surface mounted on inside of drawer.
I.
Hooks: Manufacturer's standard, ball-pointed aluminum or steel; chrome finished. Attach hooks
with at least two fasteners.
1.
2.
J.
Coat Rods: 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter steel; chrome finished.

1.
2.
K.
2.5
A.
Provide hooks as indicated on Drawings.

Provide two single-prong wall hooks for each compartment of double-tier and triple-tier
lockers.
Provide coat rods as indicated on Drawings.

Provide coat rod for each compartment of double-tier lockers.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: Satin chrome unless otherwise indicated.

ACCESSORIES
Door Trays: Fabricated from solid wood.
1.
Provide chromes-finished steel towel rod attached to bottom of door tray.
B.
Mirrors: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2; with solid wood frame.
C.
Security Lock Boxes: 6 inches wide by 6 inches high (152 mm wide by 152 mm high) by depth
of locker; with piano hinge and combination lock.
Page 7 of 9
Project:
Works:
Title:

D.
Security Vaults: 6 inches wide by 4 inches high by 6 inches deep (152 mm wide by 102 mm
high by 152 mm deep); fabricated from steel sheet; with combination lock.
E.
Protective Mats: 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick solid rubber. Provide mat at each shoe shelf.
F.
Number Plates: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter, etched, embossed, or stamped, stainless-steel

plates with black numbers and letters at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. Identify lockers in sequence
indicated on Drawings. Finish plates to match other locker hardware.
2.6
A.
FABRICATION
Fabricate components square, rigid, without warp, and with finished faces flat and free of
scratches and chips. Accurately factory machine components for attachments. Make joints tight
and true.
B.
Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows:

1.
2.
Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches (381 mm) above the floor.
Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than 48
inches (1219 mm) above the floor.
C.
Venting: Fabricate lockers with space between doors and locker assembly of not less than 3/4
inch (19 mm), with painted metal security screen attached to each shelf between doors.
D.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum

extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
E.
Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, electrical work, and similar
items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce
accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Install wood support base with 1/2-inch- (13-mm) thick plywood top.
B.
Install lockers level, plumb, and true; use concealed shims.
C.
Connect groups of lockers together with manufacturer's standard fasteners, through predrilled
holes, with no exposed fasteners on face frames. Fit lockers accurately together to form flush,
tight, hairline joints.
Page 8 of 9
Project:
Works:
Title:

D.
Install lockers without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately
aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings, providing unencumbered
operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1.
Installation Tolerance: No more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or
other variation from a straight line. Shim as required with concealed shims.
E.
Locker Anchorage: Fasten lockers through wood locker base, at ends, and not more than 36
inches (910 mm) o.c. with No. 8 flush-head wood screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration
into wood base.
F.
Locker Anchorage: Fasten wood lockers through back, near top and bottom, at ends with No. 8
flush-head wood screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or
furring and spaced not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
G.
Scribe and cut corner and filler panels to fit adjoining work using fasteners concealed where
practical. Repair damaged finish at cuts.
H.
Attach sloping-top units to lockers, with end panels covering exposed ends.
I.
Install number plates after lockers are in place.
J.
Anchor locker benches to floors.

Page 9 of 9
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 105613 METAL STORAGE SHELVING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ...
QUALTITY ASSURANCE.
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCTS.
MATERIALS..
CASE TYPE METAL STORAGE SHELVING..
FOUR POST METAL STORAGE SHELVING....
FABRICATION.
3
3
3
4
6
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION...
ERECTION TOLERANCE
ADJUSTING.
6
6
7
7
Page 1 of 7
Metal Storage Shelving
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 105613 METAL STORAGE SHELVING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes [case-type] [four-post] [and] [post-and-beam] metal storage shelving.
1.2
A.
Delegated Design: Design metal storage shelving, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
B.
Structural Performance for [Case-Type] [and] [Four-Post] Metal Storage Shelving: Capable of
withstanding the loads indicated according to MH 28.1.
C.
Structural Performance for Post-and-Beam Metal Storage Shelving: Capable of withstanding

the loads indicated according to MH 28.2.
D.
Seismic Performance: Metal storage shelving shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
1.3
A.
B.
Seismic Component Importance Factor: [1.5] [1.0].
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.
2.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For particleboard, documentation indicating that
product contains no urea formaldehyde.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For composite wood products, documentation
C.
Shop Drawings: For customized metal storage shelving. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work. Include installation details of connectors, lateral
bracing, and special bracing.
D.
E.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal storage shelving indicated to comply with performance
requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
Page 2 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
1.4
A.
B.
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for seismic restraints.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For metal storage shelving, accessories, and components,
from manufacturer.
1.5
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for installation of units required for this Project.
B.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1[, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde].
B.
Composite Wood Products: Products shall comply with the testing and product requirements
C.
Floor Anchors: Galvanized-steel, [post-installed expansion anchors] [power-actuated fasteners]

[or] [threaded concrete screws]. Provide number per unit recommended by manufacturer
unless additional anchors are indicated in calculations.
D.
Wall Anchors: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel anchors designed to secure metal

storage shelving to adjacent wall. Provide two per shelving unit for each shelving unit
adjacent to a wall unless additional anchors are indicated in calculations.
2.2
A.
CASE-TYPE METAL STORAGE SHELVING .

General: Factory-formed, field-assembled, freestanding, case-type metal storage shelving
system, designed for shelves to span between and be supported by sheet metal end panels
(without posts), with shelves adjustable over the height of shelving unit. Fabricate shelf units
with end panel at each end so each unit is independent. Provide fixed top and bottom
shelves, adjustable intermediate shelves, and accessories indicated.
1.

incorporated into the Work:
Page 3 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable

product
B.
Load-Carrying Capacity per Shelf: 91 kg
C.
End Panels: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet of thickness required for load-carrying
capacity per shelf and number of shelves; with concealed perforations at front and back
edges at manufacturer's standard spacing for receiving adjustable shelf clips. Furnish
adjustable shelf clips with projections designed to engage at least two perforations in end
panels.
D.
End Panels: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet of thickness required for load-carrying
capacity per shelf and number of shelves; with horizontal slots spaced at manufacturer's
standard spacing for supporting shelves.
E.
Back Panel: One piece, fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet of thickness required for loadcarrying capacity per shelf.
F.
Shelves: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet of thickness required for load-carrying
capacity per shelf and number of shelves.[ Fabricate with slots or holes at 51 mm o.c. for
shelf dividers]. Fabricate shelves with vertical front that is flanged and returned.
G.
Base: Closed front, with base strips fabricated from same material and with same finish as
end panels.
H.
Unit Dimensions and Number of Shelves: As shows on Drawings.
I.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
J.
Finish: Baked enamel

1.
2.3
A.
Finished End Panels: Fabricated as perforated full-height panels from same material
and with same finish as end panels, with trim for a finished appearance along edges
abutting end panels and top shelf.
Shelf Dividers: Fabricated from same material and with same finish as shelves; fullheight type.
Bins: Fabricated from same material and with same finish as shelves; size as indicated
on Drawings
Shelf-Label Holders: Clear plastic, designed to clip onto front edge of shelf.
FOUR-POST METAL STORAGE SHELVING

Open Four-Post Metal Storage Shelving : Factory-formed, field-assembled, freestanding
system, designed for shelves to span between and be supported by corner posts, with shelves
adjustable over the height of shelving unit. Fabricate initial shelving unit with a post at each
corner. Fabricate additional shelving units as add-on units, designed to share two corner posts
Page 4 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

with initial shelving unit. Provide fixed top and bottom shelves, adjustable intermediate
shelves, and accessories indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable
product for the engineers approval.
Load-Carrying Capacity per Shelf: 680 kg.
Posts: Fabricated from hot-rolled steel of thickness required for load-carrying capacity
per shelf and number of shelves. Fabricate in tubular T-box shape; with perforations at
38 mm o.c. to receive shelf-to-post connectors.
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Bracing: Manufacturer's standard, double diagonal cross bracing at [back] [and]

[ends]; as required for stability, load-carrying capacity of shelves, and number of
shelves.
Back Panel: Two half panels fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet of thickness required
for load-carrying capacity per shelf.
End Panels: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet of thickness required for loadcarrying capacity per shelf.
Solid-Type Shelves: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet of thickness required for
load-carrying capacity per shelf and as follows:
a.
b.
c.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Add-On Shelf Posts: Fabricated from hot-rolled steel, manufacturer's standard

shape; perforated to match main posts and of same thickness.
Post Base: Adjustable steel floor plate, drilled for floor anchors.
Slots or Holes for Shelf Dividers: 76 mm o.c.

Fabricate fronts and backs of shelves with box-formed edges, with corners
lapped and welded.
Fabricate fronts and backs of shelves with vertical edges that are flanged and
returned, with edges reinforced with steel channels.
Framed-Type Wire Shelves: Metallic-coated-steel wire; with shelf frame fabricated from
same material and with same finish as posts.
Truss-Type Wire Shelves: Metallic-coated-steel wire-over-wire construction, with
downturned wire truss edges.
Shelf-to-Post Connectors: Horizontal supports with rivet connectors to post.
Base: Open, with exposed post legs
Unit Dimensions and Number of Shelves: As shows on Drawings.
Accessories:
a.
Finished End Panels: Fabricated as perforated full-height panels from

manufacturer's standard thickness cold-rolled steel sheet and with same finish as
posts, with trim for a finished appearance along edges abutting posts and top
shelf.
Page 5 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

b.
c.
d.
15.
Shelf Dividers: Fabricated from same material and with same finish as shelves;
full-height type.
Bins: Fabricated from same material and with same finish as shelves; [size as
Shelf-Label Holders: Clear plastic, designed to clip onto front edge of shelf.
Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.

a.
2.4
A.
FABRICATION
Shop Fabrication: Prefabricate shelving components in shop to greatest extent possible to
minimize field fabrication.
B.
Fabricate metal storage shelving square and rigid, with posts plumb and true and shelves flat
and free of dents or distortion. Fabricate connections to form a rigid structure, free of buckling
and warping.
1.
2.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications to receive hardware, fasteners, and
similar items.
C.
Form metal in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Form backs of shelving units up to 1219
mm wide from one piece.
D.
Form edges and corners free of sharp edges or rough areas. Remove burrs.
E.
Weld corners and seams continuously to develop strength, minimize distortion, and maintain
the corrosion resistance of base metals. At exposed locations, finish welds and surfaces
smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface
matches that of adjacent surface. Weld before finishing components to greatest extent
possible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Examine walls and ceilings to which metal storage shelving will be attached for properly
located blocking, grounds, or other solid backing for attachment of support fasteners.
B.
Install metal storage shelving level, plumb, square, rigid, true, and with shelves flat and free of
dents or distortion. Make connections to form a rigid structure, free of buckling and warping.
1.
Install exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible.
Page 6 of 7
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Install braces, straps, plates, brackets, and other reinforcements as needed to support
shelf loading and as required for stability.
Adjust post-base bolt leveler to achieve level and plumb installation.
Anchor shelving units to floor with floor anchors through floor plate. Shim floor plate to
achieve level and plumb installation.
Install seismic restraints.
Connect side-to-side and back-to-back shelving units together.
Install shelves in each shelving unit at spacing indicated on Drawings or, if not
indicated, at equal spacing.
a.
b.
c.
C.
Case-Type Metal Storage Shelving: Install adjustable shelf clips at front and back
of each shelf.
Four-Post Metal Storage Shelving: Install four clips, one at each post, for support
of each shelf; with clips fully engaged in post perforations.
Post-and-Beam Metal Storage Shelving: Install beams with beam-to-post
connectors fully engaged in post perforations.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Install finished end panels and trim at exposed ends of shelving units.
Shelf Dividers: Install <Insert number> [full-height dividers per shelf]
Bins: Install at locations indicated on drawings.
Shelf-Label Holders: Install one on each shelf, centered within each shelving unit.
Record Box Support Rails: Provide two for each record storage box.
Shelf Inlays: Install one per shelf.
Storage Baskets: Install at locations indicated on Drawings.
Back Ledges: Install one per shelf.
Side Ledges: Install on each side of each shelf.
Garment Hanger Tubes: Install one per shelving unit where directed.
3.2
A.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
Erect [case-type] [and] [four-post] metal storage shelving to a maximum tolerance from vertical
of 13 mm in up to 3 m of height, not exceeding 25 mm for heights taller than 3 m.
3.3
A.
ADJUSTING
Adjust metal storage shelving so that connectors and other components engage accurately
and securely.
B.
Replace metal storage shelving that has been damaged or has deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
Page 7 of 7
DIVISION 11
________________________________________________________________________
EQUIPMENT
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 111200 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
PREINSTALLATIOJN MEETINGS...
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
PRODUCTS.
AUTOMATIC BARRIER GATES..
VEHICLE DETECTORS...........
ENTRY TERMINAL TICKET DISPENSERS.....
EXIT TERMINAL...
FEE COMPUTERS
PARKING FACILITY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE.
3
3
5
6
7
8
9
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION...
DEMONSTRATION
9
9
10
10
Page 1 of 10
Parking Control Equipment
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 111200 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Automatic barrier gates.

Vehicle detectors.
Entry terminal ticket dispensers.
Exit terminals.
Fee computers.
Parking facility management software.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product data.
B.
Shop Drawings: For parking control equipment.

1.
2.
3.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For parking control equipment to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
B.
Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1.
2.
Device address list.

Printout of software application and graphic screens.
Page 2 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
AUTOMATIC BARRIER GATES

General: Provide parking control device consisting of operator and controller housed in a
weathertight, tamper-resistant cabinet enclosure with gate arm. Device shall be activated by a
signal from access or revenue control device. Fabricate unit with gate-arm height in down
position of not more than 889 mm above pavement.
1.

incorporated into the Work .
B.
Standards: ASTM F 2200 for barrier gates and gate operators that are listed and labeled
according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency.
C.
Controller: Factory-sealed, solid-state, plug-in type, with galvanized-steel box for wiring
connections.
1.
Type: Noncommunicating.
a.
b.
2.
Type: Communicating.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Capable of logic for one- and two-way lanes.

Separate momentary contacts for transient patrons, monthly patrons, vehicle
entries, and vehicle exits.
Real-time communication of lane counts, status messages, and execute

commands.
Monitor illegal entries and exits, tailgates, tickets, monthlies, and backouts.
Status messages for gate up too long, backouts, ticket in chute, and gate-arm
rebound.
Communication commands for resetting loops, turning signs on/off, raising and
lowering gate arm, and disabling ticket dispensers and card readers.
Physical Characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
On-off power supply switch.

Automatic-manual switch.
Differential counter.
Communication port.
Internal [resettable] [non-resettable] counters.
Thermal-overload protection with manual reset.
Plug-in connectors for [two] [three] vehicle loop detectors.
Page 3 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
4.
Operational Characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
D.
Material: Not less than 3.2-mmthick aluminum sheet.

a.
Length: [3.0 m] Or [3.7 m]
Folding Gate Arm: Two pieces of 19-by-89-mm actual- size pine or redwood joined together
with metal side brackets; with painted finish and black diagonal stripes on traffic-side face.
Provide mounting flange with breakaway feature to ensure a clean break if arm is struck by
vehicle.
1.
G.
Finish cabinet, interior and exterior, with manufacturer's standard baked-enamel

or powder-coat finish.
Straight Gate Arm: 2.5-mmthick Aluminum, with painted finish and black diagonal stripes on
traffic-side face. Provide mounting flange with breakaway feature to ensure a clean break if
arm is struck by vehicle.
1.
F.
Able to store successive inputs and sequentially processing each one.

Automatic instant-reversing obstacle detector mechanism that stops downward
motion of gate arm if arm contacts or nears an object and that immediately
returns arm to upward position. Include a zero- to 60-second, variable-time reset
device.
Directional arming logic.
Broken gate-arm monitoring.
Programmable[ automatic] timer.
Diagnostic mode for on-site testing[, with LEDs for inputs and outputs].
Automatic and continuous testing of inputs and outputs.
Reversible arm capability for right- or left-handed operation.
Cabinets: Fabricated from sheet metal with seams welded and ground smooth; approximately
381 mm square by 1016 mm tall. Provide single, gasketed access door for each cabinet with
flush-mounted locks. Furnish two keys for each lock[, all locks keyed alike]. Fabricate cabinet
with internal reinforcing and four mounting holes accessible only from inside cabinet.
1.
E.
Thermostatically controlled heater with on/off/auto switch.

Switch to test motor and limit switches.
Emergency manual disconnect.
Battery backup.
Single, 115-V ac grounded power receptacle.
Length: [3.0 m] or [3.7 m]
Operator: UL labeled and listed, [Class I][1/2] hp; , 60-Hz, single-phase, instant-reversing,
continuous-duty motor for operating gate arm. Transmit power to gate-arm drive shaft through
the speed reducer to harmonic-acting crank and connecting rod. Fabricate crank, rod, and
drive shaft of galvanized solid bar steel. Provide an operable cam for adjusting arm travel.
Page 4 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
H.
Characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.2
A.
Audible alarm that activates as part of a safety device system.

Additional obstruction detector; noncontact photoelectric.
Barrier-arm warning safety signs on both sides of unit to limit traffic to vehicular traffic.
Low-voltage [yellow] [red] warning lights that illuminate when gate is in down position.
Low-voltage light on cabinet top that flashes or changes from red to green when barrier
gate is operating.
Manually operated crank for emergency operation.
Local authorities' emergency access by <Insert type>.
Gate-arm tip support with electromagnetic lock.
VEHICLE DETECTORS
General: Provide detection devices that sense presence or transit of vehicles and emit signals
activating gate-arm operators.
1.
B.
Opening Time: Six seconds.

Inherently adjustable, torque limiting clutch for safety.

Vehicle Loop Detector System: Self-tuning electronic presence detector with adjustable
detection patterns, adjustable sensitivity and frequency settings, and panel indicator light.
Include automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay before closing[, timer cut-off
switch,] designed to hold gate arm open until traffic clears. Provide number of loops
consisting of multiple strands of wire, number of turns, loop size, and method of placement at
location indicated on Drawings, as recommended in writing by detection system manufacturer
for [pave-over] [saw-cut] installation.
1.
2.
3.
Field-Assembled Loop: Wire, in size indicated for field assembly.

Factory-Formed Loop: Wire, preformed in size indicated.
Operation:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Recognize vehicles within 152 mm of each other on standard-sized loop.

Recognize vehicle direction by detecting vehicle moving from one loop to
another.
Generate reverse count if vehicle backs up after generating directional count in
forward direction.
Continuous diagnostic monitoring for intermittently operating and failed loops.
Crosstalk test between adjacent loops.
Active Infrared Vehicle Detector: Retroreflective -type presence detector with adjustable
detection zone pattern and sensitivity, designed to detect the presence or transit of vehicle in
gate-arm pathway by interrupting infrared beam in zone pattern and to emit signal activating
gate-arm operator. Include automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay before
Page 5 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

closing, timer cut-off switch, and vehicle presence detector designed to hold gate arm open
until traffic clears.
2.3
A.
ENTRY TERMINAL TICKET DISPENSERS

General: Provide entry terminal ticket dispensers, consisting of ticket-printing and -issuing
mechanisms, ticket magazines, printers, and controllers housed in cabinet enclosures.
1.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
C.
Time and date display.

Time Indicator: 24-hour cycle with military-time clock mechanism.
Voice annunciation.
Tickets: Barcode type.
Removable ticket tray with capacity of 5000 fan-folded tickets.
Operation: Online communication to remote computer.
Battery backup for clock and RAM memory.
Communication port.
Access Credit card acceptance with activation slot and "Insert Ticket/Card" message.
License plate recognition.
Multiple ticket option for valet parking.
Intercom.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.

Activation by button with "Push for Ticket" message. On activation, unit automatically
records entry time and date on ticket, sounds buzzer, and dispenses ticket.
Automatic ticket validation.
Programmable ticket numbering.
Low-ticket alarm.
Out-of-ticket alarm.
Ticket jam detection.
Test ticket printing.
Cabinets: Fabricated from sheet metal with seams welded and ground smooth, approximately
381 mm square by 1016 mm tall; consisting of base and top components. Provide single,
gasketed access door for each base component with flush-mounted locks. Furnish two keys for
each lock, all locks keyed alike. Fabricate cabinet with internal reinforcing and four mounting
holes accessible only from inside cabinet. Fabricate top component so it can be unlocked and
opened for ticket loading and maintenance. Include flush-mounted lock in rear of top, keyed
the same as base component lock.
1.
Page 6 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

a.

or powder coat finish.
E.
Ticket-Dispensing Mechanisms: Removable assembly, with ticket burster and plug-in controller.
2.4
A.
EXIT TERMINALS
General: Provide exit terminals consisting of ticket collectors, magnetic-stripe ticket readers,
digital displays or LEDs, printers, and controllers housed in cabinet enclosures. Provide
"Please Insert Ticket" sign on side of cabinet visible to driver.
1.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.


Communication port.
Intercom.
1.
2.
3.
Online communication to remote computer.

Card Acceptance: Access /Credit card acceptance with activation slot and "Insert
Ticket/Card" message.
Ticket Acceptance: Inserting exit ticket into exit ticket reader results in one of the
following actions:
a.
b.
c.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
D.
Valid Exit Ticket: Exit ticket reader captures ticket and automatically sends signal
to raise barrier gate.
Invalid Exit Ticket: Exit ticket reader rejects ticket and displays "Pay Cashier
First" message.
Exit Ticket with Elapsed Grace Time: Exit ticket reader rejects ticket and displays
"Return to Cashier" message.
Activation by vehicle detector/ card reader .

Print receipts on demand.
Voice annunciation.
Programmable facility code.
Programmable grace period.
Programmable display.
Programmable timer for closing barrier gate.
Reports for events and exception events.
Built-in service diagnostics.
Cabinets: Fabricated from sheet metal with seams welded and ground smooth; approximately
381 mm square by 1016 mm tall. Provide single, gasketed access door for each cabinet with
Page 7 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

flush-mounted locks. Furnish two keys for each lock[, all locks keyed alike]. Fabricate cabinet
with internal reinforcing and four mounting holes accessible only from inside cabinet.
1.

a.
2.5
A.
FEE COMPUTERS
General: Provide modular/ PC (personal computer)-based system consisting of fee computer
terminal, cash drawer, barcode ticket reader, and detachable printer. Register permanent
record of each transaction in computer's memory.
1.
B.

incorporated into the Work .
1.
2.
3.
C.

or powder coat finish.

Communication port.
Keyless-membrane keypad.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Compute multiple parking fees based on entry times on ticket from ticket dispenser.
Compute multiple taxes by percent and fixed amount.
Programmable lost ticket function.
Display fee on remote fee display device.
Accept payment by cash and credit card, debit card and merchant ticket.
Control independent cash drawer.
Compute change.
Print receipts.
Print validation on ticket.
Print audit trail.
Interface to automatic barrier gate.
Programmable with up to [six] <Insert number> fee structures.
Programmable time.
Programmable keys.
Programmable for special events validations.
Programmable for automatic activation for limited date and time validations.
Programmable merchant validations.
Programmable valet parking.
Programmable hotel guest parking.
Three levels of security including cashier, supervisor, and master.
Recall last transaction.
Test mode to verify accuracy of fee structure program.
Page 8 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

23.
24.
25.
Built-in service diagnostics.

View cash audit, revenue, operational, and statistical reports on screen or print on
demand.
Duress alarm output for emergencies.
D.
Cash Drawer: Fabricated with a removable tray and drawer, with five compartments for
paper currency and five compartments for coins.
E.
Remote Fee Display: Single-faced signs designed for use with fee computer, consisting of 25mm- tall, digital displays or LEDs contained in welded steel bodies with baked-enamel or
powder-coat finish.
1.
2.
2.6
A.
PARKING FACILITY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE

General: Manufacturer's standard software that is compatible with security-access control
system and that provides automatic facility monitoring, supervision, and remote control of
parking control equipment from one or more locations.
1.
B.
Messages: Amount due, "Thank You," "Closed," and time in A.M./P.M. format.
Mounting: [Front of cashier's booth] [1067-mm- high pedestal].
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products products

that may be incorporated into the Work .
Operation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Collect data for revenue and activity reporting.

Collect data for access and space control.
Track tickets.
Programmable parking control equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Install parking control equipment as required for complete and integrated
installation.
1.
B.
Rough-in electrical connections.
Automatic Barrier Gates: Anchor cabinets to concrete bases with anchor bolts or expansion
anchors, and mount barrier gate arms.
1.
Install barrier gates according to UL 325.
Page 9 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Vehicle Loop Detectors: Bury and seal wire loop at locations indicated on Drawings
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Connect to parking control equipment
operated by detector.
D.
[Entry Terminal Ticket Dispensers] [and] [Exit Terminals]: Attach cabinets to concrete bases
with anchor bolts or expansion anchors.
1.
2.
Connect equipment to remote computer.

Load ticket dispenser with supply of tickets.
E.
Fee Computers: Install computers at locations indicated, including connecting to peripheral

equipment and remote computers.
F.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
G.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
3.2
A.

Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform the following tests and inspections:

1.
2.
3.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
D.
Parking control equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
E.
3.3
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain parking control
equipment.
Page 10 of 10
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 118226 FACILITY WASTE COMPACTORS (EQ04)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
QUALITY ASSURANCE..
MAINTENANCE SERVICE.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
PRODUCTS.
WASTE COMPACTORS....
FABRICATION...........
3
3
3
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION...
DEMONSTRATION
3
3
3
4
Page 1 of 4
Facility Waste Compactors
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 118226 FACILITY WASTE COMPACTORS (EQ04)

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes waste compactors.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
1.3
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed
in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other work.
1.
Location and installation details of automatic sprinkler in hopper of each chute-fed
compactor.
2.
Equipment access points and required space for equipment service and operation.
1.4
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.5
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B.
Waste-Compactor Standards: ANSI Z245.21 including annexes and NFPA 82.
C.
Waste-Container Standards: ANSI Z245.30 and ANSI Z245.60.
1.6
A.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full
maintenance by skilled employees of waste-compactor Installer. Include quarterly preventive
maintenance, repair, or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning,
and adjusting as required for proper waste-compactor operation at rated speed and capacity.
Provide parts and supplies the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of
original equipment.
Page 2 of 4
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
WASTE COMPACTORS
Waste Compactor: Manufacturer's standard self-contained horizontal -type stationary
compactor, complying with requirements, liquidtight, and with components, options, and
accessories needed to provide a complete, functional system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

incorporated into the work.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product for
engineers approval
WASTEC-Rated Size (Volume): Minimum [10.00 cu. yd. (7.65 cu. m)]
Clear Top Opening (Length by Width): Minimum [108 by 72 inches (2743 by 1829
mm)]
Scale Weight: Maximum 12,000 lb (5443 kg)]
Motor Size: 30hp.
Electrical Power Supply: 240 V, [3] phase, 60 Hz.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer for field painting
a.
B.
2.2
A.
Number of Extra Storage Containers: One

FABRICATION
Fabricate liquidtight compactor baffles to stop liquid from leaking out.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Install each waste compactor according to manufacturer's written instructions, ANSI Z245.2,
and ANSI Z245.21[ including annexes].
Install automatic sprinkler in hopper of each chute-fed compactor according to NFPA 82.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections,
and to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
Page 3 of 4
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Test and adjust controls, alarms, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
C.
A waste compactor will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
3.3
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain waste compactors according to manufacturer's requirements
and ANSI Z245.2.
Page 4 of 4
DIVISION 12
________________________________________________________________________
FURNISHINGS
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES (12FM01)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
PRODUCTS.
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL...
ROLL-UP RAIL MATS....
FABRICATION.
3
3
3
3.0
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION...
PROTECTION..
3
3
3
Page 1 of 3
Entrance Floor Mats and Frames
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES (12FM01)

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
A.
B.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
1.3
A.
Roll-up rail mats.

Resilient entrance mats.
Recessed frames.
Items penetrating floor mats and frames, including door control devices.
Divisions between mat sections.
Perimeter floor moldings.
Custom Graphics: Scale drawing indicating colors.
Samples: For each floor mat tread rail, and frame member.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in Accessibility Guidelines in
relevant Authority having Jurisdiction.
2.2
A.
ROLL-UP RAIL MATS

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by available
manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work.
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product

indicated on Drawings or a comparable product.
C.
Roll-up, Aluminum-Rail Hinged Mats: Extruded-aluminum tread rails 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)
wide by 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick, sitting on continuous vinyl cushions.
Page 2 of 3
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Tread Inserts: Ribbed-design-surface, resilient vinyl.

Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Inserts: As selected by Architect from full range of
industry colors.
Rail Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color
densities.
Hinges: Aluminum
Mat Size: As indicated
2.3
A.
FABRICATION
Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and
cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal
traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide
prefabricated corner units without joints.
B.
Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum frames that contact cementitious material with
manufacturer's standard protective coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Install recessed mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set mat tops at
height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate tops of
mat surfaces with bottoms of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door
and mat.
B.
Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations

indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns.
3.2
A.
PROTECTION
After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or
fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain
protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.
Page 3 of 3
DIVISION 14
________________________________________________________________________
CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 142100 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS (CE03)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS. . ..
WARRANTY. . . .
2
2
2
2
2
3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
2.21
2.22
2.23
PRODUCTS.
PASSENGER ELEVATOR SPECIFICATION, GENERAL...
REQUIREMENTS OF INSTALLATION...
BUILDERS WORK AND ATTENDANCE ..
AS FITTED DRAWINGS AND SERVICES MANUALS .
CAPACITY.
SPEED..
TRACTION MACHINE
MOTOR DRIVE.
CONTROL SYSTEM
OPERATION & CONTROL.
HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT..
TRAVELING CABLES...
SAFETY EQUIPMENT..
ELEVATOR CAR
TESTING
OPERATING PANELS AND INDICATOR.
CAR AND LANDING SILLS
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF ELEVATORS.
THE MAIN CONTRACTOR
MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE..
LIFT 01 & 02 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS.
LIFT 03 & 04 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS.
OPERATIONAL AND SPECIAL FEATURES FOR ALL ELEVATORS.
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
6
7
8
8
9
10
11
12
12
12
13
14
15
16
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION...
PROTECTION..
DEMONSTRATION.
MAINTENANCE..
18
18
18
19
19
19
Page 1 of 19
Electric Traction Elevators
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 142100 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS (CE03)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes electric traction passenger and service elevators.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes,
and similar information.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
C.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each
landing,[ machine room layout,] coordination with building structure, relationships with
other construction, and locations of equipment.
Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of
support, and maximum and average power demands.
Samples: For exposed finishes.
1.3
A.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For elevator equipment, accessories, and components, from
manufacturer.
B.
Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and
[machine room] [control closet] layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical
service[ including standby power generator], as shown and specified, are adequate for
elevator system being provided.
1.4
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
B.
Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities

having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.
C.
Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer

to Owner, in the form of a standard two-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial
maintenance service is concluded.
Page 2 of 19
Project:
Works:
Title:

1.5
A.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace elevator
work that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PASSENGER ELEVATOR SPECIFICATIONS, GENERAL

The contractor shall supply, install, test and commissioning and hand over the complete elevator installation as specified and in accordance with of EN 81 elevator safety code
The general requirements of the elevators and particular specifications are given in the
schedules at the end of the specifications.
The Contractor shall commence the electrical installation from the circuit breakers provided in
the machine room for this purpose. All the works shall be co-ordinate with the other contractors prior to installation, so that there will be no areas of incompatibility.
The elevator system shall be equipped with traction machinery and associated traction
equipment, elevator cars, solid state control systems and all other equipment and accessories
required to provide a complete, modern, durable and efficient vertical transport system.
All the electrical equipment shall be compatible with the available electrical system of the
building, as specified under electrical section.
All the components shall be selected to provide satisfactory operation under prevailing environment condition at site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete maintenance of the elevator for a period
of 12 months from the date of acceptance by the Engineer of the complete elevator installation and shall include for cleaning, oiling and inspection of the elevator and all the associated equipment at periods of one month and to include for all emergency calls throughout the
24 hours of the day through the failure of the elevator to operate normally.
A monthly inspection sheet shall be submitted to the Engineer immediately after each monthly
inspection cleaning and greasing.
The contractor shall also give notice that any fault notified will receive immediate attention on
the day of the notification.
Page 3 of 19
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.2
REQUIREMENTS OF INSTALLATION
The elevators shall be supplied and installed by an approved manufacturer to the Engineers
approval.
The work will be carried out concurrently with the work of the building contract and the main
contractor will be required to carry out certain work in connection with the specialist sub
contract.
2.3
BUILDERS WORK AND ATTENDANCE

The main contractor is to allow for all builders work as per requirements of the elevator sub
contractor listed elsewhere in connection with the elevator installation.
The main contractor shall also provide normal attendance including all usual facilities for the
execution of the specialist sub contract.
2.4
AS FITTED DRAWINGS AND SERVICES MANUALS

On completion of the elevators installation and at least one week prior to the date of inspection, the contractor shall hand over to the Engineer as fitted elevator installation drawings.
Two sets of instruction manuals for general running and maintenance and repair are to be
provided.
2.5
CAPACITY
Each elevator shall have a safe carrying load inclusive of weight of complete car cable and
ropes and in accordance with the attached schedule.
2.6
SPEED
The rated speed of the elevators shall be as specified in the schedule.
2.7
TRACTION MACHINE
The elevator shall be equipped with variable voltage and variable frequency controlled gearless motors, having stepless, smooth speed time characteristics.
Motor protection for the hoisting motor against overheating and burning. If the hoisting motor
starts to overheat, the elevator car is driven to the nearest possible floor where the doors will
be opened to let the passenger out of the car. After the motor cools down the elevator will resume normal operation.
The machine should be fixed to the rail at the upper part of the shaft, isolated by isolation
pads in case of machine room less type and on the machine room when a machine room is
specified.
Page 4 of 19
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.8
MOTOR DRIVE
The variable voltage, variable frequency motor drive {VVVF} unit will control the motor speed
using a microprocessor.
The VVVF system will be provided with a converter, which performs AC to DC conversion,
and an inverter which is designed to invert DC to three phase variable frequency AC. The inverter will give an output of sinusoidal current by application of pulse width modulation technology. The inverter will control voltage and frequency continuously and accurately in accordance with speed command signal, which is performed by a microprocessor in the elevator controller.
The VVVF drive unit will be capable of keeping the elevator service under the following condition;
Supply Line Voltage Fluctuation :
- 10% + 5 % from the rated voltage
Frequency Variation
- + 2% from the rated frequency
The VVVF drive unit will be provided with contractors for removing the power from the motor
of the traction machine. The Contractors will open each time the car stops. The brake of the
traction machine will be applied while the contact drop out.
A pulse rotary encoder will detect the actual speed of the car. The difference between the
speed command signal and the actual speed measured by the pulse rotary encoder will control the motor speed while the car is accelerating, decelerating and landing.
Protective devices will ensure to open the main circuit between the VVVF unit and the motor of
the traction machine to stop the elevator when one of the following conditions occurs:
Phase reversal; phase failure, failure of supply voltage, over current, overheating of thyristor
and transistor, operation of any safety device.
2.9
CONTROL SYSTEM
The control system will consist of the VVVF motor drive unit and a computerized controller.
A computer-controlled regulator will control the car speed by comparing the actual car speed
detected by a pulse rotary encoder with an ideal speed pattern generated by a microprocessor.
While the car is accelerating the ideal accelerating pattern will be generated by the microprocessor to obtain the smooth and optimum acceleration.
While the car is decelerating the microprocessor will calculate and provide the ideal speed
pattern to obtain the comfortable and stable riding performance.
Page 5 of 19
Project:
Works:
Title:

At landing a smooth landing pattern will be generated by microprocessor and as soon as the
car has stopped the mechanical brake will be applied to hold the car.
2.10
OPERATION & CONTROL

1.
The operation will be of the selective collective type (simplex, Duplex, triplex, four, five,
or six car group) as mentioned in the schedule for each group of elevators. The operating equipment will consist of a series of micro touch button in each car number to correspond to the various landings, a single riser of UP and DOWN buttons at the intermediate landings and single button at the terminal landings, all connected electrically with the microprocessor governing floor selection and direction of travel to supply the
operation described below.
2.
The group controller shall utilize enhance spacing principle for call allocation. The system shall scatter the cars evenly within the UP and DOWN calls to ensure the shortest
possible call and waiting times.
3.
The call allocation algorithm shall consider several factors to determine optimum routing and landing call.
4.
The call time forecasts shall be continuously calculated. These forecasts shall include
both the elapsed time of each call and, the time needed by each individual car to serve
these calls.
5.
The traffic patterns are based on the forecast statistics. The passenger traffic flow is divided in three components, "Incoming", "outgoing" and "Interfloor" traffic according to
the floor where the passenger has boarded and existed the car.
2.10.1.1
Operation & Control Destination Control System (DCS) N/A

In cases where DCS is used and the calls are allocated to the car, the elevator
group control has more information than conventional control. Conventional
system knows from a landing call where the user is currently and to which direction he/she aims to go. DCS knows in addition to this users destination
floor, and the exact number of users behind each call. With the additional information DCS can arrange users to proper cars so that the number of stops of
each elevator is reduced during heavy traffic periods. When the number of
stops decreases, elevator round trip time becomes shorter. As a result more
people can be transported within a defined time interval. Thus elevator system
handling capacity increases with DCS control compared to the conventional
control. With
DCS, handling capacity is increased during heavy traffic. On
the other hand users waiting times are optimized during the light traffic.
The controller shall have the following features:
- State of the art industrial PC-computer technology
Page 6 of 19
Project:
Works:
Title:

State of the art landing allocation based on Genetic Algorithms (GE)

Artificial intelligence (AI) with Traffic Forecaster (TF) learns the
regular, from day to day repeating traffic patterns and detects prevailing
traffic type with fuzzy logic.
Fail Safety shall be achieved by Twin Group control Backup (TGB)
with Statistics Consistency Mechanism (SCM). In case the master
unit fails the backup unit is able to take over the control seamlessly.
Users journey:
When the user enters to the building with DCS he/ she needs to first locate the
Destination Operating Panel (DOP) in order to give an elevator call (phase 1).
With DOP the user selects the destination he/she aims to. The DOP then indicates which elevator is assigned for the user (phase 2). As the user approaches
the elevator group he/she can identify the right elevator by Elevator identifiers.
Elevators are named in alphabetical order (phase 3). The assigned elevator
takes the user to the destination. During the trip the user is able to follow the
position indicator and the next stops from COP, but there is no call buttons on
DCS COP (phase 4). At the destination user exits the elevator (phase 5).
The DOP shall have the option to do the following functions With a PIN code
activation:
o Car cleaning: The user is able to call a specific elevator from the
group to the landing. The mode takes the car out of the group.
o Space allocation: The user is able to call a car that leaves an extra
space.
o Empty car call: The user is able to call an empty car. It should be noted that this is not the priority call and it may take some time to get a
totally empty car as it is not served with the priority.
o Priority call: The user is able to receive a car as soon as possible. The
user is not able to choose the specific car as the priority is given for
rapid delivery of the car.
o Car out of service: The user is able to choose a certain car from the
group and take it out of the service.
2.11
HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT
(A) GUIDE RAILS
For smooth running of the counterweight and the elevator car, guide rails with steel tee
sections shall be installed, covering the entire height of the elevator shaft. The rails shall
rest on the hoistway pit to prevent exerting any physical forces on hoistway ceiling or
walls of the building.
Proper expansion joints shall be provided to withstand forces created on temperature
variations.
(B) HOISTING ROPES.
Page 7 of 19
Project:
Works:
Title:

Bright steel wire ropes with fiber cores of adequate cross section manufacture to EN
81 or steel wire ropes with adequate cross section, manufactured to EN81.
(C) GOVERNOR ROPES
These shall be manufactured similar to hoisting ropes. The two ends shall be securely
linked to the car and attached to the safety gear operating level. The governor ropes
shall be tensioned by a weight loaded device located in the pit.
(D) COUNTERWEIGHT
Cast iron blocks enclosed in a steel framework shall be provided to balance the weight
of the car and the specified capacity.
(E) BUFFERS
Oil type buffers shall be fitted in the hoistway pit beneath both car and the counterweight. These shall be securely mounted on continuous RS channels and correctly disposed relative to the car and the counterweight.
The plunger shall be of mild steel, accurately machined and designed to provide very
high safety factor. A toughened rubber bumper shall be fitted to the top of the plunger
to withstand the impact of the steel buffer plates mounted on the underside of the car
and the counterweight. An oil gauge shall be provided to check the oil level.
Spring type buffers shall be provided for speeds 60 MPM and below only.
2.12
TRAVELING CABLES
Steel Wire Ropes/ Coated Steel Belts: Suitable steel wire ropes as specified in codes. Polyurethane coated belts with high-tensile-grade, zinc-plated steel cords shall be acceptable
2.13
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
The gradual type safety system, comprising of a close loop roping system, over speed centrifugal governor, safety gear equipment etc. shall be provided.
The operation of the system shall be such that if the car over speeds in the downward direction, the governor jaws shall trip, operating the safety gear. It shall, in sequence cut off the
motor power supply, apply normal brakes and engage the safety gear jibs when the safety
gear jibs engage with the car guides. It shall apply a constant retarding force to bring the car
to a gradual and smooth stop within defined limits.
Re setting of the safety devices shall be possible by moving the car in upward direction.
The complete system shall comply with the relevant sections of EN 81 elevator safety code
A) OVER TRAVEL
Page 8 of 19
Project:
Works:
Title:

Over travel limit switches shall be provide at the top and bottom of the terminal landings of disconnect the power supply and apply brakes to bring the car to safe stop position in the event of an over travel in either direction.
B) EVACUATION DEVICES
Provision shall be made to move the car manually from the machine room to a nearest
landing in either direction to facilitate evacuation of passengers during a power failure.
C) FIREMAN EMERGENCY OPERATION
Fire Emergency operation key switch shall be installed near the entrance of the main
landing and shall operate any one of the elevators under conditions of emergency in
the event of fire. This operation shall be in Full compliance to Dubai Civil Defense requirements
When the fireman emergency call key switch is switched to fire position, it shall immediately
disconnect the elevator under normal automatic operation and the car shall return to the main
landing. It shall not register any hall calls, so that the passenger will not wait for the elevator.
The car shall then only operate on the attendant operation and it shall start registering the car
calls.
2.14
ELEVATOR CAR
The size of the car, interior design and decorations, ceiling and lighting and other facilities
shall be as called for in the schedule.
The car shall be of rigid steel framework with sound isolation designed and manufactured all
in accordance with relevant sections of EN81.
The operating buttons and keys shall be as given in the relevant section of the specification.
The following facilities shall be provided for each car, in addition to the items already specified.
A) VENTILATION
Electric ventilation mounted on car roof with proper vents to be provided.
B) EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Self-contained, non maintained emergency light, with a trickle charger.
C) EMERGENCY EXIT
An emergency exit shall be provided on car roof. This door shall be able to open either
inside or outside. A safety electrical switch shall be provided to prevent the car traveling when this emergency exit is open.
D) INTERCOMMUNICATON SYSTEM
Intercommunication system between the car, main landing and the machine room.
Page 9 of 19
Project:
Works:
Title:

E) WORKING PLATFORM
A working platform, complying with EN 81 shall be provided on the roof of the car.
F) CAR AND LANDING DOORS
The car and landing doors shall be fully automatic, two panel, centre opening automatic sliding doors. The finish of the doors shall be as specified in the schedule.
G) DOOR OPERATOR
The door operator shall be variable speed controlled AC motor with VVVF control suitable for the specified duty. The inverter shall include high speed switching device
which in turn shall provide a smooth sine curve of output current to assure smooth, quite
and precise door control. The opening and closing speeds of the doors shall be adjustable. The landing and car doors shall operate in full synchronism advance door opening during cars approach to a landing could be used to speed up passenger transfer.
H) SAFETY FEATURES
Emergency unlocking key from landing side for evacuation and maintenance work.
Manual opening of the doors from inside the car, within landing zones during power
failure.
Electronic curtain of light shall be fixed to the sill of the car doors to reverse the doors
when there is any obstruction for closing.
Electrical interlock to operate in conjunction with the car doors, so that elevators cannot
operate unless doors are closed.
Overload indicator with buzzer. If the car is overloaded it shall prevent from starting.
The blinking overload indicator and the sounding buzzer shall signal the overload
condition to the passengers.
Emergency light with trickle charger.
2.15
TESTING
On completion, a thorough test of the elevators under the working conditions shall be carried
out in the presence of and to the approval of the engineer.
All materials used must be of the highest quality and best of their respective kinds and must
comply with the relevant EN 81. All weights necessary to carry out the full load and overload
tests must be provided by the contractor and removed after use.
The tests will include the following:
No load current and voltage readings bot on UP and DOWN circuits.
Page 10 of 19
Project:
Works:
Title:

Full load current and voltage readings both on UP and DOWN circuits.
Starting current and voltage and time taken to operate overload.
Overload protection.
Gate sequence relays, if provided and installed.
All interlocks.
Collective control and priority sequences, if installed.
Safety gear mechanism.
Speeds on up and down travel with loading and empty.
Door contacts.
Final terminal stopping device.
Normal terminal stopping device.
Insulation and earth continuity.
2.16
OPERATING PANELS AND INDICATORS

A) CAR OPERATING PANEL
The car operating panel of each elevator shall contain the following:
Operating buttons numbered to correspond to the landing served with acknowledge light for
each button. (DCS elevators shall not have these buttons)
Emergency call button.
Intercom station.
Overload indicating lamp with buzzer.
B) LANDING POSITION INDICATOR
Car position indicator shall be provided for each car, in the car and over the main landing
entrance of each elevator. As the elevator travels through the hoistway, its position shall be
indicated by the illumination of the numeral/letter corresponding to the landing at which the
elevator is stopped or passing. Indicators shall be properly designed for better recognition
with colour filters to provide good contrast. Hall lanterns shall be part of this indicator and
Page 11 of 19
Project:
Works:
Title:

shall light up when the elevator reaches the floor level. Gongs shall be also provided at each
floor.
DCS elevators will have Elevator Identifiers (EI) on each landing with Alphabets
C) PUSH BUTTONS AND INDICATORS FOR LANDING
1) Up and down call buttons with indicator lights to show that the call had been registered.
2) DCS lifts shall have Destination Operating Panel (DOP) with screen to guide passengers at each landing.
3) Hall indicators(Lanterns) / call buttons to be provided as specified in the schedule.
4) Fire alarm call switch at the main landing.
2.17
CAR AND LANDING SILLS

Sills manufactured as specified in the schedules shall be fitted at every landing entrance and
on the car platform for the entire width of the door opening.
These sills shall be with integral grooves to act as guide for the bottom of the door panels.
The car sill shall be securely fitted to the car platform and the landing sills securely fitted to
the entrance threshold. These sills shall be flushed with the finished floor level.
The sills shall be designed to provide adequate strength to support the loads exerting on
them, in addition to the safety and decorative entrance plate appearance.
2.18
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF ELEVATORS

General wiring throughout the installation shall be carried out as specified in the electrical
specifications. Plastic trunking shall be used wherever possible instead of multiple conduits.
Flexible conduits shall be used between trunking and apparatus.
Earthing of all the equipment shall be carried out as specified in electrical specification and
as per IEE regulations.
Distribution equipment shall contain all protection equipment for motors and circuits.
These shall include overload protection, short circuit protection, single phasing protection
etc as appropriate.
2.19
THE MAIN CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THE REQUIREMENT OF ELEVATOR

SUBCONTRACTOR SUCH AS:
1. Related builders works, including wire mesh partition, shaft lighting and ladder in
pit, rail guard/mesh/safety chain in the machine room.
Page 12 of 19
Project:
Works:
Title:

2. Air conditioner or suitable capacity, permanent 3 phase 400V 50 Hz and 1 PH

240V 50Hz TPN + SPN circuit breakers of required capacity etc. in the lift machine room. (If Applicable)
3. Hoisting beam/hooks.
4. Steel separator beams in between hoist ways at approx. every 2.0 meters interval.
5. Emergency standby generator or required capacity to run the elevators in the event
of power failure. All in accordance with electrical specifications & drawings.
6. Normally, closed type voltage free sensing contacts (rating of contact 125 V DC
5A ) with wiring from AST / Generator panel to elevator control panel.
7. Provision of conduits with draw wire between elevator shaft and security / reception for elevator interphone supervisory panel.
8. Sufficient weather proof lockable storage accommodation to store the elevator materials at ground floor near elevator shaft.
9. Normally open free sensing contacts with wiring from fire alarm panel to elevator
shaft, if automatic recalling of elevators during fire is required.
10. Sufficient lighting every 7 meters through out the shaft in accordance with EN81
safety code.
11. Carnage facility for unloading lifts materials from containers and shifting the same
to various floors and machine room.
12. Temporary 3-phase power supply for installation and testing purposes up in the
shafts and machine rooms with breakers.
13. Corian / Marble flooring in the lift cabin.
14. Temporary protection of elevators that will be used during the construction period(If
any).
2.20
MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE

The contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the lifts at his own expense for a
duration of one year starting from the date of issue of the completion certificate. Maintenance
shall include replacement of parts or whole equipment that show manufacturing installation
defects during operation or due to normal wear and tear.
Page 13 of 19
Project:
Works:
Title:

The Contractor shall guarantee every piece of equipment from any manufacturing or installation defects for a period of one year starting from the date of issue of the completion certificate.
2.21
LIFT 01 & 02 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

TYPE
QUANTITY
RATED CAPACITY (kg)
SPEED (m/s)
NO. OF STOPS / OPENINGS
FLOOR DESIGNATION
TRAVEL HEIGHT (m)
SHAFT SIZE (W x D) per lift (mm)
LIFT ARRANGEMENT
OVER TRAVEL (mm)
PIT DEPTH (mm)
DRIVE SYSTEM
CONTROL SYSTEM
OPERATION
POWER SUPPLY (Main), Lighting
Passenger Lifts
2
1150
1
2/2
G,1
5.4 Approx
2680 X 2250
Simplex
6800
1400
MRL (Machine Room Less)
Variable Voltage Variable Frequency.
1 KA Collective Down
400V 50hz , 240V 50 Hz
II. LIFT CAR
CAR SIZE (W x D x H)
1800 x 1500 x 2500
DOOR TYPE
2-Panel Center Opening
DOOR SIZE (W x H)
1000 x 2100
DOOR PANEL
Linen Stainless Steel
DOOR SILL
Extruded Aluminum
FRONT WALL FINISHES
Hairline Stainless Steel
REAR WALL FINISHES
SIDE WALL FINISHES
HANDRAILS
Yes (3 walls) in hairline Stainless Steel
MIRROR
Yes (rear wall Half Height)
COP BUTTONS
Mechanical Buttons with Braille
NO. OF COP'S /LOCATION
1 / front Wall
COP FACEPLATE
As per manufacturer standard design
CAR CEILING
III. LIFT LOBBY
Landing DOOR PANEL FINISHES
TYPE
Landing DOOR FRAME
Narrow jamb Hairline Stainless Steel
LOP BUTTONS
LOP FACEPLATE
V. STANDARD CONTROL FEATURES INCLUDED IN THE PACKAGE
CAR / LANDING INDICATOR LED Segment
Provision of card reader system on landing stations
Page 14 of 19
Project:
Works:
Title:

Pre-opening Doors
Arrival Gong
Automatic Evacuation to Nearest Floor
Car Fan and Light Automatic Off
Door Protection Light Curtain
Earthquake Control
Emergency Power Operation
Fireman's Control
Full Load Bypass
Intercom System 2 Ways
Overload Holding Stop
2.22
LIFT 03 & 04 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

TYPE
QUANTITY
RATED CAPACITY (kg)
SPEED (m/s)
NO. OF STOPS / OPENINGS
FLOOR DESIGNATION
TRAVEL HEIGHT (m)
SHAFT SIZE (W x D) per lift (mm)
LIFT ARRANGEMENT
OVER TRAVEL (mm)
PIT DEPTH (mm)
DRIVE SYSTEM
CONTROL SYSTEM
OPERATION
POWER SUPPLY (Main), Lighting
CAR SIZE (W x D x H)
DOOR TYPE
DOOR SIZE (W x H)
DOOR PANEL
DOOR SILL
FRONT WALL FINISHES
REAR WALL FINISHES
SIDE WALL FINISHES
HANDRAILS
MIRROR
COP BUTTONS
NO. OF COP'S /LOCATION
COP FACEPLATE
CAR CEILING
Page 15 of 19
Passenger Lifts
2
630
1
2/2
G,1
5.4 Approx
2235 X 3300
Simplex
6800
1400
MRL (Machine Room Less)
Variable Voltage Variable Frequency.
1 KA Collective Down
400V 50hz , 240V 50 Hz
II. LIFT CAR
1100 x 1400 x 2135
900 x 2100
Extruded Aluminum
Yes (3 walls) in hairline Stainless Steel
Yes (rear wall Half Height)
1 / front Wall
III. LIFT LOBBY
Project:
Works:
Title:

Landing DOOR PANEL FINISHES

TYPE
Landing DOOR FRAME
Narrow jamb Hairline Stainless Steel
LOP BUTTONS
LOP FACEPLATE
V. STANDARD CONTROL FEATURES INCLUDED IN THE PACKAGE
CAR / LANDING INDICATOR LED Segment
Provision of card reader system on landing stations
Pre-opening Doors
Arrival Gong
Automatic Evacuation to Nearest Floor
Car Fan and Light Automatic Off
Door Protection Light Curtain
Earthquake Control
Emergency Power Operation
Fireman's Control
Full Load Bypass
Intercom System 2 Ways
Overload Holding Stop
2.23
OPERATIONAL AND SPECIAL FEATURES FOR ALL ELEVATORS

Fireman's Emergency Operation:
When the fireman's switch is activated during the fire, all calls are cancelled and the
designated car returns immediately to a specified floor to facilitate rescue afterwards,
the car responds only to car calls. Service lifts S1 & S3 shall have switches and shall
be dedicated for fireman use during fire.
All elevators shall return non-stop to the main floor upon receiving a signal from fire
alarm panel.
Car Arrival gong:
An electronic gong sounds to inform waiting passengers of the car arrival and shall be
part of the landing signalization, which shall be fixed at all floors above the door.
Interphone:
Interphone for three way communication between the elevator cabin, machine room
and security personnel at ground floor lobby near the elevator entrance.
Overload holding stop:
When the car load exceeds pre-determined capacity, the elevator will stop its operation with the doors open at the floor and a buzzer will sound. The buzzer will stop
Page 16 of 19
Project:
Works:
Title:

when enough passengers have excited the car to reduce the load to below the excess
capacity.
Curtain of lights:
Each elevator shall be equipped with a curtain of lights fixed on the car door sill.
When a passenger or an object passes through the infra-red beams, the closing doors
will be opened immediately.
Door Load Detector:
When an object is caught in opening / closing doors, the doors will reverse its direction when an excess load is detected. For example, when a pebble becomes lodged in
the door track, rather than force itself open / closed, the reverse cycle is to be repeated until the problem is eliminated.
Door Nudging Feature:
In the event of any door safety device malfunction, a temporary override function is to
be automatically engaged to close the doors, thereby preventing a fault in elevator operation. Once the doors close completely, the override has to be cleared and normal
operation resumes.
Door Sensor Self Diagnosis:
If a non-contact door sensor fails, the system will automatically determine the timing of
the door closing to maintain the elevator service.
Emergency Car Lighting:
Turns on immediately when normal power fails, providing a minimum level of illumination within the car.
Other features:
Expediting of door close.
Repeating of door close.
Re open with hall button.
Door open and door close buttons
DC alarm bell.
Hand winding operation for emergency purposes.
Page 17 of 19
Project:
Works:
Title:

Safety
: Gradual type
Buffers
: Spring type according to the code
Guide Rails
: Steel tee sections
Car Fan
: A fan shall be mounted on the car top.
Power Supply
Equipment.
: 415 volts 3 phase 50 Hertz for Elevator
Lighting Supply
and ventilation.
: 230 volts 1 phase 50 Hertz for cabins lighting
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts to
minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise due to elevator system.
B.
Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers.
C.
Leveling Tolerance: 3 mm, up or down, regardless of load and travel direction.
D.
Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout.
E.
Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
3.2
A.
For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators at center
of group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers.
Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance.
Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 1829 mm above finished floor.

Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator use
(either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by
ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies.
Page 18 of 19
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.3
A.
PROTECTION
Temporary Use: [Limit temporary use for construction purposes to one elevator. ]Comply with
the following requirements for[ each] elevator used for construction purposes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished
car, to protect finishes from damage.
Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed
to protect elevator and elevator equipment.
Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service.
Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of
correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required
repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
3.4
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
operate elevator.
3.5
A.
MAINTENANCE
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall
include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly
preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication,
cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and
capacity.
Page 19 of 19
DIVISION 32
________________________________________________________________________
EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 321400 UNIT PAVING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
PROJECT CONDITION. . ..
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
PRODUCTS.
BRICK PAVERS....
CONCRETE PAVERS...
ASPHALT-BLOCK PAVERS.....
EDGE RESTRAINTS....
ACCESSORIES....
AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS...
BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED MATERIALS...
MORTAR SETTING-BED MATERIALS...
GROUT MATERIALS...
BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED MIX.....
MORTAR AND GROUT MIX..
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION, GENERAL.
AGGREGATE SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS..
BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED APPLICATION
MORTAR SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS..
7
7
8
8
9
Page 1 of 10
Unit Paving
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 321400 UNIT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
A.
B.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates.
1.
C.
Brick pavers set in mortar setting beds.

Concrete pavers set in mortar setting beds.
Asphalt-block pavers set in bituminous setting beds.
Stone pavers set in mortar setting beds.
Aluminum edge restraints.
Samples for unit pavers joint materials and edge restraints.
1.3
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or build on frozen subgrade or setting
beds.
B.
Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed: Install bituminous setting bed only when
ambient temperature is above 40 deg F (4 deg C) and when base is dry.
C.
Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout:

1.
2.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with cold-weather construction requirements

contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements
contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Do not apply mortar to substrates with
temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and higher.
Page 2 of 10
Unit Paving
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
BRICK PAVERS
Regional Materials: Provide brick pavers that have been manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well
as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
B.
Brick Pavers: Light-traffic paving brick; ASTM C 902, [Class SX] [Class MX], [Type I] [Type II]
[Type III], [Application PS] [Application PX] [Application PA]. Provide brick without frogs or
cores in surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide available products

that may be incorporated into the Work.
2.
Thickness: [1-1/4 inches (32 mm)] [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [1-5/8 inches (41 mm)] [21/4 inches (57 mm)] [2-5/8 inches (67 mm)] [As indicated] <Insert dimension>.
Face Size: [3-3/4 by 7-1/2 inches (95 by 190 mm)] [3-5/8 by 7-5/8 inches (92 by
194 mm)] [3-5/8 by 11-5/8 inches (92 by 295 mm)] [7-5/8 by 7-5/8 inches (194 by
194 mm)] [4 by 8 inches (102 by 203 mm)] [4 by 12 inches (102 by 305 mm)] [8 by
8 inches (203 by 203 mm)] [As indicated] <Insert dimensions>.
Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]
3.
4.
C.
Temporary Protective Coating: Precoat exposed surfaces of brick pavers with a continuous
film of a temporary protective coating that is compatible with brick, mortar, and grout
products.
2.2
A.
CONCRETE PAVERS
Regional Materials: Provide concrete pavers that have been manufactured within 500 miles
(800 km) of Project site from aggregates[ and cement] that have been extracted, harvested, or
recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
B.
Concrete Pavers: Solid interlocking paving units complying with ASTM C 936 and resistant to
freezing and thawing when tested according to ASTM C 67, made from normal-weight
aggregates.
1.

2.
Standard-duty interlocking concrete pavers are usually 2-3/8 inches (60 mm) thick;
heavy-duty units are usually 3-1/8 inches (80 mm) thick.
3.
4.
Thickness: 3-1/8 inches (80 mm)

Face Size and Shape: [3-7/8 inches (98 mm)] [4-7/16 inches (113 mm)] [8-7/8
inches (225 mm)] [9 inches (229 mm)] square.
Face Size and Shape: [3-7/8-by-7-7/8-inch (98-by-200-mm)] [4-by-8-inch (102-by-203mm)] [4-7/16-by-8-7/8-inch (113-by-225-mm)] rectangle.
5.
Page 3 of 10
Unit Paving
Project:
Works:
Title:

6.
7.
C.
Concrete Pavers: Solid paving units complying with ASTM C 1491, made from lightweight
concrete.
1.

2.
3.
Thickness: [1-5/8 inches (41 mm)] [1-3/4 inches (45 mm)] <Insert dimension>.
Face Size and Shape: [9 inches (229 mm) square] [12 inches (305 mm) square] [As
indicated] <Insert dimensions and shape>.
4.
2.3
A.
ASPHALT-BLOCK PAVERS
Asphalt-Block Pavers: Solid units made from asphalt cement complying with ASTM D 312,
Type III; inorganic stone dust or cement filler; and coarse aggregate, consisting of clean,
hard, unweathered stone crushed into angular particles varying in size up to 3/8 inch (9.5
mm).
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work.
2.
3.
Thickness: [1-1/4 inches (32 mm)] [2 inches (51 mm)] <Insert dimension>.
Face Size: [4 by 6 inches (102 by 152 mm)] [6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm)] [8 by
8 inches (203 by 203 mm)] [8-inch- (203-mm-) wide hexagon] <Insert dimensions>.
Finish: [Natural, smooth] [Ground] [Ground and sandblasted].
4.
5.
2.4
A.
available
EDGE RESTRAINTS
Plastic Edge Restraints: Manufacturer's standard triangular PVC extrusions [1-3/4 inches (45
mm) high by 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) wide] designed to serve as edge restraints for unit pavers;
rigid type for straight edges and flexible type for curved edges, with pipe connectors and
3/8-inch (9.5-mm) diameter by 12-inch- (300-mm-) long steel spikes.
1.
B.
Face Size and Shape: [5-1/2-inch (140-mm) octagon with attached 3-1/2-inch (89mm) square] [4-1/2-by-9-inch (114-by-229-mm) rectangle with saw-tooth edges] [43/4-inch (121-mm) rectangular and trapezoidal units arranged in semicircular courses
to produce fan-shaped pattern] [As indicated] <Insert dimensions and shape>.

available
Steel Edge Restraints: Manufacturer's standard painted steel edging 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick
by 5 inches (125 mm) high with loops pressed from or welded to face to receive stakes at 36
inches (900 mm) o.c., and steel stakes 15 inches (380 mm) long for each loop.
Page 4 of 10
Unit Paving
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.5
A.
B.
1.

2.
available
ACCESSORIES
Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.
Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1.
2.6
A.
AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS

Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for
Size No. 8
B.
Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying
with gradation requirements in ASTM C 144 for for leveling course less than 1 inch (25 mm)
thick.
C.
Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing
No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
D.
Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile fabric, manufactured for

subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation
greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per
test methods referenced:
1.
2.
Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.

Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
E.
Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered with the EPA. Provide in
granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.
2.7
A.
BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED MATERIALS

Primer for Base: ASTM D 2028, cutback asphalt, grade as recommended by unit paver
manufacturer.
B.
Fine Aggregate for Setting Bed: ASTM D 1073, No. 2 or No. 3.
C.
Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381, Viscosity Grade AC-10
D.
Neoprene-Modified Asphalt Adhesive: Paving manufacturer's standard adhesive consisting of

oxidized asphalt combined with 2 percent neoprene and 10 percent long-fibered mineral
fibers containing no asbestos.
Page 5 of 10
Unit Paving
Project:
Works:
Title:

E.
Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing
No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
2.8
A.
MORTAR SETTING-BED MATERIALS

Regional Materials: Provide aggregate, cement, and lime for mortar that has been extracted,
harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
B.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
C.
D.
Sand: ASTM C 144.
E.
Latex Additive: acrylic resin water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging
water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with fieldmixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.
F.
Water: Potable.
2.9
A.
B.
GROUT MATERIALS
Regional Materials: Provide aggregate and cement for grout that has been extracted,
harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, sanded.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide r
comparable product.
Polymer Type: Ethylene-vinyl acetate or acrylic additive in dry, redispersible form;
prepackaged with other dry ingredients.
Polymer Type: Acrylic resin in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout
mix.
C.
Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
D.
Water: Potable.
2.10
A.
BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED MIX

Mix bituminous setting-bed materials at an asphalt plant in approximate proportion, by
weight, of 7 percent asphalt cement to 93 percent fine aggregate unless otherwise indicated.
Heat mixture to 300 deg F (149 deg C).
Page 6 of 10
Unit Paving
Project:
Works:
Title:

2.11
A.

General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions
Discard mortars and grout if they have reached their initial set before being used.
B.
Mortar-Bed Bond Coat: Mix neat cement and water to a creamy consistency.
C.
Portland Cement-Lime Setting-Bed Mortar: Type M complying with ASTM C 270, Proportion
Specification.
D.
Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Setting-Bed Mortar: Comply with written instructions of latexadditive manufacturer and as necessary to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface when
bed is ready to receive pavers.
E.
Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Bond Coat: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate,
and liquid latex for bond coat to comply with written instructions of liquid-latex manufacturer.
F.
Packaged Grout Mix: Proportion and mix grout ingredients according to grout manufacturer's
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of
colors and textures.
B.
Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide pattern indicated and to
fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible.
1.
For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.
C.
Joint Pattern: As indicated.
D.
Pavers over Waterproofing: Exercise care in placing pavers and setting materials over
waterproofing so protection materials are not displaced and waterproofing is not punctured
or otherwise damaged.
1.
Provide joint filler at waterproofing that is turned up on vertical surfaces[ unless

otherwise indicated; where unfilled joints are indicated, provide temporary filler or
protection until paver installation is complete].
E.
Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8
inch in 24 inches (3 mm in 600 mm) and 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from level, or
indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.
F.
Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant-filled joints at locations and of widths
indicated. Provide compressible foam filler as backing for sealant-filled joints unless otherwise
Page 7 of 10
Unit Paving
Project:
Works:
Title:

indicated; where unfilled joints are indicated, provide temporary filler until paver installation
is complete. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Sealant materials and installation are
specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
G.
Expansion and Control Joints: Provide cork joint filler at locations and of widths indicated.
Install joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers.
H.
Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
3.2
A.
AGGREGATE SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS

Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least [95] percent of ASTM D 698 ASTM D 1557
laboratory density.
B.
Place aggregate base, compact by tamping with plate vibrator, and screed to depth
indicated.
C.
Place drainage geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at least
12 inches (300 mm).
D.
Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm), taking
care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and uniform until pavers are
set and compacted.
E.
Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.
F.
Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3
mm), being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers
hand tight against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units
that exceed 3/8 inch (10 mm) with pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers.
G.
Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to
5000-lbf (16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz.
H.
Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate
pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a
slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.
3.3
A.
B.
BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS

Apply primer to concrete slab or binder course immediately before placing setting bed.
Prepare for setting-bed placement by locating 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) deep control bars
approximately 11 feet (3.3 m) apart and parallel to one another, to serve as guides for
striking board. Adjust bars to subgrades required for accurate setting of paving units to
finished grades indicated.
Page 8 of 10
Unit Paving
Project:
Works:
Title:

C.
Place bituminous setting bed between control bars. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of
250 deg F (121 deg C). Strike setting bed smooth, firm, even, and not less than 3/4 inch (19
mm) thick. Add fresh bituminous material to low, porous spots after each pass of striking
board. Carefully fill depressions that remain after removing depth-control bars.
1.
Roll setting bed with power roller to a nominal depth of 3/4 inch (19 mm). Adjust
thickness as necessary to allow accurate setting of unit pavers to finished grades
indicated. Complete rolling before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C).
D.
Apply neoprene-modified asphalt adhesive to cold setting bed by squeegeeing or troweling to

a uniform thickness of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Proceed with setting of paving units only after
adhesive is tacky and surface is dry to touch.
E.
Place pavers carefully by hand in straight courses, maintaining accurate alignment and
uniform top surface. Protect newly laid pavers with plywood panels on which workers can
stand. If additional leveling of paving is required, and before treating joints, roll paving with
power roller.
F.
Joint Treatment: Place unit pavers with hand-tight joints. Fill joints by sweeping sand over
paved surface until joints are filled. Remove excess sand after joints are filled.
3.4
A.
MORTAR SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS

Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove
surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B.
Apply mortar-bed bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes before
placing mortar bed. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed.
Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) thickness for bond coat.
C.
Apply mortar bed over bond coat; spread and screed mortar bed to uniform thickness at
subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades indicated.
D.
Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with pavers before initial
set. Before placing pavers, cut back, bevel edge, and remove and discard setting-bed
material that has reached initial set.
E.
Wet brick pavers before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.
(30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb
water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.
F.
Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers on mortar
bed, apply uniform 1/16-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick bond coat to mortar bed or to back of each
paver with a flat trowel.
G.
Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting
bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single
Page 9 of 10
Unit Paving
Project:
Works:
Title:

operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or disturb pavers for
purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
H.
Spaced Joint Widths: Provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal joint width with variations not
exceeding plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)
I.
Grouted Joints: Grout paver joints complying with ANSI A108.10.
J.
Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed.

1.
2.
Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining surfaces.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard.
K.
Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days unless otherwise
recommended by grout or liquid-latex manufacturer.
L.
Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean.
1.
Remove temporary protective coating as recommended by coating manufacturer and

as acceptable to paver and grout manufacturers.
Page 10 of 10
Unit Paving
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 321713 PARKING BUMPERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
PRODUCTS.
PARKING BUMPERS...
2
2
3.0
3.1
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION
3
3
Page 1 of 3
Parking Bumpers
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 321713 PARKING BUMPERS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes wheel stops.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
1.
C.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PARKING BUMPERS
Concrete Wheel Stops: Precast, steel-reinforced, air-entrained concrete, [27.6-MPa] <Insert
value> minimum compressive strength, [115 mm high by 225 mm wide by 1800 mm long]
<Insert dimensions>. Provide chamfered corners, transverse drainage slots on underside, and
a minimum of two factory-formed or -drilled vertical holes through wheel stop for anchoring to
substrate.
1.
B.
Mounting Hardware: Galvanized-steel [spike or dowel, 13-mm diameter, 254-mm

minimum length] [lag screw, shield, and washers; 13-mm diameter, 203-mm minimum
length] [hardware as standard with wheel-stop manufacturer].
Resilient Wheel Stops: Solid, integrally colored, 96 percent postconsumer or commingled

postconsumer and preconsumer recycled rubber or plastic; UV stabilized; [100 mm high by
150 mm wide by 1800 mm long] <Insert dimensions>. Provide chamfered corners and a
minimum of two factory-formed or -drilled vertical holes through wheel stop for anchoring to
substrate.
1.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the

following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering
following]:
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
name or comparable product.
Page 2 of 3
Parking Bumpers
Project:
Works:
Title:

3.
4.
5.
6.
Color: [Black]
Embedded Markings: Molded-in, [blue] [white] [yellow] reflective markings,
permanently inset in exposed surface.
Mounting Hardware: Galvanized-steel hardware as standard with wheel-stop
manufacturer.
Adhesive: As recommended by wheel-stop manufacturer for adhesion to pavement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Install wheel stops according to manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Install wheel stops in bed of adhesive before anchoring.
C.
Securely anchor wheel stops to pavement with hardware in each preformed vertical hole in
wheel stop as recommended in writing by manufacturer.
Page 3 of 3
Parking Bumpers
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 321723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS....
ACTION SUBMITTALS
2
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
2.2
PRODUCTS.
MANUFACTURERS.....
PAVEMENT-MARKING PAINT...
2
2
2
3.0
3.1
EXECUTION..
PAVEMENT MARKING..
3
3
Page 1 of 3
Pavement Markings
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 321723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes painted markings applied to asphalt and concrete pavement.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
1.
C.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.2: For interior, field-applied, pavement-marking paints,
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product name or

designation or comparable product.
2.2
A.
PAVEMENT-MARKING PAINT
Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #32, alkyd traffic-marking paint.
1.
B.
Color: White and Yellow as per Architects Instructions.
Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #97, latex traffic-marking paint.

1.
Color: White and Yellow as per Architects Instructions.
C.
Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1[ made of 100 percent recycled glass].
D.
VOC Content: Pavement markings used on building interior shall have a VOC content of
150 g/L or less.
Page 2 of 3
Pavement Markings
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PAVEMENT MARKING
Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified
with Architect.
B.
Allow paving to age for a minimum of [30] days before starting pavement marking.
C.
Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D.
Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions

indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to
provide a minimum wet film thickness of 0.4 mm.
1.
2.
Apply graphic symbols and lettering with paint-resistant, die-cut stencils. Apply paint so
that it cannot run beneath the stencil.
Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet markings at a rate of 0.72 kg/L.
Page 3 of 3
Pavement Markings
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 321729 MANUFACTURED TRAFFIC-CALMING DEVICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
1.1
1.2
GENERAL
SUMMARY...
ACTION SUBMITTALS
2
2
2
2.0
2.1
PRODUCTS.
MANUFACTURED TRAFFIC-CALMING DEVICES...
2
2
3.0
3.1
EXECUTION..
INSTALLATION...
3
3
Page 1 of 3
Manufactured Traffic- Claming Devices
Project:
Works:
Title:

SECTION 321729 MANUFACTURED TRAFFIC-CALMING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes manufactured traffic-calming devices.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
B.
1.
C.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURED TRAFFIC-CALMING DEVICES

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work.
B.
Speed [Bumps] [Humps] [Cushions] <Insert drawing designation>: Solid, integrally colored,
96 percent postconsumer or commingled postconsumer and preconsumer recycled rubber or
plastic; UV stabilized. Provide factory-formed or -drilled vertical holes for anchoring to
substrate.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Size: [2 inches (51 mm) high by 10 inches (254 mm) wide by 72 inches (1800 mm)
long] <Insert dimensions>; with tapered, square or rounded ends.
Size: Modular assembly [3 inches (76 mm) high by 12 feet (3.7 m) in overall width] [4
inches (102 mm) high by 14 feet (4.3 m) in overall width] <Insert dimensions>, with
overall length as dimensioned on Drawings; and with tapered, square or rounded
ends.
Color: [Black] [Yellow] <Insert color>.
Embedded Markings: Molded-in, [blue] [white] [yellow] reflective markings,
permanently inset in exposed surface.
Mounting Hardware: Galvanized-steel hardware as standard with device
manufacturer.
Adhesive: As recommended by device manufacturer for adhesion to pavement.
Page 2 of 3
Project:
Works:
Title:

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Install manufactured traffic-calming devices according to manufacturer's written
instructions unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Install devices in bed of adhesive before anchoring.
C.
Securely anchor devices to pavement with hardware spaced as recommended in writing by

manufacturer for heavy traffic.
Page 3 of 3

Architecture

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Architecture

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Architecture

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the project about?

What is the project about?

What specifications are included in the document?

What specifications are included in the document?

DOCU

PALM JUMEIRAH WEST BEACH CLUB

G+1 STOREY PALM JUMEIRAH, DUBAI, UAE

DOCUMENT VOLUME 02.01

Tendering & Contract Conditions

General Specifications Architecture & Interior

Interior Design Schedules (Appendices)

Civil & Structural Specifications

Specialist Lighting Specifications (Included in Electrical)

Faade Specifications (Section 084413)

Vertical Transport Specifications (Section

Health & Safety & Environment Plan HSEP

PALM JUMEIRAH WES

G+1 STTOREY PALM JUMEIRAH,

VOLUME 02.01 REV00

PALM JUMEIRAH WES

G+1 STTOREY PALM JUMEIRAH,

FLUID-APPLIED AIR AND WATER RE

083473..13 SF METTAL SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSE

PALM JUMEIRAH WES

G+1 STTOREY PALM JUMEIRAH,

102600 SF WALL AND

VOLUME 02.01 REV00

PALM JUMEIRAH WEST BEACH CLUB

G+1 STOREY PALM JUMEIRAH, DUBAI, UAE

DOCUMENT VOLUME 02.01

SECTION 011000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Division 01 Section 011000

PALM JUMEIRAH WEST BEACH CLUB

G+1 STOREY PALM JUMEIRAH, DUBAI, UAE

DOCUMENT VOLUME 02.01

MAINTAINING EXISTING FACILITIES IN OPERATION..

CONTRACTORS DOCUMENTS AND OTHER SUBMITTALS..

PREPARATION OF ASSET REGISTER.

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

HOLES, CHASE, INSERTS AND FIXINGS

DESCRIPTION OF SUBSTRUCTURE AND SUPERSTRUCTURE..

Division 01 Section 011000

PALM JUMEIRAH WEST BEACH CLUB

G+1 STOREY PALM JUMEIRAH, DUBAI, UAE

DOCUMENT VOLUME 02.01

SECTION 011000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Division 01 Section 011000

PALM JUMEIRAH WEST BEACH CLUB

G+1 STOREY PALM JUMEIRAH, DUBAI, UAE

DOCUMENT VOLUME 02.01

Preparation of Asset Register

Division 01 Section 011000

PALM JUMEIRAH WEST BEACH CLUB

G+1 STOREY PALM JUMEIRAH, DUBAI, UAE

DOCUMENT VOLUME 02.01

TESTS TO ESTABLISH ACCEPTABILITY OF WORKS

SAFETY REGULATIONS AND TEMPORARY WORKS

Division 01 Section 011000

PALM JUMEIRAH WEST BEACH CLUB